Actions

Work Header

Bridge to Amphibia: Season 1

Notes:

This series will take place as if the epilogue of The Hardest Thing did not occur. The ending of that episode will be similar to the beginning of a future episode. Not everything in this series is canon. If you find an unfamiliar character, event, or item, it's probably made up by me.

Chapter 1: Resolve

Chapter Text

Anne, Marcy, and Sasha walk into the portal back to Earth. They end up back at the Saint James Middle Playground, the place where their journey began. The portal closes behind them. For a few moments, neither of them say anything. Anne starts to chuckle.

 

Sasha: “What’s so funny?”

 

Anne: “Oh, it’s nothing. It’s just…this past half a year, everything has been so crazy. We ended up in a world with talking amphibians and we ended up saving not just that world, but this one and countless others. It just…feels a little unreal that it’s all over, ya know? That we’re just…back to being…normal.”

 

Sasha: “Yeah, I know what you mean. It’s gonna take some time to adjust to being back here.”

 

Anne notices that Marcy looks dejected.

 

Anne: “What’s wrong, Mar-mar?”

 

Marcy: “Is it a little messed up that I think being stranded in Amphibia was a good thing?”

 

Anne and Sasha look at each other.

 

Marcy: “Even though we had some major disagreements, the fact that we’re still able to call ourselves friends is just a testament to just how strong our friendship is. Plus we grew as people. Anne, you were able to stand up for what you believed in. Sash, you realized that there are more important things in life than being in control. And I…I learned that I can’t force people to do something they don’t want to do. I don’t know if we would have learned any of these back home.”

 

Anne sighs. “I gotta admit, she has a point. If we had just spent the past six months here, we would have just been in our same routines. Nothing interesting really happens here. And it’s difficult for people to change if they don’t see a reason to.”

 

Sasha: “I guess you’re right. But, that life is behind us now. All we can really do now is resume life on Earth.”

 

Anne: “But we can take the things we learned in Amphibia and apply them here.”

 

Marcy: “Speaking of which, are you fine, Anne? I know it must have been heartbreaking to leave the Plantars behind.”

 

Anne: “Oh me? Pfft, yeah, I’ll be alright. Anyways, I should get you two home. Your parents are probably worried sick about you.”

 

Sasha: “You’re right! I totally forgot about them. They must be so scared as to whether we’re alright.”

 

Anne: “Don’t worry, I’ve got you covered. When I was on Earth, I sent a letter to both of your parents. They more or less know what’s going on. I can call my parents and have them drop you off at your place.”

 

Marcy: “Uh wait, aren’t my parents…ya know, not in California anymore?”

 

Anne: “No, they’re still here.”

 

Marcy ponders to herself for a moment.

 

Anne: “Anyway, I’ll get my dad down here.”

 

Sasha: “Can you ask your dad to drop me off at my dad’s place? I wanna see him first.”

 

Anne: “Sure thing, Sash.”

 


 

Back in Amphibia, we see the inhabitants looking at the open sea, where the portal that sent Anne, Sasha, and Marcy once was. Everyone is silent for a few moments. Andrias stands up.

 

Andrias: “Attention everyone. Because of my many misdeeds done to you and the people of Earth, I will be stepping down as king of Amphibia, and giving that title to someone far more worthy: Olivia.”

 

Everyone turns to look at Olivia, who is in shock.

 

Andrias: “Olivia is a shining example of what it means to be honorable. She always did things by the book, and never once questioned me. But when she realized what I had been trying to do, she simply could not stand by and watch it happen. She disobeyed me and fought for what she knew to be right. If someone like that is not suitable to be queen, then I do not know who is.”

 

Everyone starts to clap, and Olivia starts to tear up. She wipes away her tears and stands next to Andrias.

 

Olivia: “Listen up, everyone. I know that we are all sad to see the saviors of this planet leave us. But as my mother once told me, ‘do not be sad because your friends are gone; instead, smile, because you had the pleasure of getting to know them’. Andrias, I think I speak for everyone here that you have some atonements to make. Therefore, I will be putting you, and anyone who supported you, into exile from Newtopia for the foreseeable future. Additionally, you will need to clean up the environment you damaged.”

Andrias: “As you wish, my queen. Bartley, Branson, and Blair, you’re with me.”

 

Andrias, Bartley, Branson, and Blair leave.

 

Olivia: “As for the rest of you, I know it will be difficult without Anne, Sasha, and Marcy here, but try to live your lives as you always have. You are all dismissed.”

 

Everyone leaves, except for Yunan.

 

Yunan: “I can still keep my title as general, right?”

 

Olivia: “Yes, of course. But I would also like to have another title.”

 

Yunan: “And what title would that be?”

 

Olivia smiles.

 


 

Mr. Boonchuy is driving his car with Anne, Sasha, and Marcy in the back. He pulls up to an apartment complex.

 

Mr. Boonchuy: “It’s good you two are reconnecting with your families. It might be a good idea for the Plantars to come here so we can have a big family get-together!”

 

Anne: “Huh?”

 

Mr. Boonchuy: “Ya know, Hop Pop, Sprig, and Polly! You can just use the music box to transport them here!”

 

Sasha: “But we don't have the music box. It only-”

 

Anne puts her hand over Sasha’s mouth. “...had enough energy to send us here! But the Plantars said they would recharge the stones after they fixed the environmental damage, so it’ll be a while before they can come here!” she says.

 

Mr. Boonchuy: “Oh. I thought you were gonna say the music box became completely unusable. I can’t imagine not seeing them again. That Hop Pop was a little strange, but his heart was in the right place. I don’t think I ever really properly thanked him for looking after you…well, anyways this is your stop, Sasha. Please give me a 5 star rating if you enjoyed your Doober ride!”

 

The girls stare at him blankly.

 

Mr. Boonchuy: “Ah, I guess that joke’s really only funny to my wife.”

 

Anne: “I…think she might have just been laughing because she didn’t want to hurt your feelings.”

 

Mr. Boonchuy: “Ah, don’t be silly, she wouldn’t do that. Besides, I’m a tough man. It takes a lot to make me cry.”

 

Anne: “Dad, you cried during the last scene of “Mall-E”.

 

Mr. Boonchuy: “But those robots were just so cute together!”

 

Sasha: “Sorry if I’m interrupting anything, but I’m getting out now. I’ll see you two later.”

 

Anne: “Catch you tomorrow?”

 

Sasha: “Yeah, for sure.”

 

Sasha gets out of the car. She walks into the building and up to room 304. She hesitates a little before knocking. A middle aged man with brown hair opens the door.

 

Sasha: “Hi Dad, did you miss me?”

 

The man hugs her.

Sasha: “I guess you missed me a lot, huh?”

 

Mr. Waybright chuckles through his tears. “Maybe just a bit”, he says.

 

Sasha peers over her dad’s shoulder. She sees a middle aged woman with slightly redder hair.

 

Sasha: “Mom?”

 

Mrs. Waybright: “Hi, sweetie. I’m so happy to see you again.”

 

Sasha runs up to her mom and gives her a hug. They both start to cry.

 

Sasha: “I feel the same way. But how did you know I was here?

 

Mrs. Waybright: “Anne texted us. She told us you were heading here. So then your father told me. We wanted to both be here for you.”

 

Sasha chuckles. “Of course she did. But I thought you two hated each other.”

 

Mr. and Mrs. Waybright look at each other. They give each other a small smile.

 

Mrs. Waybright: “Oh, Sasha, your father and I don’t hate each other. We just found that living with each other didn’t really create the best of environments for you to live in.”

 

Mr. Waybright: “Yeah, when I met your mother in college, all I could think of was just being with her. We had the same interests and we really got to know each other on a personal level. At that point, we were both certain that we had found a soulmate in each other. So we got married and had you.”

 

Mrs. Waybright: “But then we realized that maybe we rushed things a bit too much. Soon, your father and I got into disagreements. Most of them were minor, but then they started getting worse and more frequent. At that point, we came to the conclusion that maybe we would be better off without each other.”

 

Mr. Waybright: “Of course, we couldn’t really be away from each other. After all, we wanted to make sure you were set up for a good life.”

 

Sasha starts to cry. “So then it was me, wasn’t it? If I wasn’t here you guys would have gotten along better. Maybe you two would have been happier if I had stayed in Amphibia…” she says.

 

Mr. Waybright grabs Sasha and looks her in the eyes. “Sasha, look at me. Don’t ever say that. Your mother and I may not see eye to eye on a lot of things, but one thing that we can certainly agree on is that you were one of the best things that ever could have happened to us", he says.

 

Sasha starts to cry. Her mother and father hold her in a tight embrace.

 

Sasha: “Thanks, Dad. Does this mean you and mom can maybe get back together again?”

 

Mr. Waybright: “I don’t really wanna make promises that I may not be able to keep.”

 

Mrs. Waybright: “But we will certainly try. And if we can’t, just remember that it isn’t your fault.”

 

Sasha smiles.

 

Mrs. Waybright: “Now, tell us what happened. I especially wanna hear about how you got that scar.”

Sasha: “Oh this? Yeah, I was thinking I could maybe just put on some makeup to cover it up…”

 

Mrs. Waybright: “Don’t.”

 

Sasha: “Huh?”

 

Mrs. Waybright: “I said don’t. You shouldn’t be afraid to show your scars. Besides, it makes you look cool.”

 

Sasha: “Well it’s a funny story how I got it…actually no, it isn’t. But I’ll tell you about it anyway.”

 


 

Mr. Boonchuy is driving his car with Anne and Marcy in the back. He pulls up to a house. Marcy gets out of the car quickly and closes the door without saying anything. She runs up to the house door, and looks back at Anne. Anne gives her a thumbs up and a small smile. Marcy turns back to the door and knocks. Mr. Boonchuy drives away as a middle aged Taiwanese woman with her hair in a ponytail opens the door. She says nothing and steps aside to let her in. She locks the door behind her. Marcy sits down in a chair in the living room. A middle aged Taiwanese man wearing glasses looks up from his computer for a few moments before looking back down. Marcy then covers her face with her hands.

 

Marcy: “Mom, Dad, I know you guys must hate me for what I’ve done. I should have just gone along with leaving California. Instead I just put myself and my two best friends in danger, and lied to them about it. I’m a horrible person because I’m the reason you two are stuck here!”

 

Marcy starts to bawl.

Mr. Wu: “Marcy.”

 

Marcy sniffles. “Yeah?”, she says.

 

Mr. Wu: “We’re not stuck in California because of you. We chose to stay in California because of you.”

 

Marcy: “Isn't that what I said?”

 

Mr. Wu: “Not quite. You’re implying that because you left us, that we had to stay here. What I implied was that because you went missing, we decided it was best for us to stay here.”

 

Marcy: “I’m…not following.”

 

Mrs. Wu: “What your father is trying to say is that he blew off your opinion to stay here, even though you had a legitimate reason to want to. We know that you’ve always had difficulty making friends, and you found two good ones in Sasha and Anne. Your father was so overcome with happiness about getting a new job that he didn’t want to let anything or anyone take that away from him.

 

Mr. Wu: “And that was wrong of me. The problem was I only realized this too late. When you ran away, I thought for sure you were going to come back that night. I thought you would just go to Anne’s party, have a good time, and then come to terms with the fact that we were moving away. But, you didn’t come back that night. And you didn’t come back the next day either. At that point your mother and I didn’t know what to do. We tried doing everything we could, but, no matter how hard we tried, nobody seemed to know where you and your friends were.

 

Mrs. Wu: At that point, we had assumed the worst had happened. That, we were never going to see you again. Your father became overridden with guilt. We still held onto hope, though. We just had to. But over time, our hope began to wane. Every day, a little bit more of it was lost.

 

Mr. Wu: That was, until Anne had sent us a letter on Christmas. She told us you were in another world and you were alive. Our hope for you had been revitalized.

 

Marcy: “But…Anne didn’t know I was alive. If anything, she probably thought I was dead. She saw me get stabbed by a giant sword!”

 

Mrs. Wu: “Hmm, if I had to take a guess, I’d say Anne was probably in the same mindset as we were. She may have had good reason to believe you were a goner, but she held onto that hope that you would be alright. And that’s what she conveyed to us.”

 

Mr. Wu: “Marcy, you called yourself a horrible person earlier. But that’s not true. Yes, you may have done something reckless, but you were at a low point. The horrible person is me. I really should have just heard what you had to say.”

 

Marcy: “But regardless of what happened, I’m still the reason you had to turn down that job, right?”

 

Mr. Wu: “Yes, you are right about that. But honestly, you being here, unharmed fills me with more joy than any stupid job could.”

 

Marcy runs up and hugs her dad. Her mom joins in. They all start to tear up.

Mr. Wu: “From now on, before making any major decisions in this household, I promise to consider what you think.”

 

Marcy: “And I promise to never do anything haphazard again.”

 

Mrs. Wu: “Anyways I like this look of yours. You look like you came straight out of a superhero movie!

 

Marcy: “Oh my gosh! Do you like my cape? It’s fireproof! I can’t wait to tell you all about my adventures in Amphibia!”

 


 

Mr. Boonchuy is driving his car with Anne in the back. He pulls up to their house.

 

Mr. Boonchuy: “It’s good to be home. I’m a little tired from all the driving. Well let’s go inside. I’m sure there won’t be a surprise for you.”

 

Anne: “Huh?”

 

Mr. Boonchuy: “I said I’m sure there won’t be a surprise for you.”

 

Anne: “It seems like you’re trying to say there’s a surprise for me.”

 

Mr. Boonchuy: “I’ll never tell…”

 

Anne: “Dad, you big goof…”

 

They both get out of the car. They go inside their house.

 

Mrs. Boonchuy: “Welcome back, Anne! I made your favorite, mooncakes!”

 

Anne: “Wow, what a surprise…didn’t see that coming…”

 

She grabs one and eats it.

 

Mrs. Boonchuy: “Yeah, I can’t wait to make more of these for the Plantars. Your dad told me they had the music box and would recharge the stones, but that it would take a while."

 

Anne starts to sweat. “Uh, yeah! That’s what I said!” she says.

 

Mrs. Boonchuy: “Hopefully they will like them…”

 

Mr. Boonchuy: “Of course they’ll like them! You’re great at baking, and they normally eat bugs and fruits.”

 

Mrs. Boonchuy chuckles. “Yeah, I almost forgot. I remember one time, I was taking out the trash and they were eating the flies around it”, she says.

 

Mr. Boonchuy: “Yeah, hopefully they won’t take too long. Did they say when they think they would be done, Anne?”

 

Anne looks down. “Never”, she says.

 

Both her parents look at her.

 

Mr. Boonchuy: “What do you mean never?”

 

Anne: “I lied to you. The Plantars may have the music box, but the stones were destroyed. They only had enough power to send us home. And without the stones, the music box won’t work. Which means the Plantars won’t be able to come here…ever.”

 

She starts to tear up.

 

Mrs. Boonchuy: “How did the stones get destroyed?”

 

Anne: “When we came back to Amphibia, this evil thing called The Core wasn’t really defeated. It had a last resort plan, which was to crash the moon into the planet to kill everyone there. The only real defense we had against it was the stones. So Sasha, Marcy, and I became one with the stones to try to stop it. But we weren’t strong enough. It wasn’t very long before Marcy and Sasha started losing their ability to continue fighting, so it was really just me. It was then that I realized there was really one way to stop it. I had to completely absorb the stones to win. And it worked, but it came at a tall price…”

 

Mrs. Boonchuy: “What…was the price?”

 

Anne: “...my life.”

 

Both her parents gasp.

 

Mr. Boonchuy: “But…that’s not possible. You’re here, aren’t you?”

 

Anne: “Yeah, you’re not wrong about that. But something you should know is that I did lay down my life in order to stop The Core. The only reason I’m still here is because something known as The Guardian told me I had passed its test.”

 

Mrs. Boonchuy: “What was the test?”

 

Anne: “The Guardian told me it had created the stones to see how mortals would deal with unlimited power. It has seen this scenario play out over and over again, only for it to not end well. Either the people who were supposed to save the world failed to, or they ended up misusing it…I was the first one not to do either. So it took pity on me, and made an exact duplicate of me, with all of Anne’s memories and feelings, just before she died. Anyways, after being brought back to Amphibia, we were given shards of the stones, but only enough for us to go back home. So we said our final goodbyes to Amphibia, and came back here.

 

Mrs. Boonchuy: “So we’ll never see the Plantars again?”

 

Anne: “Yeah, that’s right. It’s funny too…because Marcy asked me if I was fine, and I lied to her. I’m not fine. I’m glad to be back here with my family and friends but I would have liked to have been able to see Polly, Hop Pop and-and-and Sprig!” I miss you guys!”

 

Both Mr. Boonchuy and Mrs. Boonchuy hug Anne. 

 


 

A shadowy man gets onto a plane headed towards Los Angeles. He has a single backpack slinged over his shoulder.



Chapter 2: Back to School

Summary:

Sasha, Marcy, and Anne adjust back to life on Earth.

Chapter Text

Sasha is sleeping in her bed, when her mother comes into the room and gently shakes her awake.

 

Mrs. Waybright: “Good morning, sweetie! Did you sleep well?”

 

Sasha: “Yeah, I did. Feels nice not having to worry about whether I will have to fend off raiders....wait...mom! You’re still here!”

 

Mrs. Waybright: “Well yeah, of course I am. I don’t think your dad and I would have had a major disagreement this early. But if you were worried about that, your father and I talked about how we could maybe make things work better this time. So we decided that if we ever have a disagreement, we’ll come to a compromise.”

 

Sasha: “Pfft, you hadn’t tried that before?”

 

Mrs. Waybright chuckles. “Your father and I can be very hotheaded people. We don’t really like to bend. But we will for you. In any case, Principal Murphy called. She wanted you at the school. Did you already pull a prank on someone?”, she asks.

 

Sasha: “What? I’ve been here for less than 24 hours. How would I have done that in such a short amount of time?”

 

Mrs. Waybright chuckles. “I kid, I kid. But she does want you there, so get going.”

 

Sasha: “Got it.”

 


 

Mrs. Wu: “Good morning, Marcy. Principal Murphy called and said she wants you at school. You didn’t help Sasha pull a prank already, did you?”

 

Marcy laughs. “That sounds like a tall order, even for Sasha”, she says.

 

Mrs. Wu: “Just making sure. Be ready in 5 minutes.”

 

Marcy: “I only need four!”

 


 

Mr. Boonchuy: “Good morning, Anne. Are you feeling any better?”

 

Anne groans. “Not really. What did you want?”, she asks.

 

Mr. Boonchuy: “Principal Murphy called. She wants you at school.”

 

Anne jolts upright. “My essay! I never wrote that essay!”, she says.

 

Mr. Boonchuy: “What…what essay?”

 

Anne: “No time to explain, gotta get going!”

 

She grabs her backpack and runs out the door.

 

Mr. Boonchuy: “Wait, Anne!”

 

Anne runs outside and sees a mob of people outside her porch.

 

“Hey, look! There’s Anne! We love you, Anne!”

 

“You’re my hero, Anne!”

 

“I hope my daughter will be just like you when she grows up, Anne!”

 

Anne: “What the heck is this!?”

 

Mrs. Boonchuy grabs Anne by the arm and pulls her back inside. “Those people have been outside all morning. Once word got out how about you were the one to fight that giant newt and win, everyone wanted to get your autograph”, she says.

 

Anne: “Can’t you just call the cops?”

 

Mr. Boonchuy: “I did. They’re out there, too.”

 

Anne looks out the window to see there are cops holding signs saying “We’re your biggest F-annes!”

 

Anne screams. “How am I supposed to get to school if there’s a bunch of weirdos outside! I can’t get past all of them. And I definitely don’t have time to sign all of their stuff”, she says.

 

Mrs. Boonchuy: “Well, it’s not a perfect solution, but there is one thing you can do. I know from experience.”

 

Anne: “Huh? What is it?”

 

Mrs. Boonchuy: “Easy. Just charge them every time you sign something of theirs. Lot of people will leave, and the ones who don’t you can get some cash from. Worked in college when everyone wanted my baked goods.”

 

Anne gasps. “Mom, you’re a genius!”, she says.

 

Anne walks outside. The crowd erupts in applause. Anne signals them to quiet down.

 

Anne: “Wow, it’s so cool to have so many fans. I can’t wait to give out my autograph to all of you.”

 

The crowd roars.

 

Anne: “However, there is a slight problem. You see, I don’t really get enough of an allowance from my parents, and there’s something I’ve been meaning to buy for a long time. So, I ask that for every item of yours that I sign, you give me a dollar.”

 

A few people leave.

 

“Wow, these people really want my autograph. I’ll have to do this quickly”, Anne mutters to herself.

 

Anne raises her voice. “All right everyone, listen up! If I’m gonna give you my autograph, I need a single file line…”

 

People start fighting to be the first in line.

 

Anne: “...and please don’t be unruly! If you do, you’re not getting my autograph!”

 

People calm down. Anne begins signing people’s belongings, whether they be shirts, tennis balls, or just pieces of paper. After a while, the last person gets their autograph, and leaves.

 

Anne: “Phew, that was exhausting. At least I got this wad of cash. Wait, what was I doing? Oh yeah, I needed to get to school! Principal Murphy’s probably gonna be annoyed with me, but she’ll be even madder if I don’t show up...”

 

Anne starts to run towards school. She bursts through the front gates and into Murphy’s office.

 

Anne: “Principal Murphy, I haven’t written that essay yet, but I’ll get started on it right away!”

 

Anne notices that Sasha and Marcy are also sitting in the office. Principal Murphy gives her a strange look.

 

Principal Murphy: “Essay? You mean the one where I asked you to write about who you were?”

 

Anne: “Yeah?”

 

Principal Murphy chuckles. “That’s not what this is about Anne. Just please sit down”, she says.

 

Anne sits next to Sasha and Marcy.

 

Principal Murphy: “So as you may know Saint James Middle School has a strict policy on attendance. People who fail to show up to enough classes with no prior notice generally will be held back a grade…”

 

Sasha: “You can’t hold us back! We were in another world for crying out loud! Not to mention that we saved the Earth!”

 

Principal Murphy: “Yes, I know, I know. I had a talk with the local government to see if they could perhaps waive this for you. They didn’t budge much, but they were able to make a special exception for you.”

 

Principal Murphy pulls out several large binders.

 

Principal Murphy: “Here is all the material you three missed while you were in Amphibia. All you need to do is study it, and, when you’re ready, you can take an exam that covers the entirety of the course. Whatever you get on the exam will be considered what you would have gotten had you take the course during the regular school year. So as long as you get a 70%, you will pass, and be able to resume school during the autumn.”

 

Marcy jumps up, grabs the binders, and stuffs them in her backpack.

 

Marcy: “This is great! I’ll get started on that right away.”

 

She bolts out the door. Principal Murphy blinks a few times.

 

Principal Murphy: “It’s a good thing I didn’t really have anything else to say…”

 

Sasha: “Wait, you said we need 70% to pass. What happens if we don’t reach that?”

 

Principal Murphy: “In the unfortunate circumstance that does happen, it’s not the end of the world. You can retake the exams as many times as you want, and the questions won’t change either. But because of that, we’ll just share your score with you, not what you got right and wrong. Additionally, you will need to pass these exams before summer break gets over. Thankfully you just came back yesterday, which was the last day of school, which means you have the entire summer to get this done. You are dismissed.”

 

Sasha and Anne get up, grab their binders, and walk out the door.

 

Anne: “So, better get studying, huh?”

 

Sasha: “Are you kidding me? There’s no way I’m studying for this. Not today at least. Come on, let’s go have some fun.”

 

Anne: “But what about-”

 

Sasha: “Look, Marcy’s probably gonna read those binders cover to cover by the end of today, and she’ll pass those exams with flying colors. Then we can just ask her to tutor us so we can do well.”

 

Anne: “So we’re just gonna have her do all the work while we goof off? That doesn’t seem fair…”

 

Sasha: “Studying doesn’t really seem like work to Marcy. You saw how happy she was when she left. She enjoys it, so it’s her idea of fun.”

 

Anne: “I guess you’re right…”

 

Sasha: “Of course I am. Besides, it’s been a stressful few months for us. So today’s just for unwinding. And ya know the best place for that? The arcade! I can ask my parents for some money so we can spend a few hours there.”

 

Anne: “There’s no need for that. Check this out.”

 

Anne pulls out the wad of cash.

 

Sasha: “Woah, where’d you get that?”

 

Anne: “This is the reason I was late this morning. There were a bunch of people outside my house that wanted my autograph. So I charged them a dollar per.”

 

Sasha laughs. “Maybe I should start doing that. Forget a few hours, we can spend the rest of the day there! Let’s go!”, she says.

 

Sasha and Anne run out the school towards the arcade.

 


 

Marcy gets off her bike and runs into her house.

 

Marcy: “Mom, Dad! I’m gonna be holed up in my room all day and all night studying five months worth of school material! So please don’t bother me.”

 

Mr. Wu: “Absolutely not, young lady. You can spend all day if you wish, but you need to get a full night’s rest if you wanna stay healthy.”

 

Marcy: “Dad, you’re no fun…”

 

Marcy walks upstairs with her backpack.

 

Mr. Wu: “Being healthy isn’t about having fun. Why do you think so many people are unhealthy?

 

Marcy walks into her room, pulls out the first binder, and begins reading.

 

Marcy: “All right, first up, history. Prepare to be read!”

 


 

Anne and Sasha get to the arcade.

 

Sasha: “It’s been such a long time since I’ve been here. Wanna go play Super Dance Fun Time Fusion first?”

 

Anne: “Do you even have to ask?”

 

Sasha and Anne go up to the machine. They notice their score has been knocked down to second place, by someone with the name “NSINK”.

 

Anne: “Who names themselves En Sink?”

 

“We did”, an unknown voice behind them says. Sasha and Anne turn around to see two teenage boys wearing school uniforms.

 

Sasha: “Who the heck are you?”

 

“I’m Varik, and he’s Kyne”, one of them says. “We’re the top scorers at Super Dance Funtime Fusion. We’re so good at it, that we’re perfectly in sync.”

 

Anne: “Uh, you spelled sync wrong.”

 

Varik: “Uh, no we didn’t.”

 

Kyne: “Yeah, it’s spelled the same way as the thing you wash your hands in.”

 

Anne and Sasha facepalm.

 

Sasha: “Well anyways, say goodbye to your top score, because we’re about to smash it.”

 

Kyne: “Oh yeah? we’d like to see you try.”

 

Anne goes to the token machine and puts in a dollar. It spits out five tokens. She puts in all five to the machine, and the game starts. After dancing for the whole routine, they get a near perfect score, enough to get first place.

 

Varik: “Woah, how’d you get so good at that?”

 

Sasha: “Guess you’re not as in sync as you thought you were.

 

Kyne: “No, we had that top score for like four months and now it’s gone!”

 

Kyne runs out crying from the arcade. Varik follows after him.

 

Varik: “Dude don’t cry, you’ll look like a loser!”

 

Anne: “Guess we still got it, huh?”

 

Sasha: “For sure. Now let’s play every game in the house!”

 


 

Marcy closes the history binder.

 

Marcy: “That was a lot of history. Not as much as the Amphibia history book though.”

 

Mrs. Wu: “Honey, come down for dinner!”

 

Marcy: “Be right there, mom!”

 

Marcy grabs her algebra book and brings it down with her to the kitchen table. Her mom takes notice.

 

Mrs. Wu: “Marcy, don’t you think you’ve done enough studying for today?”

 

Marcy: “No way, I’m on a roll! I just finished reading my history material!

 

Mrs. Wu: “Marcy, I don’t feel like you can be retaining a semester’s worth of history in a few hours.”

 

Marcy: “Well then, you can test me! Ask me anything in that binder, and I’ll get it right!”

 

Mrs. Wu goes upstairs and grabs Marcy’s history binder. She turns to a random page.

 

Mrs. Wu: “Who was the US’s 28th president?”

 

Marcy: “Oh, that’s an easy one. Woodrow Wilson! Some of his notable accomplishments were banning child labor and making sure railroad workers only worked eight hours a day.”

 

Mrs. Wu: “That is…correct.”

 

Marcy: “See? I can remember all this stuff. And now it’s time to learn about algebra!”

 

Mr. Wu: “Marcy, I think what your mother is trying to say is that there isn’t any need to do all this studying so quickly. You have several months to learn all this. You can go out with your friends or even play your favorite video games. You don’t need to do it all in a few days!”

 

Marcy: “But I want to! When I was in Amphibia, I spent a lot of my free time reading books for fun!”

 

Mr. Wu: “Marcy, I’m glad you’re enjoying yourself. But please, it’s time for supper. You should take a break. The material can wait.”

 

Marcy: “OK, fine. You’re lucky I love sushi. And that I haven’t had any for half a year…”

 

Marcy and her family have dinner. After clearing her dishes, Marcy goes back upstairs and resumes reading her algebra binder.

 


 

Anne is playing skeeball. After the time runs out, the machine spits out a bunch of tickets.

 

Anne: “That was my last dollar. Let’s see what I can get with all these tickets…”

 

Anne walks over to the ticket counter. She sees Sasha has a bucket full of candy that she’s eating.

 

Anne: “Did you spend all your tickets on candy?”

 

Sasha: “Yeah, I did. I haven’t had candy in such a long time, so I thought why not get some here?”

 

Anne: “You shouldn’t have all of it now though. Your body probably isn’t used to having so much sugar.”

 

Sasha laughs. “Come on, I can handle it! They don’t call me Iron Stomach Sash for nothing!”, she says.

 

Sasha eats a peanut butter cup. She then gags, and runs to the nearest bathroom.

 

Anne: “I told you so!”

 

Anne goes over to the counter.

 

Arcade employee: “Heya! You got a lot of tickets there. Do you see anything you want to get?”

 

Anne: “Well I don’t want any candy, that’s for sure. Let’s see…”

 

Anne scans the top shelves and sees several white, stuffed animals. She notices one of the animals is a frog.

 

Anne gasps. “What are those?”, she asks.

 

“Oh, those are called 'Draw-nimals'. They’re just stuffed animals, but they come with markers so you can doodle on them. The ink comes off easily in the wash, too!”

 

Anne: “The frog! I want that frog!”

 

“The frog? Don’t you want something cuter, like that cat?”

 

Anne stares at the employee. “Give. me. the. frog.”

 

“Alright, alright. That’ll be 100 tickets.”

 

Anne pulls out 100 tickets and gives them to the employee. The employee gets the frog plush and set of markers off the shelf and gives it to her. She hugs it, then puts it in her bag.”

 

“You sure like frogs, huh?”

 

Anne laughs while tears start to form in her eyes. “More than you could ever know”, she says.

 

“You still got a lot of tickets there. Is there anything else you wanted?”

 

Anne scans the shelves, but nothing else grabs her interest. She notices a kid is crying nearby.

 

Anne: “Actually, I have a better idea.”

 

Anne walks over to the kid.

 

Anne: “Hey, what’s the matter?”

 

The kid sniffles. “I’m here for my friend’s birthday party. Everyone else is having fun playing games, but my mom says I can’t play them. I just wanted tickets to get something…”, he says.

 

Anne: “Well, today’s your lucky day! I have all these tickets, but I don’t really need them. I want you to have them.”

 

The kid gasps. “Really? Thank you so much!”, he says.

 

Anne hands her remaining tickets to the kid. He then runs over to the counter. Sasha comes back from the bathroom.

 

Sasha: “I think I won’t be having any more candy today. Or for the next few days for that matter…did you get something from the counter, Anna-banana?”

 

Anne: “No, I gave my tickets to that kid. He really needed them, much more than I did.”

 

Sasha laughs. “Look at you! You’re not even in Amphibia anymore, and you’re still a hero. But don’t you want something to remember today?” she asks.

 

Anne: “Honestly, just the fact that we were able to get along and have so much fun today, even after we’ve been through together…that’s enough for me.”

 

Sasha: “Aww, thanks, Anne. I had a lot of fun today too. You know...besides me vomiting and all.”

 

Anne laughs. “Yeah, anyways we should get home. It’s getting kinda late”, she says.

 


 

Marcy closes her algebra binder.

 

Marcy: “And I thought math was complicated before. Who decided to add the alphabet to it?”

 

Mrs. Wu knocks on the door. “Marcy, it’s time for bed. Go brush your teeth. And don’t even think about staying up to study more. You’ve done enough for today”, she says.

 

Marcy: “Sure thing, Mom.”

 

Marcy gets up to the bathroom and brushes her teeth. She then goes back to her room and flops down on her bed. She closes her eyes. About an hour passes by without her falling asleep. She hears the sound of her dad’s footsteps on the stairs. She then hears a door close. Marcy groans.

 

Marcy: “Why can’t I sleep?”

 

Marcy gets up and turns on the lamp.

 

Marcy: “Hmm, Mom and Dad said not to stay up. But my brain isn’t letting me sleep. So maybe I just need to tire myself out. And what better way to do that than by studying?”

 

Marcy then gets out of bed and opens her English binder.

 

Marcy: “All right, I’ll just read this until I feel tired.”

 


Anne is walking up to her house. She opens the door and sees her parents sitting on the couch.

 

Mrs. Boonchuy: “Anne Savisa Boonchuy! Where have you been? I’ve been calling you all day! We thought you went missing again!”

 

“Oh crud. I forgot I don’t have my cell phone anymore”, Anne mutters to herself. “Sorry Mom, but I lost my phone and kinda lost track of time. I was just with Sasha at the arcade”, she says.

 

Mr. Boonchuy: “You lost your phone?”

 

Mrs. Boonchuy: “And why were you at the arcade? You should have just come home to tell us what Principal Murphy had to say.”

 

Anne: “I know, I know. I just found out that in order to get to 8th grade, I have to pass exams based on all the material I missed while I was in Amphibia. It kinda bummed me and Sasha out, so we decided to have some fun at the arcade before we had to hit the books. But, that was wrong of me. I should have let you know what was happening. I’m sorry.”

 

Mr. Boonchuy and Mrs. Boonchuy look at each other.

 

Mr. Boonchuy: “Honestly, we’re just glad you’re fine. You had a stressful six months. It’s fine to let loose.”

 

Mrs. Boonchuy: “However, covering all that material will take a while. You better get started on it right away. You can have your dinner in the fridge, and then I want you to go upstairs and study at least one chapter. But be in bed by 11:15 PM, OK?”

Anne: “Yeah, I will.”

 

Anne goes upstairs and pulls out her science binder. She notices the frog plush she got earlier today. She pulls it out, along with a pink marker. She spends a few minutes coloring it pink. After she’s done, she puts away the pink marker. She then smiles and holds the frog’s hand.

 

“Spranne against the world”, she whispers to herself.

 

She puts the doll on her desk and begins studying.


Marcy finishes reading her science binder. Next to her is a pile with the other binders.

 

Marcy laughs weakly to herself. “That was easy”, she says.

 

She yawns. ”I’m starting to feel tired. Time for bed. And then in the morning, I can take those exams”, she says.

 

Marcy hears birds chirping.

 

Marcy: “Well, that’s not good.”



Chapter 3: Coffee Break

Summary:

Marcy tries to take her exams without any sleep. Sasha and Anne try studying together, but they encounter some difficulties.

Chapter Text

“OK, calm down, Marcy. I can just sleep for a few hours, then go take the exams.”

 

Marcy hears footsteps on the staircase. She throws herself onto her bed and pulls the blankets over herself as Mrs. Wu enters.

 

“Honey, it’s time for breakfast. I made you pancakes.”

 

Marcy groans.

 

“Come on, they’re your favorite.”

 

“I’ll be right down.”

 

Mrs. Wu nods and closes the door.

 

“All right, new plan. I’ll go downstairs, have breakfast, then go upstairs and say I will continue my studies and not to bother me, and then I can just take a nap.”

 

Marcy gets out of bed. She groggily walks towards the door and down the stairs. She sits down at the kitchen table, where there is a plate with two warm pancakes on it.

 

“You can’t have pancakes without maple syrup, right?”

 

Mrs. Wu drizzles syrup over her pancakes. Marcy’s eyelids start to droop, and then she faceplants into her pancakes.

 

“Marcy! I know you like pancakes, but please be civilized and use a fork like everyone else!”

 

Marcy raises her head. Her face is covered in maple syrup.

 

“Now look at what you’ve done. Go into the bathroom and clean yourself!”

 

Marcy gets out of her chair and heads inside the bathroom. She cleans her face off. She exits and sits back down at the table. Mrs. Wu notices she isn’t eating.

 

“Honey, what’s the matter?”

 

Marcy perks up a little. “What are you talking about, mom? I’m perfectly fine”, she says.

 

“Then why aren’t you eating?”

 

Marcy tries to grab the fork in front of her, but has difficulty trying to do so. Mrs. Wu stands up.

 

“Marcy, you’re clearly not fine. Do you wanna tell me what’s up?”

 

“Oh, alright. I know you two said to get a full night’s rest, but I had difficulty sleeping so…”

 

“...you stood up all night studying?”

 

Marcy nods.

 

“Young lady, please go upstairs and get some shuteye. Now.”

 

Mr. Wu enters the kitchen. “I’m afraid that wouldn’t be a good idea’, he says.

 

Both Marcy and Mrs. Wu look at him.

 

Mrs. Wu: “Babe, what are you talking about? She’s in dire need of sleep…”

 

Mr. Wu: “Yes, and she was supposed to get some last night. If she tries to get some now, then she’ll be wide awake at night. She will unfortunately have to go the rest of the day without any sleep. Then she can go to bed tonight at a reasonable hour.

 

Marcy: “Dad, you can’t be serious! I’ve been down here for all of five minutes and I’m already starting to nod off!”

 

Mr. Wu: “If you had just told me about this last night, I could have given you something to help you sleep. But instead you decided to study for…some reason.”

 

Marcy: “If I have to stay up today, can I go take my exams? I did study for them. ALL OF THEM.”

 

Mr. Wu and Mrs. Wu look at each other.

 

Mrs. Wu: “If you think you’re ready…you can take it as many times as you want, right?”

 

Marcy: “That’s right! But I don’t think I’ll need more than one.”

 

She yawns. “I also don’t think I can make it the rest of the day without sleeping…unless…”

 

Marcy notices the mug in her dad’s hand.

 

Marcy: “Coffee! Don’t you guys drink that to wake up in the morning?”

 

Mr. Wu: “Well yes but…”

 

Marcy: “Then give me some!”

 

Mr. Wu: “Marcy, something you should know is that coffee is an acquired taste. Most people hate their first drink because it’s awfully bitter…”

 

Marcy: “Mom, I ate worms and flies in Amphibia. I think I can handle coffee.”

 

Mrs. Wu: “Alright, but I don’t think this regular strength coffee will work. We’ll stop by at Willz Coffee and get you a large espresso. Go get ready.”

 


 

Anne wakes up. In her arms is the stuffed frog she colored pink last night.

 

Anne: “Good morning, Sprig.”

 

Anne (imitating Sprig): “Good morning, Anne. Did I ever tell you that you are my best friend and I don’t know what I would do without you?”

 

Anne: “Yeah, I feel the same way, buddy.”

 

Mrs. Boonchuy walks in.

 

Mrs. Boonchuy: “Who are you talking to?”

 

Anne: “I was just…voicing out loud what I studied last night, that’s all.”

 

Mrs. Boonchuy: “That’s a good strategy. You’re studying more today, right?”

 

Anne: “Yeah I will. I need to get through the rest of my science binder.”

 

Mrs. Boonchuy: “That’s what I like to hear. Don’t forget to take breaks, though. By the way, we got you your new phone. It’s not as high tech as your old one, but it should still suffice. We’ve already linked your number to it. Don’t lose this one, got it?”

 

Anne nods. Mrs. Boonchuy puts the phone on Anne’s desk and closes the door. Anne rolls out of bed and resumes her studying.

 


 

Mrs. Wu is driving with Marcy in the front seat. She notices Marcy is starting to fall asleep.

 

Mrs. Wu: “Are you looking forward to your first coffee?”

 

Marcy: “Uh, I guess. Dad said it’s not good for the first time. Is it really that bad?”

 

Mrs. Wu: “I wouldn’t say it’s that bad. But it definitely takes some getting used to. Nowadays kids don’t really drink coffee. Everyone just drinks coffee flavored beverages. Back in my day, we didn’t have this wide variety of coffee. We just had a few, and the only things we had to make it taste better was cream and sugar. Anyways, we’re here.”

 

Marcy and Mrs. Wu get out of the car and go inside. They notice there’s a long line. Marcy groans.

 

Marcy: “This is gonna take forever!”

 

Mrs. Wu rubs her chin. Then she makes a devious smile.

 

Mrs. Wu: “Hey Marcy, you’re kind of a local celebrity, aren’t you? What with having saved the world and everything?”

 

Marcy: “Uh, I guess?”

 

Mrs. Wu: “Excuse me, everyone. This is my daughter, Marcy Wu. She was one of three girls that went to another world and helped save that one as well as this one.” 

 

The crowd murmurs.

 

“Oh wow, it really is her! Hi Marcy!”

 

Marcy: “Uh, hello!”

 

Mrs. Wu: “Anyways, I was thinking, as a small token of your appreciation, you let us cut to the front of the line.”

 

The crowd disperses, and they let Marcy and Mrs. Wu through.

 

Marcy: “Wow Mom, that was some good thinking!”

 

They walk up to the counter, where there is a barista waiting patiently.

 

“Hi, welcome Marcy! I can’t really thank you enough for what you’ve done for us. How about I give you a drink for free?”

 

Marcy: “Uh, thanks. But you don’t need to do that. We’ll pay full price.”

 

“Oh wow, so humble! Anyways, what can I get you?”

 

Marcy: “Your strongest espresso in your largest size.”

 

“Uh, that one’s a tad strong. Maybe I can get you something else?”

 

Marcy: “Nope, I just want that one.”

 

"Uh, sure thing. That’ll be $4.49.”

 

Mrs. Wu pays with her credit card. She and Marcy then go stand off to the side. A few minutes later, the barista hands Marcy her coffee.

 

Marcy: “Wow, I like the service here.”

 

“Try it! If it isn’t perfect, I can go back and make another!”

 

Marcy takes a sip. “Uh, this is good.”

 

"I’m glad to hear it! Come back anytime!”

 

Marcy and Mrs. Wu get back into their car and start heading towards Saint James Middle School.

 


 

Anne closes her science binder.

 

Anne: “That’s chapter 2 done. At this rate, I should be done with this by the end of the week. But now, it’s time for a break. I wonder what I should do.”

 

Anne (imitating Sprig): “Hey Anne, why don’t you draw yourself with me and the rest of my family?”

 

Anne: “That’s a great idea, Sprig!”

 

Anne pulls out some paper. She grabs some colored pencils and draws several illustrations of her with Polly, her with Hop Pop, and her with Sprig for several minutes. She then hangs them on her walls. Sasha enters.

 

Sasha: “Hey Anna-banana, I called Marcy and found out that she’s taking the exams already! She stayed up all night studying. That means we can have some more fun today and she can start tutoring us tomorr-”

 

Sasha stares blankly at Anne. She then notices the various drawings on the wall.

 

Anne laughs timidly. “Hey Sash, don’t you know it’s rude not to knock?” she says.

 

Sasha: “All right, girl, tell me what’s going on. What’s with all these drawings?”

 

Anne: “I was just taking a break. I thought I would, ya know, draw myself with my best friends. Oh! But it’s not what it looks like. That old looking frog over there represents Marcy, because she is so mature! And-and that pink tadpole over there represents you, because you look all sweet and innocent but deep down, you don’t take garbage from anyone! And that pink frog over there is…is…”

 

Sasha raises an eyebrow.

 

Anne: “Me! Gotta love yourself, right?”

 

Sasha: “Anne, I remember when we first got back, Marcy asked if you were fine. You said you were, but I had my doubts. I tried to give you the benefit of the doubt, but it seems like it’s worse than I thought…”

 

Anne: “But I’m fine! What’s wrong with having something to remind me of my second family?”

 

Sasha: “Nothing is wrong with that. But this…isn’t that. This is a coping mechanism for you to not have to accept the fact you’ll never see them again. And the more you do it, the more it’ll hurt. You can’t delay this forever, Anne.”

 

Anne starts to tear up.

 

Sasha: “Look, I wanted to hang out today. Can we just go out to the mall or something?”

 

Anne: “But I like being here with Sprig...”

 

Sasha: “But…Sprig isn’t here. Sprig can’t be here.”

 

Anne points to the spot on her desk, where her pink frog doll is. “No, he’s not here. But as long as I have that doll. He may as well be”, she says.

 

Sasha: “OK, yeah we need to get you out. If you wanna study, that’s fine. But we’re doing it anywhere but here.”

 

Anne: “But…”

 

Sasha huffs. “Look, Anne, as your best friend, I think it is objectively a good idea to be somewhere else. So can we please go?”

 

Anne: “Oh, all right.”

 

Anne and Sasha walk down the stairs.

 

Anne: “Mom, I’m hanging out with Sasha again. I’ll let you know when I’m back.”

 

Mrs. Boonchuy: “Thank you, sweetie.”

 

And so Anne and Sasha went to various places to study. They first head to the library, where there was a banner that states there is a seminar being held about the biology of frogs. Upon seeing this, Anne started crying and ran outside. They then headed towards the park, only to see two kids playing with frog action figures. Anne once again fled, and and they made their way to a cafe, only for them to realize that at one of the tables, someone brought their pet frog, at which point, Anne immediately left.

 

“Anne, wait!”

 

“I’m sorry Sash. But it just seems like everywhere we go I’m just reminded of the Plantars. At least if I’m in my room, it’s on my own terms. Please, just let me go home.”

 

“Anne, I told you, you need to let go!”

 

But how? I’m not like you, Sash. I can’t just forget people!”

 

“Wha-?”

 

“Oh, please. You were as close with Grime as I was with the Plantars. It must be easy to not feel anything if you just pretend he didn’t exist.”

 

Sasha clenches her fists and smiles while tears start to stream down her face. “You think I forgot Grime?” I couldn’t even if I wanted to…”, she says.

 

“Huh? How can you say tha-”

 

“Listen, Anne. Grime is largely responsible for the person I am today. Our friendship started off…a little rocky. But we became good friends. He was there when I needed him the most. When I came to terms that I might never see you or Marcy again when we first came to Amphibia…then again, when I thought I lost you as a friend at the Toad Tower…and then when I thought for sure you were going to leave me stranded in Amphibia after everything I had done to you. And when I thought I had lost Marcy forever…Grime was the one person who never left my side. And I owe my life to him. Here, take a look at this…”

 

Sasha pulls out a shield shaped locket that was draped around her neck and hands it to Anne.

 

“What…what is this?”

 

“When Grime and I had started the resistance against Andrias…both of us realized that it was possible that one of us was going to go on a mission…but not return. We wanted something to remember the other by in the event that happened. So we took the scrap from a Frobo and made two of those. Grime has the other. Open it up.”

 

Anne opens up the locket. On the left side, it says “Lieutenant Waybright”. On the other side, it says “Captain Grime”.

 

Sasha lets her tears flow freely. “We made a vow to each other when we made those. That, if the other didn’t make it back, that we would keep on living, so that the memory of the other would continue. And thankfully, both of us made it back from all our missions. I’m more glad for that than I can put into words. But…it sucks. It really does. That both of us did so much together and for each other, and we’ll never have any more memories like that”, she says.

 

Anne starts to cry.

 

“But that’s exactly why I had to let go. Even if we’re not together, he can live on through me, and I can live on through him. I don’t think you want the Plantars to be sad for the rest of their lives, do you?”

 

Anne sniffles. “No, of course, I don’t. I want them to live their best lives, even if I’m not there”, she says.

 

“Then, doesn’t it make sense that the Plantars would want the same for you?”

 

“You’re right, Sash. I-I guess I’ve just been holding on to this idea that somehow, someday the Plantars and I would be together again. But we won’t, not now, not ever. It’s so difficult to come to terms with that. But…I have to. For them."

 

Sasha gives Anne a hug.

 

Ah, thanks Sash. I feel like a huge weight has been lifted off my shoulders. I forgot that I still have people who love me here. And one of those people is holding me, right here and now.”

 

“Of course, Anna-banana. You’ll always have me. We’ll always…be friends. And I think I’m speaking for Marcy as well when I say that.”

 

Anne wipes her tears. “Wow, we haven’t really spent any time studying today, have we?”, she says.

 

Sasha laughs. “No, I guess some things came up. But I’m glad they did. We can go back to your place and study”, she says.

 

“My place? But I thought you said-”

 

“I changed my mind. Let’s go.”

 

Anne and Sasha walk home. Anne texts her mom that she is coming home soon, to which she replies with a thumbs up emoji.

 


 

Mrs. Wu drives up to Saint James Middle School. She gets out of the car with Marcy. She looks Marcy in the eyes.

 

“Alright Marcy, you didn’t spend all night studying just to fail these exams. So go ace them! I believe in you.”

 

She hugs Marcy.

 

“Thanks, Mom. I won’t let you down!”

 

Mrs. Wu gets back in her car. “Just call me when you’re done, got it?”, she says.

 

Marcy nods. Then Mrs. Wu smiles and drives away. Marcy takes a sip of her espresso, then walks inside. She goes to Principal Murphy’s office and knocks on the door.

 

“Hello? Who’s there?”

 

“It’s Marcy. I’m ready to take those exams.”

 

There’s a few moments of silence before Principal Murphy opens the door. “You seriously studied the entirety of a semester in one day?”, she asks.

 

“Yep! I’m as ready as I’ll ever be. It’s not too early to take them, right?”

 

“Uh, no…it isn’t.”

 

“Great! Just give me the exams in any order, and I’ll take them.”

 

“All right then, follow me.”

 

Principal Murphy grabs the exams and exits her office. Marcy follows her to an empty classroom.

 

“Take a seat anywhere. Put your bag and phone in the front of the room. And your coffee…”

 

“My coffee? What about it?”

 

“Let me just see it for a moment.”

 

Principal Murphy inspects it for a few moments and hands it back.

 

“Sorry about that. I’ve heard some people have gotten creative with how they cheat. Some people put the test material on their bottles or cans. I wouldn’t have assumed you would do such a thing, but I don’t wanna take any chances.”

 

“Ah, don’t worry about it…can I get started?”

 

“Yes, of course. Let’s see, Lady Luck says you will be starting with…history. You can take as much time as you need. Just turn it in when you’re done, and then, if you so wish, I can give you the next one.”

 

Marcy nods. Principal Murphy puts several pages on her desk. Marcy begins to answer every single question on this exam, before turning it in, grabbing the next exam, and repeating. Every so often she takes a sip of her espresso. As she finishes her last exam, the sun starts to set.

 

Marcy slams the last exam on the front desk. “Done!”, she excitedly claims.

 

“All right, just give me a few minutes to look this over.”

 

Several minutes pass. Principal Murphy then gets up.

 

“So? How did I do?”

 

Miss Wu, you are an incredibly scary individual.”

 

“Huh? What are you talking about?”

 

“You got an A on every single one of your exams. You’ve done better than most of my regular students have in one day than they did in half a year. Congratulations, Marcy Wu. You’re now officially an 8th grader."

 

Marcy squeals in joy and jumps up. Suddenly, she starts losing her balance.

 

“Woah, are you alright?”

 

Marcy steadies herself. “Oh, yeah. I’ve been hyped up on coffee all day because I didn’t get any sleep last night. But this stuff works wonders! I guess I need a little more”, she says.

 

She tries to take another sip. To her dismay, she realizes the cup is empty.

 

“Well, that’s not goo-”

 

Marcy starts to fall facefirst. Principal Murphy grabs her before she hits the floor.

 

“Sweet dreams, Marcy. You deserve them.”

 

Principal Murphy grabs Marcy’s phone, finds Mrs. Wu’s phone number, and calls it.

 

“Hello? Are you done, Marcy?

 

“I’m afraid Marcy is sleeping. Poor thing ran out of coffee. But good news! She passed her exams with flying colors.”

 

Mrs. Wu laughs. “I knew she would. I’ll come get her now”, she says.

 

“Sounds good. I’ll see you soon. And I’ll make sure she stays safe.”

 

Principal Murphy hangs up.

 


Anne and Sasha head into Anne’s room. Anne looks at the drawings she made earlier today. She takes them off the walls, and stuffs them in her desk drawer. She looks at the pink frog doll. She attempts to take it off the desk, but Sasha stops her.

 

“You know how I have this locket to remind me of Grime? Well, I think that doll can be your locket. If you’re ever feeling down, you can look at it and remember all the good times you had with Sprig.”

 

Anne smiles. “Let’s get to studying”, she says.

 

The two spend the rest of the night looking over the science material. At one point, the doorbell rings. Eventually, Anne yawns.

 

“Hey, you’re looking a little sleepy. You wanna call it a night?”

 

“Sounds good. We can pick this up tomorrow.”

 

“Yeah, and maybe we can get Marcy to study with us, too. I still don’t know where she was today…”

 

“Who knows. But I’m sure she’s fine.”

 

“Yeah, for sure. I’ll get going.”

 

Sasha walks out of the room, downstairs, and out the door. Mrs. Boonchuy enters her room after she leaves.

 

“Anne, are you busy?”

 

“Ah, no. I was just gonna go get ready for bed. What’s up?”

 

“Someone left this package for you.”

 

“Who’s it from?”

 

“That’s just it. We don’t know.”

 

“You don’t know who it’s from?! What if it’s a bomb or full of leeches or something?!”

 

“Your father inspected it without opening it. He’s fairly certain it’s not dangerous. You can open it since it’s yours, but please tell us if something seems wrong, OK?”

 

“Uh, yeah sure.”

 

Mrs. Boonchuy hands the package to Anne and leaves. Anne notices there’s a letter attached to it. She opens it up and begins to read it:

 

Dear Anne Boonchuy,

You may not know me, but I do know you. While it may be a formality to tell you my name, all you really need to know about me is that I come from a family that did a lot of exploring and treasure collecting throughout the ages. The valuables my family has amassed have been passed down from parent to child. Most of them are just pretty to look at or have interesting history behind them. There was one set of items we had that we thought were ordinary, but they turned out to be anything but. After we heard your story, we came to a realization. I contacted some of my friends, and we made this for you. We know it doesn’t even come close to being a proper thank you for saving our world, but it’s the best we could do. Please use it as you see fit.

Sincerely,

Someone looking to help

 

Anne unwraps the packing paper in the box. She almost does not believe her eyes as she sees a golden music box, fitted with three gems. She starts to cry.

 

“Hop Pop, Polly, Sprig. Maybe we…maybe we really can be together again…”




Chapter 4: Rekindled Hope

Summary:

Anne gets another music box and wants to use it, but her parents have other ideas. Marcy tutors her friends.

Chapter Text

“I-I don’t believe it. This music box…surely it can take me back to Amphibia, right?”

 

She inspects the box. The gems are a shining green, blue, and pink.

 

Anne starts to cry. “I can really…I can really see you guys again…”, she says.

 

Anne goes to open the box. Suddenly she stops herself.

 

“No, I shouldn’t. As much as I want to see the Plantars again, I can’t leave my parents without a word. I’ll tell them about this tomorrow. For now, I just need to get some sleep…”

 

Anne lays down on her bed. She falls asleep within minutes.

 


 

Hop Pop is planting avocados and watering them. He plucks the ripe ones, and brings them inside.

 

Hop Pop: “Hey kids! The avocados are done growing!”

 

Polly and Sprig run down the stairs.

 

Polly: “Ooh! I can’t wait to try them!”

 

Hop Pop: “Now you’re not supposed to just eat these raw. You’re supposed to get this skin off, and then you get this nice spread you can put on bread!”

 

Hop Pop peels off the skin. Using a knife, he spreads it on two slices of bread. He gives one to Polly and one to Sprig.

 

Hop Pop: “Here you go, kids. I hope you enjoy it!”

 

Polly and Sprig take a bite.

 

Sprig: “Wow, this is amazing! It’s far better than your usual cooking!”

 

Hop Pop chuckles. “Glad you enjoyed it. Wait, what’s that supposed to mean?”, he says.

 

Polly laughs. “I think that’s about as close to a compliment as you’re gonna get from Sprig about your cooking”, she says.

 

Hop Pop: “And you, Polly? What do you think?”

 

Polly: “It’s scrumptious! With this food from another world, you’re sure to get enough money to keep this farm going!”

 

Hop Pop: “That is why I took it. We don’t have anything close to avocados here. I’m sure it’ll be a hit with Wartwood! Just gotta make sure they stay alive, because…we can’t get any more.”

 

Polly and Sprig stop smiling.

 

Polly: “Uh, well this was fun. I gotta get back to learning to use a comb.”

 

Polly heads upstairs. Sprig pulls out Anne’s phone.

 

Hop Pop: “Sprig, isn’t that Anne’s phone?”

 

Sprig: “Yeah, it is. She wanted me to have it. Said I could maybe use it for future adventures.”

 

Hop Pop: “Hmm…perhaps. But I don’t think that’s the only reason.”

 

Sprig: “Why do you say that?”

 

Hop Pop: “In the few short months Anne was here, I noticed she took a lot of pictures with that. She must have wanted you to have them”.

 

Sprig opens the photos app on the phone. He sees a gallery view of all the photos Anne took while she was in Amphibia. He starts to tear up.

 

Sprig: “I think you’re right, Hop Pop. But if I have these photos, that means she doesn’t. Why would she think these are better off with me?”

 

Hop Pop: “Aw, come on now, Sprig. She saw how sad you were when she was leaving, and she just wanted you to have something to remember her by. You and she were best friends. You were inseparable, like two peas in a pod.”

 

Sprig: “Yeah…except Anne isn’t here anymore. And she won’t be coming back.”

 

Sprig notices a photo of the statue of Anne when she won Frog of the Year.

 

Sprig: “You know what, I wanna do something in her honor. We should have a statue of her. I can design it and Loggle can get us the wood to build it.”

 

Hop Pop: “I’m sure she’d appreciate that.”

 

Sprig grabs his notebook and a pencil and starts doodling pictures of Anne.

 


 

Anne wakes up. She checks under her bed to make sure that the music box she got is still there.

 

Anne: “I thought last night was just my imagination playing tricks on me. But no, this is real.”

 

She grabs the music box and heads downstairs. She sees her parents at the kitchen table.

 

Anne: “Good morning, Mom! Good morning, Dad!”

 

Mrs. Boonchuy: “You sure are chipper this morning, huh?”

 

Anne: “Uh hey, you guys were probably wondering what was in that package, right?”

 

Mr. Boonchuy: “A bit. I thought it might have just been fanmail or something. What was inside?”

 

Anne: “Oh, nothing. Just a dream come true!”

 

Anne shows her parents the music box. Her parents gasp.

 

Mr. Boonchuy: “That looks like the music box you told us about! The one that sent you to Amphibia! How did it get here?”

 

Anne: “Well, it isn’t the same music box. This one has slightly different markings on it. But it should still work the same.”

 

Mrs. Boonchuy: “You…weren’t planning on opening it, were you?”

 

Anne: “Well, not now, but eventually yes.”

 

Mr. and Mrs. Boonchuy look at each other.

 

Mrs. Boonchuy: “Anne, please don’t take this the wrong way, but I don’t think you should.”

 

Anne: “What? Why not?! Mom, you said you wanted for the Plantars to try your mooncakes. And Dad, you wanted to properly thank Hop Pop for looking after me. We didn’t think we could ever do those a few days ago, but now we can!”

 

Mr. Boonchuy: “But Amphibia is dangerous…”

 

Anne: “Dad, you were fine with sending me back to Amphibia a few weeks ago. You even helped me. What has changed since then?”

 

Mr. Boonchuy: “We sent you because we had to. You needed to get the Plantars home, and you needed to bring Sasha and Marcy back. Both of those have been accomplished. Sending you back now is an unnecessary risk…”

 

Anne groans. “I can’t believe you two! What parents don’t want their daughter to be happy?”, she says.

 

Mrs. Boonchuy: “We do want you to be happy. But we also worry about you.”

 

Anne: “I don’t need you to worry about me. I can handle myself!”

 

Mrs. Boonchuy: “But we’re your parents. It’s difficult not to be concerned for you.”

 

Anne clenches her fists.

 

Mr. Boonchuy: “OK, OK, this is getting us nowhere. Why don’t we make a compromise? Anne, we will let you use the box, but on a few conditions.”

 

Anne: “What conditions?”

 

Mr. Boonchuy: “Your mother and I will figure those out later. For now, you should go study. We’ll talk later tonight.”

 

Anne gets a text on her phone from Marcy:

 

“omg hi Anna-banana! sorry I haven’t seen you in the past few days, been studying a lot :P but hey! I passed my exams, so I can help you two! im already helping Sash. she kinda begged me to help her haha. if you want, you can come to my house today so i can tutor you :D”

 

Anne replies back with a thumbs up emoji.

 

Anne: “I’m going to study with Marcy today. That box better still be in working condition when I get back.”

 

Anne goes upstairs and stuffs her binders in her backpack. She goes downstairs and out the front door towards Marcy’s house.

 


 

Sprig enters Loggle’s shop. He has a piece of paper with a drawing of Anne in his hand.

 

Sprig: “Sup Loggle! I was hoping you could help me with something…”

 

Loggle: “Absolutely!”

 

Sprig waits for a moment. “Great! I was wondering if we could make a statue of Anne, with this design”, he says.

 

He shows Loggle the paper.

 

Sprig: “You can choose the wood. I’ll pay for it too. Well, actually, I guess Hop Pop will be paying for it because I stole his wallet, but either way…”

 

Loggle: “Oh, Sprig. You don’t need to pay me.”

 

Sprig: “Huh? Why not?”

 

Loggle: “You’re not really building this for yourself. You’re building it for the community. That makes it a donation more than anything.”

 

Sprig: “Thanks, Loggle.”

 

Loggle: “No, Sprig. Thank you. I know we don’t talk much, but you’ve grown so much in such a short amount of time. Before, you seemed to only think of yourself. Now you’re looking to do something nice for those around you.”

 

Sprig smiles.

 

Loggle: “Anyways, I think I have an idea for what wood I could use. I could probably have this done by tonight, and we can unveil it to the town tomorrow.”

 

Sprig: “That’s good! I have to get approval from the mayor that this can be built. I’m sure he’ll say yes, but I do need to make sure. Plus, I want to give a speech. Well actually, I don’t, but I feel like I have to….”

 

Loggle: “I can’t think of anyone more suitable than you. You may not be the best speech writer, but you were one of Anne’s best friends. As long as you just speak from your heart, I’m sure the townspeople will love it.”

 

Sprig: “I’ll go get started then. See you tomorrow, then?”

 

Loggle: “Absolutely!!”

 

Sprig walks outside and heads towards the town hall.

 


 

Anne walks up to Marcy’s house. She knocks on the door. Marcy opens up.

 

Marcy: “Good morning, Anne! I am Professor Wu, and I will be teaching you and Sasha everything you need to know as a 7th grader!”

 

Marcy steps aside. Anne sees Sasha sitting in a chair in front of a whiteboard on wheels. Sasha waves to Anne. Anne walks over and sits in the chair next to her.

 

Marcy: “Anyways, I just got done going over chapter 4 of the science book over with Sasha here. Did you want me to go over that with you?”

 

Anne: “No, I’m good. I’ve studied that already. I haven’t gotten to chapter 5 yet, though.”

 

Marcy: “Ooh, that’s one of my favorites! It talks about geology!”

 

Marcy begins writing various terms on the board, and drawing figures. She continues to lecture for a few hours.

 

Marcy: “...and, yeah! That’s basically everything you need to know about geology. Any questions?”

 

Sasha and Anne give Marcy a blank stare.

 

Marcy: “Great! Let’s go onto chapter 6…”

 

Sasha: “Uh, hey Marcy?”

 

Marcy: “That’s Professor Wu! Uh, but yes, what is it?”

 

Sasha: “I think I’m done for today. My brain feels like a brick.”

 

Anne: “Yeah, I’m with Sash on this one. You’re going a bit too fast, and I’m finding it difficult to be interested in learning about types of rocks…”

 

Marcy: “...I guess I find studying to be fun…but most people don’t, huh? But there’s gotta be a way to fix that…”

 

Marcy snaps her fingers. “I got it! How about we make this a competition?”, she asks.

 

Sasha: “Competition? What are you talking about?”

 

Marcy: “Whoever gets the highest collective score on their exams will get something from me! Hmm, but what could I give you that would motivate you enough to study this material with as much passion as I did?”

 

Mrs. Wu: “Honey, can you do me a favor and take out the recycling?”

 

Marcy: “Sure thing, Mom.”

 

Marcy goes over to the recycling bin. Then she gasps.

 

Marcy: “That’s it! Sasha, Anne! Whichever one of you gets the highest score, I will do one favor for you, no restrictions, no questions asked!”

 

Sasha and Anne gasp.

 

Marcy: “I know, right? You could ask me to do something humiliating, or you could ask me to do your chores for a week. The possibilities are endless!”

 

Marcy takes the recycling outside.

 

Sasha and Anne look at each other. They both nod. Anne puts out her hand.

 

Anne: “May the better student win!”

 

Sasha shakes Anne’s hand.

 

Sasha: “I intend to!”

 

Marcy comes back inside, and she resumes teaching Anne and Sasha. Several more hours go by, until Anne and Sasha decide to call it a day and go home. While walking home, Anne gets a text on her phone from her dad:

 

“We figured out an arrangement where you can use the music box. Please come home.”

 

Anne replies with a thumbs up. A few minutes later, Anne walks into her house.

 

Mrs. Boonchuy: “Welcome home, Anne! I prepared you some Pad Thai for dinner. Did you have a good time studying?”

 

Anne: “Yeah, yeah. What did you guys come up with?”

 

Mr. Boonchuy: “Straight to the point, huh? Fair warning, you may not like what you’re about to hear…”

 

Anne: “Honestly, as long as I get to use the music box again, any conditions are fine. You could ask me to walk up Mt. Everest, and I’d do it. I just want to be with the Plantars again.”

 

Mr. Boonchuy laughs. “Our conditions are more reasonable than that. I don’t even know what the point of that would be…”, he says.

 

Anne: “It’s a joke, Dad. What I’m trying to say is they mean a lot to me. Almost as much as you guys mean to me.”

 

Mr. and Mrs. Boonchuy smile.

 

Mrs. Boonchuy: “Anyways, we really only have two conditions.”

 

Anne: “All right, let’s hear ‘em.”

 

Mr. Boonchuy: “Your first condition is that you have to graduate from high school.”

 

Anne: “What? I’m not even done with middle school yet! Why do I have to-”

 

Mrs. Boonchuy: “Didn’t you just say-”

 

Anne: “I mean, yes, I did say I would do anything. But I was hoping I could see them sooner rather than later…”

 

Mr. Boonchuy: “Look, you did a lot of impressive feats for a 13 year old. But, you’re still growing. Imagine how much stronger, smarter, and faster you will be when you’re an adult.”

 

Anne: “I guess…that makes sense…Fine, I can wait five years, considering I thought I was never going to see the Plantars again. What’s the other condition?”

 

Mrs. Boonchuy: “You can stay in Amphibia for as long as you want. But we do ask that you come home for certain occasions, like your birthday.”

 

Anne: “Pfft, I was gonna do that anyway.”

 

Mr. Boonchuy: “It’s settled then. When you graduate high school, we’ll give this back to you as a gift.”

 

Mrs. Boonchuy: “I’m sorry we’re making your life more difficult than it may need to be, Anne. We’re just looking out for you.”

 

Anne: “It’s OK, you guys. I’d rather have parents that care too much about me than too little.”

 

Anne hugs her parents.

 


 

Sprig and Loggle are in the middle of Wartwood. Next to them is a fairly large statue that has a sheet draped over it. Mayor Toadstool approaches the statue with a microphone.

 

Mayor Toadstool: “Good morning, everyone. Hope y’all are doing well. Anyways, yesterday, Sprig came to me yesterday with a proposal for an addition to the town. And once I heard about it, I thought, “frog nabbit, that’s a great idea!”. Let me show you what he and Loggle made.”

 

Mayor Toadstool pulls off the sheet to see a statue of Anne. In her left hand, she is pointing a sword outward. In the other, she is holding the music box.

 

Mayor Toadstool: “Loggle obviously got the wood and built it himself. But Sprig was the one to come up with the idea to construct this, and he designed it, too. Because this statue is largely because of him, I’ll let him take over. Sprig, the floor is yours.”

 

Mayor Toadstool gives Sprig the microphone. The crowd begins clapping.

 

Sprig starts sweating. “Uh, hey everyone. Nice weather, we’re having right?”, he asks.

 

The crowd gives a blank stare as Sprig begins to stammer. He looks at his notes:

 

“Be nervous and ask about the weather. Fall over your own words. Tear these notes up, then just ad-lib”

 

Sprig rips the papers he was holding.

 

Sprig: “You know what, I spent yesterday writing this speech to give to all of you. But, in all honesty, I don’t think that was the right idea. No, I can’t really put on paper what Anne meant to me. So I’ll just speak from here.”

 

Sprig points to his heart.

 

Sprig: “For a long time, I had only thought of doing the right thing if there was some benefit to me. But Anne always did the moral thing, unconditionally…even if it put herself in danger. She helped everyone, everywhere she went. She was…more than just a friend to me. She was a shining example of how a person should live their life. She helped me become the person I am today. That’s why I wanted this here, to serve as a reminder that we should always live our lives like she did!”

 

Sprig raises his fist into the air. The crowd roars in applause.

 

Mayor Toadstool: “Thank ya, Sprig. So that’s how it is, folks. Live like Anne!”

 

The crowd shouts “Live like Anne!”

 

Mayor Toadstool: “Anyways, you all are dismissed.”

 

The crowd disperses. Loggle heads back to his shop, and Mayor Toadstool heads back to his office. Sprig looks up at the statue and starts to tear up.

 

“Spranne against the world”, he whispers to himself.

 

Ivy: “Hey Sprig!”

 

Sprig jumps up in surprise.

 

Ivy: “Oh, sorry, I just wanted to tell you that was a cool speech you gave. I thought it was heartfelt that you just ripped up your notes like that and just spoke your feelings. I think that’s the truest reflection of how much she meant to you.”

 

Sprig chuckles nervously.

 

Ivy: “Anyways, did you want to come by my mom’s tea shop? She’s trying out a new tea flavor.”

 

Sprig: “Yeah, I’d love to.”

 

Sprig holds Ivy’s hand. She blushes, and the two walk towards Felicia’s Tea Shoppe.

 


 

Marcy is erasing the board while Anne and Sasha close their notebooks.

 

Marcy: “Well, I’ve taught you everything you need to. The score you get is up to you now. But I’m sure you two will excel!”

 

Sasha and Anne look at each other and smile. They leave Marcy’s house, and arrive at the school. They head inside. They knock on Principal Murphy’s office door. She opens up, looks at them, then grabs the exams. She leads them to an empty classroom, and they sit down far from each other. Principal Murphy hands them one exam each. Each of them takes their time to complete it. After one finishes, they go up to the front desk, turn it in, and grab the next exam. This goes on for several hours. Both finish their last exam at the same time.

 

Principal Murphy: “All right, just give me a few minutes to look these over. I’ll let you know what you got soon.”

 

Anne and Sasha head outside the classroom. They both sit on a bench. Neither of them say anything for a minute. Suddenly, Anne speaks up.

 

Anne: “Hey Sash?”

 

Sasha: “Yeah?”

 

Anne: “Regardless of what happens, I just want you to know this has been fun. Which isn't really something I expected to ever say about studying and taking exams…”

 

Sasha: “Yeah, it’s strange. Why has this been fun? It can’t have just been because of the chance to get some reward…”

 

Anne: “This is just a guess, but it’s probably just been because it’s been a while since all three of us hung out.”

 

Sasha chuckles. “Yeah, I suppose when you’re with friends, you can be doing just about anything, and it’ll be a good time”, she says.

 

Principal Murphy: “All right, you two. I got your scores back. Here you go.”

 

She hands one paper to Sasha and one to Anne. They both breathe a sigh of relief as none of their scores were below passing. They both pull out their phones and open the calculator apps to average their scores.

 

Sasha: “Looks like my average was 90%. How about you, Anna-banana?”

 

Anne: “I got a 91% average.”

 

Sasha: “Ah, you gotta be kidding me! Ah well, I think the important thing is we can go back to school as 8th graders in the fall.”

 

Anne: “Yeah, that’s true. Come on, let’s go tell Marcy the good news!”

 

Both of them head out of the school and head towards Marcy’s house.


 

Sprig is sitting at a table in the tea shoppe. Felicia hands him a cup of tea.

 

Felicia: “Here you go, Sprig. I hope you enjoy it. But don’t be afraid to be critical if you don’t like it.”

 

Sprig takes a sip." Wow, this is delicious! I always thought tea was just some leaf juice. Thanks, Ms. Sundew!”

 

Felicia giggles. “Don’t thank me, Ivy was the one to get the ingredients to make that, and she brewed it herself”, she says.

 

Sprig: “Huh? She did?”

 

Felicia: “Yeah, my little girl told me she was ready to go exploring by herself to find new things to make tea with. I was a little hesitant to let her go, but seeing her handle herself these past few weeks made me realize, maybe my little girl isn’t so little anymore.”

 

Ivy: “Hey Sprig! Did you like the tea?”

 

Sprig laughs. “I think like is an understatement”, he says.

 

Ivy blushes. “I’m glad! I’ve never tried making my own tea before. But I guess I learned from the best!”, she says.

 

Felicia: “Aww, Ivy, you’re gonna make me cry…anyways, I have some other customers to attend to. You can do as you wish.”

 

Ivy: “Sounds good. Just let me know if you need any help.”

 

Ivy sits across the table from Sprig. Sprig looks down at the floor.

 

Ivy: “Sprig, what’s wrong? Oh no, did you not really like my tea? I knew I should have steeped a little longer!”

 

Sprig: “No, that’s not it. The tea is fantastic. It’s just, I’ve got something on my mind.”

 

Ivy: “What is it?”

 

Sprig: “I did make that statue to honor Anne, but that wasn’t the only reason. She’s been on my mind ever since she left. I thought by building it, it’d finally take my mind off her. But it didn’t. I just…I miss her so much…”

 

Sprig starts to tear up.

 

Ivy: “Hey Sprig?”'

 

Sprig: “Yeah?”

 

I haven’t told a lot of people this, but I had a good friend when I was younger. Her name was Emily. She and I did everything together. We went exploring in the woods, did arts and crafts, and played games. She was so important to me…but…", Ivy says, as she starts to cry. “One day, I got a notice that Emily had a rare illness. The doctors said she only had a few months to live. I was completely distraught. I…I had never known life without her. But the day she left this world, she told me she wasn’t all that special. She was just a girl who got bullied a lot when she was younger. But she told me she was blessed to have found a companion in me, when everybody else avoided her. She told me that I was unique, though. I may have been one of the cool kids, but I was one of the only people to treat her like a person. She told me to never stop being that way, even after she departed. So that’s what I did. I found you, Sprig, and I got to know who you really were. And you did the same for me. I guess what I’m trying to say is, friends may come and go. But they never really leave us. Whenever it’s their time, they leave a piece of themselves with us. And that’s what Emily did with me. And what Anne did with you. I’m sure you miss her, just as much as I miss Emily. But no matter what happens, I’ll always be by your side. So no more crying, OK?”

 

Sprig sniffles. “Thanks, Ivy, I really needed that”, he says.

 

Ivy gets up and hugs Sprig.

 


 

Anne and Sasha head into Marcy’s house.

 

Marcy: “You guys are back! So how did you two do?”

 

Sasha: “We aced those exams! But uh, Anne did slightly better than me, so she wins.”

 

Marcy: “All right! Anna-banana, you can use that favor whenever you want.”

 

Anne: “I’m gonna use it right now.”

 

Marcy: “Oh, I thought you were gonna save it for something important.”

 

Anne: “But this is something important. Marcy, I want you to go spend the rest of the day with me and Sash at the mall.”

 

Marcy smiles. “Well, I can’t say no to that!”, she says.

 

Sasha, Anne, and Marcy go around shopping, eating at the food court, and using the photo booth.

 

Marcy: “You were right, Anna-banana. This was important. It’s been a long time since we all had a good time together. I think the last time was…oh.”

 

Sasha: “Huh? When was it?”

 

Marcy: “It was back in Amphibia. When we had that battle of the bands.”

 

Sasha: “Oh yeah, you’re right. That was the day before…everything kinda went sideways.”

 

Everyone falls silent.

 

Marcy: “Well hey! That’s all behind us now. None of us are keeping secrets from each other anymore!”

 

Anne looks down at the floor. Sasha notices.

 

Sasha: “Anne? Is something wrong?”

 

Anne: “Uh, yeah. Kinda. I have been keeping a secret from you two for a few weeks now.”

 

Sasha and Marcy gasp.

 

Anne: “I was going to tell you, but I was just so busy with studying and taking the exams that it slipped my mind.”

 

Sasha: “Well, you can tell us now, right?”

 

Anne: “Yeah, I can. The truth is…”




Chapter 5: Truth

Summary:

Anne, Sasha, and Marcy try to make their way back to Amphibia. Sprig and Polly find their own paths, which makes Hop Pop proud.

Chapter Text

Sasha: “Woah, woah, woah. Just…let me see if I got this right.”

 

Anne: “OK…”

 

Sasha: “So, a few weeks ago, you got an anonymous package from someone who had their own calamity stones, who made a music box for you such that you could potentially return to Amphibia should you open it, but your parents insisted that you wait until you graduate high school until you do so. Is that the entirety of your story?”

 

Anne: “Pretty much, yeah. Like I said, I was gonna tell you two. I was gonna at least offer to bring you there if you wanted.”

 

Sasha and Marcy look at each other.

 

Anne: “Did…did you two want to go?”

 

Sasha starts to tear up. “Anne, I told you that I would give you anything just to spend a day with Grime again. If it’s just a matter of waiting five years, to see him as often as I want…do you really have to ask?”, she says.

 

Anne: “And Marcy?”

 

Marcy: “Ah, I did tell Olivia and Yunan I wanted to get to know them better. It’d be great if I actually got to do that.”

 

Anne: “Then it’s settled. Once we graduate high school, we can go back.”

 

Sasha: “Wait, Anne. It sounded like your parents were initially not OK with this…”

 

Anne: “You’re right, they weren’t. My parents even told me I shouldn’t use it. But we came to an agreement.”

 

Marcy: “But it stands to reason our parents might not be. What if we can’t convince them to let us go?”

 

Anne: “Oh, you’re right. I hadn’t thought about that. I guess I was just so happy that I could go back with my friends that I hadn’t even considered that your parents might not want you to.”

 

Sasha: “Well, hey. I got an idea. Why don’t we just tell them at the graduation?”

 

Anne: “Huh? Why?”

 

Sasha: “Think about it. They’re worried about us now because we’re just middle schoolers. If we tell them this when we’re adults, maybe they’d be more willing to listen.”

 

Marcy: “I guess that makes sense. I feel bad about not telling them, though.”

 

Sasha: “Well, hey. You didn’t tell us your secrets when we were in Amphibia. And sure, we thought it was a little messed up, but you had a good reason, and we forgave you afterwards. I imagine our parents might be the same way.”

 

Marcy: “I hope you’re right…”

 

Anne: “Anyways, today was fun, but I think we’ve spent enough time at the mall.”

 

Marcy: “Wait. I was just thinking, if there was another set of Calamity Stones here, do you think that means there is a set for every planet with sentient life on it?”

 

Anne and Sasha look at each other.

 

Anne: "I guess that makes sense. But...there's no use in wondering about it now. Let's go home."

 

Marcy and Sasha nod. The three of them head home.

 


 

Hop Pop: “Sprig! Polly! Breakfast’s ready!”

 

Sprig and Polly head downstairs. They see two cups of green liquid.

 

Polly: “Uh, what is this...?”

 

Hop Pop: “Good question! Back on Earth, I saw this thing called a breakfast smoothie. I was thinking I could try making one myself!”

 

Sprig: “Why is it green?”

 

Hop Pop: “Because I made it with avocados!”

 

Sprig and Polly look at each other.

 

Hop Pop: “Anyways, I was thinking we could start selling this to the community, because I’ve noticed my avocados haven’t been selling too well lately. But that’s nothing a little variety can’t fix! Now come on, try it! You two like avocados, right?”

 

The doorbell rings.

 

Hop Pop: “That must be the mail. I’ll go get it. You two can tell me what you think when I get back.”

 

Hop Pop leaves the kitchen and heads towards the front door. Sprig takes a sip of his drink and immediately gags.

 

Polly: “It’s that bad, huh?”

 

Sprig: “Yeah, I think Hop Pop has gone a little overboard with the avocados. But I feel like we have to drink it, because we might hurt his feelings.”

 

Polly gets up and dumps her beverage down the sink. “Suit yourself”, she says.

 

Sprig: “Polly!”

 

Hop Pop enters the kitchen with two letters. “Hey kids, look, this one’s from Sylvia!”, he says.

 

Sprig: “What did she send you? Doesn’t she just live across the street?”

 

Hop Pop: “Yeah, but she and I have been sending romantic letters to each other!”

 

Sprig’s eye twitches. “That’s great, HP”, he says.

 

“Yep, I’ll read it after you tell me what you think of the smoothies.", Hop Pop says, as he notices Polly's empty cup. "Oh, Polly! You already drank yours! Must have been good, huh?”

 

Polly: “Yeah, it was delicious! I think Sprig’s just been taking his time because he wants to savor it.”

 

Hop Pop: “That’s good! I’ll start making more and selling it today. I’ll call it the ‘Hop n Go’. Anyways, this letter is for you, Polly.”

 

Polly: “Huh? Who’s it from?’

 

Hop Pop: “Hmm, looks like it’s from Queen Olivia. Don’t know what she sent you, but it must be important if it came from her.”

 

Polly grabs the letter from Hop Pop. She opens it and reads it:

 

Dear Polly Plantar,

I hope things have been going well for you in Wartwood. We have a special assignment for you. We have many Frobos that are currently collecting dust. We would like you to reprogram and redesign them so they can help out the residents of Amphibia with various tasks. Additionally, we would like you to teach others your craft. Should you choose to accept it, please respond to this letter. And as Queen of Amphibia, you will be greatly awarded.

Sincerely,

Queen Olivia

 

Polly: “Oh. My. Frog! Guys, I just got my first job!”

 

Hop Pop: “First job? What is it?”

 

Polly: “They want me to be a mechanic for the Frobos! And a teacher so other people can be like me! And I’m gonna get a ton of money!”

 

Hop Pop: “Now that’s my girl!”

 

Polly: “So you’re fine with me going alone?”

 

Hop Pop: “Well, you did just grow your legs not too long ago. But, you’ve been looking after Frobo really well. I’d say you’ve shown me you’re more than capable of doing this.”

 

Polly hugs Hop Pop. “Thanks, HP! I’ll go pack my bags!”, she says.

 

Polly heads upstairs. Sprig stomachs the rest of his beverage and starts to walk upstairs.

 

Hop Pop: “Hey Sprig, it seems like your sister has a busy few weeks or months ahead of her. What were you planning to do today?”

 

Sprig pulls out Anne’s phone.

 

Sprig: “Hey HP, our family wrote a lot of books, didn’t they?”

 

Hop Pop: “That’s right! We got oodles of them from pretty much everyone in our family! Were you thinking of writing one?”

 

Sprig: “I feel like I wouldn’t be much of a Plantar if I didn’t. I was gonna make a guide to Amphibia. And I can use these pictures from Anne’s phone to draw illustrations. And I can use it to take more pictures, and draw more. Then I can sell them!”

 

“HP, I got my bags all rea-”, Polly says, as she heads downstairs and notices Hop Pop is starting to tear up. 

 

Hop Pop: “Both my grandkids are making something of their lives. I’m sure your parents would have been happy to see you like this."

 

Sprig: “Well, we couldn’t have done it without someone helping us every step of the way.”

 

Hop Pop chuckles. “Yeah, I guess you’re right. But you two are officially Plantars today. You can always ask me for advice, but I think you’ve learned enough to get by in life”, he says.

 

Sprig and Polly go over and hug Hop Pop.

 

Polly: “We’ll make you proud, HP.”

 

Hop Pop: “You already have.”

 

Polly heads outside. She jumps into Frobo’s arms, and they fly towards Newtopia. Sprig heads upstairs and pulls out a notebook. He writes on the cover “Sprig’s Guide to Amphibia”.

 


 

Five Years Later

 

Anne, Sasha, and Marcy are sitting amongst their classmates at their high school graduation. They receive their diplomas, turn their tassels, and throw their hats into the air. Each of them goes over to her parents and hugs them.

 

Mrs. Boonchuy: “My baby girl is a grownup now. It just felt like yesterday I was teaching you how to walk…”

 

Anne chuckles.

 

Mr. Boonchuy: “Anyways, you told Sasha and Marcy about the graduation party at our house, right?”

 

Anne: “Yeah, they know...but...they don’t know everything."

 

Mr. Boonchuy: “Good, I can’t wait to see their reactions.”

 

Marcy and Sasha start to walk over towards Anne.

 

Mrs. Boonchuy: “We’ll be in the car. Don’t be too long.”

 

Anne nods. Mr. and Mrs. Boonchuy leave. Marcy and Sasha approach Anne.

 

Anne: “So, it’s today, huh.”

 

Sasha: “Yep, we tell them today. We already got our bags packed. I assume you do, too?”

 

Anne nods.

 

Sasha: “Good, but I want you to promise me one thing, Anna-banana. If neither of us are able to go, please don’t feel the need not to go.”

 

Anne: “What? I can’t do that! You guys are my best friends!”

 

Marcy: “It’s OK, Anne. Sasha and I are aware this may not go the way we want it to. We just want you to be happy. And if that’s with the Plantars, then we will be fine with you leaving us.”

 

Anne chokes back tears. “You better try your hardest to convince them”, she says.

 

Sasha: “Way ahead of you. I've been thinking about what to say for a long time now. And I’m sure Marcy has too, right?”

 

Marcy nods.

 

Sasha: “So we’ll give it our best shot.”

 

Anne: “That’s what I like to hear. I’ll see you at the party later tonight.”

 

They both nod. They all head towards their parents’ cars. They all drive home.

 


 

The Boonchuys, Wus, and Waybrights are at Anne’s house. They’re making chit chat with each other, listening to music, and eating food.

 

Mrs. Wu: “You two keep a fine home. And this food is amazing!”

 

Mrs. Boonchuy: “Well, it is the reason my restaurant is still in business.”

 

Mr. Wu: “Hey, babe, we should go sometime! I feel a little bad having this food for free. We’ll make it up to you by giving you a good review on Belp.

 

Mr. Boonchuy: “Ah, thanks, you two. That means a lot to us.”

 

Mrs. Waybright: “Count us in, too! I didn’t really think Thai food would suit my palette, but it’s surprisingly good!”

 

Mr. Waybright: “Maybe we could go there for our anniversary? It’s coming up in a few weeks.”

 

Mr. Boonchuy: “We’d love for you to celebrate your anniversary there. It’s good you two were able to make things work.”

 

Mr. Waybright: “Well, there isn’t much we wouldn’t do for our daughter. I just wish…we could have been there more for her…”

 

Mrs. Boonchuy: “Ah, nonsense. You’ve raised a wonderful person.”

 

Mrs. Waybright: “Aww, thanks. I think Anne is a fantastic person, too. And Marcy as well! Maybe that’s why they make such good friends.”

 

They all laugh.

 

Anne: “So, uh, when were you planning to tell them?”

 

Sasha: “Honestly, I don’t know. It’s funny, I’ve gone into dangerous missions without hesitation, but even something as simple as telling my parents something has given me cold feet...”

 

Marcy: “Yeah, me too.”

 

Anne: “Don’t worry, I got you covered. Watch this.”

 

Anne picks up her glass of water and a spoon. She clinks the spoon to her glass. Everyone looks at her.

 

Anne: “I’d…like to propose a toast. A toast to the best parents a girl could ask for. And a toast to the girls who I’m lucky to call my friends.”

 

Mr. Waybright starts chanting.

“Speech! Speech! Speech!”

 

Anne: “Anything you two wanted to say?”

 

Sasha and Marcy are at a loss for words. With shaky legs, Marcy gets up.

 

Marcy: “Uh, th-thanks Anne. I’m gl-glad to call y-you g-guys my f-friends t-too. And…I’m glad my p-parents started l-listening to w-what I h-had to say after I c-came b-back from Amphibia. You guys are super cool. Anything you’d like to say, S-Sasha?”

 

Sasha starts sweating profusely. She gets up.

 

Sasha: “Uh, yeah. Uh, I’m grateful for you two, uh, as well. Uh, and also that, uh, my parents were able to, uh, stay together. I know it, uh, must have uh, taken a lot of work. Uh, but you two did it.”

 

Their parents start to clap.

 

Sasha: “Wait, I had more to say.”

 

They stop clapping.

 

Sasha: “Uh...weather’s been crazy, huh?”

 

Their parents murmur.

Marcy clenches her fists. “OK, I’m sick of this. Mom, Dad, I need to tell you something. Anne has a music box that can potentially take us back to Amphibia. We’ve known about it for about five years now, and we didn’t tell you back then because we thought you might prevent us from going. But I don’t care if you don’t want us to go. Anne’s done so much for us, and I can’t imagine life without her. But I want her to be happy, and if she wants to go back to Amphibia, then I’m going with her. So don’t try to stop me!”, she says.

 

Sasha: “Y-yeah! What she said!”

 

Their parents look stunned. Suddenly, Anne and they start to laugh.

 

Marcy: “Why are you guys laughing? I’m completely serious!”

 

They start to laugh harder.

 

Anne: “Alright, alright, that’s enough. Sash, Mar-mar, When I came back home from the mall that day, I told Mom and Dad about your desire to go back to Amphibia, but how it might be a problem that your parents wouldn’t want you to go. So my parents told your parents.”

 

Sasha and Marcy: “What?!”

 

Anne: “And Marcy, you were right. None of them wanted you to go at first. They talked about how it was a miracle that you got back, and that they didn’t want to have to go through the experience of losing you again. But, then I told them how much you wanted to go back. How, Sasha, you owed your life to Grime, and you just wanted to see him again. And how, Marcy, you wanted to get to know Yunan and Olivia better, the two people who you didn’t really get to know all that well. Once I told them that, they realized maybe it wasn’t such a crazy idea. Of course, they needed one last piece of evidence to prove you really wanted to go. And you two, you just provided plenty of it.”

 

Marcy: “What…what did we just do?”

 

Anne: “I never told you what to say to your parents. You guys came up with it yourselves. But I noticed you two were hesitating, so I just set you up, so you could tell your parents how you really feel. Of course, there was the possibility that you wouldn’t have, but you did.”

 

Sasha: “Wait so…you all knew what we wanted to go back to Amphibia? And you’re fine with that?”

 

Mr. and Mrs. Waybright nod.

 

Mrs. Waybright: “I’m still a little apprehensive of you going, but if you still feel the same way about going as you did five years ago, then you must really want it. And your father and I want you to be happy. If going back there will do that for you…then I will put my feelings aside, just for you”, Mrs. Waybright says.

 

Sasha starts to cry and hugs her parents.

 

Mr. Waybright: “Just…don’t forget to visit us for holidays and special occasions, OK?”

 

Sasha. “Of course I won’t.”

 

Marcy: “Mom, Dad? Do you feel the same way?”

 

Mr. Wu: “Initially, we did. But we realized that you improved so much in the short amount of time you were in Amphibia. If going to a place as dangerous as that doesn’t stop our little girl, I don’t think much will.”

 

Marcy hugs her parents.

 

Mrs. Wu: “But, as was previously said, we expect you home for certain events.”

 

Marcy: “Sure thing, Mom.”

 

Mr. Boonchuy and Mrs. Boonchuy hug Anne.

 

Mrs. Boonchuy: “Sorry, didn’t want you to feel left out.”

 

Anne chuckles.

 

Mr. Boonchuy: “And here, this is yours.”

 

Mr. Boonchuy hands the music box to Anne.

 

Anne: “Are you two ready to go?”

 

Sasha: “Just gotta grab my bag. You guys go get yours too.”

 

Marcy and Anne nod.

 

Mr. Boonchuy: "Anne, do you mind putting this in your bag? And this too? They're for the Plantars."

 

Mr. Boonchuy hands his daughter a Tupperware container and a letter.

 

Anne: "Sure thing, Dad."

 

Anne grabs her bag from upstairs and stuffs the music box in it, and meets downstairs with Sasha and Marcy, who have their bags on their shoulders. They head outside.

Mr. Boonchuy: “See you soon!”

 

Mrs. Boonchuy: “Have a safe trip!”

 

Mr. Waybright: “Farewell!”

 

Mrs. Waybright: “Take care!”

 

Mrs. Wu: “Stay out of danger!”

 

Mr. Wu: “Godspeed!”

 

Anne, Sasha, and Marcy turn to see their parents waving at them. They wave back and Anne starts walking, and Sasha and Marcy follow.

 

Marcy: “That was…an experience. I still can’t believe you went behind our backs to tell our parents like that.”

 

Anne: “Yeah, sorry about that. I just couldn’t imagine not going with you two.”

 

Sasha: “Eh, it was probably for the best. If they hadn’t known, that conversation would have been a lot more awkward.”

 

Anne chuckles.

 

Marcy: “Uh, hey Anne? You kinda just started walking. Shouldn’t we just use the box here?”

 

Anne: “Not quite. I wanna do it somewhere meaningful.”

 

Sasha: “Meaningful?”

 

Sasha and Marcy see that the playground in Saint James Middle School is coming into view.

 

Anne: “Yeah, the place where it all began. I want it to be here.”

 

They hop the fence. Anne pulls out the music box.

 

Anne: “I’ll open it on three. One, two-”

 

Marcy: “Wait!”

 

Sasha: “Huh? What is it, Mar-mar?”

 

Marcy: “Last time we did this, we ended up in wildly different places. So how about this time, we hold hands, so we don’t get separated?”

 

Sasha: “Good thinking!”

 

The three link hands.

 

Anne: “Uh, well my hands are full now, so I can’t really open the box.”

 

Sasha and Marcy look at each other.

 

Sasha: “Don’t worry, you hold the box like this, and Marbles and I will open it from both sides.”

 

Anne: “All right, one more time. One, two, three!”

 

Sasha and Marcy open the box. There’s a great flash of light.

 


 

Marcy, Anne, and Sasha are lying on their stomachs in a forest.

 

Sasha: “D-did we make it?”

 

Sasha notices the music box on the ground. She notices the once bright stones are now colorless. Sasha screams. Anne and Marcy wake up with a jolt.

 

Anne: “What?! What is it?! Did you hurt yourself?”

 

Sasha: “No, look at the box!”

 

Marcy and Anne notice the colorless gems.

 

Anne: “What’s the big deal? We can probably just get them charged at the temples again.”

 

Marcy: “That’s assuming that’ll work. These stones are from Earth. The stones we charged were from Amphibia, and the temples were there too. There’s no guarantee it’ll work. But, there isn’t any harm in trying. We’ve already completed the challenges, anyway.”

 

Sasha: “You’re right...I guess I overreacted a little. But are we sure this is Amphibia?”

 

Anne: “Wait, this looks like where I ended up the first time I came here. Which means…”

 

Anne runs to a cave.

 

Anne: “Rocky! It’s so good to see you!”

 

Marcy and Sasha catch up to her and see a rock that somewhat resembles a human head. Sasha raises an eyebrow.

 

Sasha: “Uh, Anne? Why are you talking to a rock?”

 

Anne: “The first night I came to Amphibia, I got lonely. This was how I kept myself sane.”

 

Marcy: “But if that’s here, then this must be Amphibia!”

 

Anne gasps. “You’re right! It has to be! We’re finally…back…”, she says.

Chapter 6: Falling Out

Summary:

Sasha, Marcy, and Anne get back to Amphibia. Anne wants to reconnect with Sprig, but finds it to be more difficult than she expected.

Chapter Text

Anne starts running towards Wartwood. She stops just before entering and hides in the bush. Sasha and Marcy catch up to her, and hide in the bush as well.

 

Anne: “Wartwood…the place I called home for five months.”

 

Sasha: “Anna-banana! Look!”

 

Sasha points to the statue of Anne. Anne follows where her finger is pointing.

 

Anne: “They…they built a statue? Of me? That’s so sweet…”

 

Sasha: “Well you did kinda save this planet. I think building a statue of you is the least they could do.”

 

Marcy: “They also might have built it to honor you because people believed you would never come back, and you being here would dampen its meaning.”

 

Anne blinks a few times. “Oh. Yeah…welp, too late for that!”, she says.

 

Sasha: “Yeah! Now come on, get there!”

 

Anne doesn’t move.

 

Sasha: “What’s wrong?”

 

Anne: “It’s just…what do I say? I kinda just disappeared in front of everyone and said my goodbyes. I didn’t really think what coming back would really entail for us…”

 

Sasha: “Anne, you’re overthinking this. Sure, life has gone on here, but I’m sure the people will be overjoyed to see you, so it doesn’t really matter what you say.”

 

Anne: “Yeah…yeah you’re right!”

 

Anne sees Mrs. Croaker looking at the statue. 

 

Anne: “I got an idea.”

 

Anne crawls out of the bushes. She walks towards the statue and stands next to Mrs. Croaker.

 

Anne: “Pretty cool statue. Who is that?”

 

Mrs. Croaker looks at Anne. “It’s you, silly. What, you don’t recognize yourself? Hold up…Anne?!”, she says. 

 

Anne: “It’s good to see you too, Mrs. Croaker.”

 

Mrs. Croaker: “Everyone, a miracle has occurred! Anne has returned to us!”

 

Various residents of Wartwood turn to look at Anne.

 

Stumpy: “She’s right! Anne really is here!”

 

The crowd starts cheering.

 

Anne starts to cry. “Oh, you guys. It’s so good to be here…”

 

Sasha and Marcy approach the crowd. 

 

Maddie: “Look! Sasha and Marcy are here too!”

 

The residents of Wartwood turn to look at Marcy and Sasha.

 

Loggle: “I thought you three were gone forever. How did you get back here?”

 

Anne: “Long story short, there was another set of calamity stones on Earth, and some random dude gave me them fitted in this box.”

 

Anne holds out the music box. 

 

Wally: “Oi, that’s great! Now you can come visit us whenever you want!”

 

Sasha: “But we didn’t come to visit. We’re staying here.”

 

The crowd gasps.

 

Marcy: “We…felt bad about leaving. Even though we were here for five months, it sure flew by. We had some unfinished business to take care of here. We…just really wanted to come back. Besides, even if this isn’t where we came from, it does feel like a second home to us. And we can always go back to our real home using that box.”

 

Anne: “And with no Core around, there shouldn’t be any issue with the stones.”

 

Sylvia: “We did miss you. But I think there’s a certain family who missed you more than any of us.”

 

Anne: “Oh my frog, you’re right. I gotta go see them!”

 

Marcy: “Anne, wait!”

 

Anne: “Huh? What is it?”

 

Sasha: “Mar-mar and I were just talking over there. And we were thinking I could go see Grime at the Toad Tower and she can go see Yunan and Olivia in Newtopia.”

 

Anne nods. “Yeah, of course. I’ll see you two around.”

 

Sasha and Marcy nod. They both leave town.

 


 

Anne runs towards the Plantar farm. The sign outside reads “Hop Pop’s California Avocados”. She sees Hop Pop planting and watering crops.

 

Hop Pop: “Polly! Can you give me a little help with these?”

 

Polly: “I’m busy fixing this Frobo! Go ask Sprig!”

 

Hop Pop: “Sprig!”

 

Sprig opens his bedroom window. “Sorry, Hop Pop, but I’m in the zone right now. If I help you with farming, I’ll lose my train of thought. Once I’m done writing, I’ll help you”, he says.

 

Hop Pop sighs. “At least they’re being productive…”

 

Anne walks over to Hop Pop. “Hey HP, you look like you could use an extra set of hands. Mind if I help?”, she says.

 

Hop Pop: “Ah, thanks Anne. You’re always the reliable one. Wait a minute, Anne?!”

 

Hop Pop hugs Anne. “I can still have my old room back, right?”, she asks.

 

Hop Pop: “Of course!”

 

Polly: “Hop Pop, how do you expect me to fix this Frobo when you’re making all this noi-”

 

Polly notices Anne. 

 

Polly runs up and hugs Anne. “Anne! You’re back!”, she says.

 

Anne: “Polly! I almost didn’t recognize you. It’s a little strange seeing you as a frog…and with hair.”

 

Polly: “Do you like it?”

 

Anne: “I love it. It suits you!”

 

Sprig opens the front door. “Anne?”, he says.

 

Anne: “Sprig!”

 

They run into each other for a hug. Both of them start crying.

 


 

Anne, Sprig, Polly, and Hop Pop are sitting on Hop Pop’s couch.

 

Anne: “...so I used the music box to get back here. The stones are…uncharged…but we should be able to use the temples to fix that. And yeah, that’s more or less what happened these past five years.”

 

Hop Pop: “It’s good you and your friends patched things up with each other. And they patched things up with their parents, too!”

 

Anne: “Yeah. Oh! I almost forgot, my parents wanted you to have these.”

 

She pulls out the Tupperware and letter from her bag. 

 

Sprig: “What’s in there?”

 

Anne: “I don’t know for sure, but if I had to take a guess…”

 

She takes off the lid. It is full of mooncakes.

 

Anne: “Yeah, that’s what I figured. Mooncakes!”

 

Polly: “You guys made cakes out of the moon?!”

 

Anne: “No, silly. We eat these during something called the Lunar Festival, hence why they’re called Mooncakes. They were one of my favorite desserts and my mom made them, regardless of the time of year. She thought you guys would like them.”

 

Sprig, Polly, and Hop Pop grab one each. They take a bite.

 

Polly gasps. “I had no idea the moon was this tasty!”, she says.

 

Anne: “And this letter is for you, Hop Pop. My dad thought he never really properly thanked you for looking after me, so he wrote that for you. Read it!”

 

Hop Pop tears open the envelope and starts to read the Hop Pop.

 

Dear Hopadiah Plantar,

 

I’m sorry I wasn’t able to give you my gratitude in person, what with all the craziness of trying to get you and your family home, but I hope this will suffice. I don’t know a lot of people who would take care of a complete stranger. More than that, my daughter spoke highly of you. She said you were a little old-fashioned, but your heart was always in the right place. If there were more individuals like you, I think the world would be a much better place. Please keep doing what you do.

 

Sincerely,

 

Mr. Boonchuy

 

Hop Pop sniffles. “Wow, I don’t think I’ve ever received such a heartfelt letter before. You really said that about me?”, he asks.

 

Anne: “Yeah…I know we may have had our disagreements on things, but you always pulled through for me.”

 

Hop Pop: “Thanks, Anne. I thought maybe I wasn’t the best parent I could have been, but I guess I was wrong.”

 

Anne: “Yeah…but that’s enough about me. What have you guys been up to?”

 

Hop Pop: “Well, after bringing that avocado from Earth, I planted it. I was able to get more, and people in town started buying them! They were super popular the first few weeks, but then they got a little sick of them…especially when they didn’t like my smoothies. But I still have customers every now and then. It’s the first time the farm hasn’t been in any financial trouble!”

 

Polly: “I think that last part is more so because of me!”

 

Anne: “Hmm? Why do you say that?”

 

Polly: “Oh my frog! Queen Olivia asked me to go to Newtopia and pass my knowledge about Frobos onto other people. I even reprogrammed them to help out with everyday tasks. I was there for a while, but eventually she let me go home…with a fat stack of cash! Now I just help fix Frobos that are in the area.”

 

Anne: “What’d you do with the money?”

 

Polly: “Well, turns out this farm had a lot of debt. So I used all the money to pay it off and was left with…almost nothing.”

 

Sprig: “I’ve been making a bit of money, too. I’ve been working on this book called Guide to Amphibia, and I’ve been using pictures from your phone to draw illustrations. It’s not done yet, and I don’t know if it ever will be, but sometimes I hold seminars to teach people about all the cool stuff here.”

 

Anne: “That’s so cool! Normally, I didn’t really like going to school, even though I kinda had to. But going to a seminar of yours sounds like fun!”

 

Sprig: “Yeah, I guess it does kinda suck you had to go to school for five more years. But I guess you getting the music box recently saved you from all that, huh?”

 

Anne: “Eh? I didn’t say the music box arrived recently.”

 

Sprig: “When…when did you get it?”

 

Anne: “Just a few days after I came back from Amphibia.”

 

Sprig: “Then why…why didn’t you come back sooner…?”

 

Anne: “Well, my parents wanted me to go back to school. They wanted to make sure I was equipped with enough knowledge.”

 

Sprig stares. “You know, I was happy just a few minutes ago, because I finally got to see my best friend. But here she is, telling me that instead of wanting to see me, she’d rather stay inside and study…”, he says. 

 

Anne: “But I had to respect my parent’s wishes…I didn’t want them worrying about me…”

 

Sprig: “What about me? Did you care about what I was going through?”

 

Anne: “Sprig…”

 

Sprig: “I was in anguish for several weeks! I designed that statue of you just so I didn’t have to think about you…but it didn’t help. In fact, it might have continued to this day if it wasn’t for…”

 

There’s a knock on the door. “Hey Sprig, are you ready for that adventure?”, Ivy says.

 

Sprig: “Her. Ivy was the one to pull me out of that dark place.”

 

Sprig gets up, heads towards the door, and opens it.

 

Sprig: “Yeah, let’s go.”

 

Ivy peers over Sprig’s shoulder and sees Anne. She gasps. “Anne, you’re back! Did you wanna go with Sprig and me on a mission?”

 

Sprig: “No, Ivy, this was supposed to be just us.”

 

Sprig looks back at Anne. “And frankly, I don’t wanna be anywhere near her”, he mutters to himself.

 

Ivy: “Ah, well maybe next time.”

 

Sprig and Ivy leave. Anne starts to cry. 

 

Anne: “Maybe coming back here was a mistake…”

 

Polly: “Aw, come on Anne. I think Sprig’s just overcome with emotions. I’m sure he didn’t mean what he said.”

 

Anne: “He still said it. Forget it, I need to be alone.”

 

Anne stands up and walks towards the door.

 

Hop Pop: “Anne, where are you going?”

 

Anne: “Look, the stones in the music box are uncharged. I don’t know why it happened again. Maybe it’s just because…I don’t know, just the three of us used it. I need to see if they can be recharged at the temples. I’m going there.”

 

Polly: “You weren’t planning on leaving Amphibia, were you?”

 

Anne sighs. “No, I wasn’t going to do that. But I did promise my parents I’d come home occasionally for visits, so I’ll need to do this sooner or later”, she says

 

Hop Pop: “OK, just…don’t do anything reckless. We care about you, Anne.”

 

Anne sighs. “I wasn’t going to”, she says. She walks out the front door.

 


 

Sprig and Ivy are walking on a snowy mountain.

 

“...oh, so that’s why you didn’t want Anne coming with us.”

 

“Yeah, can you believe her? You wouldn’t have needed to talk me out of my depression if she had just come back when she got the music box. But no, I guess school was more important than how I felt…”

 

“Sprig, did you try seeing things from her perspective?”

 

“What do you mean?”

 

“You and Anne were best friends. So she probably missed you just as much as you did. I’m sure she wanted to come back as soon as possible, and maybe she could have…but I don’t think you’re considering anyone besides yourself in the decision she made.”

 

“Oh…I get what you’re saying. I guess I just…felt a certain connection with Anne that I haven’t felt with anyone else. She felt like a big sister to me, and I felt a little betrayed when I found out the truth…but the Boonchuys took care of us and got us back home, even though they didn’t have to…I can’t really thank them enough for that. Anne trusts her parents, so maybe their decision to delay her coming back wasn’t such a bad thing…”, Sprig says, before sniffling. “In all honesty, I’m just glad she’s back. Having her here again makes me happy beyond words…I’ll have to apologize to her and tell her how I really feel…”

 

“That can wait. We’re here!”

 

Ivy and Sprig arrive at a shrine that’s partially covered in snow. They wipe it off to reveal a 5 by 5 grid, with 25 equally sized tiles.

 

“This is what I read about in the library. They say this puzzle stumped even the best of puzzle solvers. But since you’ve been playing that game on Anne’s phone, it should be no problem to solve it!”

 

“Yeah! Then we can get some treasure!”

 

Sprig starts sliding the tiles around. All of a sudden they hear a roar.

 

“Hey Ivy, did you have breakfast this morning?”

 

Ivy starts sweating. “Sprig…that wasn’t me…”, she says.

 

Behind them, a yeti appears out of nowhere and grabs them. They scream as it brings them to a nearby cave, and shoves them against a wall covered in ice. The ice starts to freeze over their bodies, leaving only their heads exposed. The yeti then goes over to a cauldron and lights the flame. He starts adding ingredients to it.

 

“Hey, I think he just wants us to try his cooking!”

 

“I think it’s more likely he wants us to be in his cooking!”

 

“Oh.”

 

“HELP! SOMEBODY HELP!”

 


 

Anne is walking towards the second temple when she knocks on the door of the hut.

 

“Valeriana? Are you home?”

 

Anne walks in to see a younger looking newt. She’s dressed in a purple cloak, and wearing a necklace with a sideways hourglass emblem.

“It’s not often I get visitors…”

 

“Oh, sorry. My name’s Anne. It’s nice to meet you.”

 

“Oh, I know you quite well. My name is Carly”, the newt says.

 

“You know me?”

 

"I can’t imagine many people who don’t. You may not have gotten to know everyone in Amphibia personally, but the story of you spread throughout the continent like wildfire.”

 

Anne chuckles. “Yeah, I guess I’m a bit of a celebrity here, aren’t I?”, she says.

 

Carly chuckles. “Yes, I suppose you are. Is there something I can help you with?”

 

“I was looking for Valeriana…do you know where she is?”

 

“I’m afraid she’s gone…”

 

“Oh. Like out to lunch?”

 

Carly shakes her head.

 

“Oh no…I’m sorry for your loss. When…when did it happen?”

 

“I know you’re looking for a simple answer, but I think it’s best I tell you about her. You may not know this, but Valeriana was quite old. In fact, she was way older than she looked.”

“How…how old was she?”

 

"She was over a millennium old.”

 

Anne stands there in shock. “But…that’s impossible. I’ve never heard of anyone that could live that long.”

 

Carly chuckles. “For a witch as skilled as her, it was quite simple”, she says.

 

“But…why? Why would she want to live that long? I mean, living for over a millennium sounds cool but…death is kinda what gives life meaning. It serves as a reminder that our time is limited, so we should make the most of our lives. It’s what gives us a sense of purpose. And to see your loved ones come and go, while you remain here…I don’t think it’d be worth it.”

 

Carly chuckles. “I think that’s why she pushed people away from her, so that when she departed, they wouldn’t really miss her. I was one of the only people she wanted in her life, because she wanted someone to carry on her legacy and story.”

 

“Then why?”

 

“You mentioned earlier about a sense of purpose. Valeriana was someone who was passionate about fulfilling a duty. For her…it was more so seeing her mistake be corrected. One she made when she was young.”

 

“What mistake?”

 

“Giving the music box to King Aldrich, who was Andrias’s father. Valeriana was naive in giving it to him, because he had told her he would use it to promote good in the world. But I think you know that he did anything but that.”

 

“But…that error was fixed, wasn’t it? I mean the music box was stolen by Leif, and she brought it to Earth…why did she continue living?”

 

“Tell me, Anne. Did the Calamity Box ever return here?”

 

“Well, yeah of course. My friends and I used it to come here for the first time.”

 

“Of course. Valeriana was a bit of a clairvoyant. That’s why she brought you here, because she thought you were our best shot at stopping The Core. She didn’t know if you would, though. But she had to take that chance.”

 

“Did…did you just say that Valeriana brought us here?”

 

“Yes. I’m afraid you being here…was no accident.”

Chapter 7: Realization

Summary:

Anne discovers her coming to Amphibia was planned out. She and Sprig work things out.

Chapter Text

“What…what did you just say?”

 

“You were brought here, by Valeriana herself.”

 

“But…how? She was never in our world. There’s no way she could have…”

 

“Due to her age, Valeriana was one of the best magic users out there. She mastered spells I could never hope to even learn. Now, observe.”

 

Carly grabs Valeriana’s old staff. She taps it to the ground. They are transported to a world of darkness, where Anne looks around in shock.

 

"What…what did you just do?!”

 

“Do not be afraid. We are still in the hut; I am simply showing you what Valeriana was able to do. Now, that individual over there. Do you know him?”

 

Carly points to a man in a suit. Anne scratches her head.

 

“No, I can’t say I do.”

 

“That is Mr. Wu’s boss. This…this is a dream he had the night before your 13th birthday.”

 

“This…is a dream?”

 

“More so a memory of a dream. Now look over there. Surely you must recognize her?”

 

Carly points to a newt with a black cloak. Anne recognizes her immediately.

 

“Valeriana? What is she doing here?”

 

“I will let her explain.”

 

Valeriana: “Hello, Mr. Gill.”

 

Mr. Gill: “Uh, who are you?”

 

Valeriana: “My name is Valeriana. I am something of a guardian. I have come here, into your dreams, to give you a request. If you fulfill it, you will be greatly rewarded.”

 

Mr. Gill: “Aw man, I’d do anything for a bonus…even if I have too much money as is…anyways, what’s your request?”

 

Valeriana: “Your employee, Mr. Wu. You must offer him a job out of state, and you must convince him to go.”

 

Mr. Gill: “Oh, that’s it? Mr. Wu is a good employee. Maybe he’s not the most suitable for that new job…but if it means I get some more money, who cares?”

 

Valeriana: “It’s settled, then. Once Mr. Wu moves out of California, you will receive the riches you desire. However, should you fail…you will not. Understood?”

 

Mr. Gill: “Loud and clear!”

 

The dream stops. Anne and Carly are back in the hut. 

 

“So…not only did Valeriana have the ability to travel into people’s dreams, but she could do it even if they weren’t in the same world…”

 

“Correct. However, this was the only time she did so.”

 

“But…what was the purpose of that?”

 

“This was Valeriana’s way to get the ball rolling, so to speak. As you know, Mr. Wu did accept that new job initially. He and his wife were happy. But their child…not so much. Which brings us to our next memory.”

 

Carly once again taps the floor with the staff. Instead of going to a world of darkness, though, they are sent to a library. Anne sees Marcy sitting at a table, reading a book.

 

“Marcy!”

 

Anne starts to run up to Marcy, but Carly stops her.

 

"Remember, Anne, this is just a memory. We can only observe, not change.”

 

“Oh, right. I forgot.”

 

Carly: “Now, pay close attention.”

 

Marcy gets a text on her phone from Sasha, telling her to meet them downtown, while an employee drops a book off her cart.

 

“Anne's birthday! I almost forgot!", Marcy says, as she gets up, and an employee drops a book off her cart, which she then picks up. "Excuse me ma'am, you dropped your...book?” 

 

Marcy picks up the book and flips to a page. Everything seems to stop.

 

“Anne, take a look at the page she just opened to.”

 

Anne goes over and sees a page with the Calamity Box on it.

 

“That explains how she found out about it…”

 

"Take a look at the corner of the page…”

 

Anne does as instructed. She notices it’s folded over itself.

 

“Wait a minute, was this page…marked?”

 

“Indeed it was. By Valeriana.”

 

“Huh?”

 

“Let me replay what just happened, but more slowly. Pay attention to the cart the book fell off.”

 

The scene replays. Anne notices the book is seemingly not there, but out of thin air, it appears, only to slide off the other books and onto the ground. The memory stops. Anne and Carly are back in the hut. 

 

“What…what just happened?”

 

Carly: “One of the things that Valeriana learned was how to send items to other worlds. She wasn’t able to transport organic life, but she certainly could for an object like a book. Again, this was the only time she ever did this.”

 

“But…why?”

 

“Good question. That should be answered by this last memory.”

 

Carly taps the ground with the staff once more. They are taken to an alleyway. There is a homeless man hugging himself for warmth. All of a sudden, the Calamity Box appears next to him, with a note attached to it. He takes off the note and reads it:

 

Dear stranger,

 

I understand you are having difficulty with fulfilling your basic needs. Please sell this box to the thrift store you are sitting behind. You will get a handsome price for it. Do not open it, or there will be grave consequences.

 

The man picks up the box and inspects it. He then takes it to the thrift store and sells it. He exits the store with a wad of cash and jumps with glee. He walks away. A few moments later, a crying Marcy arrives just outside the store window, and sees the Calamity Box. The memory stops. Anne and Carly are back in the hut. Anne sits down in a nearby chair.

 

“I…think I get it now. Valeriana told Mr. Gill to persuade Mr. Wu to take that new job…so that he would move away with his family. And Marcy, hating the idea that she would have to leave her two best friends, wanted to find something, anything that could save our friendship. She found a miracle in both reading about and finding the Calamity Box…knowing that it could send us three here, so that we wouldn’t have to be away from each other…except it wasn’t a miracle…it was all planned…I thought this whole time, Marcy was responsible for us being here…but…that’s not true at all, is it? It was all Valeriana.”

 

Carly nods. “I know this must come as a great shock to you, Anne. Valeriana took no consideration of your feelings when bringing you three here. All she focused on was making sure this planet had its best shot at continuing. And once it did, her biggest regret was put to rest. She finally allowed herself to pass onto the afterlife…”, she says.

 

“So she only stayed alive because of her regret?”

 

“That was part of it, yes. She didn’t know when the Calamity Box would return, but she knew it would. She was the one who took it from Leif, and sent it back to Earth, in the hopes that the most worthy would answer the call. But she had to keep herself alive somehow, so she…bound her lifeforce to the Calamity Box.”

 

“What…what does that mean?”

 

“It means that as long as the box was intact, she would continue to live.”

 

“Did she…destroy the box?”

 

“I wouldn’t say that…but it did disintegrate, along with the Calamity Shards, after you left. I think Valeriana was sick of this world, and she just wanted to go somewhere better…she always told me that, left to their own devices, people would hurt each other, even if there was no benefit.”

 

“Sounds pessimistic.”

 

Carly chuckles. “Yes, I would agree with that. But I think she also did what she did because she wanted there to be a better future for everyone, even if she was not here to experience it”, she says.

 

“Wow. I only knew her for a short time, and I always thought she was an old hag. But after hearing this, she sounds like the most noble of people.”

 

Carly chuckles. “I’m sure she would have liked to hear that. I hope, I too, can be like her, in both ability to use magic, and sense of duty. I think she mentored me because she wanted me to be better than her. I know at times the world may seem full of people who are just looking out for their own best interest, even at the expense of others. But there is good out there, if you know where to look. You just have to realize it’s there”, she says. 

 

Anne pulls out the Sprig doll in her backpack and looks at it. She starts to cry.

 

“Uh, excuse me if I’m interrupting anything…”

 

“Sorry, sorry, I was just", Anne says, as she wipes her tears. "…thinking about someone important to me.”

 

Carly chuckles. “No need to apologize. I know Valeriana may not be here, but I’ll try to do what I can in her place.”

 

“Oh, yeah, I almost forgot.” Anne says, as she pulls out the box from her backpack. “The girls and I absorbed the power of the stones accidentally…again…”

 

“Hmm, I think that’s because it was just you three that used it. If you bring someone else with you, or if one of you three does not use it at the same time, it shouldn’t happen again.”

 

“That’s good to know. Anyways, can you charge this one?”

 

“Certainly. Do you know how to take it out?”

 

“Uh…no. But let me see if I can figure it out.”

 

Anne inspects the box. On the back of the lid, she notices three buttons, one labeled “A”, one labeled “S”, and one labeled “M”. She then pushes the one labeled “A”. One of the stones pops out.

 

"I…, Anne says, as she hands the stone to Carly. "...think it’s this one…”

 

Carly pulls it in the staff, and it starts shining a blue color almost instantly. She hands the stone back to Anne.

 

“Huh?”

 

“Is there a problem?”

 

“Sorry, it’s just…last time, it took way longer for Valeriana to charge it…”

 

Anne puts the stone back in the box. She puts the box back in her bag.

 

“Hmm, I don’t know why that would be. The amount of magic is dependent on the holder. I’m not nearly as skilled as her, so there’s no reason it should have taken longer unless…it was intentional.”

 

“Intentional?”

 

“I’m sure she had a good reason. But there’s no point in worrying about it now. I’m sure I’ve kept you long enough.”

 

“Uh, yeah. Thanks, Carly.”

 

Anne walks outside. Back in the cave, the yeti is seen making the finishing touches to his stew. Sprig starts crying.

 

“Sprig, what’s wrong? We’ve faced certain death before and you’ve never cried…”

 

“That’s not what I’m crying about. It’s just that I might get eaten before I get the chance to apologize to Anne. If she was here, I could at least die in peace…”

 

Ivy gasps. “Anne!”, she says.

 

“Yeah, Anne. The one person I want to see most right now.”

 

"No, look over there! In the distance! That’s gotta be Anne, right?”

 

Sprig looks outside the cave. “Yeah, that’s gotta be her! We gotta call for her!”, he says.

 

They both start chanting Anne’s name as loudly as possible. Outside, Anne notices Ivy and Sprig in the distance. She starts running towards the cave and enters.

 

Anne: “Are you guys all right?”

 

Ivy: “Yeah, we’re fine. But that monster over there wants to eat us!”

 

Anne looks at the yeti. The yeti roars, and throws a snowball at her. Anne pulls out her racket and hits it.

 

Anne: “Oh, right...you can’t really volley a snowball…”

 

The yeti roars again. It charges towards Anne and attempts to pounce on her. She ducks. It manages to grab onto her backpack and rip open the front pouch, which the music box was in. The music box falls down the mountain, along with the yeti. Anne can only watch in horror as her only way home disappears out of view.

 

Anne: “NO!”

 

Ivy: “Anne! Are you hurt?”

 

Anne fights back tears. “I’m fine”, she says through gritted teeth.

 

Sprig: “Oh thank frog! If something happened to you, I’d never forgive myself. Especially since you…must hate me after what I said to you. In fact, I thought you wouldn’t even consider saving us…”

 

Anne pulls out her sword. She uses the hilt of it to break the ice surrounding Sprig and Ivy. She starts to leave the cave.

 

Sprig: “Anne?”

 

Anne stops walking, but doesn’t turn around.

 

Sprig: “Look, I understand if you never want to talk to me or see me ever again. I just want you to know…I’m sorry. In all honesty, I was a little mad at first when I heard that you could have come back sooner. I loved hanging out with you, because…you’re one of the most valuable people to me. I would have enjoyed doing that more with you these past five years…but…the important thing is you’re here now. And considering I never thought I was gonna see you again…I don’t think the timing of it really matters…”

 

Sprig starts crying.

 

Anne: “Sprig.”

 

Sprig: “Yeah?”

 

Anne: “I’m disgusted with you.”

 

Sprig: “Yeah, that’s well deserved. What I said earlier was pretty nasty.”

 

“No, what you just said was nasty", Anne says, as she turns around with teary eyes. “How could you even consider the possibility that I hate you? That I wouldn’t want to see or talk to you again? You’re not the only person who had enormous difficulty dealing with the fact that I might never see you again. In the same way that you built that statue of me so you could get me off your mind, I, too, did something like that”.

 

Anne opens up her backpack, and pulls out the Sprig doll. She hands it to Sprig. 

 

Anne: “My first full day back, I went to this place called the arcade and won a lot of tickets. There were a lot of cool items I could have gotten with them, but I got this stuffed animal you could color. It’s not an accident that I colored it pink. This…was how I coped with you not being here. Sprig, you’re my best friend. I couldn’t bring myself to hate you even if I tried.”

 

She goes over and hugs Sprig.

 

Sprig: “Oh, Anne…I really thought I lost you as a friend…but hearing you say that…”

 

They break apart from each other and smile.

 

Ivy: “Well, now that that’s settled, we should go see if we can get that treasure!”

 

Sprig: “Aw, yeah! I was so caught up in that yeti trying to eat us that I almost forgot why we came here.”

 

Anne looks down. “You two have fun”, she says.

 

Anne starts walking towards the cave exit again.

 

Sprig: “Wait, Anne. Did you…want to help us?”

 

Anne: “Thanks, Sprig. But I have something more pressing to take care of.”

 

Ivy: “Huh? What is it?”

 

Anne: “That yeti took the music box. I have to go see if I can find it.”

 

Sprig and Ivy look at each other.

 

Sprig: “Anne.”

 

Anne turns around.

 

Sprig: “That treasure can wait. We’ll help you find your music box. It’s the least we could do for you after saving us.”

 

Anne: “But I don’t even know if it’s still unscatched. Or if it can even be found. We could be out there for a while…”

 

Ivy: “Look, Anne, we’re helping you. I don’t care how long it takes.”

 

Anne smiles. “Thanks, you two", she says.

 

The three of them leave the cave. They head down the mountain. They spend several hours looking, until the sun starts to set. Sprig then sees something jutting out of the snow in the distance. Sprig pulls it out and realizes it’s the music box.

 

Sprig: “Anne! I found it!”

 

Anne: “YES! I might have been out here all night if it wasn’t for you two. It looks undamaged. I just hope it will still work…”

 

Sprig sighs.

 

Ivy: “What is it, Sprig?”

 

Sprig: “I was gonna write about that yeti. It’s too bad I never got a picture of it…”

 

Behind them, the yeti appears out of nowhere and roars. Sprig takes out his phone and takes a picture of it.

 

Sprig: “Score!”

 

Ivy: “Uh, Sprig?”

 

Sprig: “Yeah, we should probably start running.”

 

The three of them run away while screaming.

 


 

Anne, Hop Pop, Polly, and Sprig are sitting around the kitchen table.

 

Sprig: “...and then I took a photo of it!”

 

Polly: “Wow, that’s cool! And also really dumb.”

 

Sprig: “Dumb or not, I still can draw a good ilustration of it!”

 

Hop Pop: “It’s glad you two are on speaking terms again. Would have been a nightmare if I had you two bickering in my house…”

 

Sprig: “I mean, Anne and I may argue at times. But nothing will ever change the fact that we’re friends. Right, Anne?”

 

Anne: “Spranne against the world.”

 

Sprig: “Spranne against the world.”

 

Anne: “Well, I’ve had enough excitement for one day. Kinda missed this. I’m gonna go get some sleep. Are you going tomorrow with Ivy to get that treasure, Sprig?”

 

Sprig: “Yeah, and you’re welcome to come along.”

 

Anne: “Sounds like a plan. Good night, everyone!”

 

Hop Pop, Polly and Sprig: “Good night!”

 

Anne walks down the stairs into the basement. She flops onto her bed, and falls asleep instantly.

 


 

A hooded figure is standing in a bush outside the house.

“Life was better when they weren’t here. I’ll make them regret coming back."




Chapter 8: Sasha Grows Up

Summary:

Grime holds a coming of age ritual for Sasha.

Chapter Text

Sasha approaches Toad Tower. She notices two sentries are stationed outside. One of them stops her.

 

“Halt! You cannot enter unless you are accompanied by a toad, or you’ve been given special permission to enter!”

 

Sasha: “Aw, I’m sorry. Does being a previous first lieutenant to Grime qualify as special permission?” 

 

“First lieutenant? Grime only has a second lieutenant. He said he would never give that honor to anyone, out of respect he had for the one who previously held that title!”

 

Sasha: “That first lieutenant's name…what was it?”

 

“Her name was Sasha Waybright. We have a tattoo of her on our arms, just because Grime held her in such high regard!”

 

“Yeah! Would have been cool to meet her though…”

 

Sasha: “May I see this tattoo?”

 

Uh, sure.”

 

The sentry lifts up his sleeve to reveal his tattoo. 

 

“Hey, doesn’t this look an awful lot like me?”

 

“Oh, yeah, it does! It’s so cool to see someone with such a similar appearance to her!”

 

Sasha: “Yeah…wouldn’t it be crazy if I was actually her?”

 

Toad sentry #1 laughs. Yeah, it would be!”, he says.

 

“Yeah! I’d surely faint from happiness if that was the case.”

 

Sasha raises an eyebrow.

 

“Hank, I think that really is her!”

 

Hank: “WHAT?”

 

Hank falls face first into the dirt.

 

The still standing toad makes a salute. “Lieutenant Waybright! It’s an honor to meet you!”, he says.

 

Sasha: “Please, just call me Sasha. And you don’t need to do that.”

 

“Yes, L-I mean Sasha!”

 

Sasha: “So I guess I’m something of a legend here, huh?”

 

“Yeah! Grime always talks about how lucky he was to have found you. But he also talks about how he misses you every day.”

 

Sasha: “Well, make that two of us. I’m sure he’ll be happy to see me. I just hope he doesn’t faint like Hank here…”

 

“Yeah, I’ll make sure he’s OK. You can pass.”, he says.

 

Sasha starts walking. Then she turns around.

 

Sasha: “Hey, what’s your name?”, she asks.

 

“Oh, it’s Howard.”

 

Sasha: “Howard, why don’t you and Hank go out with me sometime? As friends?”

 

“F-friends? But you don’t even know us…”

 

“Are you friends with Grime?”

 

“Y-yes…he made friends with everyone in Toad Tower. I heard he wasn’t like that before you came along…”

 

“Yeah, I taught him that being kind to people is the way you earn respect. I’m glad he’s still doing that to this day…anyways, any friend of Grime is a friend of mine!”

 

Howard gasps.

 

“Hey, keep it together. This place won’t be well fortified if both of its sentries are out cold…”

 

“Yes, Sasha!”

 

Sasha enters Toad Tower. Inside, he sees a crowd. At the center is Grime, who, in place of his missing arm, he instead has one made of metal. He is wrestling with one of his soldiers. They exchange blows, but Grime sees an opening, picks him up, twirls him several times, and throws him to the ground.

 

Grime laughs. “Charlie, my good man! You put up a good fight!”, he says.

 

He holds his hand out to Charlie and helps him up.

 

“Thanks, Commander. But mark my words, one day, I will knock you down!” 

 

Grime laughs. “I’ll be looking forward to it! Anyone else wanna challenge me?”

 

Sasha pushes her way through the crowd. Grime is in a state of shock.

 

“Mind if I have a go?”

 

“Ah, if it isn’t my first lieutenant! Everyone, this is Sasha Waybright!”

 

The crowd gasps.

 

“Woah, that’s Sasha?”

 

“Yes! She is responsible for the person I am today. Before I met her, I was ruthless to everyone I met…even my own soldiers! But now I am only ruthless to my enemies! She inspired me to be a better person.”

 

“That goes both ways, Grime. I owe a lot to you for who I am today.”

 

“Ah, stop. You’re gonna make me cry. And I don’t want to cry in front of my soldiers. They’ll never let that go!”

 

The crowd laughs.

 

“Well, that’s enough of the sappy stuff. Show me what you got!”

 

Sasha and Grime run up to each other and start wrestling. Sasha dodges all of Grime’ punches, and Sasha can’t manage to phase him a little bit with hers. After several minutes, both of them are too winded to continue.

 

“Hey, Grime…wanna…call this…a draw?”

 

“Sounds good…to me.”

 

Grime straightens up. “Everyone! Since Sasha has returned, I propose we throw a celebration! So let’s go down to the Mess Hall!”, he says.

 

The crowd cheers. They head down to the Mess Hall. Everyone sits at the table and talks with each other. Sasha sits next to Grime. Some toads bring out food and beverages. Everyone starts to dig in.

 

“Ah, it’s good to see you again, Sasha. I thought for sure I wouldn’t. How did you get back here?”

 

“Oh, right. There’s another music box.”

 

“Ah, that makes sense. I see you’re still wearing your shield locket. You sure must have missed me.”

 

“You’re one to talk! You’re still wearing yours!”

 

They both laugh.

 

Anyways, I noticed you’ve grown a bit taller. And your muscles, they’re much bigger than the last time I saw you.”

 

“Yeah, after coming home, I realized I really liked fighting! For fun, of course. So I stopped my cheerleading and got into strength and conditioning. I also learned a bunch of martial arts.”

 

Grime laughs. “Well! I’m sure any man would be lucky to have you as his partner!”, he says.

 

Sasha gags on her drink. “Or woman."

 

“What was that?”

 

“Oh, nothing. Anyways, what have you been up to, Grimey?

 

“Well, after you left, Andrias stepped down as king. Now Olivia is in charge, and she appointed me as the Commander-in-Chief of Amphibia. I can command any soldier to do what I want! But, uh, there hasn’t been much conflict here, so most of the time we just pick up new hobbies. I’ve been teaching people how to play the harp!”

 

“That’s good!”

 

“Yeah, and I’d like to have you back as my first lieutenant.”

 

“Yeah, of course.”

 

“Excellent! With you growing like this, you will be quite the fierce warrior! Or, you know...whatever you want to be.”

 

“Oh, I’m done growing.” 

 

“What?”

 

“Yeah, humans go through this phase when they’re teenagers. It only lasts a few years, and I’m afraid those years are over for me. I can still get bigger muscles, but I’m afraid this is as tall as I’m gonna get…”

 

Grime spits out his drink. “Then we must have you go through our coming of age ritual as soon as possible!”, he says.

 

“Say what?”

 

“All toads in this tower go through a coming of age ritual when they’re of age. Since you are old enough, we will hold that for you tomorrow!”

 

“But I’m not a toad?”

 

“No, not physically. But you are a toad at heart. And as long as you are here, we do consider you one of us.”

 

“Aw, thanks Grimey. I’ll go get some sleep so I can be ready for it tomorrow.”

 

Sasha gets up from her seat and heads to her old room. She falls onto the bed and is asleep within minutes.

 


 

“Good morning, my friends! We are here for Sasha’s coming of age ritual! Today, she becomes a full grown toad!”

 

The crowd claps.

 

“All right, Sasha. This ritual consists of three challenges. All you need to do is complete each one.”

 

“Sounds simple enough.”

 

“And if you fail any of them, we’ll dump mud on you!”

 

Sasha turns to see that two toads have a cauldron of mud.

 

“Anyways, what’s the first challenge?”

 

“The first is the jumping challenge. Every toad should be able to clear large gaps with ease. So we have this obstacle course of sorts. All you need to do is get across this ravine by jumping on those spires. And don’t fall! It’ll hurt.

 

Sasha looks down the ravine. It’s a 50 foot drop.

 

“Uh, yeah. I think falling will more than just hurt.”

 

“You’re not giving up that easily, are you?”

 

Sasha shakes her head. “If you think I’m scared of heights, think again!”, she says.

 

She backs up to get a running start. She jumps onto one spire, then the next, until she’s almost across the ravine. She makes one last leap to the other side of the ravine, but her foot slips. She grabs the cliff wall to avoid falling, and she pulls herself up. She starts breathing heavily.

 

“My friends! Sasha has completed the first challenge!”

 

Grime comes over and helps Sasha up. “Congratulations, Sasha! Most people don’t make it this far.” 

 

“Wha-what happened to the people who didn’t make it?”

 

“Oh, they just fell down into the ravine. They just get a few broken bones. But I think their pride gets hurt more! Anyways, onto the second challenge!”

 


 

“The second challenge. The tongue challenge!”

 

“The…what?’

 

“You see those flies that are swarming that pile of garbage? All you have to do is grab one with your tongue. Like this!”

 

Grime sticks out his tongue, snatches a fly, and eats it.

 

“Delicious! Any good toad has to be accurate with his tongue. Now, it's your turn.”

 

“All right, at least there’s no impending risk of death.”

 

Sasha starts walking towards the flies.

 

Grime grabs her arm. “Oh, I forgot to mention. You can’t cross this line”, he says.

 

Sasha looks at the ground. There’s a white chalk line. She sees the flies are about five feet away. 

 

“What? I can’t do that! I can only stick my tongue out a few inches.”

 

“Well, that’s a shame. I guess we’ll get the mud ready.”

 

Sasha notices one of the toads is eating popcorn. Then she gets an idea.

 

“Hold it, the only condition is that I must get a fly with my tongue without crossing this line, right?”

 

“Correct.”

 

Sasha runs up the toad eating the popcorn and grabs it from him. “I need to borrow this for a second.”, she says. 

 

She goes back to the line and holds the popcorn out in front of her. Some of the flies start moving towards it. She continually brings the popcorn closer to her until one of them is within reach. She sticks out her tongue, snatches the fly, and swallows it.

 

My friends! Sasha has completed the second challenge!”

 

The crowd claps.

 

“Now, for the final challenge!”

 


 

“The third challenge is the lifting challenge. All you have to do is lift that boulder.”

 

Sasha sees a 100 pound boulder. “Grime, I can’t", she says.

 

"Sasha, you’ve been telling me that all day. But you got past the jumping and the tongue challenge. How is this one any different?”

 

“Because I’m not really a toad! I can’t do the same things you guys do! I mean, I almost got myself killed during the jumping challenge, and I had to use a loophole to get past the other one. But this…I don’t see how I could possibly lift that…”

 

“Sasha, do you know what it really means to be a toad?”

 

“Being green, having a long tongue, being strong…am I missing anything?”

 

“Well, yes. But it is more than that. A good toad is brave, even in the face of danger. A good toad thinks outside the box. And most importantly, a good toad never gives up! Yes, you may not have all the same physical qualities we do, but you’ve shown us more or less that you’re a good toad. It doesn’t matter that you’re a human!”

 

Sasha blushes.

 

“Most importantly, you aren’t just any human. You’re Sasha Waybright, the coolest person I’ve ever met, my first lieutenant, and my best friend! Are you really gonna let a rock get in the way of you achieving glory?”

 

“You’re right! I helped protect this tower from giant herons! I led a resistance force against Andrias! And I held my own against an amalgamation of Amphibia’s greatest minds! If I can do all that, no rock is gonna get the better of me!”

 

Sasha walks over to the boulder. She squats down, and starts lifting it from the bottom. She’s straining herself a lot, but slowly, it starts to rise off the ground. Her eyes turn pink as she holds the boulder triumphantly over her head. She then slams it to the ground.

 

“Ha! Take that, you dumb rock!”

 

The crowd cheers. All of a sudden, Sasha falls backwards, unconscious.

 

“Sasha! Are you all right?”

 

Sasha doesn’t respond. Grime grabs her, and slings her over his shoulder. He runs back into the tower.

 


 

Sasha is sleeping in a bed. She comes to.

 

“Wha-what happened?”

 

"Sasha! You’re awake!”

 

Awake? When did I go to sleep?”

 

“You passed out shortly after lifting the boulder. You’ve been out for a few hours. I’m sorry, Sasha. I shouldn’t have pushed you so hard.”

 

“Meh, it’s fine. After all, I completed the challenges, so now I’m a fully grown toad!”

 

“I almost forgot! We have to hold your ceremony! Are you able to stand?”

 

Sasha gets into a sitting position. She swings her legs across the bed and plants her feet on the floor. “Yeah, I should be fine”, she says.

 

“Splendid! Let’s go!”

 

“Wait, Grimey. Did you…stay by my side while I was unconscious?”

 

Grime clears his throat. “Well, yes. I had to make sure you were fine”, he says.

 

Sasha smiles. “Thanks, Grime”, she says.

 

They both walk outside, where there is a stage. Grime gets up to the podium and grabs the microphone. 

 

“My friends! Sasha Waybright has completed all three of the coming-of-age rituals! Thus, she has proven herself to be a toad of courage, of wit, and of persistence. Sasha, please accept this medal.”

 

Grime pulls out a medal and drapes it over Sasha’s neck. She smiles. All of a sudden, two toads dump mud on her from the cauldron.

 

“Hey! What’s the big idea? I thought you guys only do that to toads who fail the challenges!”

 

“We do! But we also do it to people who complete the challenge!”

 

The crowd starts laughing. 

 

Sasha sighs. “It’s good to be back”, she says. 

Chapter 9: Forgiveness

Summary:

Marcy gets to know Yunan and Olivia a bit better. Andrias tries to patch things up with Marcy.

Chapter Text

Marcy is walking. She notices there are more majestic trees and pretty flowers around, the grass is lush and green, which she takes note of in her journal. She smiles. Newtopia comes into view.

“Oh wow! Last time I was here, the city was in rough shape. Now it looks like nothing ever happened.”

Marcy pulls her hood up and enters the city. A few moments pass before someone notices her.

“Hey guys, look! It’s Marcy!”

The citizens within earshot turn their heads to the hooded figure.

“Oh, crud.”

The citizens start swarming her and give her a collective group hug.

“Guys…I really appreciate the hug…but I kinda need to breathe…”

The citizens break away.

“Oh, sorry Marcy. We’re just so happy to see you!”

Marcy laughs. Yeah, I know. I missed you all too. Anyways, I had a wish to get to know two people a bit better…do you know where I can find Olivia and Yunan?”, she asks.

“Oh, they’re probably in the castle. They almost always are.”

"Thanks! I’ll see you all later!”

She takes a few steps before falling face first.

“I’m good!”

She gets up and walks towards the castle and enters. Two guards stop her.

“Do you have business with the Queen?”

“Queen? Queen who?”

“Queen Olivia.”

Marcy gasps. “Olivia is queen now? That’s so cool!”, she says.

“Wait a minute, Marcy, is that you!?”

“Yep, I’m back!”

“Ah, we're sorry to have taken your time. You can pass."

Marcy heads inside towards the throne room. She knocks on the door. A few moments pass before Yunan opens the door. She gasps.

Yunan: “Marcy?”

Olivia: “Honey, did you just say Marcy?”

Yunan: “Yeah, sweetie! She’s right here!”

Yunan steps aside. Marcy steps inside the room, to see Olivia sitting on Andrias’s throne.

Marcy: “You guys remember that wish I had before I left?”

Olivia: “I remember it quite clearly. You wanted to get to know both of us better.”

Marcy: “That’s right! Of course, my wish back then was more of a regret because I had to go home. But, as you can see, I’ve returned, so now I actually can!”

Yunan: “But how did you get back?”

Marcy: “Oh…well, this is just a theory, but it seems like every world with sentient life has its own set of Calamity Stones. There was one on Earth, and someone made and sent their own music box to Anne. She had us use it, so…here we are!”

Olivia: “Ah, so Anne and Sasha are here as well?”

Marcy: “Yeah! They’re off doing their own thing, and I’m doing mine. But we’ll see each other soon. Anyways, can I have my room back?”

Yunan: “Were you planning on staying here?”

Marcy: “Yeah! Like I said, I want to get to know you two better. And maybe I can make some friends with some other people here. Everyone already knows me, so it shouldn’t be too difficult to make friends…”

Olivia: “That’s wonderful, Master Marcy. We were just about to go to lunch. You’re welcome to join us.”

Marcy: “Let’s go!”

Marcy takes a few steps forward before falling face first. She gets up.

Marcy: “I’m all right.”

Olivia: “It’s funny, you’ve grown as a person, but you still seem to be the same clumsy Marcy that came into our city by chance five years ago.”

Marcy laughs. She looks at Yunan and Olivia’s hands and notices something odd. “By the way, why are you two wearing matching rings?”, she asks.

Yunan: “Isn’t it obvious?”

Marcy: “Isn’t what obvi…Oh. My. Frog! Congratulations, you two!”

Olivia: “Thank you, Master Marcy.”

The three of them head towards the dining room.


Marcy, Olivia, and Yunan finish eating their lunch.

Marcy: “I forgot how good the food was here! My compliments to the chef!”

Olivia: “I’m glad you enjoyed it.”

Marcy: “Ah! I’m sorry, I totally forgot I wanted to get to know you two better. The food was just that good, I guess. Anyways, tell me your story, Yunan.”

Yunan: “My story?”

Marcy: “Yeah! You’re a general, so you must have had a lot of cool adventures.”

Yunan: “Ah, I have! It all started when I was a little newt. I was hanging out with my friends in the woods. Actually, they weren’t really my friends, because they bullied me a lot. Anyways, at one point I noticed we had gotten separated! I was by myself…but I wasn’t alone. A grubhog came out of the bushes. I…I didn’t know what to do. I tried punching it so I could get away but…I hesitated. And then it tried to bite my hand off! At that point, I ran away screaming. My ‘friends’ found me again because of that. When I told them what happened, they laughed at me…Since then, I vowed that I would prove I wasn’t a weakling. So I enlisted in the Newtopian army! I trained hard, and it paid off. I received several awards, like one for the time I defeated Ragnar the Wretched, whose mere presence caused even the greatest of warriors to shiver in their boots. I earned people’s respect because I got all these at such a young age.”

She points to her left pec, which has several ribbons on it.

Marcy stares in amazement. “Wow! You’re so much more awesome than I thought! I love the story trope of someone looking to better themselves because of a bad experience as a child!”, she says.

Yunan laughs. “And now, those girls keep sending me letters, asking me for my autograph. But I always tell them ‘no!’ You should have treated me better when we were kids!”, she says.

Marcy and Olivia laugh.

Yunan: “Ah, but that life is behind me now. Now I’m just here to lead the people of Newtopia. And, of course, help my wife out with anything she needs.”

Olivia: “And I appreciate you every day for that.”

Marcy: “Aww! Anyways, what about you, Olivia?”

Olivia: “Ah, I mean there isn’t really much to say. I was born into royalty, and taught to be prim and proper by my mother…everything I’ve done was mostly because of her.”

Marcy: “Oh, well…that’s nice. It’s good to listen to your parents. They do have a unique connection with their children. They instinctively want what’s best for them. Some parents…can choose to do what they think is best, without considering what their child thinks it’s best. And others just do as they please, but…no parent can truthfully deny that they love their kids.”

Olivia chuckles. “Yes, I was lucky that my mother loved me very much. That’s why I have to continue her legacy…”, she says.

Marcy: “But it’s also important that you do what you want to do. Children are a reflection of their parents, but…they’re their own people, too. They have their own desires, and maybe they don’t always line up with what their parents want…but if you live life just as your parents wanted you to, then people would be wondering who you really were after you’re gone. But, uh...that's enough about me! What are your dreams?”

Olivia stutters. “Dreams? I’ve never really had any…”, she says.

Marcy: “Whaaat? Come on, everyone has a dream. You should really think about it.”

Olivia: “I’m sorry, but I’ve always had a duty to fulfill. First I was an advisor, and now I’m a queen…I can’t just shirk my responsibility…”

Marcy: “But you don’t have to do it all alone. You have me!”

Yunan: “And me!”

Marcy: “Yeah! Just because you have an important job doesn’t mean you can’t try something new. We can cover for you every so often.”

Olivia: “You two…would do that for me?”

Yunan: “Sweetie, you’re my wife. There’s not much I wouldn’t do for you.”

Marcy: “And you helped me five years ago. Even though I was a stranger from another world. You’ve done a lot for me, and I wouldn’t be a good friend if I didn’t do the same for you.”

Olivia starts to cry. She gets up, and hugs them both. “Thanks, you two. I…I’ve always felt like I’ve needed to have my mother live on through me…I will continue to do that, but I will be my own person too”, she says.

Yunan and Marcy smile. Marcy looks around the table. Her smile falls.

Olivia: “Is there something wrong, Marcy?”

Marcy: “Yeah, it’s just…this table seems a little empty…”

Yunan: “Ah, did you want more food? I’ll go ask for more…”

Marcy: “No, that’s not what I meant. I meant there should be someone at this table that isn’t here. Someone who I’ve…also wanted to talk to…”

Olivia starts sweating. “I was hoping we could avoid this conversation…”, she says.

Marcy: “Huh? But I didn’t even say who-”

Olivia: “You didn’t need to. I know you want him to be here…we do, too. I’m…sorry, Master Marcy. But I made a mistake shortly after you left. One that I still regret to this day.”

Marcy: “What…what did you do?”

Olivia: “After Andrias passed the crown to me, I knew the people would want him to be punished. Andrias knew he deserved it, too. So, I put him into exile until further notice, and asked him to pay for the damages he did to the environment.”

Marcy stands up and goes to the window. She looks outside, and sees a beautiful landscape.

Marcy: “But…the environment seems to be back to normal. So why haven’t you ended his exile?”

Olivia: “You are sadly correct. It’s been like this for a little over four years now. Andrias has done enough. But when I brought the topic of ending Andrias’s exile to Newtopia’s citizens…”

Yunan: “We were met with a resounding ‘no’. They think what he has done is unforgivable.”

Marcy: “But, he redeemed himself a little, didn’t he? I mean he ordered his Frobos to help stop the moon…”

Olivia: “We had brought that up with them, but…they said he was just doing that to save himself. Other people being saved would just be a secondary effect. They believe Andrias would never risk his skin if there wasn’t any benefit to him.”

Yunan: “And, unfortunately, we can’t really end his exile, because then there would be riots. As much as we want him back, I don’t think he would like to see his old city like that…”

Marcy: “...well, this sounds like a simple enough problem to solve.”

Yunan: “It does?”

Marcy: “Well, yeah. People think Andrias wouldn’t put his life on the line for anyone other than himself. So all we have to do is prove he would.”

Olivia: “I suppose that is simple. But how will you pull that off?”

Marcy: “I got an idea. But I’ll need my crossbow. Where is it?”

Yunan: “Ah, don’t you worry about that. Once you came back, we asked one of our soldiers to get it back. He should be back any min-”

The door opens. A newt walks in holding Marcy’s crossbow, and hands it to her. She attaches it to her wrist.

Marcy: “Sweet! All right, here’s the plan…”


Marcy is in the castle room by the window. Olivia is sitting on the throne. They both look at each other and nod.

Olivia: “Master Marcy, be careful!”

Marcy: “Ah, quit your worrying, I’m not that clumsy-”

Marcy then trips over her own feet and falls out the window.

Olivia runs towards the window and screams. The citizens take notice, and they begin panicking as well. As Marcy is hurtling towards the ground, she fires her hookshot into the castle wall, and starts dangling.

Olivia: “Master Marcy, are you all right?”

Marcy: “Yeah, I’m fine. But I can’t get back up there!”

Olivia: “Do not worry, I will find some way to rescue you!”

Olivia leaves the window with a smile. Marcy smiles too. 

“I’ve done everything I need to do, Olivia has played her part, now it’s just up to Yunan to get Andrias."

Marcy notices the rope in her hookshot is slowly starting to break apart.

Marcy: “What?! That should be impossible…I fortified this rope to hold me indefinitely…”

Marcy comes to a realization.

Marcy: “No, that’s not quite right. I strengthened it to hold me when I was 13. I’m heavier now. This might have been a mistake…”


Yunan is running. She pulls out a tablet, which has a map on it. There are four red dots on it. One of them is larger than the other three. Andrias, who has had his cybernetic body restored, comes into view, along with Bartley, Branson and Blair. Andrias is watering flowers, Branson is planting saplings, Blair is raking leaves, and Bartley is pulling out weeds.

“Andrias!”

Andrias stops watering. “Yunan? What are you doing here?”, he says.

“We require your assistance.

Andrias sighs. “What…what do you want?”, he says.

“Marcy has come back, but she’s in trouble!”

Andrias goes back to working. “Can’t you just get someone else to help her?”, he asks.

Yunan stares in shock. “You…how could you say such a thing?! Marcy never once mistreated you. She gave you a proper goodbye, even after everything you did to her! And all you could manage was to tell her to take care!”, she says.

Andrias goes back to working as Yunan scowls.

“Honestly, I felt bad for you! You, of all people! You, who only looked to conquer the multiverse, and didn’t care what happened to anyone else! Olivia and I tried to end your exile four years ago, but nobody else did. But…maybe they were right, and maybe it was a good thing that they didn’t agree with us! You are a heartless monster!”

Andrias sighs. “No, you’re not wrong. I did some awful things. And I don’t blame anyone for how they think of me”, he says.

“But this is an opportunity to do the right thing! Marcy might die, and you would live the rest of your life in regret, not only that you choose not to save her, but also that you couldn’t patch things up with her!”

Andrias starts crying. “I…I don’t think I can make things right with her. Of all the people I hurt, I don’t think there’s anyone I hurt more than her. Not just physically, but mentally and emotionally as well. Even if I did rescue her, it wouldn’t even come close to making amends…”, he says.

Yunan’s expression softens a little. “Look, Andrias, it doesn’t matter what you did. It’s what you do now that does. If something happened to Marcy, and you could have prevented it…I don’t think you’d be able to live with yourself. And sure, maybe she will never forgive you. But, that shouldn’t matter. You should…because it’s the right thing to do”, she says.

“You’re right. I can’t believe I even considered not going…show me the way!”

Yunan unlocks the shackle around Andrias’s foot. They start running back towards Newtopia.


Marcy is still hanging from the wall. The rope snaps, and she grabs onto the hook with the palm of her other hand to prevent herself from falling. She starts sweating.

Marcy: “I’m fine! I just need to hang on! It’s not like I can fall from this. Metal doesn’t break easily. And I’m not so weak that I can’t support my own body weight!”

Suddenly, her palm slips and she has to hold onto the hook with her fingers.

Marcy: “Oh no, my sweat! Metal doesn’t absorb water. It just slides off. But…I just need to…hold on…long enough for Andrias to get here…”

Yunan and Andrias run into the town’s entrance.

Yunan: “Up there!”

Andrias: “Don’t worry, Marcy! I will save you!”

The bottom of Andrias’s feet turn into jets. He starts flying towards Marcy as fast as possible. Marcy sees him, and smiles. Her fingers slip off the hook. She starts screaming.

Andrias: “MARCY, NO!”

Andrias manages to catch Marcy. He then turns down the thrusters on the bottom on his feet to slow his descent. They make it back to the ground.

Andrias: “Oh, Marcy, please tell me you’re unharmed!”

Marcy starts to cry. “Andrias, you…saved my life…”, she says.

Andrias: “Of course I did. There isn’t anything I wouldn’t do for you. But…I’m sorry…”

Marcy: “Sorry? Sorry for what?”

Andrias starts to cry. “Yunan had to convince me to come rescue you. I really wanted to, I just…thought you never wanted to see me again…after all the grief I caused you. But…I’m ashamed…I just thought that my view of how you saw me was the way you really saw me…and I didn’t even consider that you might see me differently. But I don’t blame you if you hate me. I just did this because…there’s plenty of other people who are far more deserving of your friendship than me…and I didn’t want them to have to go through you being taken away from them, just so soon after you came back”, he says.

Andrias puts Marcy down. He notices everyone is looking at him, he looks down, and starts to leave the city, but he is stopped by Olivia and Yunan.

Olivia: “Where do you think you’re going?”

Andrias: “Those flowers aren’t gonna water themselves…”

Yunan: “Andrias, I told you. We couldn’t end your exile because everyone thought you were a terrible person. But, I think people’s opinion of you may have changed. You did just save Marcy, after all. And that speech you gave…I don’t think anyone without a heart could have given that”.

Andrias turns around to see people muttering to themselves.

Olivia: “Well then, I suppose there’s only one way to know for sure. I’d like to hold a public vote here. Who here believes that Andrias’s exile should continue, and that he should continue to pay reparations?”

A few people raise their hands. After seeing almost no one else is, they lower their hands.

Olivia: “And how many of you believe that Andrias has done enough for Amphibia, and that he should be allowed to roam the streets of his city once again?”

Many more people raise their hands. Andrias is in a state of shock.

Olivia: “Then I guess that’s settled. Andrias, I hereby declare that your exile from Newtopia has ended, and you do not need to pay any more reparations.”

Andrias frowns. “I…no…I haven’t done enough…”, he says.

Yunan: “What are you talking about? Everyone has forgiven you…”

Andrias: “Not everyone. I appreciate their ability to forgive me, but until one person has, I won’t feel comfortable being back here…”

Marcy: “Andrias…I forgave you…”

Andrias: “Forgave? That’s in the past tense…when did you…”

Marcy: “Five years ago.”

Andrias: “How could you have forgiven me so easily? I stabbed you! I had The Core control you! I tried to conquer your planet!”

Marcy: “Look, Andrias. The first time I met you, all I really saw in you was a benevolent king and a good friend. Even after you did all those things, I never got the sense that you changed. I know you were still the same person who helped me when I came here five years ago. You were just…dealing with an internal conflict between the person you wanted to be…and the person your father wanted you to be.”

Marcy starts to cry. “And I know what it’s like to have a strict parent. You know I came here because my father wanted our family to move away. I wanted to do anything I could to save my friendship with Anne and Sasha. That was all that really mattered to me but…I was just thinking of myself. I put them into serious danger, and I…couldn’t forgive myself for doing that. But that makes us similar, doesn’t it? We were both people who were haunted by our fathers, and driven to hurt the people around us”, she says.

Andrias chuckles. “Yes, I suppose you’re right”, he says.

Marcy: “It wasn’t really until Anne and Sasha forgave me that I was able to forgive myself. And finally, that awful feeling of not being able to forgive yourself, just vanished. I don’t want anyone to feel that way. That’s…why I forgave you, Andrias. Because…you’re my friend. You always have been.”

Andrias starts to bawl. “This whole time, I thought I was never gonna see you again. And for you to not only be here, but to forgive me and to still consider me your friend…makes me happy beyond words…”, he says.

Marcy: “Andrias, you said there isn’t anything you wouldn’t do for me. So please, do me a favor and forgive yourself.”

Andrias: “I will.”

The two hug as the crowd cheers.


Olivia is walking hand-in-hand with Yunan in the castle. Marcy and Andrias are following behind.

Olivia: “Anyways, Andrias, you’re welcome to stay here in the castle. I have been running this place for quite some time, but perhaps you can give me advice every once in a while.”

Andrias chuckles. “Do you really need it? Newtopia seems to be doing better with you in charge”, he says.

Olivia chuckles. “True as that may be, there’s always room for improvement. In any case, you can stay here in the guest room. We’ve made a few changes to accommodate you. It may not be as luxurious as your old room, but I hope it will suffice”, she says.

Andrias: “Nonsense, my queen. Being able to live in the castle is good enough for me.”

Olivia: “Very well. Sweet dreams, Andrias.”

Andrias opens the door and sees a bed big enough for him. On the bedside table, there is a robot pin. He picks it up, and smiles. He puts it on his robe. He thinks to himself for a moment, then leaves the room. He walks around until he sees Yunan.

Andrias: “Excuse me, Yunan. Where can I find Marcy?”

Yunan: “She said she was going to bed. You should be able to find her in her room.”

Andrias: “Thank you.”

Andrias walks towards Marcy’s room and knocks on the door. A few moments later, Marcy opens it.

“If it isn’t too much trouble, may I have a word with you?”

“Sure!”

Marcy steps aside to let Andrias in. Marcy sits on her bed and Andrias sits down on the ground.

“Were the events of today…planned?”

Marcy sighs. “Yeah, mostly. Yunan and Olivia were in on it too. The only thing I didn’t plan was my hookshot not supporting me. I…just wanted for people to give you a second chance. In the same way that Sasha and Anne gave me one. Are you mad at me?”, she asks.

Andrias sighs. “I am a little mad, yes. You’re important to me. And the fact that you could have gotten yourself killed, without me ever getting to tell you how I really felt…but…at the end of the day, I’m glad you did. I’m back here in Newtopia, with its citizens accepting me back in, and the people close to me loving me again. Just…let me know if you’re gonna do something life-risking next time, OK?” he says.

“I will. I promise.”

“Good night, Marcy.”

“Good night, Drias.”

Andrias smiles, and leaves to go back to his room.


Olivia and Yunan are sitting on the throne together.

"Well, today was…certainly eventful.”

“Yes, it certainly was. But it’s good that Andrias, Branson, Bartley, and Blair are all back here.”

“What? I thought I was supposed to just release Andrias.”

“Didn’t you hear the plan? Master Marcy said to release all four of them.”

“Must have missed that part. Should I go get them?”

“Eh, there’s always tomorrow.”


Bartley: “Do you think he’s coming back?”

Branson: “No! He should have been back by now, you moron!”

Bartley: “Sorry for asking questions, it’s how one learns! But I’m sure you find great difficulty in that, you idiot!”

Blair: “Hey, come on you two. Gardening is fun!”

Bartley and Branson: “Shut up, Blair!”




Chapter 10: Secret Frog-mirer

Summary:

Anne gets a love letter from an anonymous sender, and tries to figure who it's from.

Chapter Text

Hop Pop is tending to his avocados. The mailwoman comes by and drops off the mail. Hop Pop opens the mailbox, grabs the mail, goes inside, and puts it down on the table.

 

Hop Pop: “Let’s see, a 10% off coupon at Stumpy’s Diner, an advertisement for a new type of muffin at Flour & Daughters Bakery, and…huh?”

 

Hop Pop notices there’s a letter addressed to Anne, but with no return address.

 

Hop Pop: “Anne! You have a letter!”

 

Anne: “Who’s it from?”

 

Hop Pop: “Don’t know. Whoever wrote it didn’t put their name on it.”

 

Anne: “Oh. Well...it’s not like I haven’t had to deal with that before. But if it’s just a letter, it can’t be anything dangerous…”

 

Anne grabs the envelope and takes out the letter:

 

My dearest Anne,

 

I am writing this letter to you in the hopes that you will go on a date with me. Ever since I first laid my eyes upon you, it was love at first sight. Your elegant hair, your sparkly eyes, and your kind personality are just a few of the qualities that I adore in you. I apologize it took me this long for me to realize how I really felt about you. I didn’t even put my name on this because I am shy. If you don’t wish to go out with me, I completely understand. There are far better men than me. But I at least hope you will give me a chance.

 

Anne: “Aww! It’s a love letter!”

 

Polly and Sprig come downstairs.

 

Polly: “What? There’s a frog in love with Anne? That’s kinda gross…”

 

Sprig: “Ah, come on, Polly. Going on a date doesn’t mean you have to marry that person or have a family with them. I mean, look at me and Ivy!”

 

Anne: “That’s right! Besides, I’ve never gone on a real date. Even if it’s not with another human, that’s something I can scratch off my bucket list! We can just go and have a good time.”

 

Hop Pop: “Just remember that if you don’t wanna continue dating them, you don’t have to. But you gotta let ‘em down easy. People can get real scary if their heart is broken.”

 

Anne: “Yeah, I know. It’s kinda sweet that he’s shy but he was able to admit this stuff to me. I can’t wait to find out who he is!”

 

Polly: “Whatever, sister. Boys are gross. Robots are way cooler!”

 

Anne: “To each their own, I guess. Anyways, from what it sounds like, the person who wrote this must be living in Wartwood. I just gotta figure out who it is…”

 

Polly: “Can’t you just write your own letter to them?”

 

Sprig: “Nah, that’s not how you should go about this.”

 

Anne: “Yeah! Writing isn't really my strong suit. And romance isn’t really my cup of tea either. That makes writing a love letter twice as bad of an idea.”

 

Sprig: “I can help! I can write down a list of people in town who might have sent you that. Just give me a minute!”

 


 

Anne is sitting on the couch. Sprig comes down with a piece of paper.

 

Sprig: “Here it is! Your secret admirer will be on this list!”

 

Anne looks at the list.

 

  • Loggle
  • Stumpy
  • Toadstool
  • Toadie
  • Buck
  • Wally
  • Gunther

 

Anne: “That’s a…lot of people. Well, better get started!”

 

Anne runs out the front door with the list.

 

Anne: “Let’s see, first up is Loggle. He should be in his shop…”

 

Anne enters the wood shop. She notices Loggle is no longer buff.

 

Loggle: “Oh, hey Anne! Were you looking to buy something?”

 

Anne: “Uh…what happened to your muscles…?”

 

Loggle: “Oh, I took a cheat day. Kinda regret it…”

 

Anne: “Oh, that’s too bad. Uh, anyways, would you say we’re friends?”

 

Loggle: “Friends? Uh…I mean yeah?”

 

Anne: “Would you consider us being anything more than that?”

 

Loggle: “Ah…you mean best friends?”

 

Anne: “No, more than that.”

 

Loggle: “Hmm…super best friends?”

 

Anne: “Never mind. I’ll see you later.”

 

Anne exits the shop. She crosses Loggle’s name off. She heads towards Stumpy’s.

 

Anne: “I guess Stumpy might make sense. I did help him save his restaurant…”

 

Anne enters Stumpy’s Diner.

 

Anne: “Heya, Stumpy!”

 

Stumpy: “Ah, if it isn’t Anne. The one who rescued my business! I never did thank ya properly for that…”

 

Anne: “Oh? Did you have something in mind for how to repay me?”

 

Stumpy: “I sure did. Been waiting five years to give it to ya! Go take a seat over there.”

 

Anne takes a seat in one of the booths and squeals in glee. Stumpy comes by and hands her a dish with a kraken tentacle on it.

 

Stumpy: “This is one of our finest, most popular, and most expensive dishes! But for you, it’s on the house! And don’t worry, it won’t try to attack ya like last time!”

 

Anne: “Oh…thanks, Stumpy. Did you want to eat with me?”

 

Stumpy: “Ah, I wish. But I’ve got a restaurant to run.”

 

Anne eats the tentacle, then pulls out the list, and crosses Stumpy’s name off. She leaves the restaurant.

 

Anne: “At least I had a free breakfast. And it wasn’t something Hop Pop cooked…next, we have Toadie and Toadstool.”

 

Anne heads into the town hall. Inside, she sees Toadstool filling out some paperwork. and Toadie sitting in a leather chair.

 

Anne: “Huh? Why are you two sitting in the wrong spots?”

 

Toadstool: “What do you mean? Oh, I guess we never did tell you. I got kinda sick of being mayor, so Toadie decided to run. I helped him win, so now he and I have swapped positions!”

 

Anne: “Wow, congratulations Toadie!”

 

Toadie: “Aww, thanks Anne.”

 

Anne: “Hey, did you maybe want me working here? I can endorse you, and can help with the documents.”

 

Toadstool: “Nah, we’re good. I never realized Toadie’s job was so fun! And Toadie here was already friendly with a lotta people, so our ratings are out of the park!”

 

Anne: “Oh. Well, uh, good luck you two!”

 

Anne exits the town hall, and crosses off Toadstool and Toadie’s names.

 

Anne: “Buck…who’s Buck?

 

Buck: “That’d be me.”

 

Anne turns around to see the sheriff.

 

Anne: “Oh, Buck! I remember you!”

 

Buck: “What’s that you got there?”

 

Buck grabs the paper from Anne’s hand and reads it.

 

Anne: “Hey! That’s mine!”

 

Buck: “Oh, I see what this list is…”

 

Anne blushes.

 

Buck: “This here is a list of people you’re trying to steal from! And the crossed out ones are people you’ve stolen from!”

 

Anne: “No, no! You’ve got it all wrong! That’s just a list of people I’ve uh, uh…”

 

Buck raises an eyebrow.

 

Anne: “Played a prank on! I was gonna troll Wally by telling him there’s a fairy in the woods! It’ll be so funny!”

 

Buck squints his eyes and hands back the paper. “All right, but I got my eye on you! Nobody does this job better than me, and I don’t need anyone helping me neither!”, he says.

 

Anne breathes a sigh of relief. She crosses out Buck’s name, and heads towards Wally’s place.

 

Anne: “I guess Wally was the first person I met here. Even though he thought I was a monster…but we did have some bonding when we went to go find that mossman, and when I was his ride for Beast Polo…”

 

Anne knocks on Wally’s door. He opens the door.

 

Wally: “Oi, good day, love!”

 

Anne: “Did…did you just say…love?”

 

Wally: “Well yeah, I love ya!”

 

Anne: “Oh, Wally!”

 

Wally: “Just as much as I love the other people in this town! Like Loggle and Mrs. Croaker!”

 

Anne: “Oh, you meant like…as friends.”

 

Wally: “Yeah. What were you implying?”

 

Anne: “Uh, nothing. Have a good day.”

 

Anne leaves and crosses Wally’s name off the list.

 

Anne: “Well, I guess it has to be…Gunther.”

 

Anne starts walking towards Gunther’s house. She hesitates before knocking on the door, and he opens it.

 

Anne: “Uh, hey Gunther. Remember me?”

 

Gunther squints his eyes. “Oh, yeah! You were with that frog who got me all riled up! I’m surprised you came to see me again…”, he says.

 

Anne chuckles nervously. “Uh, look. I know you wrote this letter to me”, she says.

 

Anne hands the love letter to Gunther. He begins to read it.

 

Anne: “And honestly I did appreciate what you had to say. But I don’t think it’s best that we be together.”

 

Gunther: “But I…didn’t write this”

 

Anne: “Oh, come on. Sprig gave me this list of people who could have sent me that. I went through everyone else, so it has to be you!”

 

Gunther: “Oh, I see. Sprig tricked you! He made you think that I wrote this so you’d play with my emotions. Why, when I see him, I’m gonna-”

 

Gunther starts to grow in size. He roars, and Anne runs away screaming. He chases her into town. She runs into the Plantars’ house and slams the door behind her. Hop Pop, Polly and Sprig notice that she’s out of breath.

 

Sprig: “Uh…how did it go?”

 

They hear Gunther roar. Sprig, Polly and Hop Pop look outside to see him.

 

Gunther: “ANNE, I KNOW YOU’RE HERE SOMEWHERE. IF YOU DON’T COME OUT SOON, I MIGHT HAVE TO START HURTING PEOPLE!”

 

Hop Pop: “Anne! What did I tell you about letting people down easily?”

 

Anne: “This is all my fault. I really thought that Gunther was the person who wrote that letter to me. And now people are gonna get injured because of me!”

 

Polly: “See, this is why robots are cooler.”

 

Sprig: “Wait, nobody on that list wrote you it?”

 

Anne: “No! And he thinks you tried to deceive him!”

 

Sprig: “Then it’s my fault. I…have to go make things right!”

 

Sprig runs outside. He sees that Gunther has picked up Loggle.

 

Loggle: “Oh…now I really regret taking that cheat day!”

 

Sprig: “Gunther, stop! Put him down!”

 

Gunther turns around, and drops Loggle to the ground, who lands on his feet. “OH, IF IT ISN’T THE LITTLE PRANKSTER. I’D MUCH RATHER ENJOY GIVING YOU SOME BRUISES THAN THAT GUY!”, he says.

 

Sprig: “Gunther, I’m sorry. Anne got a love letter in the mail today from some unknown sender. I compiled a list of people who could have sent it, and on that list I put your name. I told Anne that I was certain of it, too. But, I shouldn’t have been so confident in myself.”

 

Gunther starts to revert back to his normal form. Anne walks outside. “Oh, was that all? You should have just said so, Anne”, he says.

 

Everyone in the plaza is staring at Gunther.

 

Gunther: “Uh, ya know what? Maybe I should just leave town. This is the second time this has happened…”

 

Anne: “Wait, Gunther. Why don’t you just try managing your anger?”

 

Gunther: “Hmm? What do you mean?”

 

Anne: “Just, ya know…if you feel yourself starting to get angry, just to be aware of it. You might hurt people if you get mad like this, and I don’t think you want that on your conscience. And maybe some things like deep breathing and meditation might help.”

 

Gunther: “Huh. That’s not a bad idea. Thanks, Anne!”

 

Gunther heads back towards his house. Everyone else returns to what they were doing.

 


 

Polly is impatiently tapping her foot against the ground, while Anne and Sprig are sitting on the couch. Sprig and Anne look at each other.

 

Sprig and Anne: “We’re sorry, Polly.”

 

Polly: “See? Now that wasn’t so hard, was it?”

 

Anne: “Yeah, you were right. I should have just written back.”

 

Sprig: “And I shouldn’t have been so sure about my list. Still, I wonder if there’s someone in Wartwood that I missed or didn’t consider…”

 

Polly huffs. “Or…maybe the sender isn’t in Wartwood at all!”, she says.

 

Sprig: “Oh. Right. I guess the letter never specified they lived in Wartwood. Anne has been all around Amphibia, so it’s possible they’re not here.”

 

Anne: “Ya know, all things considered, today was good for me.”

 

Sprig: “Huh? Why?”

 

Anne: “Now I have an interesting story to tell this dude. I’m sure he’ll find it hilarious.”

 

Sprig: “Yeah, I hadn’t thought about that!”

 

Polly groans. “You two are so crazy and I can’t take it anymore! I’m going to bed!”, she says.

 

Polly walks upstairs. 

 

Anne: “Something else I learned today is that even if this guy isn’t the one for me, who cares? People don’t need a lover to be happy. Especially not when you have a loving family and good neighbors.”

 

Sprig: “Aww, thanks Anne. Anyways, I’m gonna hit the hay, too. See you tomorrow!”

 

Sprig walks upstairs. Anne spends a few minutes writing a response, puts it in an envelope, and seals it up. She goes outside and puts it in the mailbox. She then goes back inside and down to her room to sleep.

Chapter 11: Invitation

Summary:

A mysterious villain turns Anne, Marcy, and Sasha's world upside down.

Chapter Text

Anne is sitting outside the mailbox in the morning. The mailwoman comes by and drops off the mail. Anne then immediately pulls open the mailbox to find a letter addressed to her. She smiles, opens it up, and her smile falls a little.

 

“Oh. Was kinda expecting a response from that guy…but meeting up with Sasha sounds good! I haven’t seen her in a while. We can exchange stories! Let’s see…she said to meet her at…this spot. I guess that makes sense, it’s about halfway from here to Toad Tower…”

 

Anne goes inside and grabs her backpack. She puts the letter in her backpack and walks past the statue of her, and towards the place marked on the map. 

 


 

Anne arrives at a mound in the ground with a door attached. 

“Uh…I guess this is the place? Seems a little creepy, though.”

 

Anne turns the knob and enters. She notices there is a large staircase going downwards that’s dimly lit by candles on both sides of the wall. She starts walking down the steps. After she reaches the bottom, she sees Marcy and Sasha are both tied to a pole, with their backs to each other. They also both have gags in their mouths.

 

Anne: “Sasha! Marcy!”

 

She runs over and unmuzzles them. 

 

Sasha: “Anne! Get away!”

 

Anne: “What? Why?!”

 

Marcy: “It’s a trap!”

 

Before she even has time to process what was said, a band of energy comes out of nowhere and binds Anne to the same pole as Marcy and Sasha. A hooded, yellow frog comes out of the shadows. 

 

“Good afternoon, ladies and gentle-phibians! I am the great Frogdini! For my next trick, I need a few volunteers! Oh! Thank you for volunteering, you three!”

 

Anne: “Hey! What’s the big idea! Let us go!”

 

Frogdini: “Oh? Did you not want to volunteer?”

 

Anne: “Definitely not!”

 

Frodini: “Well, I’m afraid there’s no take-backs.”

 

Sasha: “Listen up, you! If it wasn’t for us three, you wouldn’t even be here right now!”

 

Frogdini: “Oh, I’m well aware of that and I do thank you for that. However, I’m afraid you three have done wrong by me. Especially you, Anne.”

 

Anne: “Me? But I don’t even know you!”

 

Frogdini: “True, but surely actions can have unintended consequences for people you don’t even know, correct? Like you may buy the last of an item at a store, and someone else was looking to buy that same item for a special occasion. You didn’t intend to interfere with them, but at the end of the day, they weren’t able to get it.”

 

Anne sighs. “Look, I’m sorry for…whatever I did to you…”, she says.

 

Frogdini: “”Silence! Your words are meaningless! Life was better for the past five years when you weren’t here. I almost forgave you for what you did. But then you came back…and you were here to stay. I don’t want you here in Amphibia, but, ah, getting rid of you seems too nice for what you’ve done to me. So I will make you suffer the same way you’ve made me. I will make you want to leave!”

 

Frogdini pulls out a staff and starts to twirl it around, while reciting some mantra. The building starts to shake, then everything is enveloped in a white light.

 


 

Anne, Sasha, and Marcy are facedown in the mud when they first came to Amphibia. 

 

Sasha groans. “What…what happened?”, she asks.

 

She goes over to Anne and starts to shake her.

 

Anne: “Wha?”

 

Sasha: “Anna-banana, are you OK?”

 

Anne gets up and checks herself. 

 

Anne: “I appear to be fine. I’m assuming you are as well?”

 

Sasha: “Yeah, no complaints over here.”

 

Marcy comes to. She looks around.

 

Marcy: “What are we doing out here? Last thing I remember…we…we were tied to that pole. Then that frog did…something.”

 

Sasha: “It looks like he just sent us outside…”

 

Marcy: “But why go through all that work just to send us outside? I mean, he made a perfect forgery of my writing, and it seems like he did that with you two as well…”

 

Anne: “Forgery? What are you talking about?”

 

Marcy: “Anne, did you send me a letter recently?”

 

Anne: "I...don’t think so. Why do you ask?”

 

Marcy: “Well, take a look at this.”

 

Marcy pulls out a letter from her backpack. She hands it to Anne. She looks in shock as the letter seems to be written in the same way she normally writes.

 

Anne: “What…what is this?”

 

Marcy: “I received that in the mail yesterday. When I read it, I recognized it instantly as how you wrote it. But you’re saying you didn’t write me this, which means it has to be a fake.”

 

Anne gasps.

 

Sasha: “It wasn’t just her, either. I received a letter from someone who I thought was Marcy, but she told me she didn't do such a thing when we were stuck down there. Which must mean that you received a phony letter from me?”

 

Anne nods. “But how did he perfectly mimic how we write? He didn’t even know us…”

 

Marcy: “I know how. A few days ago, I received a letter from someone who claimed they wanted me to write them a toast to give at a wedding. But there were no weddings planned for several months, so I was a little confused as to why they were having me write it so far in advance…”

 

Sasha: “I had a similar story. I also received a letter from someone congratulating me on passing the toad coming of age ritual-”

 

Anne: “The what?”

 

Sasha: “Not important. Anyways, they claimed they wanted me to write an introduction about myself to give at a ceremony they were going to hold in Toad Toad, which I did. But when I came by the next day, no one had any clue what I was talking about. Again, I assume something like this happened to you.”

 

Anne: “Polly really was right…the person who wrote me that love letter wasn’t in Wartwood at all. In fact, it sounded like they didn’t even really feel that way!”

 

Sasha: “He wrote you a love letter? Real or not, that’s super weird…”

 

Marcy: “Regardless, it seems like he was able to copy the way we write very accurately, such that none of us even considered the letters we received may not have been from us. And it was all to bring us there and cast that spell…of which it is still unclear what it did…”

 

Anne: “He said he wanted us to suffer. But we’re not injured, so I’m worried about what he actually did…”

 

Sasha: “Well we’re not gonna learn anything standing around. Let’s go to Wartwood.”

 

Marcy: “But we should tread carefully. We don’t really know what the limits of magic are…”

 

Sasha and Anne nod. They head towards Wartwood.

 


 

Sasha, Marcy, and Anne arrive just outside Wartwood. Suddenly, Marcy stops.

 

Anne: “What is it, Mar-mar?”

 

Marcy: “Anne, wasn’t there a statue of you right around there?”

 

Marcy points to where the Anne statue once was. There is nothing there.

 

Anne: “Huh? I know for a fact it was there this morning…”

 

Marcy’s eyes go wide.

 

Sasha: “Maybe they tore it down or something?”

 

Anne: “But why would they do that?”

 

Sasha: “I don’t know, but clearly it’s not there…”

 

Anne: “I’ll go ask around. Someone has to know about it…”

 

Anne enters the town. Marcy tries to stop her, but she hesitates.

 

Anne: “Excuse me? Does anyone know what happened to the statue of me? It was definitely here this morning, and now it just seems to have vanished…”

 

The townspeople turn around to look at her. None of them say anything.

 

Anne: “Um…hello?”

 

Wally: “It’s a monster!”

 

Stumpy: “Quickly, we have to subdue it before it hurts anyone!”

 

Anne: “Huh?!”

 

The townspeople swarm Anne. Once the dust settles, she’s been tied to the ground.

 

Anne: “What the heck, guys?!”

 

Sasha jumps out of the bushes and draws her sword. Marcy stays hidden.

 

Mrs. Croaker: “Oh no, there’s more of them!”

 

Sasha: “Let her go, or I’ll make you regret it!”

 

Toadie enters the town square, with Toadstool by his side. Other townspeople walk outside.

 

Toadie: “All right, all right. What seems to be the trouble?”

 

Wally: “Oi, mayor! This monster tried to attack us, but we stopped it! But then there’s that one over there with the sword.”

 

Anne: “We’re not monsters! What has gotten into you guys?!”

 

Toadie: “Now, now. It’s possible that…whatever these are…aren’t monsters.”

 

Toadstool: “Toadie, you’re too nice. Ya ever seen something in the swamp that looks like that?”

 

He points to Anne.

 

Toadie: “No…but monsters don’t really act like this. They don’t wear clothes, use weapons, or speak. Plus, if that one with the sword really wanted to harm us, I think she could have easily. Sure, they may look a little…odd…and I know our town’s motto is about how slow we are to accept people…but just because you don’t accept someone doesn’t mean you can treat them poorly. First impressions are important, ya know.”

 

Marcy jumps out of the bushes.

 

Toadstool: “Oh, great! How many of ya are there?!”

 

Sasha: “It’s just us three. But you should know that!”

 

Toadstool: “Huh? What are you talking about?”

 

Sasha looks confused.

 

“Follow my lead”, Marcy whispers to Sasha.

 

Marcy: “Let me explain. My name is Marcy, this is Sasha, and the one you have there is named Anne. We’re, uh, from another world, and we’re called humans. We, uh, accidentally got ourselves trapped in this world, and we, uh, don’t know how to get back. We know we may have, uh, maybe left a bad first impression on you guys, but we don’t mean you any harm…”

 

Stumpy: “If you really mean no harm, then that one should lower their sword!”

 

Sasha: “Not until you let my friend go!”

 

Toadie: “All right, this is getting us nowhere. If we let your friend go, you will put away your sword. Agreed?”

 

Sasha nods. Toadie unbinds Anne, who looks dumbfounded. She walks back over to Marcy and Sasha, as the latter sheathes her sword.

 

Toadie: “Good! Now we’re building bridges instead of burning them. Uh, Marcy, was it? Do you mind continuing?”

 

Marcy: “Not at all. Uh, as I was saying, we’re kinda lost. And so, uh, if it isn’t much of an inconvenience, do you mind if we stay here?”

 

Toadstool: “You’re crazy if you think Toadie’s gonn-”

 

Toadie: “Sure, Marcy. You can stay as long as you like. However, there are two things you should be aware of. Since you’ll be considered a resident here, you will have to follow the same laws as everyone else. Secondly, even though you are a resident here, people may not treat you as such right off the bat. We won’t be…tying you to the ground like we did here…but people may be rude to you.”

 

Marcy: “We understand, mayor.”

 

Toadie: “Good! Everyone, you can resume what you were doing.”

 

The crowd disperses. 

 

Sasha: “Wow, Mar-mar, you diffused that situation really well…”

 

Anne: “But why was everyone treating us like they had never seen us before!”

 

Marcy: “I think from their point of view, they haven’t…”

 

Anne and Sasha scratch their heads.

 

Marcy: “It wasn’t until you mentioned the statue being missing that I noticed this was something that spell must have caused. An idea began to form in my head, and what they just did more or less confirmed what I thought…”

 

Marcy takes a deep breath.

 

Marcy: “I think that Frogdini…wiped everyone’s memory of us.”

 

Sasha and Anne gasp.

 

Marcy: “More so than that, I think he also got rid of any physical evidence that we were ever here…hence why the statue is missing.”

 

Anne: “Wait, so nobody remembers us? That means…”

 

Anne gasps, and starts running towards the Plantar farm. Marcy and Sasha run after her.

 

Marcy: “Anne, wait!”

 

Anne starts knocking furiously on the front door of the Plantar farm. Hop Pop opens the door, just as Sasha and Marcy stop on the front lawn. They stand there and watch from afar.

 

Hop Pop: “Yes?”

 

Anne grabs Hop Pop by the shoulders. “Hop Pop! You remember me, right?”

 

Hop Pop: “Eh, no? Unless my memory is failing me…”

 

Anne starts shaking him. “Please, you have to remember!”, she says.

 

Polly comes by and smacks Anne’s hands away from Hop Pop. “Hey, only I can do that!”, she says.

 

Anne: “Polly! Remember me? Team P-Anne for life, right?”

 

Polly: “I don’t know what you’re talking about!”

 

Anne peers over Polly’s shoulder and sees Sprig.

 

Anne: “Sprig…Spranne against the world…”

 

Sprig looks at her blankly.

 

Hop Pop: “Listen, stranger. You’re being a little strange. This town has enough weirdness in Wally. Unless you’re here to buy avocados, I’m gonna have to ask you to leave.”

 

Polly slams the door in her face. Anne starts bawling, as Sasha and Marcy pull her by each of her arms, away from the Plantar farm.

 

"They don't...remember me..."



Chapter 12: Discovery

Summary:

Anne, Sasha, and Marcy try to figure out more about the person who wiped everyone's memories of them. Along the way, they help some townsfolk.

Chapter Text

Anne, Marcy, and Sasha are sitting on the fountain in the Wartwood town square. Anne is looking at her phone.

 

Anne: “You were right, Mar-mar…all the pictures I took with people here are gone…”

 

Anne puts her phone away and sighs.

 

Anne: “Ya know, I don’t ever think there was a time when I felt alone in Wartwood. Everyone here was rude to me at first, but the Plantars…they welcomed me in with open flippers. And then I gained everyone’s respect when I stood up to those toad tax collectors. But now they just treat me like a stranger…”

 

She starts to cry. Sasha and Marcy look at each other, and nod.

 

Sasha: “Then I guess we’ll just have to fix this then!”

 

Marcy: “That’s right! First off, we need some more information. That Frogdini might have lived here in Wartwood. We should go to the town hall and see if we can find any of his files!”

 

Sasha: “Great thinking, Marbles! Come on, Anne, we could use your help!”

 

Anne wipes her tears. “Huh?”, she says.

 

Sasha: “You want people to remember us, right? Then the only thing to do is to find out more.”

 

Anne: “Oh…yeah…let’s go…”

 

Sasha and Marcy stand up and start walking towards the town hall. Anne stays seated.

 

Anne: “Sasha, Marcy…”

 

Marcy and Sasha stop in their tracks and turn around.

 

Marcy: “What is it, Anna-banana?”

 

Anne smiles. “Th-thanks, you two. I said I felt alone, when in reality, I’m not. I got two of my best friends here to help me”, she says.

 

Sasha smiles. “It’s like I said, we’ll never leave your side”, she says.

 

Anne starts to tear up.

 

Marcy: “Well, come on! Those documents aren’t gonna read themselves!

 

Anne and Sasha: “Yeah!”

 

Wally: “Oi! What are we cheering about?”

 

Anne, Sasha, and Marcy stammer around in confusion.

 

Anne: “Wally? What are you doing here?”

 

Wally: “Word around town is you’re weird. That makes you just like me!”

 

Sasha: "Uh..."

 

Wally: “I like people who are strange. That means you don’t give a flying frog what people think of ya! So, as a celebration of our new friendship, I’d like to play a song!”

 

Sasha: “But we didn-”

 

Wally pulls out his accordion and starts to play. After he’s finished, Anne and Sasha are in complete shock. Marcy begins to clap.

 

Marcy: “Wow! That was pretty good!”

 

Wally: “You…you like it? Most people run away when I start playing…”

 

Marcy: “Yeah! The accordion is a difficult instrument to play, but you make it look like it’s no big deal. You could easily become a music star with talent like that!”

 

Wally blushes. “You…you really think so? But I’ve never tried to make it big before…”, he says.

 

Marcy snorts. “Anyone who is famous could say that about themselves. All it really takes is a little belief in yourself. And, hey, you already have a believer in me. That should make it a little easier, right?”, she says.

 

Wally: “Well…all right, I’ll give it a go! Do you promise to help me?”

 

Marcy: “For sure! Here, I’ll even put it in writing…”

 

Marcy grabs a piece of paper from her backpack and writes on it.

 

I vow to help you, Wally, on your journey to becoming a music star.

 

Marcy Wu

 

She then hands the paper to Wally, who put it in his accordion case.

 

Wally: “Wow, thank you! I don’t have any froggin’ idea what this says, but I appreciate it!”

 

Wally walks back towards his house.

 

Anne: “Uh, Marcy?”

 

Marcy: “Yeah? Oh, right! We were supposed to go to the town hall. Got a little distracted there…”

 

Marcy, Anne, and Sasha walk towards the town hall.

 


 

Anne, Sasha, and Marcy walk inside the town hall, into the mayor’s room, and see Toadie in his chair and Toadstool filling a cup of coffee for him. 

 

Toadie: “Oh, hello you three!”

 

Toadstool: “Toadie! I know I’m not your superior anymore, but please, we don’t know what those…humans are capable of!”

 

Toadie: “Oh, hush up. Yes, they might be dangerous, but I want to give them the benefit of the doubt.”

 

Toadstool: “If they eat ya, I’m writing that on your tombstone!”

 

Sasha clears her throat loudly.

 

Marcy: “Um, I was wondering if you had records of the residents of Wartwood?”

 

Toadstool: “And what do you need those for?”

 

Marcy tries to think of a reason, but fails. Anne steps forward.

 

Anne: “We just…wanna know about the people of this town!”

 

Toadstool: “Couldn’t ya just…ya know…strike up a conversation with them?”

 

Anne: “Uh, we tried, but, ya know…people aren’t too friendly with us.”

 

Toadstool: “Well, all right. Just make sure you read me and Toadie’s records. We got some mighty impressive feats. That way, you can learn why you should treat us with respect!”

Anne: “Sweet!”

 

Toadie: “The records are in that filing cabinet over there. However, I do have one request. They are organized in a certain manner. If you take a document out, please back it back exactly where you found it.”

 

Marcy: “Toadie, I’m a neat freak. I cannot sleep if there is a lack of order. You have my word that we will maintain the organization.”

 

Toadie: “Glad to hear it!”

 

Marcy goes over to the filing cabinet. She notices there are two folders. One is marked “Current residents”, and the other marked “Past/missing/deceased residents”. She grabs both of them.

 

Toadstool: “Hey, don’t think I didn’t see that! What are you doing with that other folder?”

 

Anne: “Uh, we…also wanna know about the previous residents of this town! I’m sure this place has a lot of cool history!”

 

Toadie: “Eh, not really. Our town has an interesting origin story, but other than that, this place is uninteresting. But suit yourself. You can read those in our break room.”

 

Toadstool: “But don’t eat my lunch in the fridge! I’ll make ya regret it!”

 

Marcy takes the folders and walks with Sasha and Anne outside the mayor’s room. They find the break room and set the folders down on the table. Marcy picks up the one labeled “Past/missing/deceased residents” and opens it.

 

Marcy: “So…assuming Frogdini lived in Wartwood, his record should be in here.”

 

Marcy flips through the folder. After she has gone through a few records, she finds one that catches her eye. 

 

Marcy: “Girls, I think we found our guy!”

 

She slides a document across the table. Anne picks it up, and she and Sasha read it. Marcy notices another record, picks it up, and begins reading it.

 

Anne: “Things do seem to line up. He went missing five years ago, and he’s yellow, just like Frogdini…Clarence Bell…so that’s his real name.”

 

Sasha: “I feel kinda bad for him. Take a look here, it says he’s a widow.”

 

Anne: “I guess…but there’s several widows in this town, and they don’t act like this…”

 

Sasha: “That’s true. So now we know the who. But we don’t really know the why…”

 

Marcy: “No…but take a look at this.”

 

Marcy slides another document across the table. 

 

Marcy: “Take a look at his last name.”

 

Anne and Sasha look at the name. It reads “Daniel Bell”.

 

Anne: “Is this…his son?”

 

Marcy: “That seems to be the case. Also, look…the date he went missing. It was a few days just before Clarence went missing.”

 

Sasha: “What does that mean then?”

 

Marcy: “This is just a theory, mind you, but based on what we’ve been told and what we read here, it seems like Anne did something five years ago, which caused Daniel to run away. And it seems like Clarence left shortly after, maybe to go look for his son. He didn’t find him, and realizing he had no family at home, he instead planned on how to get back at Anne.”

 

Sasha: “But…why so complicated? Why couldn’t he have just gotten rid of Anne more directly?”

 

Marcy: “That likely would have caused an uproar. Besides, I think he knew that Anne’s first time here was going to be short.”

 

Anne: “Now it’s just a question of what I did.”

 

Marcy: “Yeah…unfortunately, I don’t think we’re going to find that out here. I think…it’s best that we ask someone else. Daniel’s record said he was attending Wartwood School before he disappeared. Maybe the teacher there knows something.”

 

Marcy puts the records back where they were supposed to go. She grabs both folders and heads back with Anne and Sasha back to the mayor’s room.

 

Toadie: “Did you ladies find what you needed to?”

 

Marcy: “Yes, sir! I’ll put your folders back…and don’t worry, the files are where they need to be.”

 

Marcy goes over to the filing cabinet and puts the folders back. Toadstool comes up and pushes the drawer shut, leaving his hand on it.

 

Toadstool: “Do you ladies remember what I asked you to do when you went to read those records?”

 

Marcy starts to sweat. “Ah, of course I do! You asked us to read about you and Toadie!”

 

Toadstool: “Yeah…so what’d you find out about us?”

 

Marcy clams up.

 

Toadstool: “Or did you not actually read about us, and you’re up to something shifty?”

 

Anne: “Toadstool, you used to be the mayor of this town, and you had Toadie as your assistant. And Toadstool, you had someone by the name of Hopadiah Plantar challenge you around five years ago, who beat you in every challenge. But you, you sure showed him! He only got 100% of the votes in Wartwood, but you got a bunch of votes from everyone in the valley! And you two…I’ve heard you’re good Bugball players! And Toadstool, you were asked to be the Head Toad of Toad Tower, but you…you realized that you wanted to stay here in Wartwood! And Toadie, you’re good at the drums, I’ve heard! And you also showed your brave side when you got away from those raiders when you were in the resistance! And…”

 

Toadstool: “All right, all right. Ya read our files. Sorry for being suspicious of ya.”

 

Toadie: “Wow, I’ve never had someone be so passionate about speaking of me. This is the best day ever!” 

 

Toadie extends his arms outwards in excitement, not realizing his cup of coffee was in the way. It falls to the ground and shatters, spilling coffee everywhere.

 

Toadie: “Oops. Better get the dustpan, broom, and mop…”

 

Anne: “No! I’ll clean it up!”

 

Toadie: “What? But it wasn’t your fault…”

 

Anne: “No…but you’re a respectable mayor. And someone like you shouldn’t have to do such menial work!”

 

Toadie: “But…”

 

Anne: “Look, I worked at a restaurant back home. People dropped plates and glasses sometimes, and I was often the one to take care of the mess. This isn’t anything new to me. I’ll get this done lickety split!”

 

Toadie: “Ah, I don’t know what to say…”

 

Anne: “Mind telling me where the cleaning supplies are?”

 

Toadie: “Ah, yes. If you leave this room, it’ll be the second door on your left.”

 

Anne runs out the room. A few minutes later, she has a mop bucket full of water, a mop, a dustpan, and a wet floor sign. She sweeps up the mug shards into the pan, and dumps them into the trash. She then puts the mop into the water, and mops the floor. She then puts up the wet floor sign, leaves the room, and returns. Everyone stares in shock at what they just witnessed.

 

Toadie: “Uh, thank you Anne.”

 

Anne: “No problem!”

 

Toadie: “Well, I suppose I need to get a new mug. That was one of my favorites too…”

 

Toadie tries to get up from his seat, but Anne stops her.

 

Anne: “No! I’ll get you a new one.”

 

Toadie: “Anne, please. You’ve done more than enough for me…”

 

Anne: “Hey, you can’t work at your fullest potential if you’re going out to get a new mug. Just leave it to me. I’ll even pay for it myself.

 

Toadie: “Well, all right. Thanks…again.”

 

Anne walks outside the town hall, with Sasha and Marcy following behind, looking a little confused. 

 


 

Anne, Sasha, and Marcy walk into Grub N’ Go. Anne looks at the mugs, then looks at her wallet. She finds only a few copper coins. 

 

Anne: “Oh, right. I forgot I’m dirt poor.”

 

Sasha: “I mean, no big deal, right? We can just ask the mayor for some money.”

 

Anne: “Yeah, but I told him I’d pay for it. I’ll see what I can get…”

 

Anne looks at the mugs. She notices there is one for seven coppers, which is exactly how much she has. She notices the mug has a hideous design on it. She grabs it anyway, goes over to the counter, and checks out.

Anne: “Hopefully he’ll like this.”

 

Marcy: “I mean, they say it’s the thought that counts, right?”

 

They leave the store.

 


 

Anne, Sasha, and Marcy walk into the town hall and into the mayor’s office. Anne puts the mug on Toadie’s desk.

 

Anne: “Uh, sorry. This was the only thing I could buy…”

 

Toadstool: “That mug is so ugly! How dare you insult the mayor, presenting him something like that! Don’t worry, Toadie, I’ll get you a bett-”

 

Toadie: “I love it!”

 

Toadstool: “What?!”

 

Toadie: “You are right about it being…difficult to look at. But Anne got me this mug even though she had no obligation to…and she helped clean up my spill…and she enjoyed talking about me earlier! She’s done a lot for us in the past hour, and I’m afraid I haven’t really done anything to show my appreciation.”

 

Anne: “Oh, that’s all right. You just keep doing what you’re doing.”

 

Toadie: “No, I insist. Normally, people need to be residents of Wartwood for two years for them to be able to vote, create petitions, and so on. But I can make an exception for you. I’ll add your name to the list of people who can participate in local elections.

 

Toadstool: “Toadie, please! If ya let her in, she might not vote for you!”

 

Sasha: “Dude, she just did a bunch of stuff for him. If anything, that’s evidence that she would vote for him. Besides, even if she didn’t…would one vote really matter?”

 

Toadstool: “Erm, well, no, I suppose not…fine, you can add her to the list. See if I care!”

 

Toadstool stomps out of the room. 

 

Toadie: “Aw, don’t mind him. He’s a little rough around the edges, but he’s a softie when you get to know him. Anyways, go ahead and write your name down here, at the bottom.”

 

Toadie shows Anne a piece of paper. As instructed, she writes “Anne Boonchuy” on the bottom of the list.

 

Toadie: “Now, just in case I forget, I’ll write a note here, saying that while you should not technically be able to participate in local elections, that you’ve more or less shown me that you’re trustworthy enough to do so.”

 

Anne: “Thanks, Mayor.”

 

Toadie: “Anytime, Anne.”

 

Sasha clears her throat loudly.

 

Anne: “Oh, right! I have something to take care of. I’ll see you later!”

 

Anne walks outside with Sasha and Marcy. Together, they head towards the school.

 


 

The Wartwood School, once a pile of rubble, has now been restored to a proper place to learn. The kids are outside playing for recess, while the teacher, Sylvia, is observing them. Anne, Sasha, and Marcy approach her.

 

Anne: “Oh, hey Sylvia. Didn’t realize you were the teacher here…”

 

Sylvia: “Hmm? Oh, it’s you three. You were those, uh…what did you call yourselves?”

 

Marcy: “We’re humans. More specifically, my name is Marcy Wu, this one is Anne Boonchuy, and that’s Sasha Waybright. Pleased to meet you.”

 

Sylvia smiles. “Is there something I can help you with?”, she asks.

 

Anne: “I was hoping we could ask you a few questions about one of your previous students.”

 

Sylvia: “Oh, I’d be happy to tell you what I remember about my little angels. What was their name?”

 

Anne: “Daniel Bell.”

 

Sylvia’s smile falls.

 

Anne: “I’m sorry. If it’s a sensitive subject, you don’t have to talk about it…”

 

Sylvia: “No, that’s all right. I’ll tell you what I know. Daniel was…one of the most behaved kids I’ve ever seen. He never hurt anyone, even if they did the same to him. He always turned the other cheek, and most of the kids liked him.”

 

Sasha: “Do you know what happened to him? All we know is he disappeared around five years ago…”

 

Sylvia: “That’s sadly one thing I don’t know. One day, he just didn’t show up. Didn’t show up the next day, either. Then there were missing posters of him. Then his father left without a trace, too.”

 

Anne: “I’m sorry that happened. He sounded like a good kid...”

 

Sylvia: “Yeah, he was. I…try not to think about him. I apologize for not being able to tell you much…”

 

Anne: “No, that’s OK. Every little bit of information helps.”

 

Sylvia: “Are you three trying to figure out where he went?”

 

Marcy: “Something like that. We are trying to solve a major mystery, and figuring out where Daniel went might help us towards that goal.”

 

Sylvia: “Oh, well, I wish you the best of luck on your endeavors. It’d be nice if we could see Daniel again…”

 

Two kids start yelling at each other. They appear to be fighting over a toy.

 

Sylvia: “Oh, not again…”

 

Sasha: “What seems to be the problem?”

 

Sylvia: “You see them two youngsters over there? They don’t get along too well. Every time I tell them I’ll punish them if they continue, and then they stop for the day. But the next day, they’re just back at it…”

 

Sasha: “Sounds like a job for me. Watch this, Sylvia, I’m about to show you how to nip this problem in the bud.”

 

Sasha walks over to the kids and kneels down. “What’s going on here?”, she asks.

 

“Michael took my favorite action figure!”, one of the kids says.

 

Michael: “You never let me play with it, Ben!”

 

The two resume pulling on the toy. 

 

Sasha: “All right, you two, that’s enough!”

 

The two stop fighting at the sternness in her voice.

 

Sasha: “Look, have you guys heard of sharing?”

 

The two kids shake their heads.

 

Sasha: “Well, sharing means you let someone borrow something of theirs for a little bit. Why don’t we try it now…Ben, why don’t let Michael play with your action figure for 5 minutes. And Michael, after that, you give it back to him. Sounds good?”

 

The two kids nod.

 

Michael: “Hey Ben, I’m sorry for taking this from you. It just looks like so much fun!”

 

Ben: “Yeah, it is! But, uh, since you like it so much, you can use it for a bit.”

 

Michael: “Thanks, dude. I’ll give it back to you soon!”

 

Sasha: “Just remember, you two. Sharing is caring!”

 

They both nod. Michael sits down and plays with the toy.

 

Sylvia: “Wow, Sasha. I’ve never seen those kids agree on something before. How did you do that?”

 

Sasha: “It’s simple. Negative reinforcement doesn’t teach anyone anything, it just makes them feel bad, and bad feelings tend to display in the form of destructive behavior. Now, if you make them feel good for doing the right thing, they’ll be motivated to do it in the future. Works like a charm.”

 

Sylvia: “And that quote you said, ‘sharing is caring’...now that’s catchy. Do you mind if I steal that?”

 

Sasha: “Uh, not at all.”

 

Sylvia takes out a notebook from her handbag. In it, she writes “‘Sharing is caring’ - Sasha Waybright”. She then puts the notebook back in her bag.

 

Sylvia: “I like to keep a list of phrases like that. Makes it easier to teach them to the kids.”

 

Sasha smiles. “Well, happy to help. See you around”, she says.

 

She turns and meets back up with Anne and Marcy.

 

Anne: “So where to next, Mar-mar?”

 

Marcy: “Honestly, I’m outta ideas. We’ve gotten a fair bit of information, but I don’t know where to go from here…”

 

Anne and Sasha tap their chins in thought.

 

Sasha: “Maybe we’re not looking at this the right way…”

 

Anne and Marcy look at Sasha in confusion.

 

Sasha: “Well, think about it. This whole time, we’ve been focused on figuring out who did this. But maybe we should focus on what he did.”

 

Anne: “How do we do that?”

 

Sasha: “Simple. We just ask someone who knows about magic. And I know just the frog to talk to…”

 

Sasha starts walking towards Flour & Daughters Bakery. Marcy and Anne follow her.

 


 

Sasha, Marcy, and Anne arrive at the bakery. They see Maddie is brewing something in her cauldron outside. Sasha approaches her.

 

Sasha: “Hey, Maddie! How’s it going, girl?”

 

Maddie looks up from her cauldron. “Oh, hey Sasha. I’m good, just trying to make an invisibility potion”, she says.

 

Sasha goes over and inspects the concoction. Marcy looks at Maddie in confusion. Anne notices.

 

Anne: “Marbles, what’s wrong?”

 

Marcy: “Anne, Maddie wasn’t in the town square yesterday…”

 

Anne: “Yeah, so?”

 

Marcy: “So how did she know Sasha’s name? And why is she acting so friendly with her?”

 

Anne rubs her chin before Marcy goes over to Maddie.

 

Marcy: “Maddie, you just referred to Sasha here. How did you know her name?”

 

Maddie: “Uh, you guys are my friends. Why wouldn’t I know your names?”

 

Sasha, Marcy, and Anne gasp. Marcy grabs Maddie by the shoulders.

 

Marcy: “Wait, so you remember us?”

 

Maddie: “OK, this is getting a little weird, even for me. Mind explaining what’s going on?”















Chapter 13: Challenge

Summary:

With Maddie still remembering Anne, Sasha, and Marcy, they travel to Newtopia to ask someone for some help.

Notes:

This chapter involves Sasha, Anne, and Marcy wearing leashes. Please don't read too much into this. This is not what I think people should wear; it's just for the purpose of making sense in this episode. I apologize if you find this offensive.

Chapter Text

Maddie, Anne, Sasha, and Marcy are sitting in Maddie’s room.

 

Sasha: “Are you sure your dad is fine with us here?”

 

Maddie: “My dad knows I’m a little strange. At this point, I feel like I could bring in a vampire and he’d be cool with it.

 

Sasha, Marcy and Anne laugh.

 

Maddie: “Anyways, let me see if I got this right. Some frog named Clarence Bell, who now calls himself Frogdini, cast a spell that not only made everyone forget you exist, but also removed any trace that you were ever here. And your best guess as to why he did this is because he thinks Anne was the indirect cause for his son running away from home. Did I miss anything?”

 

Anne: “Yeah, that’s about right.”

 

Marcy: But what about you, Maddie? How can you remember us?”

 

Maddie chuckles. “And they thought I was paranoid”, she says.

 

Anne, Sasha, and Marcy look at each other in confusion.

 

Maddie: “Sorry, I was just thinking to myself. Anyways, the reason why I remember you is because, every day, as part of my morning routine, I cast a low level protection spell on myself.  It only lasts the day, but it doesn’t require too much effort on my part, and it might help out a little if someone were to try to use magic on me. My sisters kept telling me I was being way too cautious, but it seems like I was right.”

 

Marcy: “So, your spell prevented you from forgetting?”

 

Maddie: “Well, not fully. I likely had more memories with you guys, which his spell got rid of. But at the very least, I have one memory of each of you. So I know for a fact that you were here five years ago. And the memories I kept were likely the ones that were most precious to me. Marcy, for you, that was the day when you helped me revive that flea, and helped me give that antidote to my sisters.

 

Marcy: “That was a fun day!”

 

Maddie: “I think that memory remained not only because you were someone who initially thought I was cool instead of creepy, but also because you helped me save and reconnect with my sisters. Sasha, for you, that was when you began the Wartwood Resistance.”

 

Sasha: “That was quite the glorious day.”

 

Maddie: “Indeed. And Anne, for you…that was the day you stopped the moon from crashing into this planet.”

 

I’m glad you didn’t remember the time I was a bird”, she whispers to herself.

 

Maddie: “What was that?”

 

Anne: “Oh, nothing. Anyways, Maddie, is it possible for you to reverse his spell?”

 

Maddie: “Yes.”

 

Marcy, Anne, and Sasha gasp.

 

Anne: “Great! Then do it!”

 

Maddie: “I can’t.”

 

Anne: “What? But you just said…”

 

Maddie: “I said it was possible for me to reverse the spell. I never said I had the capability to do so right now.”

 

Sasha: “Can’t you just…hocus pocus?”

 

Maddie stares at her. “No, I can’t just…hocus pocus. While most magic spells have a simple way to reverse them, I’m afraid a memory erasing spell has a…bit more of a complicated fix”, she says.

 

Sasha: “What? Why?”

 

Maddie gets up and walks over to a set of building blocks. She constructs them in a certain fashion. She then makes eye contact with the girls, and, without breaking it, knocks the structure down with her foot.

 

Maddie: “If I asked you three to rebuild perfectly what I had just knocked down, how likely do you think you would be able to?”

 

Anne: “Uh…close to zero.”

 

Marcy: “Oh, I see what you’re saying. Restoring everyone’s memories doesn’t just require bringing everyone’s memories back, but putting them in the right place.”

 

Maddie: “Exactly. There’s also…another reason why it’s complicated…but I don’t think it’s worth mentioning.”

 

Sasha: “Yeah, I think maybe telling us what you need to cast that spell would be more worthwhile.”

 

Maddie goes over to her bookshelf and grabs a book titled “Amphibia’s Magical Artifacts”. She turns to a page. “Here, this is what I need”, she says.

 

The girls go over and look at the page. On it, there is a crystal ball illustration, which is labeled as a “Rememb-orb”.

 

Maddie: “This was first created by a wizard named Muddy the Wise. He passed on his knowledge to create this item, among others, to his children. One of them should be alive today.”

 

Sasha: “Then…sounds easy enough right? We just ask him to make one, then we get everyone’s memories back.”

 

Maddie: “Sadly, Muddy’s grandchild decided to cut himself off from the rest of the society several hundred years ago, and none of his descendants have been seen since.”

 

Sasha: “Oh.”

 

Anne: “Who cares? Now we finally have a way to fix this. We can scour the ends of Amphibia until we find him!”

 

Sasha: “But that’ll take forever!”

 

Anne: “Do you have a better idea? It’s not like we know anyone that could have personally known this Muddy dude!”

 

Marcy: "...what if we did?”

 

Anne and Sasha look at Marcy. 

 

Anne: “Mar-mar, this person would have to be centuries old…”

 

Marcy: “Yeah, and the only way you could likely reach that age is if, I don’t know, you had cybernetic enhancements…if only we knew someone like that…”

 

Sasha: “No…you don’t mean…”

 

Marcy: “Yes, Sash, I do.”

 

Anne: “Marcy, have you forgotten what he did to you?”

 

Marcy: “No, I haven’t. But he and I became good friends recently.”

 

Anne: “Except, he won’t remember any of that. There’s no telling how he might react to seeing us…”

 

Marcy: “No, I suppose there isn’t. But, let me ask you two this: if all three of us had our memories wiped of the other two, do you think we could still become friends?”

 

Anne and Sasha look at each other briefly before smiling.

 

Marcy: “That’s what I thought. Now, come on! To Newtopia!”

 

Maddie: “Hang on, I just need to pack a few things…”

 

Maddie goes over to her bag in the corner of the room and starts packing. Anne, Sasha, and Marcy head downstairs and outside. A few minutes later, Maddie walks outside. They head towards Newtopia.

 


 

Maddie, Sasha, Marcy, and Anne are walking when Newtopia comes into view.

 

Maddie: “Hold up, you three.”

 

Anne: “What is it?”

 

Maddie: “You need to put these on.”

 

Maddie pulls three leashes out of her bag. The other three stare at her in shock.

 

Sasha: “This is a joke, right?”

 

Maddie: “Afraid not.”

 

Anne: “And why exactly do we need these on?”

 

Maddie: “Think about it. People in Newtopia have never seen a human before. If they see you walking around, they might get a little anxious. But if they think you’re just my pets…”

 

Marcy: “Aw, come on guys. It’ll be fun!”

 

Sasha: “You have a strange definition of fun.”

 

Marcy: “If you were to see someone holding a leash with a full grown adult on the other end, you’d think they were weird. But here, people will think it’s kinda normal.”

 

Anne: “Ah, I guess that makes sense. They also match my hair color, so it’s fashionable…”

 

Maddie: “It’s settled then. Also, no talking. Pets don’t talk.”

 

Anne, Sasha and Marcy allow themselves to have leashes be put on their necks. 

 

Sasha: “You’re not gonna have us walk on our hands and make us eat from bowls, are you?”

 

Maddie chuckles. “Not unless you want to…”, she says.

 

Sasha rolls her eyes. They start walking towards the city and enter. A few people give them a few strange looks, but most people ignore them. One Newt comes up to them.

 

“Er, excuse me. What kind of pets are these?”

 

Maddie: “Oh, these are humans. Don’t worry, they don’t bite.”

 

“Can I pat them?”

 

Sasha growls at the man.

 

“Or not, I’m fine with just looking.”

 

The newt skedaddles. Maddie continues walking and heads towards the castle. She is stopped by the guards.

 

Maddie: “Ah, I’m sorry. Is this place not pet friendly?”

 

The guards look at each other. “Uh, no, that’s not it. We were just wondering why you were here”, one of them says.

 

Maddie: “I’m here to see Andrias.”

 

“What for?”, asks the other.

 

Maddie: “Uh, I’m a witch who’s trying to learn more about magic. I, uh, heard Andrias has a wealth of knowledge, so I want to see what he, uh, can teach me.”

 

The guards look at each other and shrug. They open the doors, and Maddie walks up the steps. She walks aimlessly around the halls.

 

Maddie: “Now I just gotta figure out where Andrias is…might take a while, considering how large this castle is...”

 

Sasha: “There he is.”

 

Sasha points towards a room, where Andrias is drinking a cup of coffee while reading a book titled “Making Friends”.

 

Maddie: “Good eye, Sasha! But what did I say about talking?”

 

Sasha: “If nobody hears, does it really matter?”

 

Maddie: “I can’t argue with that…”

 

Maddie walks over and enters the room with Andrias. He notices them, smiles, and closes his book.

 

Andrias: “Oh, hello there! I recognize you!”

 

Maddie: “Huh? You do?”

 

Andrias: “Yeah, you were one of the members of the Wartwood Resistance, right? The army that stood against me? I caught a glimpse of you using magic. You were quite the skilled fighter for such a young age.

 

Maddie: “Oh, um…thanks. The name’s Maddie.”

 

Andrias: “You are quite welcome. To what do I owe this pleasure?”

 

Maddie: “We were looking for some information.”

 

Andrias: “Ohoho! Look no further, my friend! There is little I do not know. What do you need to know?”

 

Maddie: “I was hoping you could tell me if you ever met a man by the name of Muddy the Wise…”

 

Andrias’s smile falls. “Uh, yes. I have. I’ve also met his child, Muddy II, and his child, Muddy III”, he says.

 

Maddie: “Do you know where Muddy’s current descendant should be?”

 

Andrias grits his teeth. “Yes, I do…”, he says.

 

Maddie: “Can you tell me wher-”

 

Andrias: “No.”

 

Maddie: “What?”

 

Andrias: “Muddy III told me he thought his magic was too dangerous, which is why he secluded himself from everyone else. He trusted me, though, so he told me where he’d be hiding, under the condition that I never tell anyone.”

 

Maddie: “But we really need to know-”

 

Andrias: “I SAID NO!”

 

Maddie shuts her mouth.

 

Andrias: “Look, I’m sorry. I really am. I’m sure you have a good reason for wanting to see him…but…I’m not the one to break promises.”

 

Maddie: “Is there any way we could change your mind?”

 

Andrias: “I doubt there’s anything you could give me that would…unless…”

 

Andrias looks at Marcy, Sasha, and Anne. Then a smile grows across his lips.

 

Andrias: “Who are your friends here?”

 

"These are my pet humans...", Maddie says, before pointing at each of them in sequence. "I…named this one Sasha, this one Anne, and this one Marcy.”

 

Andrias bends down, and puts his face a few feet away from theirs. “My my, in all my years of living, I’ve never seen creatures such as these”, he says.

 

Andrias straightens up. “Tell you what, Maddie. You leave these…humans with me so I can study them, and I’ll give you the information you desire”, he says.

 

Maddie: “Uh, when can I have them back? They’re important to me…”

 

Andrias: “Well, considering I’ll be dissecting them, I’d say never.”

 

The four of them gasp.

 

Maddie: “No way! I’ll give you something else! I’m good with magic!”

 

Andrias laughs. “Welcome to the club, Maddie. You either give me them, or you can exit the way you came.”

 

Maddie sighs. “I’m sorry, Andrias. I’m afraid we won’t be able to come to an agreement”, she says.

 

Maddie turns and walks towards the exits. Andrias nods at the guards, and they use their spears to block the exit.

 

Maddie: “What…what are you doing?”

 

Andrias: “I’ve changed my mind. Letting those three walk out of here without me studying them properly would be a mistake on my part. I’ll be taking them with me.”

 

Maddie: “No!”

 

Andrias: “Oh, hush up. You’ll get the information you need from me, too. Everyone wins! Well, maybe not them, but…”

 

One of the guards grabs Maddie by the arms while the other forces her to release her grip from the leashes. Andrias then puts his hands out to grab Sasha, Anne, and Marcy.

 

Marcy: “STOP!”

 

Everyone in the room comes to a complete halt. Nobody says anything for several moments.

 

Andrias: “You…you can speak?”

 

Marcy: “Yeah, I can. And I challenge you to a game of Flipwart!”

 

Andrias laughs. “I’m one of the best players in Amphibia! You really think you can beat me?”, he says.

 

Marcy: “I’m at least going to try. Here’s the deal. If you win, you can…study us. But if I win, you have to let us go and tell us where Muddy’s descendant is!”

 

Andrias laughs. “You could have wagered that I be your servant for life and I would still have accepted it. Nobody has won against me at Flipwart, and you will be no exception!”, he says.

 

Marcy gulps.

 

Andrias: “Now then, let’s take this to the stadium, shall we? That way, I can publicly shame you, before making you my lab experiments.

 


 

Anne, Sasha, and Maddie are in a cage that’s overlooking a crowded stadium. In the center is a Flipwart board. On one side, Marcy is sitting. On the other side is a robot. Andrias is nearby wearing goggles, and has motion sensors on his hands. The robot mimics his actions. A newt grabs a microphone.

 

“Good afternoon, ladies and gentle-newts! Today, we have, uh, a human…by the name of Marcy challenge Andrias to a game of Flipwart. But this is no ordinary match, as Marcy is playing for her and her other two human friends’ lives! And Marcy is just looking for some, uh, information. Talk about a nerd, am I right, folks?

 

The crowd laughs.

 

Sasha: “Ya know, I’ve never been in one of these booths near the top of a stadium. Glad I got to cross this off my bucket list before I die…which is probably in a few minutes.”

 

Anne: “Oh, I wouldn’t be so sure about that. Have a little faith in Marbles, all right?”

 

Andrias: “Marcy, you may choose which color you want to be.”

 

Marcy: “I choose…black.”

 

Andrias: “Interesting choice.”

 

Andrias goes first. The two make plays, with Marcy losing her pieces early on. The game continues like this, until Marcy only has two pieces left, with Andrias having significantly more. Marcy starts sweating profusely.

 

Andrias: “Oh, Marcy. I don’t know if you’ve noticed, but in just three turns, your wart will be flipped. Seems like you’re not as good a Flipwart player as you thought you were.”

 

Marcy chuckles to herself. “You need 3 turns?”, she says. 

 

Andrias: “That’s right. Any last words?”

 

Well, that’s a shame...", Marcy says, as she grabs her wart. "...because I only need one!”

 

Marcy moves her wart one space forward. The referee looks at the board and confirms that Andrias’s wart has been flipped.

 

“I…I don’t believe this. For the first time ever, someone has bested Andrias in Flipwart!”

 

The crowd goes wild.

 

Andrias: “NO! That cannot be! She must have cheated!”

 

“I’ve been watching the board this whole time. Neither of you made invalid plays.”

 

Andrias is in a complete state of shock. Marcy receives a small trophy for winning, as confetti rains from the sky.

 


 

Andrias: “Well, a deal’s a deal. I’ll let you four go, and…I’ll tell you where Muddy’s descendant is. Do you have a map?”

 

Maddie pulls out a map from her bag, and hands it to Andrias.

 

Andrias: “Around right here, where it seems like where there should be the ocean. There’s actually a small set of islands there. It’s on the biggest one that you should find Muddy’s descendant.”

 

Maddie: “It’s in the ocean? How are we supposed to get there?”

 

Andrias: “We have ships you can use. I can also get you a sailor to navigate the seas.”

 

Maddie: “Oh…thanks Andrias.”

 

Andrias: “Don’t mention it.”

 

Andrias goes back and sits down at his table, reading his book. Marcy goes up to him.

 

Marcy: “Hey, sorry about embarrassing you like that…”

 

Andrias starts to chuckle. “You didn’t embarrass me, kid. I embarrassed myself. Besides, I was…a bit too serious about me wanting to study you. I still would like to…although in a less violent way…but it seems like you’re busy…”

 

Marcy: “Well, hey. I have a solution for that.”

 

Marcy pulls out a human biology textbook from her backpack and hands it to Andrias.

 

Marcy: “That book contains knowledge of everything you’d need to know about humans. It, uh, can get a bit detailed at times…but if there’s anything you wanted to know about us, it’ll be in there.”

 

Andrias: “You’d give this to me…even after what I did?”

 

Marcy: “I noticed you were reading a book about how to make friends. I’m…not really the best person at it either…but doing favors for one another is a good way to do so.”

 

Andrias: “You…even want to be friends with me?”

 

Marcy: “Yeah. I think we’d make good friends. It’s just…a hunch, though.”

 

Andrias smiles. “Thank you, Marcy. I will cherish this book forever. Have a safe trip.”

 

Marcy: “Thanks, Drias.”

 

Andrias looks astonished. “You know, there was only one person who ever called me that. You kinda remind me of her. You know what, I think we will make good friends”, he says.

 

Marcy waves, as she, Maddie, and Anne leave the room. They exit the castle and head towards the harbor.

 


 

Anne, Sasha, Maddie, and Marcy are on a large ship on the ocean. There is a newt steering it. Anne and Maddie are relaxing on some recliners, while Marcy is leaning over the edge, taking in the view. Sasha comes up next to her.

 

Sasha: “Uh, hey Marbles. I’m sorry.”

 

Marcy: “Sorry? For what?”

 

Sasha: “When I was in that cage, I thought for sure you were going to lose. I didn’t really believe in you, even though Anne did…”

 

Marcy: “Ah, don’t worry about it. The important thing is we’re one step closer to our goal.”

 

Sasha: “Yeah, you’re right. Anyways, it’s super cool that you beat Andrias at Flipwart. Fair and square, too!”

 

Marcy giggles. “I wouldn’t say that’s accurate…”, she says.

 

Sasha: “But the referee said you didn’t cheat…did you somehow sneak a move past him?”

 

Marcy: “No, nothing like that. But Andrias was the one to teach me Flipwart, and he always chose white. I lost to him over and over, but…one day, I won. I figured if I just played the exact same way as that time, he would respond in the same way.”

 

Sasha: “But…you certainly didn’t seem confident when you were playing…”

 

Marcy: “Well, part of that was because I didn’t know it would work. But the other part was something I call a ‘mind game.’”

 

Sasha: “Mind game? What’s that?”

 

Marcy: “It’s basically leading someone to think a certain way about you without explicitly telling them to do so. I figured that if I was too confident, Andrias may think I was actually a good Flipwart player, and he would play better. But because he thought I didn’t really know how to play, he held back.”

 

Sasha: “Mar-mar, you scare me sometimes.”

 

Marcy giggles. “Don’t worry, I don’t do this often. Just in cases where losing isn’t an option”, she says.

 

Anne, with Maddie following closely behind, goes over to the sailor.

 

Anne: “So, you know where we’re headed, right?”

 

"Yes. Andrias told me we are going to a remote set of islands known as the Axolotl Archipelago. I know the specific island which Muddy’s descendant should be on. Should take a few days. So, for the time being, make yourselves comfortable. And if you get seasick, please hurl over the edge and not on the deck.”

 

Anne: “Sounds good!”

 

Maddie: “You excited, Anne? We’re about to see islands that most people don’t even know exist!”

 

Anne: “Yeah…hopefully, we can just have a nice cruise.” 

Chapter 14: Kraken Up

Summary:

While sailing on the sea, Anne, Sasha, Maddie, and Marcy encounter some unexpected trouble.

Chapter Text

Anne is playing music on her phone and dancing, Sasha is sunbathing, Maddie is doing yoga, and Marcy is talking with the sailor. 

 

Marcy: “What fuel does this ship run on? How much does it weigh? How fast can it go?”

 

“Miss, please. You’ve been talking my ear off. Can you just let me focus on steering?”

 

Marcy: “Oh, sorry. I’ve just never been on a boat like this before. Nor have I had the opportunity to talk to a real sailor! I imagine it’s pretty difficult…”

 

The music on Anne’s phone stops. She wipes off the sweat using a towel and goes over to join Marcy’s conversation.

 

Actually, no, it isn’t. You just use this wheel to change directions and this pedal to go faster. And if you wanna stop, you just throw that anchor overboard in the other direction.”

 

“Oh, that doesn’t sound too much different than driving a car. The anchor is kinda like the brakes!", Marcy says, before turning over with a smile to Anne. "Anna-banana, I think you’d make a great sailor!”

 

Anne: “What? Why?”

 

Marcy: “Remember that street race you won?”

 

Anne: “Yeah, I remember. But my parents forbade me from driving for a month after I almost crashed into a wall!”

 

“Uh, sorry. What’s a car?”

 

Marcy: “Oh, I should probably mention. We’re from another world. Other worlds exist besides this one.”

 

“Oh.”

 

Marcy: “And a car is like a snail, but it’s made of metal.”

 

“A metal snail, huh? If you can operate something like that, this ship should be no issue to you. Come on up here, uh, Anna-banana?”

 

Anne comes up to the steering wheel. She grabs it, and rocks it back and forth. She notices the ship moves slightly in the direction she turns. She puts her foot lightly on the pedal, and the ship accelerates a bit.

 

Anne: “Wow, this really isn’t much different than driving a car!”

 

“All right, move over. I gotta get us back on course…we need to be heading 45 degrees towards the southeast…”

 

While Sasha is sunbathing, she notices the sunlight disappears. She takes off her sunglasses, and notices gray clouds are rolling in.

 

Sasha: “Uh, hey guys? I think a storm is brewing…”

 

Anne, Sasha, Maddie, and the sailor look at the sky. They notice it is starting to rain.

 

“You four should go inside.”

 

Sasha, Marcy, and Maddie head towards the bottom deck. Anne stays by the sailor’s side.

 

Sailor: “Did you not hear me?”

 

Anne: “I’m not leaving you out here, dude. You might get sick!”

 

“Someone needs to steer the ship. Besides, I’m a newt. We love water.”

 

Thunder booms in the distance. The sailor screams, and runs towards the bottom deck. Anne sighs before grabbing the steering wheel, and noticing a compass on it.

 

“Let’s see, that sailor dude said we need to head 45 degrees towards the southeast...", Anne says, before steering to the right, and looking out in the distance. "You got this, Anne! If you can drive in the rain, you can sail in it, too!"

 

All of a sudden, a giant kraken comes out of the water and roars.

 

“But I’ve never driven with a kraken on the road before!”

 

The kraken tries to slam one of his tentacles to where Anne was standing, but she manages to evade it. She then runs towards the bottom deck.

 


 

Anne gets to the bottom deck, where everyone else is standing.

 

Sasha: “What the heck is going on up here?!”

 

Anne: “Giant kraken!”

 

Sasha, Maddie, and Marcy gasp. The sailor has no reaction.

 

“Why are you all so worried? If the ship gets torn apart, we can just swim to the nearest shore.”

 

The four girls look at the sailor.

 

Maddie: “Uh, yeah, except they’re not like us. They’re good at walking on land, but swimming...not so much.”

 

“Oh. Well, glad that’s not my problem!”

 

Suddenly, the ship starts to be lifted slowly out of the water by the kraken. Marcy looks out the window.

 

Marcy: “Uh, guys…I think the kraken is raising us into the air, and is planning to drop us back into the water! I don’t think we’ll survive the fall!”

 

Sasha, Maddie, and Anne gasp. The sailor still has no reaction.

 

“Well, it is a sailor’s dream to die on the sea. This still isn’t my problem.”

 

Anne looks around for something she can do to stop the kraken. She notices there’s a pitcher of lemonade on a table. She then gets an idea.

 

Anne: “All right, everyone. Listen up! I’m gonna save us! Just grab onto something, and don’t come after me!”

 

Anne runs and grabs the pitcher. She then runs towards the stairs to the top deck. Everyone grabs onto the hand railing.

 

Sasha: “Anne! If you don’t come back alive, I’m gonna kill you!”

 


 

Anne runs outside and leans over the ship. She sees the kraken has lifted the ship just above its head. 

 

“Hey Kraken! Did you order lemonade?”

 

Anne then dumps the entire pitcher over the ship, directly into the kraken’s eye. She starts running towards the bottom deck. Once the lemonade makes contact, it roars, then drops the ship. Anne then hits the ceiling of the staircase. Once the ship hits the water, she then hits the floor of the stairs and falls all the way down. Her ears are ringing, and the last thing she sees before losing consciousness is Maddie, Sasha, and Marcy huddled around her, with tears in their eyes.



Chapter 15: Axolotl Archipelago

Summary:

Sasha, Marcy, and Maddie look for Muddy's descendant. Anne runs into a familiar face.

Chapter Text

Anne is sleeping in a bed on the ship. Sasha, Marcy, and Maddie are sitting around her, looking worried. Anne comes to and groans.

 

Anne: “What…what happened?”

 

Marcy: “Anne! You’re OK!”

 

Anne chuckles. “Well yeah, I didn’t want Sasha killing me…”

 

Sasha and Marcy chuckle with tears in their eyes.

 

Sasha: “You really saved us back there! How did you even know what to do?”

 

Anne: “Not my first time dealing with a squid before. This is the first time I’ve dealt with one this big before, though…”

 

Maddie: “Well, if it wasn’t for you, we wouldn’t be here right now. We appreciate it.”

 

Anne smiles before looking around. “Uh, where did we land, anyway?”, she asks.

 

Maddie: “Oh, funny story! After you blacked out, the waves carried us to the island we needed to go to, which is awfully convenient, since the ship isn’t in working order right now.”

 

Sasha: “Yeah, the kraken really did a number on it. The sailor went into town to go get some materials to fix it. He said there’s a good blacksmith here.”

 

Anne: “Wow, talk about lucky! I thought for sure we would be stranded in the ocean…”

 

Marcy: “Meh, the sailor said we were close to the island anyway. Besides, the one we needed to go to is the biggest one anyway…”

 

Maddie: “Anyways, the sailor gave us a map of this island. It’s a bit outdated, but we’ve marked on here where that wizard should be.”

 

Anne takes a picture of the map. “Great! Let’s get going!”, she says.

 

Anne tries to sit up, but winces in pain.

 

Sasha: “Woah, girl. You took a nasty fall. You’re in no condition to move right now.”

 

Maddie: “That’s right. Leave it to us. We’ll find that wizard.”

 

Anne: “All of you? But who will look after me?”

 

Marcy: “Don’t worry, there’s a clinic in town, too. We’ll help you get there, and they can fix you right up!”

 

Sasha and Marcy help Anne get up, and they help her walk outside. There, they see the sailor with a bunch of tools and metal plates.

 

Anne: “Oh, hey dude. Too busy trying to fix the ship to see if I was OK?”

 

“Andrias told me I needed to get you four here. He never specified that you needed to get here safely.”

 

Anne groans and rolls her eyes.

 

"But, for what it’s worth…I am glad to see you are unharmed. While it is my dream to die at sea, that was the first time I ever went sailing. I didn’t want it to be my last, but you saved us. The least I could do for you is fix my ol’ girl, so I can get you off this island when the time comes.”

 

Anne: “Wow. I was…not expecting that. I don’t know what to say…”

 

“No need for words. I wish you a quick recovery, Anna-banana, and good luck to you three on your quest.”

 

Sasha, Marcy, Maddie, and Anne nod. They turn and head towards the clinic.

 


 

Marcy, Anne, Sasha, and Maddie get to the clinic. They open the door to see the waiting room is completely empty. There is no one at the front desk.

 

Sasha: “Hey, looks like there’s no wait. They should get you checked in quickly.”

 

Marcy and Sasha help Anne down into one of the chairs.

 

Anne: “Ah, thanks, you two. I’m sorry I can’t really help you. But, I guess I’d just slow you down anyway...”

 

Maddie: “Hey, friends look out for each other. Just take it easy, OK?”

 

Anne nods. Sasha, Marcy, and Maddie leave the clinic. 

 


 

Marcy, Maddie, and Sasha are walking through the forest at the edge of town.

 

Marcy: “OK, according to this map, Muddy should be around here somewhere…”

 

Sasha: “Hey, look over there!”

 

Sasha points to a hut in the distance. The three of them walk towards it. They notice there’s a patch with crops growing in it.

 

Maddie: “I guess that explains why he doesn’t need to go into town. He just grows his own food.”

 

Sasha: “But…we’re in a forest. And this doesn’t look well-protected. How does he keep it safe from wild animals?”

 

Suddenly, a giant rabbit comes out of nowhere. The three girls let out a scream, but the rabbit just tries to swipe at the carrots growing in the garden. Once its paw gets within a few feet of it, it appears to be hit with a light electrical shock. The rabbit lets out a roar, and runs away.

 

Marcy: “...oh, right. Rabbits are herbivores. They wouldn’t try to eat us, anyway...”

 

Sasha: “But what just happened? That rabbit didn’t even touch the vegetables and it got electrocuted...”

 

“A good question, my dear friend!”, a voice to the side of them says.

 

The girls turn around to see a young, adult axolotl. He’s wearing an orange robe and is holding a staff made of a mystical-looking wood.

 

Marcy: “Oh! You must be Muddy!”

 

The wizard puzzledly looks at her before chuckling. “Oh no, you must be thinking of my father”, he says.

 

Sasha: “What? Wasn’t the first of your line named Muddy?”

 

The axolotl nods.

 

Sasha: “And his son was named Muddy…”

 

The axolotl nods again.

 

Sasha: “So…following that same logic…”

 

The axolotl chuckles. “Yeah, I can see why you would think that. But my mother was the first to break that tradition. My father’s name was Muddy, but mine is Jim. Nice to meet you”, he says.

 

“Yeah, it's a pleasure to meet you, too...", Maddie says, before pointing to the crops. "Now tell me about how this forcefield works!”

 

Jim chuckles. “Eager to learn, are we? Very well. I set up a spell around my crops because of the wildlife here. Anything that gets too close to it gets an…unpleasant surprise. But the cool thing about it is this…”, he says.

 

Jim walks over to his mini farm, grabs a grape, and pops it into his mouth.

 

Jim: “As you can see, I’ve made it such that it will shock anyone except me. That way, I don’t have to take down and reapply the forcefield every time.”

 

“That’s so cool! Oh, by the way...", Maddie says, before holding out her hand. "...my name’s Maddie. I’m training to be a master witch.”

 

Jim: “Maddie, huh? That’s a nice name. And who are your…friends here?”

 

Maddie: “Oh, that one’s Sasha. And this here is Marcy.”

 

Jim: “Interesting. I’ve never seen something like them before…”

 

Marcy: “Oh, that’s because we’re from another world.”

 

Jim: “Ah, that makes sense.”

 

Sasha: “You don’t sound too surprised to hear that.”

 

Jim chuckles. “When you have a family like mine, it’s difficult to be flabbergasted by things. In any case, what brings you here?”, he asks.

 

Maddie: “Seeing what you’re capable of, I want to learn magic from you, but…I’m trying to help my friends here.”

 

Jim: “What seems to be the problem?”

 

Sasha: “Long story short, some guy cast a memory wiping smell. So now nobody in Amphibia remembers us, besides Maddie here.”

 

Jim: “Did you cast a low level protection spell on yourself, Maddie?”

 

Maddie: “Was it that obvious?”

 

Jim chuckles. “Memory wiping spells are quite powerful. For you to remember them, I was certain you must have. That’s a good practice for magicians to follow”, he says.

 

Maddie: “Thanks. Anyways, can you make us a rememb-orb so we can restore people’s memories?”

 

Jim: “Of course. But first, I must test you. Not too far from here, there’s a cave that has a set of challenges that only the most skilled of magicians can pass."

 

Maddie: “If it’s for magicians, does that mean I’m the only one who can enter?”

 

Jim: “No, you can bring anyone you wish.”

 

Maddie: “Sasha, Marcy, if it isn’t too much of an inconvenience…”

 

Sasha: “Dude, this is our mission. You offered to help us. Of course we’re going with you!”

 

Marcy: “That’s right!”

 

Maddie smiles. 

 

Jim: “All right then, follow me.”

 


 

Anne is still sitting in the clinic. She checks her phone.

 

“It has been almost 30 minutes. There’s not even anyone else. Why are they taking so long?”

 

The axolotl receptionist comes out and sits at her desk. Anne manages to get up, but it takes a lot of effort. She walks over to the counter.

 

“I don’t mean to be rude, but where have you been?”

 

“Didn’t you see this?", the receptionist says, pointing to a sign that says 'We are out to lunch. Do not have a medical emergency until we return."

 

“Oh.”

 

“Anyways, what can I help you with?”

 

Anne holds up her arms. “Uh, do you not see all these bruises?”

 

"My, you certainly are cranky today. But sure, we can have someone see you right now.”

 

The receptionist pushes a button. An axolotl doctor comes out of the door with a wheelchair.

 

“Miss, please sit.”

 

Anne gets in the wheelchair and the doctor pushes her to a room labeled “Examination Room A”.

 

“Let’s see, you have quite a few bruises on you…do you mind explaining what happened?”

 

“Oh, I was on a boat and a giant kraken attacked us, but I poured lemonade in its eye so that we could safely get away from it. But, uh, I kinda fell down a bunch of stairs...”

 

“Sounds like you might have some internal damage as well. Let me just get the X-Ray…”

 

The doctor opens his cabinet and pulls out a portable X-Ray. He uses it to look at Anne’s bones.

 

“Yeah, it’s just as I thought. You have several fractures as well. But don’t worry! I have something to remedy both those and your fractures.”

 

“You…you do?”

 

“Yep! Us axolotls have regenerative abilities, so we were able to create this lotion that can restore just about any injury.”

 

“That’s amazing! What’s it made of?”

 

“It’s…better you don’t know.”

 

Anne shudders. The doctor puts his fingers in the lotion, before applying it to her arms.

 

“Let’s see, let me just dab a little here, and a little here…how are you feeling?”

 

“I…feel better, I guess.”

 

“Glad to hear it! This stuff isn’t magic, so you shouldn’t be back to 100% right away. But give it a few days, and you should be A-OK! And you don’t even need to reapply it.”

 

Anne tries to get up. Her legs are a little wobbly, but she otherwise has no difficulty doing so.

 

“Well, thanks, doc...”

 

“Anytime. Did you want a report of your visit today?”

 

“I’m good. I have to meet up with my friends.”

 

“Well, enjoy the rest of your day!”

 

Anne walks out of the examination room. She goes up to the counter and pulls out her wallet, only to remember she doesn’t have any money. Her eyes go wide. 

 

“Oh no…”

 

The receptionist looks up from her magazine. “Is there a problem?”, she asks.

 

“I just realized I didn’t have any money! I can’t pay for my expenses…I can just…maybe work off what I owe?”

 

“What are you talking about? The healthcare here is free.”

 

“It’s free?!"

 

“Well, technically speaking, it isn’t free. Nothing ever is. We just charge high taxes for people here, and that money covers the cost of visits here. People do pay for healthcare here, it’s just not direct.”

 

“Oh.”

 

“Yeah. Anyways, have a lovely day!”

 

The axolotl goes back to reading her magazine. Anne walks outside the clinic and pulls out her phone.

 

“Let’s see, according to that map, the girls should be-”

 

Anne knocks into someone. 

 

“Oh my frog, sir! I’m so sorry!”

 

Anne goes to help the frog up, only to realize it's someone she knows.

 

“You…you…”

 

The frog looks up at her. “Well, it’s a small world, isn’t it?”, Frogdini says.

 

Frogdini gets up and dusts himself off. “It’s been a while, Anne. I’m surprised you didn’t just up and leave Amphibia. But I guess you’re the type of person to never quit, huh?”, he says.

 

Anne picks up Frogdini by the collar. “Give me one good reason why I shouldn’t just sock you right here!”, she says.

 

“It won’t bring back your friends’ memories. Besides, if I were you, I’d take a look around..you’re causing a bit of a scene.”

 

Anne looks around, and sees that several axolotls are staring at her. She puts down Frogdini. 

 

“Honestly, for you to have the audacity to not only knock me down, but also to threaten me…”

 

Anne grits her teeth. “I’m sorry, sir. I don’t know what came over me”, she says.

 

“That’s quite all right. I’ll be leaving now.”

 

Frogdini turns and heads towards the forest. Anne starts following him. This goes on for several minutes.

 

“I’m not gonna stop following you unless you talk to me, you know.”

 

“And why would I talk to the likes of you? I hate you.”

 

“Because I know about you…Clarence.”

 

Clarence stops in his tracks, shortly before Anne does as well.

 

“And while I don’t know the full story, I do have good reason you think I’m the cause for Daniel leaving…which is sad, considering he seemed like a kind kid…”

 

“I don’t think, I know...", Clarence says, before turning around. "...and don’t you dare speak his name!”

 

“Look, maybe my first apology wasn’t sincere, because I didn’t really know anything about what I had done. But…I can sympathize with you. I know how difficult it is to lose someone close to you…”

 

“I’m sure you do. But tell me, the people you’ve lost in your life…did they ever leave because of you?”

 

“N-no…but D-I mean your son didn’t leave because of you. You just said you knew it was because of me.”

 

“You had a big part in him running away. But so did I.”

 

“What…what happened?”

 

Clarence sighs. “You’re not gonna stop bugging me until I tell you, are you?”, he says.

 

“Uh…”

 

“Fine, you’re right. Daniel was a nice kid. I taught him to be. At his request, actually.”

 

“Your son…asked you to teach him to be nice?"

 

“Not exactly. But there was a title he really wanted. And, being the good father I was, I wanted to make sure he got it, and in order to reach his goal, he had to be kind. I roleplayed with him, acting like the biggest bully you’d ever seen. At first, it was difficult for him to just…ignore me. Even if it was just pretend. I even felt bad about doing it, even if it was for a good cause. But after enough time, he became instinctually genial. He didn’t even have to think about it. I told him he was a shoo in for…Frog of the Year.”

 

Anne gasps.

 

“Now you get it, huh? Here’s me, an only parent faking being mean to his son just so he can get what he wants, and both of us hating every minute of it. And then, out of nowhere, comes this human, who took everything Daniel had worked for away from him in one fell swoop. He was beyond distraught that night. He accused me of lying to him. And that night, he ran away from home...", Clarence says, before a tear falls down his cheek. "...and so, I went looking for him…but I didn’t find him. I thought something must have eaten him. I lost my only reason to live. I wanted to get back at you…but I figured I’d get over it. I knew you were going to go back home. Even after you and your friends became globally famous, I still managed to contain my feelings of rage towards you. But…I just couldn’t when you came back. And let me be clear: I don’t want any apology from you. Nothing you say will bring back Daniel. I understand that me wiping everyone’s memories of you won’t bring him back, either. But…I have to do this. For you to have lived such a good life until this point, while people you don’t even know around you suffer because of you…it’s not fair!"

 

“Clarence...do you really think this is what your son would have wanted? You taught him to be nice to people no matter what. And here you are, not doing that…”

 

“I could easily say the same thing about you. Have you always been unconditionally kind to me? You threatened to hurt me back in town. And yet you were Frog of the Year, and Daniel wasn’t. You don’t deserve that title!"

 

“I…I agree with you. Maybe he could have won after I left…”

 

“Except he couldn’t. Because he’s dead…", Clarence says, before huffing. "...and here you are, trying to undo my work. But I'm not gonna let that happen, you stubborn brat...which is why I'm here."

 

“Huh?”

 

“Don’t you find it kinda odd that I just so happened to be in the same location as you? Especially a place like this?”

 

“What…what are you saying?”

 

“My goal was to get you to leave Amphibia for good. Clearly, making everyone forget about you wasn’t enough. But I knew you might find your way here. What I’m going to do…if this won’t make you leave, nothing will.”

 

Clarence pulls out a wand from his coat pocket and casts a force spell to push Anne into a tree. She then falls facefirst into the dirt, as Clarence runs away. 

 

“It hurts to move. But…I have to help my girls…there’s no telling what Clarence will do!”

 

Anne’s musters every bit of strength she has to get up, and start walking.

 


 

Sasha, Marcy, Maddie, and Jim walk into the cave. The first room is large but empty.

 

Jim: “These challenges will test you on your knowledge and application of the three lessons that any good magician must have learned. Just walk through the door at the end of this room, and you’ll find your first challenge!”

 

Marcy and Sasha begin walking forward. Maddie stays still, and narrows her eyes. Then they go wide. 

 

Maddie: “GUYS, STOP!”

 

Marcy and Sasha stop in their tracks.

 

Sasha: “Wh-what’s wrong?!”

 

Maddie: “One of the first things I was taught is that a magician should always trust their gut. And something feels…off about this room…”

 

Maddie picks up a rock, and throws it across the room. It seems to stop midair.

 

Sasha: “That rock just…stopped?”

 

Marcy: “There must be invisible walls!”

 

Jim: “You’ve figured it out!”

 

Sasha: “Wait, so…this is just an invisible maze? That doesn’t seem too bad…”

 

Jim: “Oh, it’s more than just an invisible maze. Should you make contact with any of the walls, you will disintegrate.”

 

Marcy and Sasha gulp.

 

Maddie walks up to and stands beside Sasha and Marcy. “Don’t worry, you two! The walls have a magical aura around them. I can tell where they are…kinda…”, she says

 

Sasha: “Kinda? What sort of guarantee is that?”

 

Marcy: “Sash, if it wasn’t for Maddie, we’d be dust right now. Let’s just trust her ability to navigate us through the maze, OK?”

 

Sasha starts to sweat a bit. She looks at Maddie, then nods.

 

Maddie: “Sasha, grab my hand, and Marcy, grab her other. I’ll lead us across…”

 

The three link hands, and start to move slowly throughout the maze. After a few minutes, they get to the door, and unlink their hands. 

 

Sasha: “Maddie, you did it!”

 

Jim: “Congratulations, you three!”

 

The three girls jump in surprise, as Jim has seemingly appeared next to them.

 

Marcy: “How did you get here so quickly? I was certain nobody was following us…”

 

Jim chuckles. “A good magician never reveals his tricks. Onward to the second challenge!”, he says.

 

The four of them enter the next room. There is a set of five doors that look identical.

 

Maddie: “What’s this challenge, then?”

 

Jim: “This is a test of luck, you might say. Four of those doorknobs have been laced with quite a virulent venom. It’ll permeate through your skin and kill you in a matter of seconds.”

 

Sasha: “Wha…but there’s not even enough of us to try every room. Isn’t it possible that none of us can get through this room?”

 

Jim: “Not quite. All of you will have to try the same door.”

 

Two additional two knobs appear on each of the doors.

 

Jim: “The venom won’t activate unless all of the knobs are being touched by a different person.”

 

Maddie: “So we either all make it through…or none of us do…”

 

Marcy: “Hey, Maddie, you seemed to know the lesson that got us through the first room. Can you think of something that might apply here?”

 

“Well, one thing we’re taught is that a good magician should always be observant.”

 

Jim: “Correct! Now then, let me give you a hint. Those doors in front of you, they all look the same…but is that really the case?”

 

Marcy: “It’s like a spot the difference type game! I loved those as a kid!”

 

Marcy examines each of the doors thoroughly. After a few minutes, she points to one.

 

Marcy: “It’s this one. It’s gotta be.”

 

Marcy puts her right hand on one of the knobs.

 

Sasha: “Are you sure, Mar-mar? I mean, if you’re wrong…”

 

Maddie: “Hey, her guess is as good as mine.”

 

Maddie walks up and puts her right hand on the second knob. Sasha sighs.

 

Sasha: “All right, you have me convinced.”

 

Sasha walks up, and hesitates before putting her hand on the third knob. 

 

Sasha: “Are we…safe?”

 

Maddie: “That does appear to be the case. Let’s just turn the knobs.”

 

The three of them open the door. Somehow, Jim is already on the other side.

 

Jim: “Congratulations, you three! You’ve passed the second challenge. Now, for the last!”

 

The four of them walk into the third room.

 

Sasha: “Maddie, that last lesson. What was it?”

 

Maddie: “Uh, a magician shouldn’t always rely on their magic.”

 

Jim: “Correct! A magician is nothing if they’re made useless without their magic. And that’s the test of this room!”

 

A pile of runes in the center of the room congregate to form a monster.

 

Jim: “Don’t try using any magic on that fella, Maddie. It’s completely immune! As long as you’re not within this circle, though, it won’t attack you.”

 

Marcy: “I’ve never needed magic to fight before. And today will be no exception!”

 

Marcy charges forward and fires her crossbow at the monster. It’s not even phased when it hits.

 

Marcy: “Oops.”

 

The monster swings its giant arm at Marcy. She manages to avoid it by throwing herself onto the ground. It prepares to take another swipe at her, but Maddie starts throwing rocks at it to grab its attention. The monster twirls its arms in a sweeping motion, which sends Maddie and Marcy flying against the wall. The impact knocks Maddie out, and leaves Marcy dazed.

 

Sasha: “No!”

 

Jim: “Ah, do not worry. This monster doesn’t like to attack people who are down. I’m afraid it’s only interested in harming you.”

 

Sasha pulls out her sword, as her eyes turn pink.

 

Sasha: “You’re gonna pay for hurting my friends!”

 

Sasha runs towards the monster, and dodges its blows with ease. She can’t land any hits on it.

 

Sasha: “That…that all you got?”

 

Marcy comes to and sees Sasha fighting the monster.

 

“Ugh, that thing hit me so hard I can barely move. I can’t even talk. But there has to be something I do, otherwise, Sasha is just gonna end up like the rest of us…”

 

Marcy notices something about the monster. The punches it throws seem to be rhythmic. It also seems to be using the same attack pattern.

 

“Hey, that perfectly matches the tempo of…!”

 

Marcy pulls out her phone and starts playing “Heartstomper”. The monster and Sasha quit fighting for a moment. 

 

Sasha: “Marcy, what are you doing?”

 

Marcy points to the monster. The monster then tries to hit Sasha, then she notices something before smiling.

 

Sasha: “Marbles, you’re a genius!”

 

Sasha dodges another of the monster’s punches, in rhythm with the song. She sees an opening at the monster’s side, and takes full advantage of it. It tries to use its sweeping attack from before, just in time as the beat drops, which she dodges by jumping. She then stabs the monster in the chest, causing it to stagger back a bit. She then takes one final swing at the monster’s head as the guitar solo stops. The monster behind her turns into pebbles.

 

Sasha: “Looks like your heart got stomped!”

 

Jim: “Bravo! Bravo!”

 

Sasha goes up to Marcy and picks her up.

 

Sasha: “Are you all right?”

 

Marcy nods. Jim approaches.

 

Jim: “Oh, this won’t do. Let me heal you.”

 

Jim uses his staff to cast a pink cloud over Marcy.

Marcy: “Ah, I can speak again! And I can stand, too!”

 

Jim does the same for Maddie. Maddie comes to, and approaches Marcy and Sasha.

 

Maddie: “Uh, what happened?”

 

Sasha: “Oh, nothing. Just turned that monster into gravel.”

 

Maddie: “Wow, my respect for you just skyrocketed!”

 

Sasha chuckles. “Yeah…but, uh…I wouldn’t have even gotten this far if it weren’t for you two. You two were pretty cool back there. So you two have earned my respect as well”, she says.

 

Maddie: “You…you respect me? You really mean that?”

 

Sasha: “Yeah, girl! You’re the bomb!”

 

Maddie smiles.

 

Jim: “Well! I think this entire challenge has proved you’ve learned the secret fourth lesson…”

 

Maddie: “Huh? What’s that?”

 

Jim: “To believe in one another. You believed in Maddie’s ability to get you across the maze, Marcy's ability to choose the correct door, and Sasha's ability to defeat that monster. Truth is, nobody makes it in this world on their own. But when people work together…there’s no limit to what we can accomplish. Don’t forget that.”

 

The girls nod. 

 

Jim: “Now then, let us proceed to the final room!”

 

The four of them walk through the door to the last room. It is small and empty.

 

Jim: “Ah, now this brings back memories…I remember when I passed this same challenge several years ago. It was then I received this new staff from my father.”

 

Sasha: “I mean, that’s just a branch, right?”

 

Jim: “Kinda. But it is able to cast spells that regular staffs are not.”

 

Marcy: “Like creating a Rememb-orb?”

 

Jim: “Among other things, yes.”

 

Maddie: “Do you mind making one now?”

 

Jim: “Yes, you have proven you will not misuse it.”

 

Sasha: “Misuse…?”

 

Jim taps his staff to the ground, and, at the top, a crystal ball starts to take shape. It then solidifies.

 

Jim: “It is made.”

 

Jim is then knocked out by an unseen assailant. He drops his staff and the Rememb-orb, which he catches before they hit the floor. 

 

Clarence: “You girls are certainly obstinate."

 

Sasha: “You!”

 

Maddie: “Who…who is that?”

 

Marcy: “That’s Clarence! The guy who took away everyone’s memories!”

 

Maddie: “What…what are you doing here?!”

 

Clarence: “Isn’t it obvious? This artifact poses a threat to my goal of getting you to leave. On the other hand, if I use it, it will significantly help me…”

 

Sasha: “That thing only brings back memories. How could you possibly use it to your benefit?”

 

Clarence looks at Maddie. He recognizes her.

 

Clarence: “You…I know you. You’re that magic girl, who works at the bakery.”

 

Maddie: “The name’s Maddie. I’d say it’s a pleasure to meet you, but it isn’t.”

 

Clarence: “And you lot are all friends then?”

 

The girls nod.

 

Clarence: “And friends, they don’t keep secrets from each other, do they?”

 

Marcy and Sasha look at each other while frowning.

 

Sasha: “No…friends sometimes keep secrets from each other…”

 

Marcy: “And even if it’s for a good reason, it’s not right. But real friends understand why they keep secrets from each other.”

 

Clarence: “Well then. Let’s put that theory to the test, shall we?  I can tell you now that while Rememb-orbs can be used to restore people’s memories, they can also be used to…corrupt them.”

 

Marcy and Sasha gasp.

 

Clarence: “That’s right. I failed in my first attempt to get you to leave Amphibia. But this time, I won’t just make everyone a stranger to you. I’ll give them memories that will make people abhor you. In other words, it won’t just be me that will want you gone. It’ll be everyone else, too!"

 

Marcy: “You…you can’t do that!”

 

“I can, and I will...", Clarence says, before smirking and looking at Maddie while holding up the orb. "...but you already knew that this was capable of doing so, didn’t you, Maddie?”

 

Maddie’s eyes go wide.

 

Sasha: “That…that can’t be…”

 

Clarence: “I know you two have lied to your friend Anne in the past. But she was able to forgive you, even after what you made her go through. Now it’s time for you to do the same for Maddie. Of course, whether you do so is entirely up to you.”

 

Maddie has tears forming in her eyes.

 

Clarence: “Now, Maddie. You should know I have no quarrel with you. I just want them gone. But rest assured, if you continue assisting them, I won’t be so kind to you the next time we meet. Besides, considering you just shattered what little trust you had with them, I think it’s best that you just cut your losses.”

 

Clarence hears fast footsteps behind him. He turns around and sees Anne.

 

Clarence: “Well, this was a nice talk. But I’m afraid I have to get going. Oh, but just so you can’t reverse this…”

 

Clarence takes the staff and snaps it against his knee.

 

Sasha, Marcy, & Maddie: “No!”

 

Clarence uses his wand to teleport. Anne tries to tackle him, but barely misses him and lands on the ground. She groans.

 

Anne: “What were you guys doing?! How could you just let him get aw-”

 

Anne looks up from the ground to see Sasha with her hands balled into fists. Marcy is holding her face in her hands. Maddie is looking at the ground.

 

Anne: “What…what’s going on here…?”

 

Sasha: “I can’t believe you, Maddie. This whole time, I thought you were helping us.”

 

Maddie: “I…I was. That was my only intention…”

 

“But you didn’t think to mention that maybe something like this could happen? You’ve just made things go from bad to worse…", Sasha says, before turning her back to Maddie. "...I don’t even want to look at you right now. All the respect I had for you just vanished.”

 

Maddie shakes her head before runing out the cave. 

 

Anne: “Maddie, wait!”

 

Marcy: “Sash, that was harsh…”

 

Sasha: “Oh, come on, Marcy! All of this could have been avoided if she had just been honest with us!”

 

Marcy: “But-”

 

Sasha: “And yeah, I know that sounds hypocritical coming from me. But…I hate seeing people who remind me of who I used to be.”

 

Jim comes to.

 

Anne: “Guys, what happened?”

 

Jim: “This is something I, too, would like to know. But this isn’t the place to chat. Let’s just go back to my hut.”

Chapter 16: The Decision

Summary:

Anne, Sasha, Marcy, and Maddie make one final stand against Clarence.

Chapter Text

Anne, Sasha, Marcy, and Jim are sitting inside the hut. 

 

Anne: “...so that’s what he meant. He wants to make everyone remember us as awful people.”

 

Marcy and Sasha nod. 

 

Anne: “And Maddie knew this was a possibility, and didn’t tell us.”

 

Marcy and Sasha nod once more. Anne sighs.

 

Sasha: “Anne, how did you do it?”

 

Anne: “What?”

 

Sasha: “When we were on the Toad Tower. I betrayed you. I tried hurting Sprig. I almost got Hop Pop killed. But you…you still leapt to my rescue without even thinking about it.”

 

Anne sighs. “Look, I haven’t told anyone this, but…there’s a reason I try to be kind to everyone I meet. When I was young, I had an uncle we tried to visit every weekend. He was a selfless person. He helped everyone out, in whatever way he could…whenever he could. He made everyone around him smile. I wanted to be like him when I grew up. But there was one weekend, where my uncle wasn’t at home. My aunt just told me he was on a journey, to spread love and kindness to others in the world. It wasn’t until I was older that I found out he was sick”, she says.

 

Marcy puts her right hand over her mouth. Sasha closes her eyes and faces down.

 

Anne starts to cry. “I didn’t understand why nobody told me. If I had known he only had a few years left in him, I would have cherished my time with him more. But…my aunt told me why. He knew his time on Earth was limited. And so he lived by this motto, that it’s not how long your life is that matters. It’s what you do that counts. And he just wanted to make the world a better place for as long as he could”, she says. 

 

Anne wipes her tears. “And so, that’s why I try to be unconditionally nice to people. Sure, it’s…difficult at times. But you never really know what a person is dealing with. Even small gestures remind people the world isn’t such a cruel place. You guys did some bad things. But you had good reasons, so you’re not bad people. That’s why I didn’t even have to think.”

 

Sasha starts to cry and stands up. “I…have to go. I have to find Maddie and apologize to her”, she says.

 

Sasha walks out the front door, and starts to run.

 


 

Maddie is in the alcove of a rock wall. Sasha sneaks up behind her and observes her using a stick to sketch Marcy and Sasha’s face in the dirt. Sasha jumps down. Maddie notices her, but then looks back at her art.

 

“Hey, that’s a pretty good drawing of us. You ever think of being an artist?”

 

Maddie continues to draw. “What do you want?”

 

Sasha sighs. “Look, what I said back there wasn’t right.”

 

“No, I think you hit the nail on the head. You three naturally came to trust me quickly because I was one of the only people who could help you. And I let you down.”

 

"Yeah, but...I can't say I haven't done the same.”

 

“That’s not the same. You three are friends. Besides, I’m sure you had a valid reason. What reason do I have for not telling you?”

 

“...hey, besides us three, do you have...any other friends?”, she asks.

 

"Huh? No…I mean I guess I’m friends with my sisters, but I don’t think that counts. Sprig and Ivy are also kinda my friends, but they tend to hang out with each other, and they really only talk to me if they need a favor. You three were kinda my first real friends, but ya know, you were gone for five years.”

 

“Then it just sounds like you have difficulty talking with people. If you don’t have friends, it’s difficult to know how to act around others. And besides, I’m sure people would like the real you if they just gave you a chance. I know because I did.”

 

“I don’t know, I’ve been told I creep people out. But that’s just kinda the way I am.”

 

“Well, that kinda makes you like a…uh…pineapple!”

 

Maddie looks at Sasha with a confused look.

 

“Uh, I mean…the first person to discover the pineapple probably didn’t think it was meant to be eaten because of all the spikes, right? But they cracked it open and found it to be delicious. In a similar way, people might look at you and think you’re eerie, but if they got to know you, they’d find you were cool.”

 

“Uh…”

 

Sasha: “Look, it’s not the best analogy, but you get what I’m saying, right?”

 

Maddie: “Yeah, I guess…but…”

 

Sasha: “Look, I’ve lied to Anne before…more than once. I hated myself for it, even after she forgave me. So I tried to make things right. You may have messed up, but I know your heart’s in the right place. I’m giving you another chance, in the same way that Anne did for me.”

 

Sasha stands up, and holds her hand out to Maddie. Maddie grabs her hand, and Sasha helps her up. Maddie smiles.

 

Maddie: “Thanks, Sasha.”

 

Maddie and Sasha head back to the hut.

 


 

Jim is outside the hut, casting some spell over it. Sasha and Maddie run up, and he notices them.

 

Jim: “Ah! Good to see you two back. I just finished applying a forcefield to my abode.”

 

Sasha: “Forcefield? What for?”

 

Jim: “That Clarence fella is going to use that Rememb-orb soon. You will be safe here.”

 

Sasha: “Can’t you just…”

 

Anne opens the door. “Sasha, Maddie. Get in here. Now”, she says.

 

Sasha and Maddie do as instructed. Anne then closes the door behind them.

 

Sasha: “Uh, so what’s the plan?”

 

Anne: “Don’t really have one.”

 

Sasha: “Huh? But…”

 

Anne: “Look, while you guys were patching things up, Jim explained to us what would happen. Once Clarence casts that spell, everyone will think we did terrible things to them. They’ll come after us, and because his staff was broken, he can’t make another Rememb-orb. And because that staff was sorta “one-of-a-kind”, he can’t just go and get a new one. And while he could get one for Maddie, he wouldn’t have enough time to teach her how to make one.”

 

Marcy: “She’s unfortunately right. Our biggest concern isn’t restoring everyone’s memories at this point. Right now, it’s just making sure we get away from-”

 

Outside, there is a large mob with pitchforks approaching the hut.

 

Marcy: “-them.”

 

Jim: “Oh dear, that spell was cast sooner than I expected. You two need to get going. Now. There’s a back door you can sneak out of.”

 

Sasha: “But what about-”

 

Jim: “I’ll be fine. They just want you. Besides, just because I don’t have my staff, doesn’t mean I can’t use my first wand. Just get out of here!”

 

The four girls nod. They run out the back exit, with nobody noticing them. One of the members of the mob tries to grab a potato, but he gets shocked by the forcefield. The rest of them head towards the hut and bust down the door. They see it is completely empty. They scratch their heads, and leave.

 

Jim chuckles. “Invisibility potion. Works every time”, he says.

 


 

Sasha, Maddie, Marcy, and Anne run into town, but hide in a nearby bush. They see the town is overridden with people holding signs with insulting messages about them about Anne, Marcy, and Sasha.

 

Anne: “OK, the only way off this island is the ship.”

 

Sasha: “Yeah, but look…”

 

They see the sailor that ported them across the sea there is standing guard by his ship.

 

Marcy: “That’s actually pretty smart. He knows we can’t get off the island any other way.”

 

Anne: “Yeah, but how do we get on it, then?”

 

Maddie: “I’ll provide a distraction. On my cue, you three run towards the ship. Got it?”

 

Marcy, Anne, and Sasha nod. Maddie walks out of the bushes, and people notice her.

 

Maddie: “Hey everyone! You guys like magic?”

 

Random axolotl: “Ooh! Can we use it to hurt people? Because I really wanna do that to Anne, Sasha, and Marcy!”

 

Maddie: “Uh, yeah! Of course! I hate Sasha, Marcy, and Anne!”

 

The crowd cheers.

 

Maddie: “Here’s one of my favorites!”

 

Maddie grabs two smoke bombs from her bag. She throws them into the air. When they land, everyone’s vision is obscured. Anne, Sasha, and Marcy make a break for the harbor. Sasha pushes the sailor into the water.

 

Marcy: “Sash!”

 

Sasha: “Dude, he’s a newt. He won’t drown. Now let’s go!”

 

Sasha, Anne, and Marcy get onto the ship. Then Anne makes a realization.

 

Anne: “Wait, how are we supposed to sail this thing without the sailor?”

 

Marcy: “The sailor taught you to sail, didnt you?”

 

Anne: “For like a few minutes.”

 

Sasha: “Anne, we have to get away. Just embrace your inner sailor, and get this ship on the sea!”

 

Anne nods. Maddie boards the ship.

 

Maddie: “Let’s move!”

 

Anne turns the ship towards the sea, but it stops moving.

 

Marcy: “Oh no! The anchor!”

 

Sasha notices the anchor is still at the port. She grabs the chain and tries to lift it out of the water.

 

Marcy: “Sash! There’s a lever you can pull!”

 

Sasha: “That’ll take too long! Look!”

 

Another angry mob is approaching the ship. They’re swimming in the water and trying to get on board. Maddie casts some wind spells to blow some away. 

 

Maddie: “I can’t hold them off forever! There’s too many of them!”

 

Sasha: “Just sit tight!”

 

Marcy: “Sasha, you can’t lift an anchor!”

 

Sasha smirks. “Wanna bet?”, she says.

 

Sasha strains herself to pull the anchor out of the water, as her eyes turn pink. She manages to pull it up and put it on board. She lays on the ground out of exhaustion. With the ship no longer encumbered by the anchor, it moves full speed ahead, leaving the mob behind.

 


 

The four girls are sailing on the sea. Maddie is twiddling her thumbs, Sasha is sitting on a recliner, Marcy is looking at a map, and Anne is steering.

 

Anne: “So, where are we headed exactly?”

 

Marcy: “Hadn’t really thought of that. We just have to stay away from civilization. I think the best place to dock would be…here.”

 

Marcy points to a spot on the map.

 

Anne: “Why there?”

 

Marcy: “It’s far from society, but there isn’t anything dangerous that lives around there. Plus, there’s a forest, so it’ll be easier to hide.”

 

Anne sighs. “Yeah, hiding. How long are we supposed to do that for?”, she says.

 

Marcy: “Oh, come on, Anna-banana. We’ll figure out something. We always do.”

 

Anne steers the ship onto the beach and docks it there. The four of them get off. Marcy leads them to the forest she mentioned earlier. After walking for several hours, they decide to call it a night.

 


 

Sasha, Marcy, Anne, and Maddie are sitting around a campfire.

 

Marcy: “Uh, so I was thinking tomorrow, we could go into Wartwood. Then we can just try to convince people we’re not bad by telling them all the good things we did. And then we can do that for Newtopia-”

 

Anne: “Stop.”

 

Marcy: “Huh?”

 

Anne: “Marcy, you are too hopeful. At this point, we just need to get the Calamity Box recharged, go home, and never come back.”

 

Marcy: “But I said we’d figure out something…”

 

Anne: “There’s nothing to figure out here! Clarence got what he wanted. Or, he got what he thinks he wants. I don’t want to live as a hermit here. It sucks that everyone will think of us the way they do, but there’s nothing else we can do. We just…need to go home. We have friends and family there.”

 

Sasha: “Anne, where is this coming from? You’re not the type to give up so easily…”

 

Anne: “Oh, come on. You saw what those people were saying about us, and what they wanted to do. And it’s not just them. Everyone will be like that. All the people we once called friends are just going to want to get rid of us. It’s better for everyone if we just go home.”

 

Sasha: “Anne, you’ve conquered every challenge you’ve come across. You mean a lot to everyone here, even if they don’t remember you that way. If you leave, I don’t think you’ll be happy, because…you will wonder why you didn’t try.”

 

Anne: “But we could get killed!”

 

Marcy: “It’s like your uncle said, Anne. It doesn’t matter how long you live, it’s what you do with your life that counts.”

 

Anne sighs. “You’re right. If I give up, that’s how it ends. And I’m not letting that happen. Not without putting up a fight”, she says. 

 

Sasha: “We’ll make them believe.”

 

Maddie: “And I’ll help you.”

 

Anne: “But-”

 

Maddie: “No. I did wrong by you three. This is my chance to make amends.”

 

Sasha, Anne, and Marcy nod. The four of them go to sleep.

 


 

Sasha, Marcy, Maddie, and Anne hide out in the bushes near Wartwood. They see that Clarence is in the middle of the town, next to the bulletin board, which has wanted posters for Anne, Sasha, and Marcy.

 

Marcy: “So, do we have an actual plan here?”

 

Maddie: “Yeah. You three just go up there and tell Clarence you’re not leaving. Make sure you stand your ground, and I’ll play my part when the time comes.”

 

Anne: “Sounds good. Let’s get this done!”

 

Sasha: “Guys, wait. Maddie, regardless of what happens, I just wanted to let you know, that despite all the hardships we’ve faced on this journey, and the disagreements we’ve had…I’m glad we got to know you better.”

 

Maddie smiles. “There will be more opportunities for us to learn about each other. I promise”, she says. 

 

Anne, Sasha, and Marcy nod and jump out of the bushes. They only walk for a few moments before Stumpy notices them.

 

Stumpy: “Anne, Sasha, and Marcy are here!”

 

The townsfolk stop what they’re doing to turn around. They catch sight of Anne, Marcy, and Sasha.

 

Mrs. Croaker: “Let’s get them before they can cause any more damage!”

 

The townsfolk start advancing with pitchforks towards Sasha, Marcy, and Anne.

 

Clarence: “My friends, please! There is no need to resort to violence…yet.”

 

The townsfolk stop.

 

Clarence: “Anne, have you finally come to your senses and realize there’s no point in you staying here?”

 

Anne continues staring at him.

 

Clarence: “Not much for conversation today? Suit yourself. You can either go home and never come back. And don’t worry about the stones, I got them recharged for you!”

 

Clarence waves his hand, and the Calamity Box appears on the fountain, with all three of the stones glowing with color. Anne, Sasha, and Marcy are a little surprised, but they don’t show it.

 

Clarence: “Or…you can stay here. But I don’t think you want that. Here, everyone hates you. But back at home, you have a loving family. So what will it be?”

 

Anne: “No.”

 

Clarence: “Still as persistent as ever. Whatever, you can’t say I didn’t give you a choice. Get them!”

 

Again, the townsfolk start advancing with pitchforks towards Sasha, Marcy, and Anne. Before they get too close, Maddie jumps out of the bushes and stands in front of them.

 

Maddie: “STOP!”

 

Clarence: “Y…you! I warned you!”

 

Maddie: “Yeah, you did. And I don’t care.”

 

Chef Flour: “Daughter, what are you doing? Why are you defending these villains?”

 

Maddie: “They’re not villains. They’re my friends!”

 

The townsfolk gasp.

 

Chef Flour: “How can you call them friends? After what they did to me? To your sisters? And especially to you?”

 

Maddie: “I know it doesn’t make any sense why I should be doing this. But the reason why is because…you’ve all had false memories planted in your minds by Clarence over there. Ones designed to make Anne, Marcy, and Sasha look evil.”

 

Clarence laughs. “So you claim I did something to their memories? Don’t you think it’s more likely that you’re delusional?”, he says.

 

Maddie: “Yeah, perhaps. But I am willing to give up a lot for what I believe in.”

 

Clarence: “What do you mean?”

 

Maddie: “These three have been some of the kindest people I’ve ever met, even when the rest of you have treated me poorly. Marcy was one of the first people who treated me like a person when we first met. Sasha helped train me in the Wartwood Resistance, and she saw my magic as a talent, not something to be afraid of. And Anne…well we wouldn’t be here right now if it wasn’t for her. I’m not going to stand by and watch this happen. So if you want to get them, you’ll have to go through me!”

 

The townsfolk gasp. Clarence chuckles.

 

Clarence: “Are you not even going to fight back?”

 

Maddie starts to tear up. “Even if we’re at a disagreement right now…I would never hurt any of you”, she says.

 

Clarence: “Well! It seems like we have a new target on our hands. This ultimately changes nothing. Get them!”

 

The townsfolk don’t move.

 

Clarence: “Uh…why aren’t you attacking them?”

 

Chef Flour scowls. “That’s my daughter! I’m not gonna hurt her. I’m not really sure why she’s acting this way, but family looks out for each other.”

 

Chef Flour goes over and stands by Maddie. Rosemary, Lavender, and Ginger stand next to them as well.

 

Chef Flour: “Are you oout f your mind? They don’t even have any proof!”

 

Marcy gasps as her eyes meet Wally's. “Wait, maybe we do, actually!”

 

Clarence: “What?”

 

Marcy: “Wally, in your accordion case, you should have a piece of paper. Do you mind taking it out and giving it to someone who can read?”

 

Wally: “Uh, sure.”

 

Wally does as instructed and hands the paper to Loggle. He then reads it out loud.

 

Loggle: “It says, ‘I vow to help you, Wally, on your journey to becoming a music star signed by...Marcy Wu’”.

 

Wally: “Oi! I don’t remember you saying anything like that to me…”

 

Sasha: “I have proof, too! Sylvia, in your notebook, you should have a quote that says ‘Sharing is caring’. Do you mind reading who said that?"

 

Sylvia pulls a notebook out of her satchel.

 

Sylvia: “It says you said this…but I don’t remember writing this down.”

 

Anne: “And I have proof as well! Toadie, on your list of people who can vote here. Whose name is at the bottom?”

 

Toadie pulls out a list from his briefcase. “It says...‘Anne Boonchuy’. It says I put down this note of why I would let you participate in local elections so I wouldn’t forget…but somehow…I did”, he says.

 

Felicia: “Maybe Maddie is telling the truth. Maybe Clarence was just trying to get us to hurt good people!”

 

The townsfolk have now turned to Clarence.

 

Clarence: “People, please! There’s a perfectly valid explanation for this!”

 

“So, you think it’s fine to have us hurt our friends?", Stumpy says, as he raises his pitchfork, along with the other townsfolk. "...if that’s the case, don’t take this personally!” 

 

Clarence has to back away from the townsfolk trying to stab him. He is nearing a wall.

 

Anne: “N-no…this isn’t what I wanted…”

 

The blue gem in the Calamity Box starts reacting to Anne’s feeling. It pours energy over her, and changes her into her Calamity Form. Her body then moves towards the mob before she even realizes what’s happening. Just as Clarence has nowhere left to run, and someone tries to deal a finishing blow to him, Anne blocks it with her sword. Everyone is in shock. 

 

Toadstool: “Anne! What in tarnation are you doing?”

 

Anne calms down. 

 

Anne: “Look, Clarence here has done some outright dreadful things to me. By all means, I should hate him. But…I can’t bring myself to…”

 

Loggle: “Uh…why not?”

 

Anne: “Because I caused his son to run away from home. Even if it wasn’t intentional, I am still responsible. He was angry at himself, and he just channeled that towards me. He may have some…wrongdoings to answer for, but he doesn’t deserve this. No one does.

 

The townsfolk lower their weapons.

 

Clarence: “Anne, please…”

 

Anne turns around.

 

Clarence: “I have no one left. The people of Wartwood hate me and I’ve done appalling things to you. I just…I wanna see my wife and kid again…”

 

“Dad?”, a meek voice calls out from the crowd.

 

Clarence: “...th-that…that voice. It can’t be…”

 

A green frog takes off his hat. Clarence sees him and his eyes go wide.

 

Clarence: “Daniel! You’re alive!”

 

Clarence runs and hugs him. “Daniel, I’m so sorry, I shouldn’t have lied to you like that…” he says.

 

Daniel: “It’s fine, Dad. You didn’t lie to me. Honestly, it wasn’t until later that I realized that you should always be kind, even if people don’t take notice. I was so focused on getting attention that I didn’t really think about that.”

 

Clarence: “Wait a minute…you went missing five years ago. How is it that you’ve been here the whole time?”

 

Daniel: “I did leave for a few days. But…I realized the wilderness was dangerous, and I almost got eaten. So I came back, but…you weren’t here. But I figured you’d come back. And yesterday, you did. But…I saw you devastated at the loss of me. I didn’t really wanna say anything because…I realized I also left you alone. That was wrong of me, and…I’m sorry.”

 

A tear falls down Clarence's cheek. “Just you being here is enough to make that all OK…”

 

Toadie clears his throat as Clarence lets go of his son.

 

Clarence: “Ah, I apologize to all of you too. I’ll serve whatever punishment you have in mind.”

 

Toadie: “Life in prison seems the most appropriate, considering what you’ve done.”

 

Daniel: “I can at least visit my dad, right?”

 

Toadie: “Yes, you can.”

 

Clarence: “Before I go, I have one more thing to do.”

 

Clarence pulls out the Rememb-orb from his pocket and gives it to Maddie. “Here, this is rightfully yours. You passed that challenge, and I didn’t”, he says.

 

Maddie nods, as Buck Leatherleaf takes Clarence to jail. 

 

Maddie: “Anne, do you mind coming over here?”

 

Anne walks over to Maddie. 

 

Maddie: “Attention, everyone! In order for me to restore your memories, I…first have to make you forget about Anne, Marcy, and Sasha…”

 

Sasha: “What? Why?”

 

Maddie: “You can’t have conflicting memories. In other words, everything that’s happened these past several days…none of you will have any recollection of this. Which is why I’m asking you what you want to do.”

 

The townsfolk think for a moment. 

 

Toadie: “Well, from what it sounds like, you three were upstanding inhabitants of Amphibia. It’d be nice to have the good memories we had of you, rather than the fake ones.”

 

The townsfolk murmur in agreement. Maddie then pulls out her wand, and the town is enveloped in a white light.

 


 

Anne, Sasha, Marcy, and Maddie are sitting in Maddie’s room.

 

Marcy: “So, you used the Rememb-orb to just think that everyone lived their lives normally these past few days? And that everyone just thought we were out of town.”

 

Maddie nods.

 

Marcy: “And the memories that people had, they really took place?”

 

Maddie nods again.

Anne: “Magic is some powerful stuff, dude.”

 

Maddie chuckles. “Yeah, it certainly is. That’s why I like it so much.”

 

Anne: “So what are you going to do with the orb? I mean, it sounds like it’s gonna be the only one for a while…”

 

Maddie: “Hadn’t thought of that. I’ll just keep it to myself for the time being. I’ll figure out what to do with it later.”

 

Sasha: “Hey, Maddie?”

 

Maddie: “Yeah?”

 

Sasha: “Uh, thanks for having our backs back there.”

 

Maddie: “Well, that’s what friends do for each other, right?”

 

Sasha smiles. “Yeah, they sure do. Come on guys, bring it in!”, she says.

 

Sasha forces everyone into a group hug. Marcy, Anne, and Maddie smile.

 

Anne: “Eh, it’s getting late. I hope we can meet again soon.”

 

Maddie: “Yeah, me too. Don’t be a stranger.”

 

Anne, Marcy and Sasha leave the bakery.

 

Sasha: “Hey Anne?”

 

Anne: “Yeah?”

 

Sasha: “How come you were able to use your calamity powers, even though your stone had been recharged?”

 

Anne stops in her tracks. Then she remembers her meeting with Carly.

 

Anne: “I didn’t tell you guys this, but Valeriana is gone. Her successor is named Carly. She was the one to recharge the stone, but she did it much quicker than Valeriana. Then she told me her taking a long time might have been intentional on her part, but she didn’t specify why…”

 

Marcy: “Do you think Carly did this on purpose, too?”

 

Anne: “Maybe…but I don’t know why. I guess I can just ask her tomorrow…”

 

Marcy: “Yeah, because your birthday’s in a few weeks, isn’t it? And your parents wanted you back for that.”

 

Anne: “Yeah, I can’t miss that. I don’t want my parents worrying about me…”

 

Sasha: “Well, I gotta head back to Toad Tower. Grime has missed me. And you gotta get back to Newtopia, Mar-mar.”

 

Marcy: “Oh, yeah. There’s a snail taxi over there. We can get a ride together, I can just use the royal credit card to pay for the trip!”

 

Anne: “Well, see you around!”

 

Sasha and Marcy wave as they head towards the taxi. Anne heads back home.

 


 

Anne opens the door to her home. Hop Pop is drinking juice. He notices Anne and spits out his drink.

 

Hop Pop: “Anne! You’re back! Sprig, Polly, your big sister’s home!”

 

Sprig and Polly come running down the stairs and hug Anne. Hop Pop joins in. Anne starts to bawl.

 

Polly: “Aw, come on, you didn’t miss us that much, did you?”

 

Sprig: “So where did you go?”

 

Anne: “Oh, uh…we went to this place called the Axolotl Archipelago. Axolotls live there.”

 

Hop Pop: “That must be where Loggle’s from!”

 

Anne: “Yeah, I think you’re right. There was a blacksmith in town, and I know Loggle used to be one. Uh, anyways I’m kinda tired. I’m going to bed.”

 

Anne heads downstairs to her room and flops onto the bed. She falls asleep almost instantly.

 


Maddie is trying to sleep. She hears her father’s footsteps outside her door, and then his door closes. She then gets out of bed, picks up the Rememb-orb and grabs a shovel. She then jumps out the window. She digs a hole and buries the Rememb-orb.

 

“I’m sorry, you guys. This item is too valuable to get rid of. But it’s also too dangerous in the wrong hands. It’s better if only I know where it is.”

Chapter 17: How I met your Frog-ther

Summary:

Ivy realizes she may have known her father without actually knowing him.

Chapter Text

Anne is sleeping in her bed when her alarm goes off. She groans.

 

“Gotta get ready…I have to go ask Carly about the Calamity Box…”

 

Anne shuts the alarm off her phone. She rolls out of bed, puts the Calamity Box in her backpack, and puts it on her back. She walks upstairs, and walks into the bathroom. She brushes her teeth and washes her face. She then walks outside to see Hop Pop sitting at the table drinking some coffee. He notices her.

 

Hop Pop: “Uh…good morning, Anne! You seemed tuckered out last night, wasn’t really expecting you to get up this early…”

 

Anne: “Oh, yeah…I had something to take care of today. Don’t you normally get up later?”

 

“I try to, but when you get this old, sometimes your body just wakes itself up, and you can’t get back to sleep no matter what you do", Hop Pop says, before narrowing his eyes. "You weren’t…looking to avoid me, were you?”

 

Anne sighs. “I mean, kinda…it’s not like I don’t wanna see you. But I figured that you guys might wanna spend the day with me if I got up at the same time as the rest of you. And it’s not like I don’t wanna hang out with you, I just have something to take care of today”, she says.

 

Hop Pop: “When will you be back?”

 

Anne: “I shouldn’t be gone long. When I come back, we can hang out.”

 

Hop Pop: “Sounds good. Want a cup of coffee before you go? I just made it.”

 

Anne yawns. “Yeah. I’m not the biggest fan of coffee, but I am still waking up…”, she says.

 

Hop Pop pours her a cup of coffee. She takes a sip and immediately spits it out.

 

Anne: “Why does this taste like…guacamole?”

 

Hop Pop: “Oh, yeah. I forgot to mention. I really liked the avocados I brought back with me, and so I paired it with my coffee! The kids never want to drink it, though. They just get energy drinks at the Grub n’ Go.”

 

Anne: “Uh, yeah. Maybe I’ll do that instead. See you later. Make sure you let Sprig and Polly know where I went.”

 

Hop Pop: “Can do!”

 

Anne walks out the front door. Sprig walks down from his room.

 

Hop Pop: “Wait...she never told me where she was going...”

 

Sprig: “Where who is going?”

 

Hop Pop: “Oh, Sprig! Good morning! Fancy a cup of coffee? I can make some without avocado!”

 

Sprig: “I’m good. Hey, where’s Anne?”

 

Hop Pop: “Oh, she just…uh….went to…uh…practice tennis with herself in the woods. She said she would be back later.”

 

Sprig: “Aw, I was kinda hoping we could just chill. Haven’t seen her in a few days…but I guess I can wait one more day. I guess I can go hang out with Ivy in the meantime…”

 

Sprig walks out the front door towards Felicia’s Tea Shoppe.

 


 

Anne is walking towards the Grub n’ Go. She passes the statue of herself and smiles. She walks inside the store and finds the “Beverage” section. She goes to grab the last can of Red Bullfrog when another hand tries to grab the same one.

 

Anne: “Oh, sorry. You can take it.”

 

“No, you were first”, the frog says.

 

Anne takes a closer look at the frog. He is green and wearing a hat that covers his face. She notices he’s a bit familiar. Then it clicks.

 

Anne: “Hey, your name wouldn’t happen to be Daniel, would it?”

 

His eyes go wide. He looks around, and sees that the rest of the store is empty, save for the cashier, who is sleeping.

 

Daniel: “Shush, keep it down. I don’t want anyone to know who I am.” 

 

Anne: “Oh, sorry…”

 

Daniel: “But how…how did you know my name?”

 

Anne: “Uh, I can’t really explain it in a way that would make sense. All I know is I took something from you five years ago. And…I just wanted to apologize for that.”

 

Daniel rubs his chin before smiling.

 

Daniel: “Oh, I know what you’re talking about. You must know I was trying to win Frog of the Year, right?”

 

Anne: “Yeah. And I kinda just came out of nowhere and stole that from you. You should know I didn’t vote for myself, and well…if I had known how hard you were working for it, I would have taken myself out of the running.”

 

Daniel chuckles. “You didn’t take anything from me. You won fair and square. And the fact that you think this way just proves you earned that title”, he says.

 

Anne: “Oh, thanks…but because you ran away, you weren’t able to win these past few years…”

 

Daniel: “You didn’t cause me to leave, though. That was my choice. You don’t have anything to apologize for.”

 

Anne: “True as that may be, I still feel bad…”

 

Daniel: “Look, when I came back after running away, I figured people would ask why I left. I didn’t really wanna deal with that, so I made a deal with Toadstool. He told me that he would keep my being back in Wartwood a secret, by giving me a fake name. That way, I could stay until my dad came back.”

 

Anne: “But…were you ever in the running for Frog of the Year?”

 

Daniel chuckles. “No, I wasn’t. I wanted to attract as little attention to myself as possible. But then I realized the title didn’t really matter to me. I was so focused on winning that I completely missed the meaning of what the title really means. You shouldn’t be kind so you can get a reward; you should do it because it’s the right thing to do”, he says.

 

Anne smiles. “You know, I’d think we’d make good friends”, she says.

 

Daniel: “R-really? But you just met me…”

 

Anne: “Yeah, but…I have a similar motto I live by. Besides, you’ve kept yourself hidden because you don’t want people learning who you really are. But I know who you are. And sure, maybe being kind isn’t something you need to be regarded for. But, it certainly helps to feel appreciated.”

 

Daniel: “You won’t tell anyone about me, will you?”

“Eh…I’m not really one to keep secrets...", Anne says, before winking. "...but I can make an exception for you.”

 

Daniel smiles. “Thank you”, he says.

 

A stock clerk walks through the doors and restocks the shelves. Among the items he puts on the shelves are more cans of Red Bullfrog.

 

Anne: “Hey, now we can each get one!”

 

Daniel: “Yeah!”

 

They each grab a can and check out. Then they walk outside. 

 

Daniel: “It was nice meeting you. I’d like to hang out, but…I gotta visit my dad. He’s in jail for life, but they won’t tell me what he’s done…must have been pretty bad though…”

 

Anne: “Ah, well, he did something right. He raised you.”

 

Daniel: “Yeah…anyways, I’ll see you around.”

 

Daniel heads towards the jail, while Anne heads towards the snowy mountain.

 


 

Anne approaches Carly’s house. She knocks on the door.

 

“Hey Carly? Do you have a few minutes? I just wanted to talk…”

 

Anne waits a few moments. She pulls on the door knob.

 

“Carly, did you hear m-”

 

Anne notices that Carly isn’t here, nor is her staff. There is a sign in the middle of the room that says “Out to Lunch. She raises her hands in the air in frustration.

 

“Oh, come on! Who has lunch this early in the morning!", Anne says, before lowering her hands. "Oh, wait…I’ve had lunch this early in the morning…whatever. She’ll be back soon.”

 

She notices there’s a bowl of wrapped, hard candies. She grabs one, unwraps it, and pops the candy into her mouth, leaving the wrapper on the table. She then sits down, and within a few moments, she pulls out her phone.

 

“I guess I can play that Bonbon Bash game until she shows up…”

 


 

Wally is sleeping in a hospital bed, with a doctor overlooking him. He comes to.

 

“Oi, how did I get here?”

 

“Wally, can you tell me what happened?”

 

“Oh…I was just having a pint at Stumpy’s, and the next thing I knew, I was here.”

 

“How often do you go there? And what do you typically eat?”

 

“I’m in there pretty much every day. I normally just get a few drinks there. And I just eat whatever bugs I can find outside my house.”

 

“Hmm…Wally, as your doctor I can’t legally force you to do things, but I highly recommend you change your diet. Stumpy brought you here, because he said you just passed out in his restaurant, and I suspect a lack of nutrients might have been the cause. If you don’t change what you consume, you might have more of those.”

 

“Aww. Well, I suppose a change of pace never hurt anyone…”

 

“That’s the spirit! I recommend trying Felicia’s Tea Shoppe. Their beverages are delicious but also healthy.”

 

“Thanks, Doc!”

 

Wally gets out of the hospital bed and walks outside the clinic. He starts heading over to Felicia’s Tea Shoppe. Inside the shop, Sprig, Felicia, and Ivy are talking.

 

Ivy: “Thanks for coming over today, Sprig. I didn’t have any quests I could fulfill, and I know helping out at a tea shop isn’t all that exciting…”

 

Sprig: “Ah, not everything we do together has to be full of danger. Just hanging out with you is good enough for me!”

 

Ivy smiles.

 

Felicia: “I do appreciate you helping today as well, Sprig. You two look so cute together!”

 

Sprig and Ivy blush before there’s a knock on the door.

 

Ivy: “What? We’re not open for another hour. Who could that be?”

 

Ivy opens the door to see Wally standing outside.

 

Wally: “Oh, hello!”

 

Ivy: “Dude, what are you doing here? We’re closed. Didn’t you read the sign?”

 

Wally looks at the sign. “Ah, sorry. Can’t read.”

 

Ivy sighs. Felicia comes up behind her.

 

Felicia: “Ivy! Wally here is a customer. We don’t turn away customers unless we have a good reason to.”

 

Ivy: “Is being closed not enough of a reason?”

 

Felicia: “Well, no…but he’s here, and he wants to dine here.”

 

Wally: “Ah, if I’m too much of a bother, I can just come back later…”

 

Felicia: “No, no. That’s fine. Come in!”

 

Wally walks in meekly. He notices the place is empty, so he just sits down at the table closest to the counter. He picks up the menu before dropping it.

 

Wally: “Ah, right. Still can’t read.”

 

Felicia: “Ah, don’t worry. I can pick out an item for you. Were you looking for anything in particular?”

 

Wally: “Ah, what was it that the doctor said? Something about nutrients?”

 

Felicia: “Oh, were you looking for a healthy option?”

 

Wally: “Uh, yeah…do you have anything like that?”

 

Felicia: “Yeah, I think a good one might be black tea. It’s a little bitter, but it helps out with cholesterol.”

 

Wally: “Uh…don’t know what this is, but I trust your judgment. I’ll have one of those!”

 

Felicia walks into the kitchen. 

 

Felicia: “Bruce, do you mind making a cup of black tea?”

 

“For you?”

 

Felicia: “No, for our customer.”

 

“Customer? We’re not open yet…”

 

“I know. Let's just say he’s...", Felicia says, before giggling. "…a special guest.”

 

“If you say so…”

 

Bruce begins boiling water, and collecting black tea leaves. Felicia walks back outside and sits at the other end of the table Wally’s sitting at.

 

Felicia: “So tell me, Wally. What brings you in here today?”

 

Wally: “Ah, had a bit of a fainting spell at Stumpy’s. Doc told me I needed a better diet so he recommended this place. I heard it’s good but…I dunno. I feel like this isn’t really my style, ya know?”

 

Felicia: “What do you mean?”

 

Wally: “Well, everyone in town knows me as the weirdo…not that I care. But this place is for more civilized people, like you.”

 

Felicia giggles. “Well, just know you’re always welcome here. And if anyone is bothering you here, I’ll tell them that’s not OK”, she says.

 

Wally: “That’s nice of you. But like I said, I don’t care what people think of me.”

 

Felicia: “And that’s a good thing! But you should have a little respect for yourself. It’s difficult to do that with people making fun of you.”

 

Wally: “Ah, but…I feel like I’m not really worthy of respect. I mean, people respected me during the Wartwood Resistance, but everyone there was being cool. And now I’m back to being just…’me’.”

 

Felicia: “But there’s nothing wrong with ‘you’. And for what it’s worth, I respect you.”

 

Wally: “You…you do?”

 

Felicia: “Yeah…even before the Resistance. I know we don’t talk much, but it’s tough for me to not care what other people think. I have to meet high expectations, and whenever someone has a complaint, I feel like I’ve failed. But you…you just go with the flow. I wish I could do that.”

 

Wally: “Ah, it’s been a while since someone’s given me a compliment. Thanks!”

 

Felicia giggles. “My pleasure. Your tea should be out soon. Let me know if you need anything else”, she says.

 

Felicia walks back to the counter. 

 

"Tea’s ready.”

 

Sprig: “I’ll get it to Wally.”

 

Sprig grabs the teacup and brings it over to Wally. He begins drinking it. Sprig comes back to the counter. Felicia rests her chin on her hand, and sighs dreamily while looking at Wally. Ivy raises an eyebrow.

 

Ivy: “Mom.”

 

Felicia: “Yes, dearie?”

 

Ivy: “I’ve never seen you try to be so nice to any customer before. You let Wally in here, even though we weren’t open, and because he’s…well, Wally…and you personally helped him pick out a beverage. You even lied to him about respecting him.”

 

Felicia: “I didn’t lie. I really meant what I said.”

 

Ivy: “But…how can you respect him? He’s a vagrant!”

 

Felicia giggles. “Well, no, you’re not wrong about that. But he was a real go-getter back in the day”, she says.

 

Ivy: “Back in the day? You mean five years ago?”

 

Felicia: “Mmm, closer to twenty.”

 

Ivy: “You’ve known Wally for two decades?”

 

Felicia: “Well, sure. Why wouldn’t I know your dad for such a long time?”

 

Sprig’s eyes go wide as Ivy bursts out laughing.

 

Ivy: “That’s a good one, mom!”

 

Felicia stares at Ivy, as her laughter subsides.

 

Ivy: “Wh-why aren’t you laughing?”

 

Felicia: “Because I wasn’t joking.”

 

Ivy's expression changes to one of confusion.

 

Wally: “Oi, why are you havin’ a giggle over there?”

 

Sprig: “Oh, uh. I just told Ivy this really funny joke. Wanna hear it?

 

Wally: “Sure. I love a good knee slapper!”

 

Sprig: “Uh…why was the frog sad?”

 

Wally: “Uh…I don’t know. Why?”

 

Sprig: “Cuz his snail got toad!”

 

Wally starts laughing. “That’s a good one, Sprig!”

 

Ivy: “Mom, can we have a word in the back?”

 

Felicia: “But someone’s gotta-”

 

Ivy: “Just ask Bruce to keep watch.”

 

Felicia: “Hmm…all right.”

 

Felicia goes into the kitchen. Bruce then comes out, and stands at the counter. Felicia then waves to Ivy. Ivy goes into the kitchen. Sprig notices, and enters as well.

 

Felicia: “Sprig, I know you’re Ivy’s friend, but this is a personal family matter…”

 

Ivy: “Hey, Sprig’s my best friend. He should hear this, too.”

 

Felicia: “Well, OK. So I’m guessing you want to hear about how Wally came to be your dad?”

 

Ivy: “Uh, yeah. Kinda.”

 

Felicia giggles. “It’s a funny story really. It all began around my 20th birthday. My mother told me something important that day. She told me to never give up on my dreams.

 

Sprig: “And what was your dream?”

 

Felicia: “To start my own tea shop, of course! But, I found some difficulty in doing so. I didn’t really have a lot of money to start my own business, and I couldn’t find anyone who could really help. Plus, I didn’t even know the first thing about keeping a business running.”

 

Ivy: “Sounds like some things got in the way of your dreams.”

 

Felicia: “Sadly, yes. But I wasn’t going to let some small things like that ruin my dream. I realized that if I was going to see this through, I would need help from someone outside Wartwood. So I left town, and I found myself in a place called Ribbitvale…”

 

Ivy: “I heard about that place. They say it's the fanciest town in all of Amphibia.”

 

Felicia: “Yes, and that’s also where I met Wally. Or, as he was called there, Walliam.”

 


 

Felicia is riding on a snail into Ribbitvale, and she looks around.

 

"This place is perfect! Everyone here must be rich. All I gotta do is find someone who wants to invest in my tea shop and provide their business expertise!”

 

Felicia sees Wally, who has two functional eyes, talking with his father. His father leaves, and Wally sighs and sits on a bench. Felicia walks over and sits down next to him.

 

“Why hello there!”

 

“Are…are you talking to me?”

 

Felicia giggles. “Who else would I be talking to, silly? My name is Felicia. Nice to meet you”, she says.

 

“I’m Wally. It’s, uh, nice to meet you too. I’m kinda surprised you came up and just started talking to me. Most people in this town try to avoid me. Everyone knows me as the local weirdo. Everyone…except my family, of course.”

 

"Why do people think of you that way?”

 

“Well, they’re not wrong. Living in this town is boring, so I try to liven things up by playing my accordion! But people here are just so stuck in their own ways, that they think anything outside of ‘prim and proper’ is strange. People have told my family about me, but they don’t believe them. They think I’m just like them, but…I’m not. I have a dream to leave this place and be my own person.”

 

Felicia smiles. “Maybe we can help each other, then”, she says.

 

“What do you mean?”

 

“Well, the reason I came here is because I have a dream as well, and I’m not letting anything stop me from achieving it.”

 

“What is your dream?”

 

“It’s to start my own tea shop. Maybe if you can convince your family that it’s a worthwhile investment, then they’ll let you leave.”

 

“Ah, that’s a great idea! My father would love to hear about this!”

 

Wigbert walks from around the corner. 

 

Wigbert: “Love to hear about what?”

 

Wally and Felicia jump in their seats a bit.

 

Wally: “Ah, father! How much of that did you hear?”

 

Wigbert: “Just that part about me loving something…who is this?”

 

Wally: “Oh! This is my new friend and potential business partner, Felicia.”

 

Wigbert: “Business partner, eh? And what is your business, young lady?”

 

Felicia: “Well, right now, it’s just an idea. But I was thinking of a tea shop.”

 

Wally: “And I can provide the money she needs, and help her get set up!”

 

Wigbert: “Splendid! We can talk more about this at dinner.”

 

Felicia: “You’re…inviting me to dinner?”

 

“Oh, yes. It’s tradition for us Ribbitons to talk business over supper", Wigbert says, as he points to a house in the distance. "My home is that one, with the white bricks. Please arrive by 7 PM.”

 

Wigbert goes back the way he came. Felicia sighs.

 

“What’s the matter? Aren’t you excited? You can finally get your business going!”

 

“Yeah, I’m just a little nervous. I’ve never really ‘talked business’ with anyone before.”

 

“My father may seem intimidating, but he’s kind. I’m sure he’ll agree to our arrangement.”

 

“All right. See you later tonight?”

 

“For sure!”

 


 

Felicia, who is wearing a pink tuxedo, walks into the Ribbiton Manor. She finds the dining room and enters. Wigbert notices her, and he clinks his spoon against his wine glass.

 

Wigbert: “Attention, everyone! Our lady of the hour is here!”

 

Everyone in the room starts to clap. Felicia smiles, and takes a seat next to Wally.

 

Felicia: “Thank you, Mr. Ribbiton. You have a lovely home.”

 

Wigbert: “Glad you like it. You said you wanted to start your own tea shop, if I remember correctly?”

 

Felicia nods.

 

Wigbert: “Well then, I think instead of talking, a demonstration is more in order. Martin, do you mind taking the rest of the day off?”

 

Martin: “Will I get paid for it?”

 

Wigbert: “No.”

 

Martin: “Aww…”

 

Martin leaves the dining room, as Felicia looks around curiously.

 

Felicia: “Um, what’s going on?”

 

Wigbert: “Martin normally makes our tea for us. But tonight, you will be.”

 

Felicia gasps.

 

Wigbert: “Now, now. If you can make us a good pot of tea, I will believe that your business will be worth the investment.”

 

Felicia smiles shyly.

 

Wigbert: “Of course, if your tea is subpar, I will tell people in this town that your business will likely fail, and your likelihood of getting an investor will be slim to none in the future. No pressure, though.”

 

Felicia gulps.

 

Wigbert: “Now then, in the kitchen, you will find some of the best tea supplies you can find in Amphibia. Feel free to make us whatever you wish.”

 

Felicia slowly gets up from her seat and enters the kitchen. She looks around for ten minutes, trying to decide what to make. 

 

Felicia: “Maybe I can make…no, they probably wouldn’t like that…but that’s the one I brew the best…”

 

Felicia starts hyperventilating. She sits down on the floor and holds her knees against her chest, trying to calm herself down.

 


 

Wigbert: “Hmm, she sure seems to be taking a while…”

 

Wally: “Uh, why don’t I go check on her?”

 

Wally gets up from his seat and enters the kitchen. He sees Felicia with her hands over her eyes.

 

“Felicia, what’s wrong?”

 

"I can’t do this…”

 

“What? Why not?”

 

“I’m just…gonna mess it up. And that’ll be the end of my dream…”

 

Wally grabs Felicia by the shoulders, as she takes her hands off her eyes.

 

“Felicia, earlier today you told me nothing was going to get in the way of getting your tea shop up and running. You came all the way out here, and now success is just within reach.”

 

“But-”

 

“No, just…close your eyes."

 

Felicia sighs before closing her eyes.

 

"I want you to imagine us working at your tea shop. Think of all the fun we’ll have, serving grateful customers tea, and us being happy. That can be your reality."

 

Felicia opens her eyes to see Wally with a smile.

 

"I know you can do this. I believe in you.”

 

Felicia stands up proudly. “You’re right. What am I doing? I’m the best tea maker in all of Wartwood. Nothing can stop me!”

 

Wally watches as Felicia grabs several ingredients, and begins brewing a pot of tea, before Wally going outside and sitting back in his chair.

 

Wally: “Felicia will be out shortly.”

 

A few minutes later, Felicia comes out with a pot of tea.

 

Felicia: “I apologize for the wait. I hope you enjoy this jasmine tea!”

 

Felicia pours everyone, save for herself, a cup of her tea. She then sits down next to Wally.

 

Wigbert: “All right, let’s see how this is…”

 

Everyone at the table has a sip of their tea. Wally smiles after his. 

 

Wigbert: “Why, Felicia, this tea…it’s…it’s…”

 

Felicia’s eyes light up. “Yes?”, she asks.

 

Wigbert: “...mediocre at best.”

 

Felicia’s face falls.

 

Wigbert: “I think you boiled the tea for a bit too long. And honestly, it could have used a bit more sugar. I’m afraid you’ve failed your test.”

 

Felicia starts to cry.

 

Wigbert: “You can go out the way you came. And please don’t get your tears on my floor, I just had this place cleaned.”

 

Wally balls his hands into fists as Felicia stands up, and walks towards the exit.

 

Wally: “Father! I have something to say!”

 

Everyone at the table gasps.

 

Wigbert: “Walliam? What is the meaning of this?”

 

Wally: “Felicia came to me earlier today and told me her dream of starting her business. She came all the way here from Wartwood. She’s one of the most determined people I’ve ever met!”

 

Wigbert: “But, Walliam, this tea is just…”

 

Wally: “I thought it was pretty good! Is it perfect? No. But products don’t have to be perfect. Besides, it’s not like she can’t improve. And someone like her will, if she is given the opportunity to.”

 

Wigbert: “Son, this is a risky investment! You could lose all your money.”

 

Wally: “Father, have you ever invested in a business that had to declare bankruptcy?”

 

Wigbert: “Well, of course. But I don’t want that happening to you.”

 

Wally: “You’ve taught me everything about business, but you haven’t given me the chance to actually use it. Sure, maybe investing into Felicia’s business may be a bad idea in hindsight. But, I sure won’t be able to learn any more if I just stay here.”

 

Wigbert: “Walliam…”

 

Wally: “No, father. The money you gave me is mine to use. And I’m choosing to invest it in Felicia’s tea shoppe, and that’s final!”

 

Everyone in the room is completely silent. After a few moments, Wigbert starts to clap. Soon after, everyone else at the table starts to clap as well.

 

Wally: “Wh-why are you all clapping?”

 

Wigbert: “Congratulations, Walliam. You’ve finally become a Ribbiton today!”

 

Wally: “I....don’t understand…”

 

Wigbert laughs. “Nor did I. My father did the same to me as I did to you. He kept me holed up in this mansion, teaching me everything I knew about business, but never letting him use that knowledge. One day, I just snapped in a similar manner to you. Although I was about a decade older than you when that happened…but, for you to stand up to your old man like this must really mean you believe in Felicia” he says.

 

Wally: “I…I do.”

 

Wigbert smiles. “Good! Then, I’ll let you invest in her business. Your money and expertise, combined with her tea making abilities and determination, it will be easy for you to succeed”, he says.

 

Wigbert takes another sip of his tea.

 

Wigbert: “Ya know what, I take it back. This tea isn’t half bad. I apologize for being rude to you earlier, Felicia.”

 

Felicia wipes her tears and smiles. “That’s…that’s all right. I’m just glad you like it”, she says.

 

Wigbert raises his cup. “Here’s to a lucrative business, run by my son Walliam, and his new business partner, Felicia!”, he says. 

 

Everyone raises their cups.

 


 

Wigbert and Felicia are walking down the halls. They stop at a room.

 

“You can stay here in the guest room, Felicia. Tomorrow, you can get started on your business venture in Wartwood.”

 

“Thank you, Mr. Ribbiton...", Felicia says, before bowing slightly. "You’ve been a kind host.”

 

“Please, call me Wigbert. Anyways, I’ll let you get some rest. Good night.”

 

Wigbert leaves. Felicia wanders around the halls until he sees a room with the door cracked open, with Wally packing his bags inside. Felicia knocks on the door. Wally turns around.

 

"Oh, hello.”

 

“Can we talk for a bit?”

 

“Oh, uh…sure.”

 

Felicia enters. “Wally, I can’t thank you enough for today. I had honestly lost all hope when your father said what he did…but you…you never gave up. And because of you, my dream is finally coming true…”

 

Felicia hugs him.

 

“Ah, I should thank you, too…”

 

“But…I didn’t really do anything?”

 

“Nonsense. I never would have had the courage to talk to my father like that if it weren’t for you.”

 

Felicia giggles. “Well, it’s like I said. We can help each other”, she says.

 

Wally chuckles.

 

Felicia: “Well, I’ll let you finish getting ready to go. Sweet dreams.”

 


 

Felicia: “”And that about sums it up. Wally helped me set up this place, and then we became lovers for a bit. Then you came along, Ivy.”

 

Ivy: Oh my frog.”

 

Sprig: “Wait, have you been keeping the profits all for yourself?”

 

Felicia: “Of course not. We’ve split them equally.”

 

Ivy: “Also, the Wally you described doesn’t really sound like the Wally we know…”

 

Sprig: “Yeah, you made him sound intelligent.”

 

Felicia: “Well, that’s where the story takes an unhappy turn. While Wally was helping renovate this place, he accidentally dropped a nail into his eye. Then he fell off the ladder onto a table. He hit his head pretty hard. The doctors told us he had developed some amnesia. The next day, he didn’t have any recollection that he was a part of this business, or that we had a bit of a relationship. I told him, but the next day he would just forget. I decided it’d just be best for the best of us if he lived life the way he wanted. And he wanted to be a vagrant, and so I let him.”

 

Ivy: “Wow. I feel kinda bad now. I mean, if it wasn’t for him, I wouldn’t even be here. And this shop is here because of him.”

 

Felicia: “Yeah, it is a shame.”

 

Ivy: “And he doesn’t even know any of this. He doesn’t know he played a big part in this place, that you and he had something special, and that…I’m his daughter.”

 

Felicia: “Maybe not…but I like to think, somewhere, deep down, he knows all this. Maybe not in his mind, but in his soul…”

 

Bruce walks through the kitchen door. “Felicia, our ‘special guest’ wants to talk to you…and I’m taking a break. Listening to his stories about goblins was exhausting….”

 

Felicia: “Oh, all right. Come on, you two.”

 

Felicia, Sprig, and Ivy walk outside. Wally is standing near the counter.

 

Felicia: “Wally, did you enjoy your tea?”

 

Wally: “Yeah, it was great! A little…too great, you might say…”

 

Felicia: “Hmm? What do you mean?”

 

Wally: “Well, after having it, this…fog in my brain seemed to lift.”

 

Felicia’s eyes light up.

 

Wally: “Felicia, you and I used to be partners, right?”

 

Felicia nods.

 

Wally: We got this tea shop going, and we were an item for a bit, too. And that must mean…”

 

Wally looks at Ivy.

 

Wally: “You must be my daughter!”

 

Ivy: “Uh, yeah. This is news to me, too.”

 

Wally hugs Ivy.

 

Wally: “I’m sorry I wasn’t there for you...I know it doesn’t make up for it, but I promise to be the dad you should have had from now on!”

 

Ivy: “Dude, it’s OK. You had memory issues. I…I know you would have helped mom raise me if it wasn’t for your fall.”

 

Wally: “Ah, thanks.”

 

Ivy: “No problem…dad.”

 

They break away from their hug.

 

Ivy: “Mom, what was in that tea? It seemed to have worked wonders on Wally.”

 

Felicia: “It was just black tea. I didn’t add anything.”

 

Ivy: “Then why is Wally here able to remember us?”

 

Sprig: “Hey, Wally…you used to go to Stumpy’s a lot, right? Like, every day? And you always had something to drink there?”

 

Wally: “Uh, yeah. Why?”

 

Sprig: “This is just a theory, mind you, but I think Wally’s amnesia was temporary, but because he drank so much and so often, he wasn’t allowing his brain to reform the memories he had lost. Plus, black tea helps with cognitive abilities, so that probably had something to do with it.”

 

Felicia, Wally, and Ivy look at each other.

 

Wally: “Ah, yeah…that actually makes a lot of sense. Well, I’m definitely not going back to Stumpy’s again! Instead, I’ll be coming here! And maybe I can learn to make tea with my daughter!” 

 

Felicia giggles. “I have taught her well. Maybe you can learn a thing or two from her”, she says.

 

Wally: “I’ll be looking forward to it!”

 

Felicia checks her watch. 

 

Felicia: “It’s almost time to open.”

 

Wally: “Well, I guess I’ll go home then. But I’ll be back tomorrow!”

 

Wally leaves and waves to Felicia and Ivy, as customers start to walk in.

 

Felicia: “Well, it’s business as usual. I’ll take people’s orders, Ivy can make them, and Sprig can bring them out. Let’s hop to it!”

 

Ivy and Sprig: “Yeah!”

 


 

It is nighttime. Anne is still playing on her phone. She tries to go to the next level of Bonbon Bash, but it says there’s no more levels. She looks up from her phone, and sees that Carly still hasn’t returned from her lunch. She puts her phone in her pocket, and grabs another hard candy. She then leaves without a word. 

 


 

Anne walks inside the home. 

 

Sprig: “Anne! You won’t believe this! Wally is actually Ivy’s dad!”

 

Anne doesn’t respond. She just goes down to her room and flops onto her bed, and falls asleep instantly.

 

Sprig: “Eh, what’s her problem?”

 

Hop Pop: “Women are complicated, boy. Don’t worry about it.”

 

Polly smacks Hop Pop’s face.

 

Polly: “Women are not complicated, people are complicated! Like you, you’re so obsessed with avocados that you put it in your coffee, even though it’s disgusting! I could go outside, shovel some mud into a mug, and it’d taste better!”

 

Sprig chuckles. “She got you good!”, he says.

 

Polly: “And you! You and Ivy clearly have feelings for each other, but neither of you want to take your relationship forward!”

 

Sprig blushes. “No, no! It’s not like that. Ivy and I are just friends!”

 

Polly: “This is why robots are better! They’re direct with you!”

 

Sprig sighs. “Maybe she’s just going through some stuff. I’ll try talking to her tomorrow”, he says.

Chapter 18: Birds of a Feather

Summary:

Maddie and Anne try to brew a potion.

Chapter Text

Anne wakes up. She looks at the Calamity Box and frowns. 

 

“Carly…there’s no way she was on her lunch the whole day. Clearly she didn’t want to be found. But…why? Does it have something to do with her not properly recharging the stone? I have so many questions, but no way to get answers…I guess for the time being, I’ll just put up lost posters for her around town. Probably won’t work, but…I need to do something.”

 

Anne rolls out of bed, yanks a few pieces of paper from her notebook, and makes similar drawings of Carly on them. Under the illustrations, she writes the words “Goes by Carly. If seen, contact Anne Boonchuy”. She then grabs the missing posters and walks upstairs, where Sprig and Hop Pop are having breakfast. Polly is seen adding some new parts to Frobo.

 

Sprig: “Morning, Anne!”

 

Anne: “Hey Sprig.”

 

Anne continues walking towards the front door, but Sprig jumps out of his chair and stands in front of the door.

 

Sprig: “And where do you think you’re going?”

 

Anne: “I was just gonna…”

 

Sprig: “Stay out all day and not talk to me?”

 

Anne: “Huh?”

 

Sprig: “Come on, don’t act dumb with me. You told Hop Pop yesterday you’d be back later, and you didn’t show up until late. Then you just blew off what I said and went to bed without a word. I thought you said you missed us!”

 

“I did, but...", Anne says, before sighing. "...look, there’s a lot of questions that I need answers to. It’s not like I don’t want to hang out with you, it’s just…I feel like I can’t properly enjoy time with you until I do. That’s all.”

 

Sprig: “Maybe we can help then?”

 

Polly: “Yeah! With Frobo’s new upgrades, he should be twice as smart!”

 

Anne: “I appreciate it guys, but these aren’t really questions you’d know the answers to. I’m not saying you’re stupid, it’s just…you couldn’t possibly know. Please understand.”

 

Sprig: “Well…all right. But if you ever need to talk, I’m all ears.”

 

Anne: “Thanks, dude. I promise we’ll hang out soon. But, in the meantime, here, I downloaded some new seasons of Suspicion Island. I’ve already seen them.”

 

Anne hands her phone to Sprig.

 

Sprig: “Sweet! I wanted to know about what happened after the cliffhanger.”

 

Polly: “Ooh! Frobo can project this out of his chest!”

 

Anne: “You two have fun, all right? I’ll…try to be back at a reasonable hour. And if I’m not, I won't be such a jerk.”

 

Anne walks out the front door. She spends an hour around town putting up her posters. Once she puts one on the bulletin board, she hears a man clear his throat. He turns around to see Sheriff Buck Leatherleaf.

 

“Mornin’, Anne. What are you up to?”

 

“Oh, hey sheriff. I wasn’t doing anything illegal, I swear.”

 

“Never said you were. But now that you say that…”

 

“Look, I’m just putting up missing posters. If that’s against the law, I’ll take them down.”

 

“Hrm, nothing wrong with putting up wanted posters. Just make sure you let Toadie know about this individual. Gotta put ‘em in the logs.”

 

“Oh, uh…this person doesn’t live in Wartwood…”

 

"Where do they live?”

 

“In the snowy mountains.”

 

"That’s a…mighty strange place to call home.”

 

“Well, she is a bit odd. But I really need to talk to her.”

 

“And why’s that?”

 

"Uh…it’s just…", Anne says, before sighing. "Look, you know I’m from another planet, right?"

 

"Hrm."

 

"And  I came here by using a music box that only works because of stones of infinite power, of which can be inside the stones or inside a person?”

 

“I certainly knew that first part. Not so much the second."

 

“Well, two of the stones currently have power. But one of them doesn’t, and this person is the only one who can fix it. And until she does, I can’t get back to Earth.”

 

“Sounds like you have a bit of a problem on your hands. I can certainly keep an eye out for this…newt. Do you know when they went missing?”

 

“N-no…I just know I saw them a few weeks ago, and I only just checked yesterday.”

 

“Did they leave any clues?”

 

“Just a sign that said she went out to lunch…but I don’t think that’s where she really went…”

 

“It’s possible she might have gotten kidnapped or attacked while she was getting some grub.”

 

“I don’t think so. She’s a powerful sorcerer. Valeriana trained her.”

 

“Why does that name sound familiar…?

 

“Oh, she was…the one who created the original music box.”

 

“Can’t she just do somethin’ about your stone? Or maybe give ya insight as to where this…newt named Carly went?”

 

“She’s dead…so no.”

 

"Hrm. Can you keep a secret?”

 

“Hmm? What is it?”

 

“Just because that Valeriana is gone…don’t mean you can’t talk to her.”

 

“...what are you talking about?”

 

“A few years ago, I had a murder case on my hands that I was unable to solve. So I put out a challenge to this here community, that if anyone could figure it out, they’d get a reward.”

 

“Did…someone solve it?”

 

“As a matter o’ fact, yes. You know that bakery girl?”

 

"Maddie?”

 

“Yeah, her. She was able to use some mumbo jumbo to talk to the victim. Turned out it wasn’t even a murder, just an unfortunate accident.”

 

“Oh.”

 

“Point is, you really wanna find out about that box o’ yours? Might not be a bad idea to ask Maddie for help.”

 

"Huh, that...actually helps a lot. Thanks, sheriff!”

 

Leatherleaf tips his hat, as Anne heads towards Flour & Daughters Bakery.

 


 

Anne is walking towards the front door of the bakery. She knocks on the door, and Chef Flour opens up.

 

“Ay, you’re Anne. That girl who’s friends with my daughter, right?”

 

“That’s right. Is she home?”

 

“Yeah, she’s in her room…as usual. Did you want to try some of my new cookies?”

 

“Oh, sure!”

 

Anne walks inside and sits at the table. She is given what appears to be a chocolate chip cookie. She takes a bite.

 

“Hey, this is really good!”

 

“Thanks! I think those bits of tarantula add a real kick to it.”

 

Anne grimaces, but swallows nonetheless. 

 

“I, uh, think I’ll go upstairs and talk to Maddie…”

 

Anne gets up from her seat and walks upstairs. She knocks on Maddie’s door. Maddie opens up.

 

“Oh, hey Anne. What are you doing here?”

 

“I said we’d hang out, right? So here I am!”

 

“Oh, uh…right. Come on in.”

 

Anne walks inside Maddie’s room. Maddie sits on her bed, where there’s a book opened to a page detailing a potion. She notices there’s a safe in the corner of the room.

 

“Hey, what’s that safe? That wasn’t there last time.”

 

“Oh, that…remember when you asked me what I was going to do with the Rememb-orb? Well, I figured that if word got out that I had such an item, people would try to steal it from me. So I put it in there.”

 

Anne puts her ear against the safe. “You know, Sasha once taught me this trick to crack open safes…” she says.

 

“Ah! Please don’t!”

 

“Why not? I already know it's in there.”

 

“Well, yeah…but there’s some…other stuff in there, if you catch my drift.”

 

Oh...”

 

“Come on, I’m sure you have something like that back home!”

 

Anne blushes. “This…this isn’t about me!”

 

Maddie chuckles.

 

“Uh, anyways…what do you have there?”

 

“Uh, I was gonna make this lightweight potion…I got all the ingredients for it…except for one. But I couldn’t really ask you to help with it…”

 

“What’s the ingredient?”

 

“Well, they’re all feathers from dangerous birds. But the one I need a feather from isn’t like the others.”

 

“Feathers?”

 

“Well yeah. Birds can slow their descent using their wings.”

 

"Oh…that makes sense. But hey, do you know where this bird lives?”

 

“Yeah. It lives at this place called Doom Peak. But…”

 

“No buts! Friends do things for each other. If you’re scared, I can just pluck a feather from it, and get it to you. Easy-peasy.”

 

“Well, if you insist…”

 


 

Maddie and Anne are hiking up Doom Peak. Maddie has a bag with her, with a mini cauldron, various feathers, a book about brewing potions, and one glass bottle. They reach the summit and see a sleeping, pink bird that’s about the size of a pigeon.

 

Anne chuckles. “That’s what you’re afraid of?”, she asks.

 

Anne goes up and plucks a feather from it.

 

“Anne, wait! Appearances can be deceiving!”

 

The bird wakes up. It notices one of its feathers is missing. It gets angry, and balloons to the size of an elephant, with its wings turning more into muscly arms.

 

“Oh. That’s why you were afraid of it.”

 

The bird pushes Anne back several yards, until she falls off the side. She manages to grab a tree branch. Anne looks down and gulps.

 

“That’s a pretty far way down…”

 

“Anne! Don’t worry, I’ll save you!”

 

Maddie pulls out her wand and waits. Just as the bird is about to crush her with its arms, she casts a strong wind spell, which causes it to go flying. She then casts a lightning spell, which causes it to start falling. It manages to snap out of its dizziness before hitting the ground. It roars, then flies away. Maddie runs over to the edge of the cliff.

 

“Anne! Are you OK?”

 

“Relatively. I don’t think this branch will last much longer, though…”

 

“I can’t reach you…”

 

“Wait. You can brew that potion! I may not be able to get back up, but I can safely get down to the ground!”

 

“But I’ve never brewed this one before…”

 

“Girl, you passed a challenge that was designed for master sorcerers. Brewing a potion shouldn’t be a problem!”

 

“All right, I really only get one shot at this. I gotta be careful, and follow the directions exactly.”

 

“Yeah! Just take your time...", Anne says, as the branch creaks a little. "...but hurry!”

 

Maddie pulls out her cauldron, and book. She reads the directions and breaks pieces of each feathers apart. She then stirs it with her wand, and puts the concoction in the glass bottle.

 

“All right, it’s ready!”

 

“Great! Just give it to m-”

 

The branch breaks. Anne starts falling.

 

“Anne!”

 

“Maddie, throw it!

 

Maddie throws the potion as hard as she can. Anne manages to catch it, and she downs the whole thing mere feet before hitting the ground. 

 

“Ah, I’m…I’m alive…”

 


 

Maddie and Anne are walking back towards the bakery.

 

"Well, today was fun!”

 

“Yeah, if you ignore the fact that you almost turned into a pancake…”

 

“Well, hey. Now you can use that potion whenever you want. And you’ve improved as a brewer. Doesn’t that make it all worth it?”

 

“But you almost died for something that doesn’t really mean that much to me…”

 

Anne: “Sure, maybe some things went wrong. But it’s rare that everything goes according to the plan. You trusted me to help you, and I trusted you to help me, and that’s what friends do.”

 

Maddie smiles. “Well, all right. I guess it was pretty cool what happened today. I’m still not used to this whole ‘being friends with someone’ thing…”, she says.

 

“Ah, don’t worry. It’ll get easier over time. You just gotta do it as often as possible. So…maybe we can hang out tomorrow?”

 

“Uh, yeah. That sounds good.”

 

“Great! See you then!”

 

Anne walks back home, while waving to Maddie. Maddie gives her a weak smile, and waves back. Maddie walks inside the bakery, and up to her room.

 

“Am I being a bad friend? I lied to Anne about the Rememb-orb being in that safe. Even if it’s for a good reason…that doesn’t make it OK. She said she trusts me. This might change her view of me but…it’s the right thing to do.”



Chapter 19: Beyond the Grave

Summary:

Maddie helps Anne speak with Valeriana.

Chapter Text

Anne wakes up and rolls out of bed.

 

“All right, I’ll go to Maddie’s, and if she doesn’t have anything planned, I can just ask her to let me talk to Valeriana.”

 

Anne walks upstairs and sees the Plantars watching Suspicion Island on Frobo’s chest. There’s a knock on the door.

 

Polly: “Anne, I can’t stop watching this…can you get the door?”

 

Anne: “Uh, sure…”

 

Anne walks over to the front door and opens it. Maddie is standing there with her hands behind her back.

 

Anne: “Oh, hey Maddie. What are you doing here?”

 

Maddie chuckles. “You said we’re hanging out today, right? So here I am!”, she says.

 

Anne: “Oh. Wasn’t really expecting that…”

 

Maddie: “Well, you’ve been putting a lot of effort into this friendship, but I haven’t really been putting in mine. That’s why I came over here. I also made you some actual chocolate chip cookies!”

 

Maddie pulls out a brown paper bag with a few cookies in them.

 

Anne: “Aw, sweet!”

 

Maddie: “Yeah, my dad told me he had you try those tarantula cookies. I thought I’d make you some ones you’d actually like.”

 

Maddie hands the bag over to Anne.

 

Anne: “Hey guys, Maddie brought us cookies! Did you want any?”

 

Sprig: “Cookies can wait. Suspicion Island cannot!”

 

Anne: “All right, I’ll just…put them on the counter…”

 

Anne puts the bag on the counter.

 

Maddie: “Uh…what are they doing?”

 

Anne: “Oh, they’re just watching a TV show. It’s kinda like that movie Love Choice, but it’s split out into several episodes instead of just one long one. Also the plot is…completely different.”

 

Maddie: “Oh. They seem…kinda addicted to it.”

 

Anne chuckles. “Yeah, it has that effect on people. I binge watch it whenever new seasons come out. And they always release all the new episodes at once. Anyways, let me show you my room!”, she says.

 

Anne walks down to her room while Maddie follows.

 

“You live in the basement?”

 

“Yeah…the Plantars don’t have a guest room…but this room is all mine, so I don’t mind. I’m sorry everything is a mess, though…”

 

“Eh, it’s fine.”

 

Anne grins. “Anyways, what did you have planned for us today?"

 

Maddie looks at Anne, before shuddering, as Anne's smile fades.

 

"Maddie, what's wrong?"

 

"Anne...", Maddie says, before sighing. "...I'm afraid I've lied to you."

 

“What…what did you lie about?"

 

"You know that safe in my room?", Maddie says, before Anne's expression changes to one of concern. "The Rememb-orb isn’t in there. It never was.”

 

"What?”

 

Maddie begins to pace around the room. “When I was asked what I was going to do with it, it was a tough choice. I couldn’t get rid of it, but I also couldn’t just keep it. If someone found out I had it, they might try to steal it and use it for evil. I mean, look at what Clarence almost did. I didn’t want that happening again. So I bought that safe as a misdirection, and put it somewhere else…somewhere only I know", she says.

 

"I don’t understand...do you not trust me?"

 

Maddie stops, and sighs. “Look, it’s difficult for me to. But…you’ve been teaching me how to. I mean, you trusted me even after I lied to you. Even if I was the only person you could rely on, you could have just left me behind on the archipelago because you might have felt like you didn’t need me anymore. I even was fully expecting you to, and I wouldn’t have blamed you", she says.

 

“I wouldn’t even have considered that. I didn’t know you felt that way…”

 

“But I’m still lying to you. That’s why I’m letting you know, if you were to walk about 10 yards from my bedroom window, that you’d find a small rock. If you were to dig underneath that rock, you’d find the Rememb-orb...", Maddie says, before hanging her head down. "...I know this doesn’t make up for what I did, but you deserve to know...”

 

Anne looks at Maddie before sighing.

 

"Maddie, I forgive you.”

 

Maddie pulls her head up. “What? How can you forgive me so easily…?”

 

“Because…I haven’t been totally honest with you either…”

 

“What?”

 

“Did you think hanging out with you yesterday was because I was being a good friend?”

 

“Well yeah…were you not?”

 

“Well, not completely. I did want to hang out with you, and it was fun, but…I found myself in a situation where I once again need your help. And…right now you’re really the only person I can rely on.”

 

“Is that why you were so willing to help me brew that potion? Because there was a chance I might not assist you?”

 

“Yeah…I’m sorry.”

 

Maddie sighs and smiles. “Anne, you’re my friend. And you told me friends help each other. You didn’t need to risk your life for me. We can just…participate in safe activities. So next time I tell you not to do something, just listen, OK?”

 

“Yeah, for sure. Honestly I’ve just been super worried lately, so I haven’t really been acting myself.”

 

“Well, if whatever you want me to do can destress you, I’ll do it. What did you want me to do?”

 

“Sheriff Buck told me you can talk to deceased people.”

 

Maddie chuckles. “Oh, he must have told you about that funny story then, huh?”, she says.

 

“Funny!? Someone died!”

 

"Yeah, but get this: Poor guy just tripped over a vine. Out of all the things that could get you here, you gotta admit it’s a little humorous that a regular tree is what ended his life.”

 

“I guess…”

 

“Anyways, who did you want to speak with?”

 

“Ah, well…you remember that day when we stopped Clarence? I was able to use my calamity powers, even though it was supposed to be in the stone.”

 

“Yeah, I was wondering about that. How did you do that?”

 

“It’s not like I don’t have experience with it. I could call upon the stone’s power if it’s uncharged, or if the box is nearby and I’m emotional.”

 

“Ah, that makes sense. Seeing Clarence get attacked like that must have triggered you being able to use its power.”

 

“It did. But…that means Carly didn’t recharge the stone properly. And even if the other two are, the box won’t work.”

 

“Carly?”

 

“She’s Valeriana’s successor.”

 

“I see. Must have been a mistake…”

 

Anne ponders for a moment. “I…I don’t think it was…”, she says.

 

“What makes you say that?”

 

“Because Valeriana did the same thing. And Carly told me that was likely intentional, but didn’t give me a reason why. I imagine she might have done it with a similar intention in mind. I went to go ask her about it at her house, but…she wasn’t there.”

 

“Sounds like she doesn’t want to be found.”

 

“Yeah, and that really bugs me. That’s why I have to talk to Valeriana.”

 

“Well, I can get that conversation going! Uh, but, I do need something.”

 

 “What is it?”

 

"In order for me to open a connection from this world to he next, I need something that had some meaning to the person in question.”

 

“Meaning?”

 

“Yeah, like…what’s a possession of yours that’s important to you?”

 

Anne looks around the room. She notices her tennis racket is leaning against the wall.

 

“My racket, I guess? I know it’s stupid, but I like playing tennis. It’s something I’m good at.”

 

“All right, so let’s say you were to perish right now. I could use your racket to talk with you.”

 

“Uh…OK…”

 

“So in a similar way, if you have something that held meaning to Valeriana, I could use it to communicate with her. Or, have someone in my place do so. Do you have anything like that?”

 

“Uh…no. I didn’t really talk to her much. The only thing I can really think of is her staff, but Carly has that.”

 

“Hmm, well…I guess we can just ‘borrow’ something from her house.”

 

"Borrow something...wait..."

 

Anne feels around in her pocket, and pulls out the hard candy she got when she was there last.

 

“Uh…do you think this would suffice?”

 

“Did…did you get that from Valeriana?”

 

“No…Carly just had these in a bowl on her table.”

 

Anne hands it to Maddie. She then closely inspects the wrapper and notices that Valeriana’s face is on it.

 

“What the heck? Why is Valeriana’s face printed on this?”

 

"It…it is? I guess I didn’t notice…”

 

“Perhaps...this is Carly’s way of feeling close to her.”

 

“Aww, that’s sweet…kinda like the candy!”

 

“Yeah, this just might work. I have the necessary supplies at my house.”

 

Anne nods. They both head upstairs. 

 

Anne: “Hey, guys? I’m just going to Maddie’s house to speak with a dead woman.”

 

Hop Pop: “Yeah, yeah, whatever. Just be back before dinner.”

 

Anne and Maddie go out the front door.

 


 

Anne and Maddie are in the basement of the bakery. Anne is sitting in a circle surrounded by candles. 

 

“All right, fair warning. If this doesn’t work, you might be face to face with a demon.”

 

“Look, Maddie. I’m prepared to do whatever it takes to learn more. If that means I have to deal with some underworld freak, so be it.”

 

“Very well. What will happen is, I will more or less rip your soul from your body, and send it hopefully to Valeriana. Your body can’t be harmed by anything there, but I’ll make sure you’re fine here. If something seems wrong, I can snap you out of it. Are you ready?”

 

“I mean…no…but I don’t really think anyone could prepare for this.”

 

“Good point. Let’s get started.”

 

Maddie touches the hard candy with her wand and recites some incantation. She then points it at Anne. Anne’s vision goes completely white as she screams.

 


 

Anne is laying on her stomach in some small cottage. She comes to.

 

“Wha…what happened?”

 

She notices there’s a newt in a white robe. She is sitting in a white chair and knitting, with a pile of sweaters next to her. Anne gets up and walks behind the chair.

 

“Valeriana?”

 

Valeriana stops knitting and turns her head. She then drops what she was working on, gets up, and turns around.

 

“Y…you! How did you get here?!”

 

“I had a friend send me here…”

 

“Begone! I wish to enjoy the rest of eternity doing as I please!”

 

“But I just wanted to talk with you…”

 

“No! That chapter of my story is over! I want nothing more to do with you!”

 

“I’m sorry but…I’m out of options. I promise to leave you alone if you just answer my questions.”

 

“No!”

 

“Look, you have until the end of time to yourself, correct?”

 

"Yes. Why?”

 

“Then it doesn’t really matter if you spend a few minutes speaking with me, does it?”

 

Valeriana sighs. “No, I suppose it does not. Fine, what is it that you desire to know?”, she asks.

 

“So, your successor, Carly. I asked her to recharge one of the stones, and she did so using your staff, although much quicker. When I asked her about it, she said you did that on purpose, but she didn’t know why…”

 

“She lied. She does know why.”

 

“But…why? Why would you do that?”

 

“Let me ask you this, child. If I had, how would have events played out differently? Did you even wonder?”

 

“Uh…”

 

“Figures you haven’t. Allow me to jog your memory.”

 

Valeriana claps her hands. She and Anne are taken to a memory of the Newtopia Castle. She sees a familiar scene.

 

Anne: “Wait a minute, this was when…Sasha and Grime overthrew Andrias…”

 

Valeriana: “Correct. Now, look at Sasha.”

 

Anne looks at Sasha. She’s holding the Calamity Box and pointing it towards Anne.

 

Sasha: “Sorry, Anne. Say hi to your parents for me!”

 

Sasha then opens the box, but nothing happens.

 

Sasha: “What? Well, that was embarrassing. Until I can figure out how to use this...guards, take them to the dungeon!”

 

Anne and Valeriana are transported back to the cottage.

 

“The box failed to work only because I didn’t charge it properly. But…what would have happened if it was?”

 

“Sasha…she would have sent me back to Earth, and taken me away from the Plantars…’

 

“Not quite. You would have been transported back to Earth with the Plantars, which is what ended up happening anyway. But this timeline would have been much darker.”

 

“Huh?”

 

“Sasha would have attempted to imprison Marcy, Yunan and Olivia, and ‘Frobo’, but without you, their attempts would have failed. Yunan, Marcy and Olivia were killed there and ‘Frobo’ was disassembled for spare parts. And with you having no connection to the stones, you would have had no way of getting back to Amphibia."

 

“Oh, no…”

 

“It gets worse. Eventually, the newts would manage to free Andrias. With him on their side and him showing no mercy, the toads would not stand a chance, and they would have been killed, along with Grime and Sasha. In other words, their desire for power would have been their downfall. Andrias then would have paired his most intelligent newt with The Core and started their conquest of the multiverse, with Earth as their first victim.”

 

“Wow. I…had no idea…”

 

“I do not blame you for thinking poorly of me. Everything I did was just because I wanted the best odds for the best future. Of course, there are limits to what I can do. I can’t force people to do things, but I can influence them. Like you, for example.”

 

“What do you mean?”

 

“Did you think it was a little…convenient that you got another Calamity Box?”

 

“Convenient…?", Anne says, before taking a step back in shock. "N-no…there’s n-no w-way…”

 

“Figured it out, have you? Yes, you coming back here was part of my plan.”

 

“But…how?!”

 

“Quite simple, really. The individual who created the Calamity Box, I was the one who instructed him how to make it, in his dreams. I told him not to use it because there would be dire consequences. Instead, if he sent it to an individual by the name of Anne Savisa Boonchuy, he would become rich.”

 

“So you lied to him, too!? Just as you lied to Mr. Gill!?”

 

“I didn’t lie to either of them. My conditions were for Mr. Wu to move out of California. He didn’t do that, so he didn’t get anything from me. But Gregory, the man who sent you the box, did. So I gave him the winning numbers for the lottery.”

 

“But…why!?”

 

“Isn’t it obvious? I wanted you here.”

 

“Then..why did you send me back to Earth five years ago?”

 

“Everyone was in agreement that, despite how badly they didn’t want you to leave, that you had to. If I had refused, people would have wondered why. Besides, I’ve had enough of my life. Being centuries old really takes a toll on your body, and your mind…but you’re happy here, aren’t you?”

 

“Yes, but-”

 

“And that's why I knew I would succeed. Even if I couldn’t force you to use the Calamity Box, I knew you would want to see the Plantars again, and that you would bring Sasha and Marcy here, to see their friends as well.”

 

“Look, I appreciate you doing that for me. I really do. But what I’m wondering is if you know why Carly didn’t recharge the stone properly. Is it for the same reason as before?”

 

“Yes, I do know. And it is not the same reason.”

 

“Then why?”

 

“I respect you, Anne. I want to tell you, but…I can’t.”

 

“Wh-why not?”

 

"It’s better you don’t. I apologize, Anne.”

 

Anne starts to tear up. “But…I made a promise to my parents that I’d see them…and Sasha and Marcy want to be able to go back and forth from here and Earth, too. And I wanted to show everyone here what life was like on Earth. But, I can’t…I don’t understand”, she says.

 

The room starts to shake.

 

“No! I need to know!”

 

Anne wakes up with a start. She is back in the basement of the bakery. Maddie is standing next to her.

 

“Woah, hey. Everything’s OK. You’re safe.”

 

“Maddie…”

 

“What happened? I saw you crying, so I thought maybe you were up against a demon…”

 

“No, I…saw Valeriana.”

 

“Did she tell you anything?”

 

“Yes, but…it wasn’t really what I was looking for…”

 

“I can send you back…”

 

“No, that’s fine. She seemed like she really didn’t want to tell me. I…don’t know why, but…I just have to believe there’s a good reason for us being here. It just sucks, because my birthday is tomorrow, and I was supposed to go back and celebrate it with my family…”

 

“Your birthday’s tomorrow?”

 

“My 19th, yes. I…", Anne says, before standing up. "...I think I should get going. Hop Pop has probably made dinner by now. Thanks for your help…”

 

Anne walks upstairs and outside the bakery.

 

“Anne seemed really down about not being able to see her family for her birthday. I…I don’t know how birthdays are done on Earth. But maybe…Sprig knows. He’s been there. We can maybe try to cheer her up by commemorating it. We can get the whole town in on it. And I can get Sasha and Marcy down here, too. It may not be exactly what she wants, but…I’m sure she’ll appreciate it.”

 


 

Anne walks inside and sees that Polly, Sprig, and Hop Pop are at the table eating supper.

 

Sprig: “Hey, Anne! We finished watching Suspicion Island. We left you a cookie, too. Did you figure out anything?”

 

Anne: “Uh, yeah. A bit. I still don’t have all the answers. In fact, I’ve run into a wall…”

 

Polly: “Don’t do that! You might break your face!”

 

Anne: “It’s an expression, Polly. It means I can’t really progress forward…”

 

Sprig: “Anne, I’m sorry…”

 

Anne: “It’s fine, dude. Rather, I should be apologizing. I’ve been leaving you guys in the dark about what’s happening...and Polly, that means I haven’t been giving you info that you should know, not that I’ve been turning off lights or something.”

 

Hop Pop: “Anne, you don’t have to tell us…”

 

Anne: “No, I do. You guys are like my second family. And families tell each other stuff. Besides, it’s not like I can really do anything about this now…so there really isn’t any harm in doing so.”

 

Sprig: “I’m glad you feel comfortable talking about this with us.”

 

Anne: “Of course. Anyways, are you guys ready? It’s...kind of a long story…”

 

Polly: “Ooh! I’ll have Frobo make popcorn!”

Chapter 20: Birthday Bumble

Summary:

Sprig throws a party for Anne's 19th birthday.

Chapter Text

Anne: “...and…yeah. That about sums everything up.”

 

Polly: “So, you’re stuck here? Again?”

 

Anne nods.

 

Sprig: “Ah, I’m sorry, Anne. I know how kind your parents were. It sucks you might not be able to see them anytime in the near future.”

 

Anne: “It’s more than that. One of the conditions of me coming here was visiting them every so often. If I don’t come back soon, who knows what they’ll think?”

 

Hop Pop: “Well, hey. I know you miss home. So we’ll try to make this place feel as much like it as possible.”

 

Anne smiles. “Thanks, HP. But this place already does feel like home”, she says.

 

Polly: “Ooh! I know what might help. Why don’t we talk about Suspicion Island!”

 

Anne yawns. “Maybe tomorrow. I’m beat”, she says.

 

Anne goes downstairs, gets into bed and goes to sleep. Everyone cleans up their dishes. A few minutes later, there’s a knock on the door.

 

Hop Pop: “It’s a little late…who could be here at this hour?”

 

Sprig gets up and opens the door. Maddie is standing outside.

 

Sprig: “Oh, hey Maddie. Got any more of those chocolate chip cookies?”

 

Maddie giggles. “Did you like them?”, she asks.

 

Sprig: “Yeah!”

 

Polly: “They were da bomb!”

 

Hop Pop: “I prefer oatmeal raisin. But they were good nonetheless!”

 

Maddie: “Well, if you want more, you’ll need to hang out with me. I gave those to Anne because she was.”

 

Sprig: “Uh, sure. If it’s for sweets, I’ll do anything!”

 

Maddie raises an eyebrow. “Anything?”, she asks.

 

Sprig blushes. "Uh, maybe not anything…but hanging out with you is certainly on that list.”

 

Hop Pop: “Anyways, Maddie, what are you doing here this late?”

 

Maddie: “Oh, right. You guys know Anne can’t get home, right?”

 

Sprig, Polly, and Hop Pop nod.

 

Maddie: “Well, her birthday is tomorrow, and she was supposed to go celebrate with her parents. But uh, that isn’t happening. So, I was thinking we should just commemorate her birthday here!”

 

Sprig: “That’s a great idea! But, wait…if it’s tomorrow, that means we only have tonight and some of tomorrow to prepare, right?”

 

Maddie: “Yeah, don’t worry about that. I told the rest of the town, and they’re in on it. They have their shops open, so just get her a gift. And Sprig?”

 

Sprig: “Yeah?”

 

Maddie: “You were on Earth, so you should have some idea how humans celebrate birthdays, right?”

 

Sprig: “Oh, yeah. Anne threw a birthday party of sorts for me. I know all the ins and outs about them.”

 

Maddie: “Perfect. You’re the head of the party planning committee then.”

 

Sprig: “M-me? But I’ve never been the head of anything!”

 

Maddie: “Hey, it’s for Anne. Just do what she did for you. Besides, this seems impossible to mess up.”

 

Sprig: “Well, all right. I’ll throw her the best birthday bash she’s ever had!”

 

Sprig runs upstairs, takes several minutes to write out a schedule, then hands it to Maddie. She reads it.

 

Maddie: “Got it. I’ll let everyone know what we’re doing. You guys get your presents for Anne.”

 

Sprig, Hop Pop, and Polly nod. They walk outside with Maddie, get their presents for Anne, and wrap them up. They then put them in a pile in the middle of town, where everyone else has put theirs. They also put up tables, a stage, as well as decorate the town. 

 

Sprig: “All right, gang. This looks good. Tomorrow’s Anne’s day. So let’s make her feel special!”

 

Sprig pumps his fist into the air, and the townsfolk do so as well. They all go to their houses to get some rest.

 


 

Anne wakes up. She looks at her phone.

 

“Happy birthday to me, I guess. I probably should have told the Plantars, but…I don’t know. Maybe it’s better that they don’t know. All I really want is to be with my parents…and they’re not exactly a replacement for them…”

 

Anne rolls out of bed and walks upstairs. Once she opens the hatch, she sees Sprig standing at the entrance.

 

Sprig: “HAPPY BIRTHDAY, ANNE!”

 

Anne yells and falls backwards down the stairs. Sprig runs down to her side.

 

Polly: “I told you it was a dumb idea!”

 

Sprig: “Ah! I’m so sorry Anne…are you OK?”

 

Anne rubs her arm. “Yeah, I’ve been through worse…wait, did you just wish me a happy birthday?”, she asks.

 

Sprig: “Yeah! It’s today, right?”

 

Anne: “Yeah, but…I didn’t tell you.”

 

Sprig: “Well, a good friend should know their friends’ birthday, right?”

 

Anne smiles.

 

Polly: “Yeah, like Maddie!”

 

“Maddie? Oh right…I told her my birthday was today...", Anne says, before narrowing her eyes. "...wait, did she tell you?”

 

Sprig: “Uh…OK, fine, I didn’t know when your birthday was. But I planned the events for today! The whole town is in on it!”

 

Anne: “A birthday party with the whole town? That sounds so much fun!”

 

The oven bings.

 

Hop Pop: “Ooh! Pie’s ready!”

 

Anne walks upstairs. “What did you make, HP? A mud pie?”, she says.

 

Hop Pop chuckles. “No, I made something you’d enjoy. There’s no bugs or dirt in it!”, he says.

 

Polly: “There’s also no avocado. Even though he really wanted to add it.”

 

Hop Pop gets the pie out of the oven. He slices a piece and gives one to Anne on a plate.

 

Anne: “Mmm, this smells good!”

 

Anne picks up a fork and takes a bite.

 

Anne: “Tastes good, too! What’s in here?”

 

Hop Pop: “Oh, Chef Flour made the pie crust. And I made the filling with pumpkins! And I scattered pecans in there for a little extra kick.

 

Anne’s face falls. “Did…did you say pecans?”, he asks.

 

Hop Pop: “Yeah, they’re delicious and healthy. The perfect combination!”

 

Anne falls out of her chair. Her face starts to swell.

 

Sprig: “Anne! What’s happening?”

 

Anne: “Back…pack…front…pouch…epi…pen…”

 

Sprig runs to Anne’s room and finds the backpack. He rummages around the front pouch until he finds something labeled “Epipen”. He runs back upstairs.

 

Sprig: “OK, what do I do with this?!”

 

Anne presses her finger against her forearm.

 

Sprig: “Did…you want me to stab you with this?!”

 

Anne nods.

 

Sprig: “All right, here goes!”

 

Sprig jabs Anne with the Epipen. Her face starts to revert to her normal size, and she starts breathing normally again.

 

Polly: “Do that again!”

 

Hop Pop: “Anne, I’m sorry! I didn’t know you were allergic to pecans.”

 

Anne: “It’s all right...I never told you, so you couldn’t have...”

 

Hop Pop: “Well, I guess we can serve this to the rest of the town. Maybe I can make you something without pecans?”

 

Anne pulls herself back up to her chair. “Nah, it’s all right. What’s next for today?”, she says.

 

Sprig: “Just a whole bunch of party games! We got musical chairs, root beer pong, and card games! We got enough to last the whole day.”

 

Anne smiles. “What are we waiting for, then? Let’s get going!”

 

Anne walks outside with Sprig, Polly, and Hop Pop. She sees the whole town is decorated, with people chatting, having refreshments, and dancing to music played on Sprig’s phone. There are banners that say “Happy Birthday, Anne!” across the houses. She also notices there’s a pile of boxes that’s covered with a large sheet.

 

Anne: “Wow! I wonder what that…thing covered with a sheet is…”

 

Sprig: “Oh, that’s a surprise. You’ll find out later tonight. Come on, this is all for you! Go crazy!”

 

And so the rest of the day was filled with Anne running around town, playing Go Fish with Loggle, Felicia, and Toadstool, playing root beer pong with Wally, and playing Musical Chairs with everyone else. As the sun set, everyone sat down and had dinner courtesy of Stumpy. During the middle of supper, Sprig got on the stage and clinks his spoon against his glass of water, and everyone turns their heads to look at him.

 

Sprig: “Everyone! I’d like to propose a toast to Anne.”

 

Anne smiles.

 

Sprig: “Anne and I met under some funny circumstances five years ago. She caught me in a rope trap, and I thought she was going to eat me!”

 

The crowd laughs.

 

Sprig: “But, then she saved me from a giant praying mantis. And we got to know each other, and I’m proud to call her my best friend. For all that you’ve done for me, this town, and this world, Anne, here’s to you!”

 

Sprig raises his glass, and everyone else follows. Anne wipes a single tear from her eye.

 

Sprig: “Anyways, that’s enough of the sappy stuff. Toadie, do you mind pulling off that sheet?”

 

Toadie pulls off the sheet covering the pile of boxes. 

 

Anne: “Wow, gifts? For moi? Didn’t see that coming…”

 

Sprig: “Yeah! Everyone in town got you something. Some of them are from the store, some of them are handmade, and some of them are just items we found and thought you’d like.”

 

As Anne stands up and walks over to the presents, the crowd claps for her. She picks up each box, sees the name of the person who it’s from, unwraps it, thanks the person who got it, then puts it into a new pile. This goes on for several minutes, until she’s down to the last present, which she picks up.

 

Anne: “All right, last but not least, this one’s from…Polly!”

 

Anne then takes a step forward while opening the box. She trips on her shoelace, as the box opens to reveal a bunch of Boom Shrooms, which then rain down on the pile of gifts that she opened. She then watches as her presents explode. She then gets up.

 

Sprig: “Polly! Why did you get Anne Boom Shrooms?”

 

Polly: “You said to get something I’d like! I like explosions!”

 

Sprig: “No, I said to get something she would like!”

 

Polly: “Ohh, that makes a lot more sense.”

 

Sprig runs over to Anne, who is in disbelief.

 

Sprig: “I’m so sorry, Anne. I really tried to make this a good birthday for you, just like you did for me. I know you were missing your parents, so I tried to cheer you up, but I just ruined everything…”

 

Anne starts laughing.

 

Polly: “Oops. Looks like we finally broke Anne.”

 

Anne: “Are you kidding me? This was one of the best birthdays ever!”

 

Sprig: “What? But…I made you fall down stairs, Hop Pop kinda poisoned you, and all your gifts are gone…”

 

Anne: “Yeah, but…honestly if I was with my parents, we would have just had some lame party. But this party was so exciting! I mean, how many people can say their birthday presents blew up?”

 

Polly: “Yep. She’s definitely broken.”

 

Anne: “Besides, parties aren’t even about what you do or what you get. It’s about the people you spend it with. And…you tried to pick me up because I was feeling down, and you got the whole town involved. And that to me, is worth more than presents.”

 

Anne hugs Sprig. 

 

Sprig: “Wow, Maddie, you were right. This was impossible to mess up.”

 

Maddie chuckles. “Told you so”, she says.

 

Anne sighs.

 

Sprig: “Oh no, is there something wrong? I’ll try to fix it and not mess it up.”

 

Anne: “No, it’s not that. It’s just…there’s two people who I wish were here…”

 

Sprig: “Your parents?”

 

“No...us”, a voice behind Anne says.

 

Anne turns around to see Marcy and Sasha standing. Both of them are holding tiny gift boxes. Anne runs over with a smile and hugs them.

 

Anne: “Sash! Mar-mar! You came!”

 

Sasha: “Of course. Wouldn’t miss your birthday for the world.”

 

Marcy: “Sorry we’re late. I was just making your gift to add to the rest of the ones you got…?”

 

Marcy and Sasha notice there’s a crater in the town.

 

Sasha: “Uh…what happened?”

 

Anne pulls herself away from Sasha and Marcy. “My other gifts blew up. Don’t ask.”

 

Marcy: “Well, uh…we got you a perfectly intact gift. It’s kinda small, though…”

 

Anne: “Doesn’t matter. Gimme!”

 

Sasha hands the box to Anne, while she pulls out another identical one.

 

Anne: “Why do you guys have the exact same box?”

 

Sasha: “You’ll see. Open it!”

 

Anne opens the box. Inside is a gold bracelet, with the chains being connected by a tiny tennis racket, a tiny sword, and a tiny arrow. Sasha and Marcy open their boxes to reveal they have the same bracelet.

 

Sasha: “This was my idea, but Marcy was the one to make it real.”

 

Marcy: “Yeah, Olivia let me use some of Newtopia’s gold to make these. So then I melted the gold, put them into molds I built myself, then let them cool. And then I engraved each of our names on our respective items!”

 

Anne looks at the sword, to see Sasha’s name engraved on it, Marcy’s engraved on the arrow, and Anne’s engraved on the tennis racket.

 

Marcy: “But like I said, it’s really something small. It’s cool if you don’t want it."

 

Anne: “...don’t say that. It’s perfect.”

 

Anne, Sasha, and Marcy put on their bracelets.

 

Sasha: “What did I tell you, Marbles? You were overthinking it.”

 

Marcy: “Can you blame me?”

 

Marcy: “Anyways, since we didn’t really spend the day with you, Marcy and I got a reservation at the Wartwood Hotel. We’ll stay there tonight.”

 

Anne: “Isn’t that place expensive?”

 

Marcy holds up the Royal Credit Card.

 

Anne: “Oh…right.”

 

Sasha: “It works out, anyway. Grime and I had a big announcement to give to Wartwood tomorrow.”

 

Anne: “What is it?”

 

Sasha: “Well, you’ll be here tomorrow, so you can wait. Besides, there’s no fun in spoiling a surprise.”

 

Marcy: “Anyways, we’ll see you tomorrow.”

 

Anne: “Good night!”

 

Marcy and Sasha head towards the Wartwood Hotel. Everyone else goes home.

 


 

Anne is sitting on the couch at home. Hop Pop and Polly are asleep. Anne is fiddling with the bracelet she was given. Sprig comes downstairs, and sees Anne.

 

Sprig: “Can’t sleep?”

 

Anne: “No, not really…”

 

Sprig: “Yeah, I get it. It’s difficult to sleep with all that adrenaline…”

 

Anne: “No, that’s not it…”

 

Sprig: “What is it?”

 

Sprig notices the bracelet Anne is holding. 

 

Sprig: “Oh, I get it. You don’t really know how Marcy and Sasha will react when you tell them that they might not be able to go home.”

 

Anne: “They didn’t really say anything about it to me at the party but…I’m sure they’re wondering.”

 

Sprig: “Do you feel responsible because you didn’t tell them?”

 

Anne: “No…it’s just…last time we were here, it was because of an accident. But this time, we came here on purpose. And I was the one to bring them here this time, not Marcy.”

 

Sprig: “But…they wanted to be here, right? They didn’t come here just because of you…besides it’s not like you could have seen this coming…”

 

“You’re right. I guess I’ve just…", Anne says, before shrugging. "...been starting to get more comfortable with the idea of being here for…who knows how long. I should give Sasha and Marcy that chance as well. That’s why I have to tell them.”

 

Sprig: “All right. Just…don’t stay up too late.”

 

Anne nods. Sprig starts to head upstairs.

 

Anne: “Sprig.”

 

Sprig turns his head.

 

Anne: “Thanks for talking with me. Even if I am trapped…I’m glad it’s with you guys.”

 

Sprig smiles, then continues to head upstairs.

Chapter 21: Recruitment

Summary:

Ivy wants to go on an expedition with Sprig, but he has some second thoughts.

Chapter Text

Anne wakes up. She rolls out of bed, and puts on her bracelet. She walks upstairs, and sees Polly, Hop Pop, and Sprig having breakfast. She walks towards the door. Before turning the handle, she turns her head.

 

Anne: “Aren’t you guys wondering where I’m going?”

 

Polly: “Sprig already told us.”

 

Anne: “Oh.”

 

Hop Pop: “Besides, you’re an adult now. You don’t need to tell us where you’re going if you don’t want to.”

 

Anne smiles, and leaves. She walks towards the Wartwood Hotel. She enters, and walks up to the front desk.

 

“Hello! Can I interest you in a room? Only 20 coppers a day!”

 

Anne: “Uh, actually, I was looking for my friends. Their names are Sasha and Marcy. What room are they in?”

 

“Oh, I saw them come down here a few minutes ago. They should be in the dining room having breakfast.”

 

Anne: “Ah, thanks.”

 

Anne walks towards the dining room and pokes her head in. She sees Sasha and Marcy talking.

 

Marcy: “Why are you eating all those eggs, Sash?”

 

Sasha: “Hey, these muscles don’t maintain themselves. Lifting helps, but you gotta watch your diet, too.”

 

“Fine, but it’s your loss. These frog-shaped pancakes are delicious...", Marcy says, before noticing and waving to Anne. "...oh, hey, Anna-banana!"

 

Anne sheepishly walks in and sits down with them.

 

Marcy: “Hey, did you want anything here?”

 

Anne: “I’m not a guest, though…isn’t the food for customers only?”

 

Marcy: “Ah, I’m sure they can make an exception for you. If not, I can just pay for it with the Royal Credit Card.”

 

Anne: “That’s fine…I’m not really hungry.”

 

Sasha: “Anyways, what was your party like yesterday?”

 

Anne: “Oh, well it started with me falling down some stairs…and then Hop Pop accidentally fed me pecans, so I had an allergic reaction…but then I had some fun playing games and dancing with everyone in town, but then…well you know what happened.”

 

Sasha: “Your gifts exploded or something, right?”

 

Anne: “Yeah. Polly got me some Boom Shrooms, but I tripped over my own shoelace and flung them onto the presents.”

 

Sasha: “Yeesh. Sorry about that. Sounds like Marcy and I made your night much better, right?”

 

Anne: “Well, yeah. But that’s not to say I wasn’t having a good time beforehand.”

 

Marcy: “Even after all that, you were…happy?”

 

Anne: “Yeah. I mean, it’s the thought that counts, right? And all the bad stuff that went wrong wasn’t anyone’s fault.”

 

Sasha: “Look at you, looking at the bright side of things.”

 

Anne: “Yeah, the bright side…”

 

Anne sighs.

 

Sasha: “Is something wrong, Anna-banana?”

 

Anne: “Well, I’m sure you guys are wondering why we’re still here…”

 

Marcy: “What do you mean?”

 

Anne: “That agreement we made with our parents. We were supposed to see them for special occasions, like my birthday. But, I seemed to have broken that promise.”

 

Marcy: “Well, sure. But there’s nothing wrong with a birthday party a day later, right? You probably just wanted to celebrate with Wartwood first. I’m sure your parents will understand.”

 

Anne looks down.

 

Sasha: “Or…maybe they won’t…because you couldn’t get the box fixed. Is that right?”

 

Anne looks back up at Sasha, then looks at Marcy.

 

Anne: “I’m sorry, you two. I tried everything I could. But…I don’t know when I’ll get the stone recharged. Or, even if I can…”

 

Marcy: “Wh-why? Can’t you just ask Carly?”

 

Anne: “She wasn’t home the day after we got done with Clarence. I waited all day, and she never came back. I haven’t checked since, but…I did put missing posters around town, and the sheriff told me he’d get back to me if there was any sort of clue as to where she was. But, I haven’t heard from him.”

 

Marcy: “Where do you think she went?”

 

Anne: “I honestly don’t know. But, one thing’s for sure. She doesn’t want to be found.”

 

Marcy: “Wh-what makes you say that?”

 

Anne: “Maddie was able to help me communicate with Valeriana using some magic. She didn’t really give me a lot of info, but…she told us she wanted us back in Amphibia. And that she doesn’t want us to leave, but didn’t specify why.”

 

Sasha: “Woah, woah. She wanted us back here?”

 

Anne: “Yeah. She said her sending us back was so she could finally rest. But the man who sent me that new Calamity Box…Valeriana was the one to tell him to do so in his dreams.”

 

Sasha and Marcy gasp.

 

Anne: “And I’ve also been keeping this from you two…but…Marcy, you happening to find out about the Calamity Box, on the same day that your dad got that new job out of state, on the same day as my 13th birthday, and the same day that you found the Calamity Box…Valeriana planned all of that.”

 

Sasha: “There’s…there’s no way…”

 

Anne: “It’s hard to believe, I know. But, think about it. She wanted three friends to stop The Core. One who was brave, one who was witty, one who was kind. All she needed was a reason for us to want to use that box. That’s why, Marcy, Valeriana transported that book detailing the Calamity Box to you. That’s why she told your dad’s boss to give him that job. And that’s why she sent that box to the thrift store. So you would be driven to use it as a last ditch effort to save our friendship.”

 

Sasha looks over at Marct. “Marcy, this whole time, I thought you were a little selfish for sending us here the first time. Not that I wouldn’t forgive you but…I never would have thought fate brought us here.”

 

Marcy: “So…we weren’t just a few friends who were sent here by random chance? It was all Valeriana’s doing?”

 

Anne: “Almost. Valeriana may be powerful, but there is a limit to what she can do. But even for those things, she can influence people. And we were all just…pawns in her grand scheme. But…everything she did was to give this planet, as well as countless others, the best shot at surviving…”

 

Sasha: “But…that doesn’t explain what’s happening now…this planet isn’t under any new threat, right?”

 

Anne: “Maybe…but I don’t know…if there was…something on its way, something only we could stop, why wouldn’t Carly just tell us?”

 

Marcy: “And it especially doesn’t make sense since Sash and I don’t have our Calamity Powers, and the only way to regain them is by using the Calamity Box…and…it’s not like we can’t get back here if we do, because Anne was able to get back without the Calamity Box…”

 

Anne: “Look, either way, the point is we’re not able to go back right now. We can…maybe explain why to our parents if the box gets fixed. Maybe something will happen that will allow us to do that. But, I’m just letting you know now, that we may never see Earth again. So…try to get comfortable, if you can.”

 

Sasha and Marcy look at each other. Sasha smiles, then Marcy smiles back.

 

Sasha: “Hey Anne, you remember how sad you were when you thought you’d never see the Plantars again?”

 

Anne: “Yeah?”

 

Sasha: “Well, this isn’t quite the same. We have the Calamity Box, and the stones. Maybe Carly can’t be easily found, but she’s still somewhere in Amphibia. And as long as she’s around, she can recharge the stone. And if not her, maybe someone else can. Point is, we’re not really as stuck as you might think.”

 

Marcy: “Yeah, we’ll find a way home. It just might take a little extra time, that’s all.”

 

Anne smiles. “Thanks, you two. I thought you’d be mad with me”, she says.

 

Sasha: “Hey, it’s not your fault.”

 

Anne: “But I was the one to talk us into going here.”

 

Marcy: “Anne. We wanted to come back. Don’t blame yourself.”

 

Anne: “All right. I’ll keep my head high.”

 

“Sasha, are you here?”

 

Grime pokes his head into the dining room.

 

Grime: “Ooh, sorry. Didn’t mean to interrupt girl time.”

 

Sasha: “Nah, you’re good, Grime. We just got done talking. We’ll just finish breakfast and head outside, all right?”

 

Grime: “Sounds good. See you in a few minutes.”

 

Sasha starts shoveling the rest of her eggs into her mouth then downs the rest of her orange juice.

 

Sasha: “It’s go time!”

 

Sasha runs outside. 

 

Anne: “Uh, was she going to wait for you?”

 

Marcy: “Oh, I already know about the announcement. Sasha, Grime, and I have been working on this for the past few days. You can go on ahead.”

 

Anne nods, and walks outside. She sees a big crowd standing in front of a stage. Sasha and Grime are standing on it. Grime grabs the microphone.

 

Grime: “Good evening, fellow Amphibians! I have some exciting news!”

 

Loggle: “Are you lowering property taxes?”

 

Grime: “Eh, no. You find reduced taxes exciting?”

 

Loggle: “Absolutely!”

 

Grime sighs. “No, the news is that we have discovered a new continent!”, he says.

 

The crowd starts clapping and murmuring.

 

Grime: “Yes, as you may know, to the east of Newtopia, there is a large glacier wall in the ocean that prevents access to the other side. However, a recent surveying team found a break in that ice, which is large enough for a small boat to pass through. We came here to get some recruits for our first exploration team.”

 

Hop Pop: “Er, wouldn’t it make more sense to ask someone from Newtopia? Their army is more sophisticated than anyone here…”

 

Grime laughs. “Nonsense! The Wartwood Resistance started here, and people here showed me they were naturally good fighters. Besides, we do have some Newtopians who are willing to go. But Queen Olivia wanted to extend this offer to anyone else who was willing. Any takers?”, he says.

 

Ivy: “Hey, Sprig! We should totally go!”

 

Sprig: “Huh?”

 

Ivy grabs Sprig’s hand and raises it with hers.

 

Ivy: “We’ll go!”

 

Grime: “Ah, if it isn’t my old pal Sprig! And uh…you’re…Ivy, right?”

 

Ivy: “That’s right!”

 

Grime: Why don’t you come up here?”

 

Ivy pulls on Sprig’s hand, and the two of them head up to the stage.

 

Sasha: “These two are perfect. They’re some of the best commandos I’ve ever seen, and they work so well together! Almost, a little too well…”

 

Grime: “Splendid! Listen up, you two. You will have today to pack whatever supplies you may need. We do not know what to expect, so please choose your items carefully. Tomorrow, we will come by again to take you to Newtopia.”

 

Sasha: “And when you succeed, you two will be famous!”

 

Ivy: “Awesome! Mom, Dad, I’ll make you proud!”

 

Felicia and Wally are holding hands in the crowd. They give Ivy a smile.

 

Felicia: “Sweetie, you already have. I’m glad you’re reaching for new heights.”

 

Wally: “Oi, that’s right! You don’t need to prove anything to us. Just do this for you!”

 

Ivy: “Isn’t this great, Sprig? You and I will get to explore somewhere new, and we’ll go down in history!”

 

Sprig chuckles nervously. “Yeah, super cool…”, he says.

 

Grime: “Excellent! You all are dismissed.”

 

Marcy walks outside the hotel, and leaves with Grime and Sasha. Everyone else returns to their normal routines.

 

Ivy: “All right, I’ll go pack my bag, and you do the same. We’ll meet later to talk about strategy.”

 

Sprig nods. Ivy smiles, then runs home. Sprig walks home.

 


 

Sprig is sitting in his room on his bed. He has a bag on his floor, which is empty. He looks at it, and sighs. Polly walks into Sprig’s room.

 

“Sprig, have you seen my wrench?”

 

“Huh? Oh, Hop Pop was using it to whack moles in the avocado patch. He should know where it is.”

 

“Ugh, why can’t he just let me automate that? I could get Frobo to water and pick them, and it can get rid of any pests!”

 

“He said something about it building character.”

 

“I don’t even know what that means. It just seems like an excuse for him to ‘stick to the old ways’”.

 

“Yeah…”

 

“By the way, what are you up to? You came home and just went upstairs, and you’ve been up here for a while.”

 

“Oh, Ivy and I are going to explore a new continent, so I was just packing.”

 

Polly walks over to the bag and sees it doesn’t have anything inside. “Uh, Sprig…this bag is empty", she says.

 

“Uh, yeah I’m having difficulty deciding what to bring. You know how many slingshots I have, right? It’s tough to choose just one…”

 

Polly gives Sprig a doubtful look.

 

“Sprig, why don’t you tell me what’s really going on?”

 

Sprig sighs. “All right, you got me. I don’t really want to go.”

 

“What? But you love adventure!”

 

“Yeah, I do. But…I don’t like not knowing what we’re going up against…”

 

“Dude, we joined the Wartwood Resistance and stood up against Andrias and his Frobo army. The odds seemed heavily against us, and yet you still helped. How is this any different?”

 

"Yeah, I’ll do risky things if there’s no other choice. I mean, if we had done nothing, we would have ended up getting killed anyway, so fighting was really the only thing we could do. But this expedition is completely optional. They can just send someone else to go, and we can join one of the later teams.”

 

“But you won’t be well-known…”

 

“There’s more important things than fame, Polly.”

 

“But what about Ivy? Doesn’t she want to go?”

 

“She does…and that’s where the conflict comes in. I don’t want to stand in the way of her dreams, and I want to help her achieve them, but…at the same time, I don’t want anything bad to happen to her…”

 

“Then go! If you’re with her, that won’t be as likely!”

 

"It’s not that simple, Polly. What if neither of us are…enough? I don’t want you and Hop Pop to have to attend my memorial service. And…", Sprig says, as a tear falls down his cheek. “If our parents were still here, I don’t think they’d want me to go either. And the same goes for Ivy with Felicia and Wally.”

 

Polly hops on the bed and rubs Sprig’s shoulder.

 

“Then I think you need to tell Ivy how you feel.”

 

“I…I can’t. I don’t want to break her heart…”

 

“Sprig, you only have two options. You can either go, or you can talk to her. Neither of them are good, but you’ll have to deal with the repercussions of one of them. It’s really just a matter of which one you’re more comfortable with.”

 

Sprig sighs as Polly hops off the bed.

 

“Anyways, that’s just my advice. I don’t want to influence you one way or the other. And this isn’t really my business, so…I’m just gonna ask Hop Pop for my wrench. Frobo has a few bolts loose.”

 

Polly leaves Sprig’s room. Sprig sighs.

 


 

Sprig is seen standing outside Felicia’s Tea Shoppe. He knocks on the door. Wally opens up.

 

“Oi, hey Sprig! Wanna come inside and have a cup of tea? Made it myself!”

 

“You made tea?”

 

“Ah, don’t worry. Ivy’s been teaching me to make it. She’s also been teaching me to read, so I’ve been taking orders here recently!”

 

“Oh, that’s good, but…maybe some other time. I just wanted to talk to Ivy.”

 

“Oh, she’s just in her room.”

 

Sprig walks inside and heads up to Ivy’s room. He sees the door is cracked open, and sees Ivy is packing her bag. He opens the door, which makes a creaking noise. Ivy turns her head. 

 

“Oh, hey Sprig! You all good to go? I almost am! I got food, a first aid kit, and-”

 

“Ivy.”

 

“Yeah?”

 

“Um, there’s no easy way to say this, but…I’m not going with you.”

 

“...what? Why not...?”

 

“Because…I’m worried what might happen to us. This is uncharted territory. Who knows what we’ll find out there?"

 

“But dude, that’s what makes it such a thrill!”

 

“Ivy, I don’t think you’re thinking about the risk here. We could get killed. Your parents may not realize that. They’re just being happy for you because they want you to see you follow their dreams, just like they did.”

 

“What? Do you not want that for me?”

 

“No, I do. And I wasn’t looking here to change your mind. If you want to go, then please do. I don’t want to get in your way. I’m just letting you know where I stand.”

 

Ivy stands up and balls her hands into fists as she scowls.

 

“You know what, Sprig, I was happy today. I finally got a chance to make something out of my life, and to do so with my best friend. But now you’re telling me you don’t want to go. I thought you cared about me, and that you’d just go with me so we could look out for each other. But maybe you’re not really my friend.”

 

“Ivy…”

 

Ivy walks over to the door. “Leave! I never want to see you again!”, she says.

 

Ivy slams the door in Sprig’s face. Sprig hangs his head down, and leaves the tea shop without a word. Ivy curls herself into a ball and starts crying. A few minutes later, Felicia knocks on the door.

 

“Go away. I wanna be left alone.”

 

“Sweetie, please. I just wanna talk.”

 

Ivy doesn’t respond.

 

“If you don’t wanna open the door, that’s fine. We can just talk this way. What happened?”

 

“Sprig’s not my friend anymore. Or, I guess he never was.”

 

“He said that?”

 

“He didn’t need to.”

 

“Ivy, what have I told you about hopping to conclusions? What did he really say?”

 

“He told me he doesn't want to help me follow my dreams. He’s not like Wally was with you. You two became friends, then lovers. You helped each other follow your dreams. And you wouldn’t be friends if you hadn’t assisted each other.”

 

“I…I don’t know if that’s true."

 

 

“Oh, come on. If Wally hadn’t gotten you what you needed to get this tea shop going, and if you hadn’t helped him stand up to his dad, I don’t think you two would have even spoken to each other again.”

 

“Ivy, I became friends with your father not because we aided each other in our dreams. Sure, not having Wally invest here would have been more bitter than a chamomile tea. But we became friends because we related to each other in a way that neither of us had found with anyone else.”

 

“But friends agree with each other on things, right?”

 

“Not always. The other day, Wally wanted to make tea out of worms, and I told him no. And when I asked him to let me clean up his house, he told me no. Neither friends, nor lovers have to agree with each other on everything.”’

 

“But-”

 

“Look, I’m sure this wasn’t an easy decision for Sprig. He’s his own person with his own priorities. Sure, he may not…think going with you is the best idea, and you see that as a bad thing. But, when he weighed his options, he thought this was the best one. And just because you two may not agree on this, even for something this major, doesn’t mean you can’t stay friends. It just requires effort from both sides. And I’m sure Sprig would be willing to maintain what you have, if you’re willing to do the same.”

 

Ivy doesn’t respond.

 

“I understand you want to be alone right now, and I can respect that. I just wanted to let you know my thoughts on this.”

 

Felicia walks downstairs. Ivy resumes packing her bag. She then looks out the window before grabbing a piece of paper, and writing on it, before sealing it in an envelope. On it, she writes “Give to Sprig in case I don’t come back”. She then goes downstairs to have dinner with her family, with none of them saying a word to each other. She then goes upstairs, brushes her teeth, and goes to sleep.

 


 

Ivy is waiting in the town square with Wally and Felicia. General Yunan arrives riding on a snail.

 

Yunan: “Ivy! Are you ready to go?”

 

Ivy nods.

 

Yunan: “Hmm? I thought Sprig was supposed to be here…”

 

Ivy: “Yeah, he…changed his mind.”

 

Yunan: “That’s…unfortunate. Regardless, we have someone to fill in for him, so it’s no big deal. Ready to go?”

 

Sprig opens the front of his door and sees Ivy. He walks over and hands her his phone.

 

Sprig: “Thought you might need this.”

 

Ivy: “But…don’t you need this for your book?”

 

Sprig: “I can hold off on writing it. You might need this more than I do.”

 

Ivy gives Sprig a small smile.

 

Sprig: “I’ll…see you, I guess…”

 

Sprig walks back to his house and closes the front door.

 

Ivy: “Yeah, I’m ready to go.”

 

Ivy gets on the snail and waves to Wally and Felicia, and they return the wave.

Chapter 22: New Land

Summary:

Ivy and her new friend explore the continent, but find they are not alone.

Chapter Text

Ivy arrives at Newtopia with General Yunan. They both hop off, and Ivy follows Yunan inside the city. Ivy looks around.

 

“It’s magnificent, isn’t it?”

 

“Yeah. I’ve heard this place was a sight to behold, but it’s way different in person.”

 

Yunan chuckles. “If you think this place is cool, just wait until you see the castle”, she says.

 

Ivy follows Yunan into the castle. 

 

“Wow, you live here?”

 

“Yeah. It loses its splendor if you’re here long enough. But the company’s good. Like my wife, Olivia, Master Marcy, and…”

 

Andrias rounds the corner. Ivy gasps.

 

Andrias: “Oh, hello! You must be part of the first exploration team. I don’t think I’ve had the pleasure of meeting you before. What’s your name?”

 

Ivy is too shocked to answer.

 

Yunan: “Ah, sorry. I didn’t tell you this, but Andrias here has made more than enough atonements for his wrongdoings. He’s a changed man.”

 

Ivy: “He is? Sorry, I had no idea…”

 

Andrias: “Oh, that’s quite all right. You couldn’t have known. People in the city still aren’t 100% cool with me. But I’m glad I had people like Yunan, Olivia, and….”

 

Marcy rounds the corner.

 

Andrias: ”...Master Marcy help me forgive myself.”

 

Marcy: “Hey Drias, who are you talking to?”

 

Andrias: “Ah, this is…”

 

Ivy: “Ivy. My name’s Ivy.”

 

Marcy: “Oh! You’re one of the two people who are going to the new continent, right?”

 

Ivy: “Yep, that’s me. Yunan said you had someone else to accompany me?”

 

Marcy: “Uh, yeah. Fair warning though, she’s…a little extreme.”

 

Ivy: “Extreme?”

 

Marcy: “You’ll understand when you meet her. Follow me.”

 

Ivy follows Marcy. They arrive in a room, where there is a female newt sitting with her hair completely shaved. She’s drinking coffee with no sugar or cream. Ivy sits on the opposite end of the table and extends her hand for a handshake.

 

Ivy: “Uh, hi. My name’s Ivy. I think we’ll be working together.” 

 

The newt smacks her hand.

 

“All right, I love high-fives! Your name’s Ivy? That’s rad. My name’s Darla. Don’t forget it!”, she says.

 

Ivy: “Uh, yeah sure…”

 

Darla: “Hey, why you being so meek? If you got something to say, then say it! Don’t care about what people will think of you!”

 

Ivy: “Oh, sorry.”

 

Darla: “No apologies!”

 

Ivy is at a loss for words. Marcy walks over.

 

Marcy: “Since you two have had the pleasure of getting to know each other, let me get you guys set up for the mission.”

 

Darla: “Wicked! I’ve been cooped up here. But I’m like a dragon that can’t be tamed. Let me loose!”

 

Darla and Ivy follow Marcy. They walk into a laboratory of sorts. Marcy picks up two devices with armbands attached, and puts one on Darla and the other on Ivy. She then goes back and picks up two earpieces, and puts them in Darla and Ivy’s ears.

 

Darla: “Bro, what are all these gadgets?”

 

Marcy: “Good question! I designed those myself. Those earpieces will allow you to communicate with us long distance. All you gotta do is press the button on the side, and then we’ll be able to hear you through this speaker. Go on, try it!”

 

Darla presses on the button”

 

Darla: “Far out!”

 

Her voice reverberates throughout the room, while Marcy and Ivy cover their ears.

 

Marcy: “Welp...at least we know it works...”

 

Darla: “And what’s this doohickey that you attached to our arms?”

 

Marcy: “Another good question! Those can detect your vitals, like your heart rate and cholesterol, which…brings me to an order I have to give you two.”

 

Darla: “I don’t really like being told what to do. But you’re cool, so I’ll listen.”

 

Marcy: “This continent, as you may know, is a place we know nothing about. As such, there could be hazards that we could not have foreseen. That’s why, if either one of you is in trouble, or perishes, the other has to return here immediately.”

 

Ivy: “Wait, we may just have to leave the other to die?!”

 

Marcy: “That wasn’t my call. Olivia knew this expedition could be extremely life-threatening. The point of those devices is for you to give us valuable information. Ideally, you two explore the continent and make it back here unharmed. But, this is a real possibility. And anything you can tell us will help the next team.”

 

Ivy is at a loss for words.

 

Darla: “Bro, you don’t need to worry about all that. I live for danger!”

 

Ivy: “Darla, how can you be fine with this?”

 

Darla: “Aren’t you?”

 

Ivy: “Not really…”

 

Darla: “Hey, listen, bro. Life’s finite. Everyone you know and love, they’re all gonna die someday. So the timing of it really shouldn’t matter, right?”

 

Ivy: “But what about all the missed opportunities you’ll never get to take?”

 

Darla: “Counterpoint. Some people live a long life but do diddly-squat. Do you think those people are happy?”

 

Ivy: “No, I guess not…”

 

Darla: “Besides, dude, those people were brought into this world, and all that’s really left of ‘em is the memories that others have of ‘em. But that’s not really anything, is it? Look at Marcy here. She left her mark on Amphibia, being the savior of this world and all. Don’t you wanna be like her?”

 

Ivy: “I guess…”

 

Darla: “Rad! Anything else, Marcy?”

 

Marcy: “No…that is all. Darla, you can leave. I need to have a word with Ivy here.”

 

Darla: “All right, but if I have to wait much longer, I’m gonna break something!”

 

Darla leaves the room.

 

Ivy: “I see what you mean by ‘extreme’.”

 

Marcy: “Yeah. Darla is…a unique one. She constantly puts herself in death-defying situations. And I don’t know if it’s just luck, or skill, but…well, you know.”

 

Ivy: “Why does she do that?”

 

Marcy: “Wish I knew. She boggles my mind. In any case, you might say she’s…chaos. And chaos on its own is not a good thing. You’ll have to be her order to work well together.”

 

Ivy nods, and is about to leave the room.

 

Marcy: “Ivy, I wish you and Darla success on your travels!”

 

Ivy smiles, then leaves.

 


 

Ivy and Darla are standing on the pier next to Bartley, Branson, and Blair.

 

Bartley: “So, on this motorboat we’ve put a compass. Based on our projections, you just need to head 5 degrees to the northeast.”

 

Branson: “And I told you, that’s not going to work! You didn’t account for the wind or tides at all, you moron!”

 

Bartley: “The effect caused by wind and tides are negligible, you idiot!”

 

Blair: “Can’t we just give them a map…?”

 

Branson and Bartley: “Shut up, Blair!”

 

Darla: “Bro, these three are my style, you know? They may be nerds, but they got fire in them.”

 

Yunan walks over.

 

Yunan: “You three! Why aren’t Ivy and Darla on the water yet?”

 

Branson: “Oh, sorry, General. We were just coming to an agreement.”

 

Bartley: “Not really!”

 

Yunan: “Enough! You three are unbearable! Just get them going...they’ll figure it out.”

 

Blair: “Ivy, Darla, just get in the boat. That lever there controls the speed. To turn, just use this rudder. Got it?”

 

Darla: “Not really. Did you get any of that, Ivy?”

 

Ivy: “Yeah, I’ll take care of it.”

 

Ivy and Darla get in the boat. Ivy checks the compass is pointing in the right direction, then pulls the lever.

 


 

Ivy and Darla are speeding across the sea, when they see the glacier wall. Ivy sees an opening, and heads towards it. Once they get through, they find a beach, and they dock there. They jump out of the boat, and Ivy pulls out a rope, hammer and stake from her bag. She drives the stake into the ground, ties a knot around it with the rope, and ties it around the boat.

 

“Bro, what are you doing?”

 

“Making sure the boat doesn’t float away.”

 

“That’s wicked smart!”

 

IYeah, sure. Let’s get going.”

 

They start walking towards the jungle and enter. Ivy pulls out her phone and sighs.

 

“Whatcha got there, dude?”

 

“Oh, this…is something that someone important gave to me before I left.”

 

“They your friend?”

 

“I don’t know. I said some pretty hurtful things to him. I wouldn’t blame if he doesn’t consider us friends anymore.”

 

“Was it just this once?”

 

Yeah…”

 

“Then you’re probably still friends. It’s not like it happened to you when you were a kid, by your own family, everyday…”

 

Ivy puts the phone away. "Did…did that happen to you...?”, she says.

 

Darla frowns slightly. “Yeah. It’s part of the reason why I’m like this.”

 

“What do you mean?”

 

“My family told me I was worthless. Said I wouldn’t amount to anything. And I didn’t really have a lot of friends, either. I felt…lonely. Even though I had people around me. One day, I just had had enough. I ran away, and I felt free. I desperately wanted to prove them wrong. That’s why I live life to the fullest. But...", Darla says, before chuckling. "...I guess they’re still haunting me, huh? Should be doing this because it’s what I want.”

 

“Is this what you want?”

 

“Honestly, don’t know. Never really talked to anyone about it before. I can’t even remember what I wanted to be when I was younger. Before the abuse started.”

 

“I’m…I’m sorry…oops, I forgot I wasn’t supposed to apologize…”

 

“Nah, it’s all right…I didn’t really mean what I said about not apologizing. Part of the reason why I’m so hardcore is so I can push people away from me…”

 

“Why? Do you not like people?”

 

“Naw, that’s not it. I just find it difficult to trust people. I trusted my family, and I got hurt. I feel like if I get to know someone, it’ll just happen again…but here I am, pouring my heart out to someone I just met…”

 

“...can I tell you something?”

 

“Sure, dude.”

 

“Marcy told me you were extreme, so I initially thought we weren’t going to get along. And when I met you, my suspicions were confirmed. I thought you were going to be impossible to work with. But you…you’re all right.”

 

“Thanks, bro!”

 

Ivy and Darla approach a clearing. They see there are tents set up.

 

“Aw, no! Someone beat us here. This reeks!”

 

“But, the glacier…”

 

Darla: “Hey, I’ve got an idea. Doesn’t look like anyone’s here. Let’s just steal their stuff!”

 

Darla jumps out of the bushes and looks at the tents. Ivy notices movement out of the corner of her eye.

 

“Darla, look out!”

 

Ivy jumps out of the bushes and pushes Darla out of the way, just as a spear hits the ground right where she was standing.

 

“OK...maybe there is someone here..."

 

An unknown creature seemingly appears out of thin air. Several more similar-looking ones appear as Ivy stands up.

 

"Woah, and they can turn themselves invisible!"

 

“I wouldn’t say we can turn ourselves invisible. Rather, us salamanders have a special ability to camouflage…”, he says.

 

“What the heck is a salamander?”

 

“You’re not too smart, are you?”, he says.

 

“Hey, you better watch your mouth, before I put my fist in it!”

 

“Darla, look around. We’re outnumbered. Just…let me handle this, OK?”

 

“Greetings, salamanders. My name is Ivy. I’m a frog from a town called Wartwood, and this...", Ivy says, as she gestures to Darla. "...is my…friend, Darla. She’s a newt from a city called Newtopia. Please excuse her, because while she…did attempt to steal from you, she is a bit reckless.”

 

“At least one of you is reasonable. My name is Nahuel”, he says. 

 

Ivy: “It’s…nice to meet you?”

 

Nahuel: “I understand your hesitation. Perhaps we got off on the wrong foot. My people are generally peaceful, and only attack when provoked. If this does not happen again, you have my word that we will not fight.”

 

Ivy: “Good, I’m glad we could come to an agreement.”

 

Nahuel smiles. “That is how we do things here. Our people agree on just about everything”, he says.

 

Ivy: “E-everything?”

 

Nahuel: “Yes, everything. We've seen how your societies operate, and we abhorred their ideas.”

 

Ivy: “How…how could you possibly know how we run things?”

 

Nahuel: “Simple. Our ancestors visited your continent once before.”

 

Ivy: “That’s…impossible. I haven’t read many books, but I’ve never even heard the slightest hint that your species existed, or that you lived here.”

 

“That doesn’t surprise me…", Nahuel says, as he circles around them. "...you know, it’s easy to miss something when you don’t know it’s there…wouldn’t you agree?”

 

Ivy: “Huh?”

 

Naguel stops. “Haven’t figured it out? They used camouflage to blend in. Nobody knew they were even there", he says.

 

Ivy gasps

 

Nahuel: “As a result, we were able to learn your language, as well as other useful information. Everyone was so helpful in the knowledge they provided. But…one thing they could have improved upon was how they settled arguments…”

 

Ivy: “Huh?”

 

Nahuel: “My ancestors saw frogs, newts, and toads alike squabble over the most trivial of things. For minor things, they had debates. And for major things, people resorted to violence. It sickened them, and so they vowed to never go back.”

 

Ivy: “But…that just seems to be universal. How could you not have any sort of difference of opinions?”

 

Nahuel: “Ah, well…I did say just about everything. For the things that two individuals cannot agree on, they go to…The Ring.”

 

Ivy: “The…Ring?”

 

Nahuel: “Yes. Follow me, and I will elaborate.”

 

Nahuel starts walking, Ivy helps Darla up, and the two of them follow.

 


 

Nahuel, Darla, Ivy, and the rest of the tribe approach a ring outlined with stones. It’s ten feet in diameter.

 

Ivy: “This must be The Ring.”

 

Nahuel: “Correct. Here, two salamanders will sort out their dispute.”

 

Ivy: “How?”

 

Nahuel: “Simple. They fight to the death.”

 

Ivy: “What?!”

 

Nahuel: “Two salamanders enter. Only one of them leaves. And if one of them steps outside? We kill them.”

 

Ivy: “But that doesn’t prove who’s right or wrong!”

 

Nahuel: “No, it doesn’t. But when two people have different opinions, both think they’re right. They just put those to the test here.”

 

Ivy: “This…this is barbaric…”

 

Nahuel: “Yes, and my people are well-aware of that. That’s why it also serves as a deterrent. People generally will come to an agreement, just out of fear of having to come here. It’s not perfect, but it’s better than anything you have come up with.”

 

Ivy: “But-”

 

Nahuel: “Tell me. When was the last time you had a disagreement with someone, that ended with either of you not getting what you wanted?”

 

The memory of Ivy and Sprig arguing in her room flashes in her mind. 

 

Nahuel: “It was recent, wasn’t it? Dare I say…it might have been as early as yesterday.”

 

Ivy: “But…the person who I argued with means a lot to me. I wouldn’t…even consider fighting him because we didn’t agree, and he wouldn’t do the same to me…”

 

Nahuel: “And that is why you are weak.”

 

Ivy: “What did you say?!”

 

Nahuel: “Here, we have no relationships. Salamanders serve the tribe, and the tribe serves them. Everybody shares what they have. And when a salamander dies, we simply forget about them.”

 

Ivy: “OK, I think I’ve had enough of this place. I thought you were reasonable, but you’re just a sociopath. We’re leaving.”

 

Ivy grabs Darla’s hand and starts to move away. The salamanders point their spears at them.

 

Ivy: “Wh-what’s the big idea!?”

 

Nahuel: “I’m afraid you can’t leave.”

 

Ivy: “Wh-why!?”

 

Nahuel: “If you go back, you will tell people about us, won’t you? Then they will want to come here. They will ruin the perfect society we have set up here.”

 

Ivy: “Look, if it really means that much to you, my lips are sealed.”

 

Nahuel: “You might be lying to me. That is a risk I do not wish to take. Nor need to.”

 

The salamanders retreat their spears.

 

Nahuel: “Listen, I’ve given you quite a nice offer. We could have murdered you for trying to enter our village, and we won’t even bother you as long as you live here, so long as you do not bother us. You can even live how you want.”

 

Ivy: “But my friends and family back home…”

 

“I’m sure they will miss you. But their feelings are none of my concern...", Nahuel says, as he walks past Ivy and Darla. "...salamanders, let us return home.”

 

Ivy starts to tear up, as Nahuel and his tribe retreat. 

Chapter 23: Escape

Summary:

Ivy and Darla look for a way off the new continent.

Chapter Text

It is nighttime. Ivy is setting up a tent. Once she finishes, she notices Darla is just laying on the ground.

 

“Darla, please. You should sleep in here. You might catch a cold.”

 

“So what? I’ll get stronger as a result of it.”

 

Ivy sighs. She opens the flap of the tent and gets into her sleeping bag. She looks at her phone, and opens a picture of her and Sprig smiling. Then she starts to cry.

 

“Bro, what’s the matter?”

 

What’s the matter!? We were just told we can’t leave this place! I’ll never see my family or friends ever again! But I guess for you, that doesn’t matter, because all you have is me!”

 

Darla sits up with a scowl and balls her hands into fists.

 

“You take that back.”

 

“I…I’m sorry. I’m just worked up, is all.”

 

Darla sighs as she releases her grip. “It’s fine. I guess from my point of view I don’t really have much to lose. But you…you got friends and family. And ones who care about you”, she says.

 

“Yeah. And…I never even properly apologized to Sprig…”

 

“Sprig…that must be your buddy, right?”

 

“Yeah…”

 

Darla stands up. “You know what, I’ll get us off this island.”

 

“But-”

 

“No buts. There’s gotta be some agreement we can make with that dude. He’s all about them, right?”

 

“What if he challenges you? I don’t want to see you get hurt…or worse…”

 

“Honestly, I wouldn’t mind cracking his skull..but I guess that’d make me just as bad as him, huh? So I won’t fight him.”

 

“Wow, you…you held yourself back there.”

 

“Yeah...I guess I did...", Darla says, before chuckling. "Maybe I’m not such a violent person after all.”

 

“All right, tomorrow morning, we ask Nahuel if there’s some sort of arrangement we can make so we can leave."

 

“That’s the spirit!”

 

Ivy goes to sleep with a smile on her face. Darla lays back down on the ground, and goes to sleep as well.

 


 

Ivy and Darla are walking to the tribe. There, they see salamanders smelting metal, sharpening sticks, and carving stones. The salamanders give them a neutral look.

 

“You know, I feel kinda bad for these guys…”

 

“What do you mean, dude?”

 

“They seem to just…live in constant fear. Nobody’s talking to each other because maybe they’ll find they disagree on something. And Nahuel has conditioned them to think this is the best way to live.”

 

“Do you think it isn’t, bro?”

 

“I mean, just look at them. How can it be?”

 

“I don’t really know about ‘the best way to live’. I mean, as bonkers as Nahuel is, he does have a point…”

 

“You...you agree with him?”

 

“Not at all. Dude’s crazy. But he’s not wrong. Everyone here shares with each other, so there’s no hunger. And everyone looks out for each other unconditionally. Plus, nobody has arguments.”

 

But…there’s no change here because of that. Sure, debates aren’t exactly good to have, but if nobody disputes ideas, people will just live the same way. And here, if you have a dispute, you know what happens. And that’s if people voice their opinions. People here must have them. Everyone does. But they keep silent.”

 

“Yeah, I get that. It is different. But different doesn’t necessarily mean bad.”

 

“Um, excuse me…”, a voice says.

 

Ivy: “Oh, uh…hey…what’s up?”

 

“My name is Odina. You’re those two visitors from the other continent, right?”, she says.

 

Ivy: “Yeah, that’s us.”

 

Odina: “I…overheard your conversation.”

 

Ivy: “Um, maybe you shouldn’t talk with us. Nahuel might have you battle one of us.”

 

Odina: “It is fine. He only has us do that if we disagree. You’re…right in that we don’t talk much. We try to talk as little as possible, because…we worry whether we might be forced to duel. As such, people here don’t know much about each other, beyond the obvious. That also makes it easier for us to forget people once they’re gone. It’s a peaceful life.”

 

Ivy: “Do you really think that? Or is that just what you were influenced to think?”

 

Everyone stops what they’re doing, and turns their heads to look at how Odina responds. She starts sweating.

 

Odina: “I…I can’t answer that question…”

 

Ivy frowns.

 

Darla: “Bro, come on. We’re not gonna get any straightforward replies from these people.”

 

Ivy and Darla start walking.

 

Odina: “Wait…”

 

Ivy and Darla stop.

 

Odina: “Nahuel only cares about the stated difference in opinions. But…there’s more than one way to tell what a person thinks…”

 

Ivy turns around, and nods. Then she continues walking with Darla, until they find Nahuel in one of the tents, with a giant cricket carcass next to him. He notices them.

 

Nahuel: “Ah, if it isn’t our new friends! We are having a festival tonight, to celebrate the successful hunt of this cricket. You’re welcome to join us, if you wish. Just bring your own food.”

 

Darla: “Thanks, but no thanks.”

 

Nahuel: “Oh?”

 

Ivy: “It’s not like we don’t trust you or anything. We just wanted to bargain with you.”

 

Nahuel: “Bargain?”

 

Darla: “Yeah. We want off this island.”

 

Nahuel: “I told you yesterday. You cannot-”

 

Darla: “Yeah, you don’t want us to leave. We remember. But surely there must be something we can do that may change your mind?”

 

Nahuel interlaces his fingers. "Hmm...yes, I suppose there is. I just don’t understand", he says.

 

Ivy: “What do you mean? It’s simple. We don’t want to be here.”

 

Nahuel: “But why? You must have a reason.”

 

Ivy: “Yeah. We got loved ones back home. And while we could make friends here, if there was a choice between you guys and them, that’s hardly even a choice. So just tell us what you want, and we’ll get it for you.”

 

Nahuel brings his hands to his side. “Very well. To the east of here, there is a temple which is said to contain a vast trove of treasure. Salamanders have entered before, but none have exited. If you can retrieve all of it for us, we will…allow you to leave just this once", he says.

 

Ivy: “No way. You let anyone come here whenever they want.”

 

Nahuel: “Is that a challenge?”

 

Ivy: “Maybe it is. You gonna tussle with us? Even if you win, you don’t really win.”

 

Nahuel: “How so?”

 

Ivy: “Clearly, you’re afraid to go. Everyone here seems to be. We’re the only two people who are brave enough to. You kill us, you lose your one opportunity to get those riches.”

 

Nahuel “...fine. Your conditions are acceptable. We’re not using much of this land, anyway. However, we still wish to maintain our way of life here. As such, if anyone tries to interfere with us, we will show them no mercy. Understood?”

 

Ivy and Darla nod. Nahuel stands up, walks over to a drawer, pulls out two burlap sacks from it, and tosses one each to Darla and Ivy.

 

“Good. Should you complete the temple, store the gems in there, and bring them to us...", Nahuel says, before pointing at them "...and don’t try to take it for yourself. That treasure is rightfully ours, so don’t even think of cheating us out of it.”

 

Ivy: “We won’t.”

 

Ivy and Darla leave. Nahuel steps outside and watches them exit the village. He then goes up to a salamander starting a campfire.

 

“Nootau. I have a request for you.”

 

“Hmm? What is it?”

 

“There is something I need to take care of. You must watch over the tribe in my absence.”

 

“M-me? Why me?”

 

“You have proven yourself fit to be the leader of this tribe. You are next in line in case of my death. Think of this as a practice session just in case that does happen.”

 

“But…what about someone like Dustu? He’s stronger and faster than me.”

 

Nahuel menacingly takes a step forward. “Are you questioning my judgment?”, he says.

 

Nootau gulps. “N-no, sir. Thank you for choosing me. You have my word that I will defend this village”, he says.

 

“Excellent. I will return shortly.”

 

Nahuel camouflages himself, and starts following Ivy and Darla. 

 

“That Ivy...she thinks she’s so smart, tricking me like that. But we’ll see who has the last laugh...”

 


 

Ivy and Darla are heading towards the temple.

 

“Hey, Darla?”

 

“Sup?”

 

“Thanks for…not giving up. I resigned myself to just staying here, even though I didn’t want to. But you didn’t throw in the towel.”

 

Darla chuckles. “Well, I didn’t wanna stay around those stinky salamanders. Those guys seriously need a bath”, she says.

 

Ivy smiles, then hears a chirp, and stops walking. Darla continues.

 

“Darla?”

 

Darla stops, and turns around.

 

“Yeah, dude?”

 

“Did you hear that?”

 

“Hear what?”

 

There’s another chirp.

 

That.”

 

A giant cricket lands behind Ivy. She screams as Darla walks towards it with a smile.

 

“Finally! Something I can hit!”

 

Darla jumps at the cricket. She dodges all of its swipes, and lands several punches over its body. Then she lands an uppercut to its chin and sends it flying.

 

“First mistake was trying to harm my friend here. Second mistake was thinking you could take me on!”

 

There are more chirps. Three more crickets land in front of Darla, before she backs up.

 

“Darla, we need to get out of here!”

 

Ivy grabs Darla’s hand and starts running. The crickets chase them.

 

"Why are we running? Just help me fight!”

 

“We're outnumbered! We don’t need to battle them, we just need to lose them. It doesn’t really make a difference either way.”

 

“Tch...fine. You’re lucky I’m a fast runner…”

 

The two continue running. Ivy notices they're heading towards a gorge.

 

“A ravine! We have to stop!”

 

The two stop running, and skid just before sliding off. 

 

“Did we lose them?”

 

The two turn around to see the crickets approaching quickly.

 

“Gonna say no. Now can we make a stand?”

 

Ivy looks at the ravine, then she gets an idea.

 

“Darla, we’re just gonna stand here. When I say go, you’re gonna step to the side!"

 

Darla nods. Ivy watches as the crickets approach. When they get within a few feet of them, two of them try to tackle them. 

 

“Go!”

 

The two step to the side, and two of the crickets fall down into the bottomless pit. Darla and Ivy watch as they disappear.

 

“Heh, that was smart! Dumb bugs!”

 

“Yeah! Wait, weren’t there three of them chasing us...?”

 

Darla and Ivy turn around to see one of the crickets still standing. It roars at them. Darla attempts to punch it, but it blocks the blow, only sending it back five yards.

 

“This one must be smarter than the others…”

 

Darla looks across the ravine.

 

“We’re gonna have to get across…I don’t think it will follow us…”

 

“But can we even make that…?”

 

The cricket roars. Darla picks up Ivy, and throws her across the ravine. Darla then jumps as hard as she can, and manages to grab a rock several feet below the edge of the cliff. The cricket then retreats. Ivy gets up, and sees Darla hanging.

 

“Darla! Don’t worry, I’ll help you up!”

 

Ivy grabs a rope out of her bag, and tosses one end to Darla. She grabs it just as the rock gives way. Ivy backs up as far as possible and plants her feet in the ground, but she struggles to pull Darla up. Her feet start to slip.

 

“Ivy…you need to let go…I’m dragging you down…”

 

“No! I’m not leaving you here! You said we’d get off this island together!”

 

“I was…kinda lying. I was trying to get us both off, but I knew there was a possibility one of us might not. I wanted to make sure the one who did was you.”

 

“But…why?”

 

“I don’t have friends and family waiting back home for me. You do.”

 

Ivy starts to cry. “Darla…”, she says.

 

“It’s OK, dude. I’ve done a lot with my life, more than some people who have lived way longer…and the one regret I had before coming here was eased. I was able to open up to you. And even if the time we spent together was short…I enjoyed every second of it. Just…promise me you’ll get that treasure. That you’ll get home. And that you’ll tell your friends and family how much they mean to you”, she says.

 

“I…I will. And I won’t forget you. I’ll make sure people know who you were”, she says.

 

Darla lets go, just as Ivy approaches the edge.

 

“NO!”

 

Darla is seen plummeting into the abyss, with tears in her eyes but a smile on her face.

 


 

In Newtopia, Marcy and Yunan are looking at the vital signs of Ivy and Darla.

 

 

“Marcy, take a look at this. Darla’s heart rate just significantly dropped. Is she…”

 

Marcy hangs her head down as Yunan takes a step back.

 

“I…I can’t believe it. She really met her match out there…”

 

“Ivy’s heart rate is…accelerated a little. But that’s not out of the ordinary, except…”

 

“I’ll contact her and see what’s going on…”

 

Yunan pushes the speaker button.

 

“Ivy, this is General Yunan speaking. Please describe what’s happening.”

 

Yunan is met with silence.

 

“Ivy, do you read me? Please respond!”

 

Yunan waits for several more moments before putting the device down.

 

“I don’t understand. You told her to come back immediately or talk with us if one of them perished, correct?”

 

Marcy nods.

 

"Then why isn’t she?”

 

“Ivy’s heart rate is consistent with someone who is going through emotional distraught…”

 

“Emotional distraught? You mean she’s…sad that Darla is gone?”

 

Marcy nods.

 

“I don’t understand. Darla didn’t have any friends, and for good reason, too. There’s no way those two could have bonded…”

 

“But…what if they did? That would explain why, right?”

 

“I…can’t argue with that.”

 

“I think Ivy will be fine. I think she needs time to process this. She’ll talk to us when she’s ready.”

 

“I hope you’re right…it’d be a shame if this mission was a complete bust…”

 


 

Ivy is seen in a cave covering her eyes with her hands.

 

“Darla…why…I don’t understand…”

 

Darla’s words ring in her mind.

 

“Just…promise me you’ll get that treasure. That you’ll get home. And that you’ll tell your friends and family how much they mean to you.”

 

“I…I’m too sad to move…but…I have to get home…because it was her…last request…”

 

Ivy wipes her tears.  “Darla wanted me to get back for my friends and family. But…I have to do this for her, too. If I don’t get back, people won’t know her story. It’d be like she never even existed. And she didn’t want that. I’ll do it for her, just like I did for…Emily", she says.

 

Ivy stands up. “Darla wouldn’t want to see me like this. I can be sad when I get back, for now…I have a temple to conquer", she says.

 

Ivy leaves the cave and starts heading towards the temple once more.

 


 

Ivy is walking, when a temple comes into view. She stops walking just before the entrance.

 

“This must be it. Nahuel said nobody has ever left this place. I know I need to get through this place, but…there’s a chance I end up like the people who have previously attempted to get through. I…I have to contact Yunan.”

 

Ivy presses the button on her earpiece.

 

“Hello? Is anyone there?”

 

"Ivy, are you all right?”

 

“Relatively. I’m alive…which is more than Darla can say…”

 

“Ah, I’m sorry.”

 

“It’s fine…there was nothing you could have done…”

 

“That’s not what I meant. I…hadn’t considered the possibility that you and Darla could become friends, so I didn’t understand why you didn’t respond. Please forgive me.”

 

“Well, I suppose I should give you a status report…”

 

“That can wait. You need to get back here.”

 

“I…I can’t…”

 

“Ivy, I understand you want to maybe leave a headstone for Darla, but both of you knew that this mission could take either of your lives. Marcy told you to leave under these circumstances.”

 

“That’s not why. I do want to leave, but I am unable to…”

 

“And why not?”

 

“This continent isn’t uninhabited. There are...other amphibians living here.”

 

Yunan gasps. “A new species!? Did you talk with them?”, she asks.

 

“Yes, and yes...”

 

“What are they like?”

 

Ivy notices that Nahuel comes out of hiding from his camouflage. He is holding a knife, and makes a cut motion a few inches away from his throat. Ivy starts to sweat.

 

“Ivy, are you still there?”

 

“Uh, yeah! You wanted to know what they were like? They’re just, uh…toads.”

 

“Oh. So they’re not really new...”

 

“Oh, b-but g-get this! They...h-have two h-horns on their head!”

 

“Horns?”

 

“Yeah…anyways, you know how mean Grime used to be? Well, these toads are just like that. They won’t let me leave.”

 

“Understood. We’ll send out another team to rescue you.”

 

Nahuel glares at Ivy.

 

“No!”

 

“No? What do you mean ‘no’?”

 

“I worked out an arrangement with them. If I do something for them, they’ll let me leave, and come back, as often as I please. They’ll also let everyone else do the same, assuming we don’t bother them. If you send someone else, they might be subjected to being stuck here…”

 

“...fine. We will monitor your vitals from here. Should you also perish, we will send someone else. Best of luck with your…task.”

 


 

Yunan stops pressing the button before looking over at Marcy, who has a concerned expression.

 

“General?”

 

“Yes, Master Marcy?”

 

“I, uh…apologize for not telling you this earlier. But there’s a secret that Anne, Sasha and I have been keeping from Amphibia since…we first came here.”

 

“A secret? From everyone?”

 

“Yes. I don’t really want to tell you, and I don’t mind if you hate us for what I’m about to tell you…but I have to…”

 

“Master Marcy, you and your friends saved our world for no other reason than the good in your heart. You could tell me just about anything, and I…promise I won’t loathe you for it. And I think I speak for everyone in Amphibia when I say this.”

 

“OK then…here goes…did you ever wonder how I knew you guys were newts when I first came here?”

Chapter 24: Time to Travel

Summary:

Ivy finds a strange artifact in a temple. Marcy reveals a long-kept secret to Andrias, Olivia, and Yunan.

Chapter Text

Ivy and Nahuel are looking at each other.

 

“My, how far your civilization has advanced. You are now able to communicate with people far away.”

 

“What are you doing here?”

 

“I was on a stroll, when I heard you having a conversation with someone. Thought it might have been with Darla, but she seems to not be here. Where has she gone?”

 

Ivy hangs her head down.

 

“Ah...I was not expecting that. She seemed like a capable warrior, despite her…lack of intelligence.”

 

Ivy makes eye contact with Nahuel with a stone cold stare.

 

“Do you only see people as nothing more than their physical abilities? There’s more to people than what they are able to do!"

 

“From your point of view, maybe. But you are correct in your assumption of me. Why do you ask?”

 

“Because…Darla was more than just a newt. She was someone who valued life. And she…thought I was worth more than her, which is why she traded her life, for mine.”

 

“How foolish of her. No life is worth more than another.”

 

"How can you say that!? You let people kill each other over disputes!”

 

“We have no involvement in that. Besides, what’s one life for maintaining peace?”

 

“Big talk coming from you. Would you give up your life in the name of peace?”

 

Without hesitation.”

 

“Whatever...", Ivy says, as she stomps off. "...I gotta go get your treasure!”

 

“Don’t bother. You won’t survive.”

 

Ivy stops. “What did you say?!”

 

“You heard me. I had my doubts the two of you working together would make it. But now that you are alone, I am certain you will perish.”

 

Ivy balls her hands into fists and approaches Nahuel.

 

“Listen up, bub, Darla gave me the chance to keep going. If I don’t, then her sacrifice means nothing.”

 

“Do you think that’s what she would have wanted? For you to perish in the temple? That would also make her sacrifice meaningless, no? Surely, living life here is not that unbearable, even if your friends and family are not here.”

 

“No, I guess if you ignore them, it’s not that bad. But you sicken me, and I’ll be happy to leave this island if I never have to see your ugly mug again.”

 

"Sticks and stones, Ivy. I do not care about your reasons for wanting to leave this place. If you bring me the treasure, I will rescind my statement and apologize sincerely. But if you’re in that temple and are about to die, do not forget I didn’t warn you.”

 

Ivy walks towards the temple.

 

“Such hardheadedness. She will get what she deserves", Nahuel says, as he starts to walk home. "

 


 

Ivy is navigating through the jungle, when she comes across a temple made of stone covered with moss. She walks towards the entrance and goes inside, and the door closes behind her.

 

“Welp, no turning back now. Let’s see what this temple has to offer...”

 

Ivy walks farther in, and notices there are giant axes swinging from side to side rapidly. She studies them closely.

 

“Looks like I’m gonna have to commit to this. I either go as fast as possible, or I get sliced in half…”

 

Ivy starts counting in her head. Then she closes her eyes, and starts running. She manages to get to the other side, just as an axe nearly misses her. 

 

"One down.”

 

Ivy enters the second room. It has a single bridge connecting the entrance to the exit. At the bottom of the room, there is a pool of lava. She starts walking, when a huge pillar comes out from under the floor a foot in front of her and slams into the ceiling in front of her. She lets out a breath she didn’t know she was holding.

 

“Second room involves potentially getting crushed to death. Good to know.”

 

Ivy tries to look for a way past the pillar.

 

“How am I supposed to get through? I can’t break this, it’s made of marble…and I don’t know how someone could safely get to the other side without…falling into that lava…”

 

The pillar slowly starts retreating into the ground. Ivy taps her foot against the ground as it retreats back into the ground.

 

“Hopefully, it doesn’t do that again…”

 

Ivy tiptoes across the part of the floor where the pillar once was. She then notices there’s another part of the floor where there is marble, which repeats nine more times.

 

Ivy: “All right, just gotta get close enough to it…”

 

Ivy moves very slowly towards the marble part of the floor. The pillar juts out of the ground. She then waits for it to recoil, and repeats this eight more times.

 

Ivy groans. “I know I’m trying to survive here, but that room was so boring…”, she says.

 

Ivy enters the final room. She notices there is a 6 by 6 grid of tiles in front of her, with each one being a foot wide and foot long. A six note song begins, and one tile in each row lights up in rhythm with the song. The song then plays again.

 

“Ah, I got it. It just wants me to follow the pattern in tempo with the beat.”

 

Ivy notices the tiles light up differently the second time.

 

“Oh, I guess it changes each time. Really gotta focus, then…”

 

The song then finishes once more. The tiles light up, and Ivy looks at each one carefully. Once the song is over, she counts to herself, then jumps onto one tile to the beat, then to the next, until she’s across the grid.

 

“Whew! Don’t wanna know what happens to people who stepped on the wrong tile…or too early…or too late…”

 

Ivy gets to the final room. There, she sees a giant pile of precious gems against the back wall. In the middle of the room is a pedestal with a stopwatch on it, which she ignores.

 

“WOAH! That guy wasn’t kidding about there being a frog ton of treasure here. Too bad it’s all his…”, Ivy says, as she walks over the trove. “...I mean, he probably doesn’t know how much treasure’s in here, right? I’ll just fill this sack he gave me, and told him that’s all there was. That should be enough for him. And I’ll just fill my bag with whatever I can carry.”

 

Ivy begins filling the sack with as many jewels as she can. She then puts in as many as she can in her bag.

 

“...I guess it’s possible he might think there’s more than I’m saying…if he thinks it’s too little, I’ll just tell him I couldn’t carry it all. Just so long as I keep some, because I conquered this temple, not him.”

 

Ivy is about to leave, when her eye catches the stopwatch on the pedestal. 

 

“What is this...?”

 

Ivy picks up the stopwatch. She notices it isn’t moving. She pushes the button on the side, and nothing happens.

 

“Stupid thing doesn’t even work. But…someone couldn’t have just this here…there has to be some reason for it being here…”

 

Ivy turns the watch around. She notices there are several dials, with one labeled Mi, one labeled H, one labeled Mo, another labeled D, and the last labeled Y.

 

“...the first challenge of this temple required me to move quickly. Then it required me to be patient. Then it required me to move in rhythm. Anyway you slice it, this temple seems to be based around time. Does that mean this…is a way to travel in time?”

 

Ivy gets a worried look on her face.

 

“I…I shouldn’t use this. I might royally mess something up in the past…”

 

Ivy gets a small grin on her face.

 

“Then again, think of all the things I could fix…but…”

 

Ivy looks at the device on her arm.

 

 “If this really does take me through time, there’s no way the vitals will read correctly on the other end. They’ll think I died, and they’ll just send someone else. And I can’t just take this off, either…”

 

Ivy looks at the stopwatch again. Then she gets an idea, and presses on her earpiece.

 

Hello, is anyone there?”

 

Ivy is met with silence.

 

“Uh, don’t know if anyone is listening, or if I can leave a message, but uh, I’m gonna maybe travel through time, so my vitals will show that I’m dead. But uh, clearly I’m not, since I’m talking…you know what, I’m just gonna hang up…”

 

She stops pressing the button. 

 

“Let’s see, what time would be best?”

 

Ivy waits a few moments before turning the dials.

 

“Here goes…”

 

Ivy pushes the button, and a portal opens up, which she is sucked into.

 


 

Marcy is standing in the throne room, facing Olivia and Yunan, who are sitting on the throne. Andrias is standing next to them.

 

Olivia: “Master Marcy. My wife came in here, saying that you have been keeping a secret from us that might make us mad, and that you asked her a strange question to begin with. She didn’t really know how to respond properly, so, naturally I summoned you here to explain yourself.”

 

Marcy: “Yes. The question that I asked her was if you ever wondered how I knew you guys were newts when I first came here.”

 

Olivia: “What?”

 

Marcy: “I don’t know if you recall our first interactions together, but I vividly recall noticing that you were newts when I arrived in Newtopia for the first time and even saying so to you. You guys didn’t know what I was, but I knew what you were.”

 

Andrias: “And I’ve been learning about humans from this book you got me! Can’t remember when you gave it to me, though…”

 

Marcy: “You didn’t read that…one section…did you?”

 

Andrias: “If you told me not to, I forgot. Sorry!”

 

Olivia: “OK, we’ve gotten a bit off topic. So you’re saying it was strange that you knew what we were, when we did not, correct?”

 

Marcy nods.

 

Olivia: “Then the simple question is...how did you know?”

 

Marcy: “Because…there are newts on Earth. Frogs, toads, and axolotls, too.”

 

Olivia and Yunan gasp. 

 

Andrias: “There are…more of us on Earth?”

 

Marcy: “Yes…and no…”

 

Andrias: “Do you mind elaborating?”

 

Marcy: “There are frogs, newts, toads, and axolotls on Earth, and they share a lot of similarities with you guys. But…there is a notable difference.”

 

Andrias: “And what is that?”

 

Marcy: “Frogs, newts, toads, and axolotls are…smaller on Earth. They’re also not quite as intelligent as you guys.”

 

Olivia: “Well, uh…this is certainly a surprise, but it makes sense. I’m not really sure why you thought this would anger us…”

 

Marcy: “That’s…not the full story…”

 

Yunan: “What do you mean?”

 

Marcy: “Let me explain it this way. You guys sometimes have…lesser species as pets sometimes, right? And sometimes you have them as food?”

 

Yunan: “Yes, we eat bugs and such, and some people keep them as pets. Why do you ask?”

 

Marcy: “The…dynamic is similar on Earth…”

 

Andrias: “Do…do you mean to tell us you have amphibians as pets? Or as food?”

 

Marcy: “Um...more so the former. People typically don’t have them as pets, and people rarely eat frogs or toads, and they don’t eat newts or axolotls at all…but…yes…”

 

Andrias, Olivia and Yunan look at each other. Then Andrias starts laughing, and Olivia and Yunan start chuckling nervously.

 

Marcy: “Uh...why are you laughing?”

 

Yunan: “I don’t know. I was just doing it because Andrias was.”

 

Andrias: “Marcy, I can see why you might think this would make us furious. But you don’t have anything to worry about.”

 

Marcy: “I…I don’t?”

 

Andrias: “No. You put it quite well. Honestly, if humans existed here, and you were smaller and less smart, we might consider keeping you as pets. Or even eating you!”

 

Marcy chuckles nervously.

 

Olivia: “It seems like a universal constant that animals will eat others, provided their bodies are able to process what they consume…”

 

Marcy: “Yeah…nature can be beautiful, but it’s also horrifying…”

 

Olivia: “In any case, we need to tell everyone this…”

 

Marcy: “E-everyone?”

 

Olivia: “Naturally, yes. As queen of Amphibia, it is my duty to make sure people have information they rightfully deserve. And this qualifies as such.”

 

“But…", Marcy says, as she rubs her arm. "...you guys are cool with me. What if people I’m not as friendly with don’t forgive me for it?”

 

Andrias walks over to Marcy and pats her head.

 

“I seem to recall you saying something similar to me sometime ago. And just as you three were there for me, us three will be there for you. Besides, you saved us all. I can’t see anyone hating you for such a thing.”

 

Marcy smiles. “Yeah, you’re right. I guess when people find out that Sasha and Anne were lying just as much as us, they’ll realize the same about them". she says.

 

Olivia: “In any case, we must rest, as it is late. Tomorrow, we have a big day of traveling across Amphibia, and telling people what we’ve learned tonight. I am heading to bed. Yunan, are you coming with me?”

 

Yunan: “Yes, honey!”

 

Yunan and Olivia leave the throne room holding hands.

 

Andrias: “I believe I will retire for the night as well. Good night, Marcy.”

 

Marcy: “Good night, Drias.”

 

Andrias heads to his guest room, and Marcy heads back to her room. On the way she passes the laboratory. Then she stops.

 

Marcy: “Ivy! I totally forgot!”

 

Marcy runs in and sees the vital signs for Ivy have dropped to zero. She starts crying.

 

Marcy: “N-no…Ivy…”

 

Marcy wipes her tears.

 

Marcy: “I need to see what her last message was…”

 

Marcy pushes a button, and listens to the recording. Then she breathes a sigh of relief.

 

Marcy: “Oh, she just traveled through time, so she’s still alive. I thought for a second there, she was a goner.”

 

Marcy starts to leave, then she stops. 

 

Marcy: “WAIT, SHE TRAVELED THROUGH TIME?!”

 


 

Ivy is laying in a forest. She comes to.

 

“What…what happened?”

 

Ivy gets up and rubs her eyes,

 

“Oh, yeah. I used that stopwatch to travel through time. I don’t know if it worked though, or where it is…should be around here somewhere…”

 

Ivy takes a few steps before she hears a crunch under her foot. She looks down, and sees that she has stomped on the stopwatch. She picks it up.

 

“No, no, no…please still work…”

 

Ivy resets the dials and pushes the button. Nothing happens.

 

“N-no…n-now I really can’t get back…m-mom, d-dad…Spr-Sprig…I’ll n-never s-see them again…”

 

Ivy curls up into a ball and starts crying. Then Darla’s words ring in her mind once more.

 

“Just…promise me you’ll get that treasure. That you’ll get home. And that you’ll tell your friends and family how much they mean to you.”

 

“No, this isn’t how it ends. I can just…find someone to fix it.”

 

Ivy gets up and starts walking in the direction of Wartwood. She hides in the bushes, and notices it looks smaller, and the inhabitants aren’t the same as the Wartwood she knows.

 

“That confirms it worked. It’s…interesting to see how Wartwood used to be. And with this, I can get pictures…”

 

Ivy pulls out Sprig’s phone and starts taking pictures of the town. She goes to various spots without being seen, until she gets a picture of just about everything.

 

“And should do it. Maybe I should interview people, too…”

 

A woman clears her throat behind Ivy. Ivy turns around and sees a pink frog with orange hair.

 

“What are you doing? And what’s that you got there?”, she says.

 

“Uh...w-well, why are you asking so many questions?”

 

“I’m sorry, but there’s someone in this village I’ve never seen before using a strange device, and you expect me not to want to find out more?”, she says.

 

“Uh, good point…”

 

“Well? Spit it out. And don’t think you can get away with lying to me.”

 

“Me? Lying? You’re one to talk…do these people even know?”

 

“Know what?”, she asks.

 

“You’re…Leif, right?”

 

“How…how do you know my name?”

 

“And if you’re Leif, that means you have the Calamity Box. I’m asking if these people know.”

 

Leif takes a step forward. “You…come with me. We have much to discuss", she says.

 

“Why should I? You’re a liar.”

 

“True as that may be, people in this village know me. And if I say you, a complete stranger, are a thief, they’ll run you outta town. But that can be avoided if you just come with me.”

 

Ivy sighs. “Guess I don’t have much of a choice, do I?”, she says.

 

“Oh, you certainly do...", Leif says, as she starts walking towards her house. "...but I think you only have one good choice.”

 

Ivy watches as Leif walks away, before following after her.

 

"In hindsight, I should have just left with the treasure..."

Chapter 25: Core once More

Summary:

Ivy finds a way to fix the stopwatch.

Chapter Text

Ivy is sitting in Leif’s house. Leif is sitting across from her.

 

“So…you’re someone I’ve never seen before, who knows my name, and knows about the Calamity Box. Mind telling me your name?”

 

"Y-yeah, it’s…Ivy.”

 

“You hesitated. Tell me your real name.”

 

“...Vine. My name is Vine.”

 

“All right, Vine. Mind explaining how you have this information? Nobody besides me, Barrel, and Andrias and his family should know this. Yet, here you are.”

 

Ivy struggles to think of something. Then she sighs.

 

“If I told you, you wouldn’t believe me.”

 

“Try me.”

 

“All right…I’m…from the future.”

 

“The future?”

 

“Yeah. As in, a time that is yet to happen.”

 

“Well, I…suppose that does potentially explain things. Like that device you got.”

 

"Oh, this?”, Ivy says, as she pulls out her phone.

 

“Yeah, that. What is it?”

 

“Oh, this…this is a phone.”

 

“Phone?”

 

“Yeah. One of your descendants actually gave it to me, and it was given to him by a…”, Ivy says, before quickly closing her mouth.

 

“By a what?”

 

“Um…a human. But you probably don’t know what that is…”

 

“I know about humans.”

 

“You…you do? But how?”

 

“I’ve been to Earth. I left some clues of the existence of Amphibia there, as well as some guidance on how to save this planet. I imagine someone found them?”

 

“I…I don’t know for sure…”

 

“But if a human brought that here, surely, one must have come here? And with two others?”

 

Ivy nods.

 

“And they were the saviors of Amphibia?”

 

Ivy nods again.

 

Leif smiles. “That’s good. I didn’t know if what I did would solve anything…but it looks like it did. You mentioned one of my descendants?”, she says.

 

“Uh…yeah. You have three of them alive, that I know of.”

 

“Mind telling me about them?”

 

“Um, I probably can’t tell you much. Don’t wanna mess with time or anything.”

 

“Hmm…I suppose you’re right...”

 

“But, uh…your youngest one…she is a successful mechanic.”

 

“Mechanic? You mean she works with technology?”

 

Ivy nods.

 

“The future sounds exciting. What about the other two?”

 

“Well, uh, they have a grandfather who raised them. He’s uh…a little old-fashioned.”

 

“Grandfather? Why not their parents…?”

 

Ivy turns her head. Leif frowns.

 

“Did they abandon their children? Or were they…”

 

“That second one. I…I never knew them. But they didn’t sound like the type of people to even consider doing that first one.”

 

“That’s…a shame. But I guess it’s good they had someone to raise my youngest one.”

 

"Yeah. And that brings me to the last one. Your youngest one’s brother. He’s my…well, he means a lot to me.”

 

“You know, I thought you were some no-good trespasser earlier today. But, you’ve given me information that I never would have gotten. And you’ve also given me hope for a brighter future…”

 

Leif stands up and sighs.

 

“So you also know about the Calamity Box. You also know what it’s capable of, right?”

 

Ivy nods.

 

“I don’t feel good about telling anybody about it here. I know lying is wrong. But…you know, sometimes it’s better to hide the truth from people. I don’t want anyone worrying here. But, if you’re from the future, that means the end of this world was prevented, right?”

 

Ivy nods.

 

“That’s good to hear. I…I feel bad about not being able to make amends with Andrias. What he’s doing now…it isn’t right. But Barrel and I know him. He…isn’t a bad person. It’s just his father wants him to be someone he isn’t. That’s why…I wrote him a letter. I don’t know if he will ever read it, though…but you couldn’t know either way…”

 

“Why do you say that?”

 

“You’re from far in the future, right? So there’s no way Andrias is still alive. But maybe you could ask his descendant…”

 

Ivy stares at Leif.

 

“What is it?”

 

“Andrias…he’s still alive in my time…”

 

Leif gasps.

 

“N-no…that can’t be…”

 

“I was told that after you left with the Calamity Box, Andrias’s father refused to let him pass away without making up for his mistake. So, he was given cybernetic enhancements, one that would let him live a vastly longer life…”

 

“But…the destruction of this planet was averted, right? Hasn’t he lived a long enough life? I mean…not that I want him to perish, but…if there’s an afterlife, I would want to see him again…”

 

“He’s…well, he’s made new friends in our time. He’s…not really the person he is now. He’s not haunted by his father anymore.”

 

"Oh…so he must have forgotten about me and Barrel then…”, Leif says, as a tear falls down her cheek. “I would have preferred he opened his heart up to me and Barrel, but I’m glad he’s found some new people to do that with…”

 

“Hey, don’t cry. I can just tell him when I get back.”

 

“Huh? You will tell him about the letter?”

 

“Yeah! But…there’s a slight problem…”

 

“What is it?”

 

Ivy pulls out the broken stopwatch from her pocket. “This…was how I got here…but now it’s busted, so I can’t get back", she says.

 

“Tell you what. There’s a magic artifact seller in Newtopia. He goes by the name of Merlin. He should know how to fix it.”

 

“I…I can’t go there!”

 

“Why not?”

 

Andrias is there…if he sees me, his future self will have memories of that happening, and I might…disappear…”

 

“...what if...he doesn’t recognize you?”

 

"That’s…wishful thinking…”

 

“No, no...", Leif says, as she stands up and walks over to a closet. "I can give you a disguise. Come here.”

 

Ivy gets up and walks over to Leif as she opens the closet. From out of it, she pulls a pair of scissors, and she shortens Ivy's hair with it. She then pulls out some makeup, which she dabs on Ivy's face. Lastly, she pulls out a pair of blue jeans and a teal cloak. Ivy then takes them into the bathroom, takes off her overalls and hat, and puts on the jeans and cloak. She then walks outside.

 

"Do…I look different?”

 

“Hmm…no…but that might just be because I know this isn’t normally how you present yourself. Andrias likely won’t.”

 

“All right, if you say so…thanks.”

 

“My pleasure. I want you to get back to that descendant of mine that you speak highly of. Let him know how much you value your friendship.”

 

Ivy smiles. “I will. And…I’ll tell Andrias about you”, she says.

 

Leif smiles, and gives her a hug before Ivy leaves.

 


 

Marcy is seen sitting in the laboratory with the door locked. She is drinking coffee while fidgeting. There’s a knock on the door.

 

“Who-who’s there?”

 

“It’s me, Yunan. I can’t seem to find my key. And why is the door locked…?”

 

“Oh, uh…I didn’t want anyone…breaking in here…”

 

“Breaking in? Why would anyone do that?”

 

“I…I don’t know…”

 

“...can you come out? We have to get going so we can tell everyone in Amphibia about what you said…”

 

“I, uh…have to keep watch over Ivy, right?”

 

“Oh, right, I forgot about that…very well. I will let Olivia know. Is Ivy all right?”

 

“Yep! Perfectly fine!”

 

"That’s good to hear. We’ll be back.”

 

Marcy takes a look at the monitor, as she hears the sound of receding footsteps.

 

“Ivy, please come back soon…I hate lying…and sooner or later, they’re gonna want to come in here, and I can’t keep making excuses…”

 


 

Ivy enters Newtopia. She looks around, and sees a directory. 

 

“Let’s see…we’re looking for that shop…”

 

Ivy spots an icon on the map that says Merlin’s.

 

There we go! It’s just this way!”

 

Ivy starts walking, but freezes in her tracks when she sees Andrias coming her way. Without even thinking, she jumps behind a wall and starts breathing heavily. She then notices there’s a newt standing next to her.

 

“Why are you hiding? And why do you look so nervous?”, he says, before gasping. “Oh, I get it. You stole something, and you’re trying to hide from the police! You must be hiding stuff in your bag!”

 

“No, no! I’m not a thief!”

 

“Sounds like something a bandit would say! I’ll have you know crime doesn’t go unpunished here!”

 

The newt pushes Ivy into view.

 

“Everyone, this frog here is a no-good criminal! Arrest her!”

 

Ivy stands in shock as all eyes are on her. Then newt soldiers start approaching her.

 

Andrias: “Cease this at once!”

 

The soldiers stop, and look at Andrias. Andrias then looks at the accuser.

 

Andrias: “My friend, did you personally witness this…frog…commit a crime?”

 

“Um…no…but she’s acting suspicious…she hid behind this wall and was tense!”

 

Andrias: “Well, I’ll provide this frog here the benefit of the doubt. Why were you hiding, miss?”

 

Ivy: “Um…well…I was just…afraid of you…”

 

Andrias doesn’t say anything for a moment. Then he starts laughing. Ivy starts chuckling nervously.

 

Andrias: “I apologize. I must look so scary because of my size, right?”

 

Ivy nods.

 

Andrias: “Well, you should know appearances aren’t everything. I’m a gentle giant. Isn’t that right, folks?”

 

Newts in the crowd nod.

 

Andrias: “I’m sorry about…your unwelcome visit. Why don’t I make it up to you by inviting you to dinner at the castle tonight?”

 

Ivy: “Oh…that’s fine, I just had something to take care of, then I’ll be out of your hair…”

 

Andrias: “Please, I insist.”

 

“You should take that offer. I hear the castle is beautiful, the service is unmatched, and the food is delicious!”, one newt says.

 

Ivy starts sweating. “OK, I’ll go…”, she says.

 

Andrias: “Splendid! Dinner starts in around an hour. Please don’t be late.”

 

Andrias leaves. Ivy lets out a sigh, and starts walking towards Merlin’s.

 


 

Ivy enters a shop called “Merlin’s Magic Emporium”. She sees a newt with a wizard hat and a white beard.

 

“It’s not often I get a customer. How may I help you, young one?”

 

“Can you fix this?”

 

Ivy pulls out the stopwatch from her pocket and puts it on the counter.

 

"Certainly! It’ll take about two hours.”

 

“Two hours?! Can’t you go faster?”

 

“Not to be rude, but it’ll take more time if you keep talking to me…why are you in such a rush? It’s not good to be impatient…”

 

Ivy sighs. “Fine. Can I pay in advance?”, she says.

 

“Sure. That’ll be 30 coppers.”

 

Ivy pulls out a diamond from her bag and puts it on the counter.

 

“Will this cover it?”

 

“Cover it? You’re overpaying me!”

 

“Well, consider it your lucky day, because all I got is gems. Just…keep the change.”

 

Merlin gets all giddy as Ivy leaves the shop. She checks the time on her phone.

 

“Let’s see, I got 50 minutes until dinner. Maybe I can just…sneak out, and come back for the stopwatch.”

 

Ivy approaches the city gates, when two newt guards block the exit with their spears.

 

“Where do you think you’re going? You have supper with Andrias in 40 minutes.”

 

Ivy: “Oh, right. Totally forgot.”

 

“Just don’t do it again. Andrias may be kind, but it gives me shivers thinking about what he could do…”

 

Ivy gulps as she walks away.

 

"Maybe I could take pictures of this place, too. Just gotta make sure nobody sees…”

 

Ivy pulls out her phone and starts taking pictures of the city. By the time she gets all around, she sees that it’s time for dinner. She starts heading towards the castle.

 


 

Ivy walks around the castle until she sees a dining room. There, she sees Andrias in a giant chair, sitting to the left of a newt of similar size, but older-looking. The rest of the table has people eating, drinking, and chatting. Andrias notices Ivy, and clinks a giant spoon to the side of his giant glass.

 

“Everyone, our guest has arrived!”

 

Everyone starts clapping. Ivy nervously takes a bow.

 

“Forgive me again, but I never got your name.”

 

“Vine.”

 

“Vine! What a lovely name. Please, sit next to me.”

 

Ivy sits next to Andrias in a normal size chair. She serves herself some food, and pours herself a glass of water.

 

“So, Vine…tell me about yourself.”

 

“Oh, uh…I’m from…Frog Valley. And I’m good at making tea, but I like adventuring, too.”

 

“I see. Newtopia has a shop where you can get some of the finest herbs and spices for teas. I even have a credit card you can use to pay for them!”

 

“Oh, thanks, but I’ll pass. But I’ll check it out later.”

 

“Will you be staying here? I know this city is full of newts, but we also have other species here, such as axolotls. We can get you a place to live.”

 

“Um, thanks. This city does seem like it’d be a cool place to reside in. But, I don’t think it’s for me. I like my home in Frog Valley. I just wanted to see what this place was like.”

 

“Hmm, fair enough. I hope you enjoy your stay here!”

 

Ivy notices the older newt has been glaring at her. Everyone finishes their meals.

 

“Well then, I suppose it is time to party!”

 

“Party?”

 

“Yes! A royal party! It will be held in the next room over. There will be live music from the best artists in Newtopia.”

 

Andrias leaves the room, along with everyone else.

 

“I, uh, I’ll be right there…”

 

Ivy checks her phone. She sees that she still has 15 minutes until the stopwatch is supposed to be fixed.

 

“I could just make a run for it, but…this place has guards…I guess I’ll just have to wait it out a bit longer…”

 

Ivy leaves the room and joins Andrias and everyone else. She sees the older newt standing off to the side. Andrias is sitting in a chair next to the band, while everyone else is dancing.

 

“Ivy! Come on, dance with me!”

 

“...uh, no thanks. I have two left feet.”

 

“Suit yourself!”

 

Ivy goes and stands at the side of the room. The older newt approaches her, but doesn’t face her.

 

“You. You are not from here”, he says.

 

Ivy: “Uh, yeah…I’m from Frog Valley, not Newtopia…”

 

“That is not what I meant. I’ll let you in on a little secret…”, he says, an eye pops out of his crown. 

 

“This is Aldrich. That pathetic excuse for a man over there is his son. He is supposed to be next in line for king, but he is not worthy of joining…us”, he says.

 

“...us?”

 

“You can call me…The Core. I am the amalgamation of Amphibia’s greatest minds. We had plans to conquer this planet, as well as others in the multiverse, but Andrias there let his ‘friends’ get in the way of that. Now we have no way to. But that doesn’t explain you.”

 

“Wh-what…what do you mean?”

 

“We have no record of a frog like you being in Amphibia. The only explanation is that you are from the future. And judging by the fact that you’ve been anxious this whole time, and have been wanting to leave, you must know what we plan to do. But…if we had succeeded, you would not be here, meaning our plans have failed in the future. We cannot allow that to happen. So tell me, how were we stopped?”

 

“Look, you really have no leverage against me. So no.”

 

“We don’t? Clearly, you have a way of getting back to your time. But I imagine it’s not working, or you would have left by now. You must have given it to…Merlin, to repair it.”

 

Ivy gulps.

 

“We can simply be rid of you. We may fail in this timeline, but all we must do is travel to your time and try again.”

 

Aldrich grabs Ivy’s hand and starts dragging her. Ivy notices there’s a bowl of punch on the table.

 

“Hey Aldrich?”

 

"What is it?”

 

"You like punch?”

 

“Not particularly? What are you…”

 

Ivy grabs the bowl of punch with her free hand and splashes it in Aldrich’s face, causing him to let go, and the eye in his crown to vanish. Everyone takes notice as Ivy bolts out of the room.

 

Aldrich: “Guards! Stop her using any means necessary!”

 

Andrias: “Father! What is the meaning of this!?”

 

Aldrich: “Do not call me that. We share blood. We are not family.”

 

Aldrich chases Ivy. Ivy weaves past the soldiers and exits the castle, and makes a beeline for Merlin’s shop. She enters, and slams the door behind her.

 

“Oh, good! You’re right on time-” 

 

“Yeah, whatever. Just give me it!”

 

Merlin hands the stopwatch as soldiers bust down the door. 

 

“There is nowhere to run!”

 

Ivy notices there’s a closed window. She starts running towards it, and breaks through the glass.

 

Merlin: “Hey! You better pay for that!”

 

Ivy: “I already have!”

 

Merlin: “Oh, right…”

 

Ivy begins running again as the guards exit the shop, but they start relentlessly throwing their spears at her. One of them strikes her right ankle. She falls to the ground and screams in pain, as the stopwatch lands on a patch of grass nearby. A newt stands over to her and tries to strike her chest, but she rolls out of the way.

 

“Give it up! You can’t escape all of us!”

 

“Shut it!”

 

Ivy flips herself up using her hands, and begins using them instead of her legs. She spots the stopwatch and grabs it with her tongue. The newts begin chasing her again, and they gain on her. She approaches the inner city wall. Then she gets an idea.

 

“Come on, sticky fingers, don’t fail me now…”

 

Ivy propels herself onto the wall and starts climbing, as more newts toss their spears at her. She makes her movements impossible to predict, so they miss. She then gets high enough that the newts can’t reach her. Once she gets to the top, she sits down and spits out the stopwatch.

 

“Not the worst thing I’ve ever tasted. Now I just gotta…”

 

Ivy notices a flaming sword from the corner of her eye, and uses her one good foot to jump out of the way just in time. She lets go of the stopwatch accidentally, and it falls off the other side of the wall. She tries to keep herself standing, but she crumbles from the pain in her other foot, as she looks up at Aldrich.

 

“You’ve done well to get past my guards. But we’re afraid it was for naught. Unless you’d like to go for a swim?”

 

Ivy sees that on the other side of the wall is a several hundred foot drop into the ocean.

 

“This ends now!”

 

Without even thinking, Ivy throws herself off the side, just as Aldrich attempts to slice her. Ivy then starts to swan dive.

 

“I have to catch up to that stopwatch!”

 

Ivy notices a glint in the distance. She then uses her tongue to grab it, spits it out in her hand, and pushes the button on it a few feet before hitting the ocean, causing a portal to appear underneath her, which she goes into.

 


 

Ivy is laying on the temple floor. She comes to.

 

“Am I…safe?”

 

Ivy gets up, but then winces in pain as she falls to the floor. She grabs the first aid kit out of her bag, and wraps a bandage around her right ankle. She attempts to stand again. Her right leg is wobbly, but she grabs the stopwatch and puts it in her pocket. She then grabs the sack of gems, and starts walking slowly out of the temple. She notices the exit of the last room takes her directly outside. 

 

“Huh?”

 

Ivy then walks back inside. It takes her to the treasure room.

 

“Oh, I guess since I completed the trials, they won’t make me go through them again…I guess that’ll make it easier for Nahuel to get the rest. I’ll tell him about this, then. Just…won’t tell him about what I kept…”

 


 

Marcy is trying to keep her eyes open, when she notices that the vital readings for Ivy are normal. She then jumps out of her chair, unlocks the door, and pushes the button.

 

“IVY, DO YOU READ ME? THIS IS MARCY!”

 

“Stop yelling! But, uh...yeah, I’m fine. I just traveled through time…UH! I mean, that was just a joke. I just took it off because it was getting itchy…”

 

“Ivy, I got your original message. You really did travel through time, didn’t you?”

 

Ivy sighs. “Yeah, I did”, she says.

 

“Do you understand the amount of damage you could have caused?!”

 

“Hey, if I recall, Sprig told me you used the Calamity Box without even considering what could have happened to you or your friends. So don’t tell me what not to do!"

 

Marcy sighs. “Fair point. Just…don’t use it again, OK? And don’t tell anyone about it”, she says.

 

“Only if you don’t.”

 

“Of course. Did you complete your task?”

 

“Just about. Most of the work is done. I’ll get back soon.”

 

“Glad to hear it. See you then.”

 

Marcy stops pressing the button. She then sits down at her table, and smacks her head against the table out of lack of sleep. 

 


 

Ivy heads into Nahuel’s tent, and drops the sack of gems at his feet. He is in complete shock.

 

“Well? I’m waiting.”

 

Nahuel clears his throat. “I apologize for not believing in your capacity to pass the challenges inside the temple. You would make an excellent member of this tribe…but I suppose the whole point of this was so you could leave…”, he says.

 

“Mhm.”

 

Nahuel sighs. “Very well, you’ve kept your word, so I will keep mine. You can leave this island, and anyone can come here and live on this continent, so long as they do not disturb us. However, that offer I gave you to be a member will remain. Whether you choose to take me up on it or not is up to you”, he says.

 

“Thanks, I guess. By the way, this isn’t all the treasure.”

 

“It is not? The agreement was you got us all of it.”

 

“Well, look. There’s a lot of treasure in there. All of it is yours, but it’d take more time for me to get it all than if you just had your tribe do it. You…also shouldn’t need to pass the tests in there, because I was able to get outside directly from the treasure room.”

 

“Very well. I suppose I can bend the agreement a little. You may go."

 

Ivy starts to leave as Nahuel notices something, before Nootau walks in. 

 

“Hey, chief. You want us to get that treasure?”

 

“Yes. However, you must stay here.”

 

“Wh-why?”

 

Nahuel stands up. “Watch the tribe in my absence once more", he says.

 

“Wh-where are you going now?”

 

“That Ivy, I heard a jingling in her bag…so she took some of the treasure for herself.” 

 

“Shouldn’t we go after her, then?”

 

Nahuel smirks. “No, she thinks she got the best of me. I’d like her to revel in that feeling. Then…I want to see the light in her eyes fade as she watches everything she worked for fade away”, he says.

 

“Wasn’t that just the gems?”

 

 “No, it was not. All she ever talked about was getting back home to her loved ones. I want to punish her by taking them away from her. At this point, I care little about whether you want to watch the village or not. I just want her to suffer. I’m leaving.”

 

Nahuel camouflages himself and begins running towards the ocean.

 


 

Ivy approaches the boat. Then she sighs.

 

“I was…really hoping not to have to leave here alone…but I did it, Darla. I’m going home. I’ll let people know about you, and I’ll tell my friends and family how significant they are to me.”

 

Ivy hops on the boat. Unbeknownst to her, an invisible Nahuel is hanging on the end of it. She pulls the lever and starts to head back to Newtopia.

Chapter 26: The Invader

Summary:

Ivy returns home.

Chapter Text

Ivy arrives in Newtopia. She hops out of the boat, and starts walking towards the castle. Unbeknownst to her, Nahuel is following her. Once she gets inside, he stands still outside, trying to keep his breathing as quiet as possible.

 

“Her loved ones may be here. But if I’m going to murder one of them, it’ll have to be a sneak attack. I’ll just have to wait for the right opportunity. Now is not that time. But sooner or later…that chance will come.”

 

Ivy walks through the castle, looking around.

 

Ivy: “Hello? Is anyone here?”

 

"That voice...", Yunan says, as she and Olivia pop their heads out of a nearby doorway. "...Ivy!"

 

Yunan and Olivia come running and basically tackle Ivy in a hug.

 

Ivy: “Ow…I appreciate the affection, but I’m kinda injured…”

 

Olivia and Yunan let go of Ivy.

 

Olivia: “You’re hurt? Don’t worry, I will personally carry you to the infirmary!”

 

Ivy: “It’s not that bad. Just give me a few days, and I’ll be all good.”

 

Yunan: “Spoken like a true warrior!”

 

Ivy chuckles. Then she turns her head to the side.

 

Olivia: “Is something the matter?”

 

Ivy: “Um, maybe I have no right to make this request, but…can we have a statue built of Darla? And maybe a book written about her? If it wasn’t for her, I wouldn’t be here right now…”

 

“Not at all...", Olivia says, as she turns to her guards. "One of you, please tell Donewtello to create a sculpture of Darla!”

 

One of the guards salutes, and starts running out of the castle.

 

Olivia: “Ivy, I’m terribly sorry for your loss. That must have been…difficult to go through…”

 

Ivy: “Yeah, it was. But…I’m over it. I know she’s gone, but…people never really leave when they perish, do they? As long as people remember them. That’s something she told me.”

 

Yunan: “That’s pretty wise of her. And I thought she had bricks for brains…”

 

Olivia: “Anyways, I know you must want to see your loved ones back home, but there is something we must discuss first.”

 

Ivy: “Oh, you mean about what I found on the continent?”

 

Olivia: "That topic will be covered, yes…”

 

Ivy: “Huh? There’s something else?”

 

Olivia: “Yes. Come with me.”

 

Olivia and Yunan start walking, and Ivy follows. She notices Andrias is in the guest room painting. Then she stops.

 

Ivy: “Wait, can I talk to Andrias first?”

 

Yunan and Olivia turn around.

 

Yunan: “Um, sure.”

 

Ivy goes into Andrias’s room. Andrias notices her with a smile.

 

“Ivy! Welcome home!”

 

“Uh, hey, this might seem like an odd question, but…did you know someone by the name of Leif?”, she says.

 

Andrias’s expression falls before he sits down on his bed. “A long time ago, I did. I wronged her. But she…she forgave me. I just wish she knew about how I felt…”, he says.

 

Ivy smiles. “I imagine she does. Everyone here was able to forgive you, and she knew who you really were. Someone who was just looking to serve, with a father who was just looking to rule”, she says.

 

Andrias chuckles. “Yeah, she was always one to tell people they are not the sum of their actions…how did you know about her?”, he asks.

 

“Uh, Sprig told me about her.”

 

“Ah, yes. Sprig and Polly are her descendants. And to think I almost killed both of them…”

 

“Hey, come on. That’s not you anymore. Remember what Leif said?”

 

“Yes, you’re right. Thank you.”

 

Ivy leaves the room and meets up with Yunan and Olivia. Andrias sighs before resuming painting.

 


 

Ivy enters the laboratory with Yunan and Olivia. She sees Marcy is drooling on the table, fast asleep.

 

Ivy: “Uh, what happened?”

 

Olivia: “Oh, Marcy never left your side for a second…metaphorically speaking.”

 

Yunan: “We came in this morning and saw her like this.”

 

Ivy: “Shouldn’t we just…let her sleep in silence?”

 

Marcy comes to.

 

Ivy: “Or not…”

 

Yunan: “Here, Master Marcy. You must have been exhausted from making sure Ivy was OK. I made you some coffee.”

 

Marcy: “Oh, coffee sounds great…”

 

Yunan pours a cup of coffee for Marcy, and hands it to her. She takes a sip.

 

Marcy: “Mmm, that’s good stuff…oh, hey Ivy…”

 

Marcy takes another sip. Then she almost chokes on her drink.

 

Marcy: “IVY!”

 

Marcy tries to stand up, but Olivia stops her.

 

Olivia: “Just be aware that Ivy isn’t completely unharmed. It isn’t serious, but please contain your excitement.”

 

Marcy: “Oh, sorry…”

 

Marcy gets up and walks towards Ivy slowly, and gives her a gentle hug.

 

Ivy: “Thanks, Marcy.”

 

Olivia: “Well then. Master Marcy, we’ve told the story to everyone else in Amphibia. Perhaps you’d like to for Ivy?”

 

Marcy rubs the back of her neck. "Uh, yeah sure. Sorry I wasn’t there for that", she says.

 

Olivia: “It is all right. You played an important role.”

 

Ivy: “What are you guys talking about?”

 

Marcy: “Uh…long story short…frogs, newts, axolotls, and toads exist on Earth, they’re just smaller and less intelligent than you guys.”

 

Ivy: “Oh. That’s…interesting…but why are you telling me this?”

 

Marcy: “Well, people here deserve to know. But…in your case, there’s something that’s been on my mind for a while…”

 

Ivy: “What is it?”

 

Marcy: “When you said the continent was inhabited by horned toads, I believed you. Horned toads are in fact a thing on Earth.

 

Ivy: “Oh. But…”

 

Marcy: “Except one thing. You said they had two horns on their head. Horned toads on Earth have spikes all over their body. So I figured you lied to us.”

 

Ivy: “I…I’m sorry…but…”

 

Marcy: “I was trying to figure out why, though. But then I remembered, there are other species of amphibians on Earth. I figured that if there were newts, toads, axolotls, and frogs in Amphibia, then it’s likely there were other amphibians here.”

 

Ivy: “Are…salamanders a thing on Earth, too?”

 

Marcy: “Yes, they are. But similar to how frogs, toads, newts, and axolotls are small and less intelligent, the same goes for salamanders.”

 

Ivy: “OK…and the reason I lied is because…these guys can kinda turn invisible. When I was talking to you that time, one of them named Nahuel had revealed himself. He didn’t want anyone knowing they were there, and I wasn’t prepared to fight. So I had to lie to you.”

 

Olivia: “That is quite all right, Ivy. The important thing is you made it back safely.”

 

Yunan: “By the way, did you get any loot?”

 

Ivy: “I sure did! I was supposed to give it all to Nahuel, but he didn’t know I took some of it. He probably wouldn’t care, since there’s more of it than I would know what to do with.”

 

Ivy pulls out a handful of gems from her bag, and Yunan and Olivia marvel at them.

 

Olivia: “Well, those jewels are rightfully yours. You can do with them as you please.”

 

Ivy: “R-really?!”

 

Yunan: “Of course. You went through the trouble of getting them.”

 

Ivy: “Th-thank you!”

 

Olivia: “Well, I suppose we have kept you long enough. We can get you a ride home. Next time you come here, we should have that Darla statue built. And, you can send us an outline of the story you want for her, and we can have a professional write it. We will make sure the world knows who she was.”

 

Ivy smiles with tears in her eyes.

 

Yunan: “Wow, I didn’t think someone this tough would be so easy to make cry!”

 

Yunan, Olivia, and Ivy laugh. Marcy chuckles nervously.

 

Ivy: “Anyways, I’ll see you later!”

 

Yunan and Olivia wave as Ivy leaves. 

 

Marcy: “Guys.”

 

Yunan: “Yes, Master Marcy?”

 

Marcy: “Call me paranoid, but is it possible that…Nahuel knew that Ivy stole from him?”

 

Yunan and Olivia look at each other.

 

Yunan: “Yeah, you’re right. You are paranoid.”

 

Olivia: “I have to agree.”

 

Olivia looks out the window.

 

Olivia: “If he did, in order for him to get revenge, he’d have to come here by Ivy’s boat without her knowing, since it’s the only one in the dock. He…could do that by hanging on, from here to the other continent, but that’s a long trip. I don’t think he could be that strong.”

 

Marcy: “But…salamanders can produce a sticky substance. He might not have to be that buff if he was doing that…”

 

Yunan and Olivia look at each other.

 

Marcy: “And…if he was here, Ivy said they can camouflage themselves, so it’d be pretty easy for him to sneak around…”

 

Olivia: “I need to alert everyone. There’s potentially a maniac on the loose!”

 

Yunan: “Woah, hold on, sweetie. You don’t need to get everyone riled up. Maybe…there’s some way we can confirm Master Marcy’s theory?”

 

Marcy rubs her chin. “...the boat", she says.

 

Yunan: “Huh?”

 

Marcy: “If the salamander was really on the boat, there should be some of that goo on the back of it. I’ll be right back!”

 

Marcy runs out of the castle. A few minutes later, she returns with some black slime on her hand. Yunan and Olivia look at it in horror.

 

Marcy: “This…this didn’t come from Ivy. Her slime is yellow.”

 

Olivia: “This is an emergency! Ivy is in danger!”

 


 

Ivy is riding on a snail driven by a male newt. They arrive at the gate of Wartwood.

 

Ivy: “Thank you! Uh, how much do I owe you?”

 

“Mind giving me one of those gems? It’s my husband’s birthday tomorrow, and he loves sparkly, green things.”

 

Ivy pulls out a topaz from her bag and tosses it to the driver. He smiles.

 

“Much appreciated. Have a nice day!”

 

The driver takes off. Ivy walks into the town. She only takes a few steps before Mrs. Croaker notices her.

 

Mrs. Croaker: “Ivy! Is that you?”

 

Several Wartwood residents turn their heads and see that Ivy is back. They all happily run towards her and throw her into the air playfully.

 

Ivy: “Everyone…I’m home…”

 

Wally: “Oi! Mind saving a little bit of her for the two of us?”

 

The residents put her down. Ivy then sees Wally and Felicia standing, holding hands.

 

Ivy: “Mom! Dad!”

 

Ivy runs and hugs her parents. 

 

Ivy: “I missed you two so much…”

 

Felicia: “We missed you, too, sweetie. And we’re glad you’re back.”

 

Ivy breaks away from the hug.

 

Felicia: “I almost didn’t recognize you. It’s only been a few days, but you look…tougher.”

 

Wally: “Yeah! Maybe you’re even strong enough to beat your old man in an arm wrestle!”

 

Ivy chuckles. “Pretty sure I could do that before leaving”, she says.

 

Felicia: “She’s right. I can beat you in an arm wrestle.”

 

Wally: “Oi, not so loud…”

 

Felicia: “Anyways, we were gonna have a party at my tea shoppe. Everyone in town is invited!”

 

The crowd cheers.

 

Ivy: “Uh, could you maybe hold off on that? There’s…someone I need to talk to…”

 

Felicia: “Sure, honey. We’ll be at my tea shop.”

 

Wally: “Don’t keep us waiting too long!”

 

Wally and Felicia leave, and various other residents follow them to the tea shop. Ivy walks over to Hop Pop’s house, and knocks on the door. Polly opens the door.

 

Polly: “Oh. my. frog. Ivy! You’ve returned! How’s it going, girl?”

 

Ivy walks inside. Anne is reading a magazine, and Hop Pop is cleaning the kitchen.

 

Ivy: “Hey, Polly. I have a minor injury, but otherwise, I’m good.”

 

Polly: “You know, I could have just had Frobo explore the continent…”

 

Hop Pop: “Polly! Going on an adventure builds character!”

 

Polly: “What does that even mean?!”

 

Anne: “It means Hop Pop doesn’t want to feel obsolete…”

 

Hop Pop: “Listen, back in my day, we didn’t have all this technology. We had to do our chores by hand. It was a lot of work, but I learned a lot from it. What does having a robot do something for you teach you?”

 

Polly: “That you can complete tasks more efficiently and with less work?”

 

Ivy: “Woah, hey. I’m happy to see all of you, but I wanted to have a word with Sprig.”

 

Polly: “Oh, he’s upstairs doing research. Are you sure you want to see him? He seemed a little bummed when you left…”

 

Ivy: “That’s…exactly why I have to…”

 

Ivy walks upstairs. She sees Sprig has a beetle on his desk and is feeding it blueberries. He tries to give it one more, but it shakes its head. He writes down in his notebook. Ivy walks up to Sprig and sits down next to him.

 

Sprig: “Oh, hey…”

 

Ivy: “Whatcha doing?”

 

Sprig: “Oh, I’m just getting answers for questions I had at my last seminar. Someone wanted to know how many blueberries a beetle could eat on an empty stomach. Turns out to be 43.”

 

Ivy chuckles as the beetle moves his antenna. “It seems like something he enjoyed”, she says.

 

Sprig chuckles. “Yeah. Jacob, are you feeling sleepy?”, he says.

 

The beetle rotates in circles a few times before falling asleep. Ivy looks at the notebook, and sees that Sprig has answered dozens of other obscure questions.

 

Ivy: “Woah, did you…do experiments for all of these?”

 

Sprig: “Every single one. I don’t know, it’s just…I don’t like not knowing things. And I’m sure someone else might not, either, so I try to solve these mysteries. Even if it’s something silly…”

 

Ivy: “Hey, these aren’t silly. I wouldn’t have the patience to try to figure these all out. It’s pretty cool, if you ask me.”

 

Sprig: “You do?”

 

Ivy nods.

 

Sprig: “Well, thanks…but I’m sure it’s not as cool as your journey was.”

 

Ivy: “Oh, that? Pssh, I just found a new species of amphibian and conquered a temple.”

 

Sprig: “Seems like my point stands.”

 

Ivy frowns. Sprig looks at his notebook.

 

Sprig: “Let’s see, next on my list is to find out how much weight an Alarm Bug can carry before it’s unable to fly…”

 

Sprig gets up and starts heading towards the door.

 

Ivy: “Sprig, wait.”

 

Sprig stops walking, but doesn’t turn around.

 

Ivy: “When I was on my adventure, I got to know this newt named Darla. At first, I didn’t think she and I would be friends. But…we bonded.”

 

Sprig: “Hmm...glad you found a new friend.”

 

Ivy: “She’s dead.”

 

Sprig turns around to see Ivy has tears in her eyes.

 

Ivy: “If it was just an accident, I don’t think I’d feel as sad as I do now. It’s just what she did, that makes it sting. She…she traded her life for mine.”

 

Sprig walks over and sits back in his chair.

 

Ivy: “She…she told me I had to get home, so I could tell you how I really felt about you. And something that’s been on my mind this whole time is…that just as easily could have been you had I asked you to come with me. And I…I don’t think I’d ever forgive myself if you got killed because of me. You were right to stay here, and I was stupid for not listening. I’m sorry, Sprig. You were my best friend, and I threw that all away for my stupid dream!”

 

Sprig: “Were...?”

 

Ivy: “Yeah…we’re not friends anymore, right?”

 

Sprig: “Not unless you don't want to be.”

 

Ivy: “Wait, you mean…”

 

Sprig nods.

 

Ivy: “How can you forgive me after all the stuff I said to you?”

 

Sprig chuckles. “Honestly, I don’t blame you for acting that way. I might have responded the same way. I’m just glad you got to achieve what you wanted”, he says.

 

Sprig has happy tears in his eyes.

 

Sprig: “And I’m especially glad that you got back here safely.”

 

Ivy pulls Sprig into a hug.

 

Sprig: “Now, come on. Tell me about what happened.”

 

Ivy wipes her tears. 

 

Ivy: “Well, can you keep a secret?”

 

Sprig: “Uh, sure?”

 

Ivy: “I, uh…went back in time…using a magical stopwatch.”

 

Sprig: “You what?”

 

“Look...", Ivy says, as she pulls out the phone, and opens up the photo gallery on it. "...I took pictures of old Wartwood and Newtopia while I was back there!”

 

Sprig looks at the photos. “Oh, wow…looks like my phone really did come in handy, huh?”, he says.

 

Ivy laughs. “Yeah, it sure did”, she says.

 

Sprig: “Does anyone else know? I mean, this sounds like it could be used for evil in the wrong hands…”

 

Ivy: “Just Marcy. But she promised not to tell anyone. And…I don’t know. Maybe Maddie could do something with it. She knows about magic more than either of us.”

 

Anne walks in. 

 

Anne: “Hey, you two made up yet?”

 

Sprig and Ivy nod.

 

Anne: “Good! Wally just came by and told us about the party for Ivy. Hop Pop, Polly, and I are heading there now. You coming?”

 

Sprig: “Soon. Ivy and I weren’t really done talking.”

 

Anne: “All right, see you there!”

 

Anne leaves. The two hear the front door close. Sprig notices there are birds chirping outside.

 

Sprig: “Hey, I’ve been cooped up all day. Wanna talk outside? It’s a nice day.”

 

Ivy: “Yeah, you’re right! Let’s go!”

 

Ivy leaves her bag in Sprig’s room, and the two head outside for a chat in the backyard. They sit down at a table. 

 

Sprig: “So, you get any cool treasure?”

 

Ivy: “Yeah! I got a bunch of gems. They could sell for thousands of coppers!”

 

Sprig: “Awesome! What were you planning on doing with the money?”

 

Ivy: “I don’t know. I was thinking I could invest it in our future…”

 

“Or, you can give it to me, like you said you would.”

 

Nahuel stops camouflaging himself, and grabs Sprig and presses him close to his chest. In his other hand, he has a knife. Ivy looks in horror as Sprig flails his legs to break himself free.

 

Nahuel: “Don’t call for help, or you die right here.”

 

Ivy: “Nahuel!”

 

Ivy takes a step forward. 

 

Nahuel: “Don’t move. Wouldn’t want something to happen to your friend here, would you?”

 

Ivy stops.

 

Nahuel smirks. “That’s better. Here’s the deal. You tell no one what happened here. You come alone and bring me the treasure you stole from me by sundown, and I will spare him. Fail, and you’ll never see him alive again.”

 

Ivy: “How…how did you get here!?”

 

Nahuel: “Simple. I camouflaged myself and used a sticky substance I produced to hang on. At that point, it was child’s play to keep myself hidden from you, and everyone else.”

 

Ivy: “You’re...you're…insane…”

 

Nahuel: “Say what you want. You can either give me what’s rightfully mine, or he gets gutted.”

 

Nahuel camouflages himself. 

 

Nahuel: “Oh, wait. I guess it makes no difference if I’m invisible or not. Oh well…”

 

Nahuel carries Sprig into the forest. Sprig mouths the word “no”, as Ivy has tears in her eyes. She runs inside.

 


 

Ivy runs upstairs and into Sprig’s room. She takes everything out of her bag except the gems, and puts it on her back. As she is about to run outside, Anne comes back inside.

 

Anne: “I can’t believe I forgot my shoe…yo, Ivy. Where you going? The party can’t really get into full swing without you…”

 

“Oh, Sprig j-just w-wanted to d-do s-something w-with m-me in the w-woods”, Ivy says, before she smacks herself in the forehead.

 

Anne: “Oh, he wants to do something with you in the woods, huh? All right, I catch your drift. Have fun! Just…not too much fun.”

 

Anne winks, grabs her shoe, puts it on, then walks outside.

 

Ivy: “She’s never gonna let that go, is she? Whatever, I have more important things to take care of!”

 

Ivy runs out the back door.

 


 

It is almost sunset. Nahuel has Sprig tied to a tree with rope.

 

Nahuel: “I’d say Ivy only has about 5 minutes left. And once the sun goes down, you know what happens.”

 

Sprig gulps.

 

Ivy: “Nahuel!”

 

Nahuel turns his head to see Ivy running with a bag.

 

Nahuel: “I figured you’d come. You always talked about your loved ones when you were with us. You spoke so highly of them, it seemed like there was no price you were willing to pay to keep them safe. That worked out wonderfully for me.”

 

Ivy: “Just...let him go.”

 

Nahuel: “You give me the gems first. You told me you’d give me all the treasure, and you lied to me. Never once have I lied to you.”

 

Sprig: “Ivy, don’t! You earned that!”

 

Nahuel: “Quiet, you!”

 

Ivy tosses the bag to Nahuel. He opens it up and sees the gems inside.

 

Ivy: “There. Now I’ve actually upheld my end of the deal. Or do you think I’m trying to cheat you again?”

 

Nahuel smirks. “No, I don’t think you would for a situation this dire”, he says.

 

Nahuel cuts the ropes binding Sprig. Sprig runs up to Ivy’s side.

 

Nahuel: “I take back what I said about your intelligence. You are an imbecile.”

 

Ivy: “What?!”

 

Nahuel: “You said these gems would be worth thousands of coppers. That’s quite a large fortune. You could have done so much with it, but you’d rather give that up for someone who couldn’t even defend himself properly.”

 

Ivy balls her hands into fists.

 

Ivy: “WILL YOU JUST SHUT UP ALREADY!”

 

Nahuel crosses his arms.

 

Ivy: “There’s more worth in some people than there is in any amount of money. Sprig here is invaluable to me. But someone like you couldn’t possibly understand that.”

 

Nahuel: “No, I suppose I cannot. I will be leaving now.”

 

Nahuel camouflages himself and leaves.

 

“Ivy, why did you do that? You could have had a happy future…”

 

Ivy has tears in her eyes. She hugs Sprig.

 

“Sprig, any future without you by my side can’t be happy…”

 

Sprig starts crying. They break away from their hug.

 

“Come on. We have a party to go to…”

 


 

Ivy and Sprig are walking to the tea shop. Buck Leatherleaf starts approaching them from the side. He has goggles above his eyes.

 

Buck: “'Scuse me.”

 

Ivy: “Oh, hey, Sheriff. Were you invited to the party?”

 

“Nope. But I got a warning from Queen Olivia that there was some punk with a few screws loose running around. They gave me these...", Buck says, as he touches the goggles. "…erm…heat goggles…because they told me this feller could turn himself invisible. Anyways, I found someone like that and confiscated this from him. This yours?”

 

Buck holds up a bag. Ivy and Sprig’s eyes light up.

 

Buck: “That’s what I thought. Here you go.”

 

Buck hands the bag to Ivy.

 

Ivy: “Thank you so much, Sheriff! Here, I can give you a gem to repay you..”

 

Buck: “No need. Seeing criminals behind bars is enough for me. Plus whatever salary Toadie gives me.”

 

Sprig: “How long will he be in prison for?”

 

Buck: “Well, thievery ain’t that bad. But, did he do anything else?”

 

Sprig: “He kidnapped and attempted to murder me.”

 

Buck: “That’ll earn him a much longer sentence then. I’ll be sure to file that in his report. Anyways, you two stay out o' trouble.”

 

Buck leaves. Ivy and Sprig get all giddy.

 

“This is great, Ivy! That slimeball’s in jail, and you have your riches back!”

 

“No, Sprig. This is our money.”

 

“Huh?”

 

“I meant what I said. I won’t be happy in a future where we aren’t together. So we’re sharing this.”

 

“But…how do you propose we divvy this up?”

 

“Simple. We move in together and open a joint account."

 

Sprig’s eyes go wide. “M-move in together? Aren’t we moving, ya know...a little fast?”, he asks.

 

“Dude, we’ve been friends for years now. We see each other a lot. Would there really be any difference if we lived in the same house?”

 

“I guess when you put it that way…But I’m not in it for the money. That’s just a nice bonus. I’m in it because…well, you’re irreplacable.”

 

“Anyways, I’ll just put this in my room."

 

“Uh, how are you gonna get there? People are probably gonna ask you a million questions, when you walk through the door…”

 

“Oh, right…tell you what. You go in through the door, and tell people I’ll arrive shortly. I’ll go through my bedroom window, drop this off, jump out the window, then walk back in.”

 

Sprig nods. They arrive at the tea shop. Sprig enters the front door. Everyone turns their attention to him.

 

“Uh, hey everyone. Uh, Ivy will be here soon.”

 

Sprig goes and sits down next to Anne, who is at the same table as Wally, Felicia, Hop Pop, and Polly.

 

Anne: “Sooo…what’d you two do in the woods?”

 

Sprig: “Huh?”

 

Anne: “Ivy said you wanted to do something with her in the forest.”

 

Sprig blushes. “Oh, I just…wanted to show her this cool plant I found”, he says.

 

Anne: “Mhm. I bet you did…”

 

Ivy climbs the outside and opens her bedroom window. She puts the bag of gems on the floor. She notices the letter she wrote to Sprig on her desk. She rubs her chin for a moment before throwing it in the trash. She jumps back outside, and enters the front door.

 

Wally: “Oi! The lady of the hour has arrived!”

 

Everyone inside starts clapping, as Ivy sits down next to Sprig. Everyone continues sitting at their tables, chatting, drinking tea and eating pastries.

 

Ivy: “Wow, uh…I was kinda expecting to be bombarded with questions…”

 

Felicia giggles. “I was, too. That’s why I told people that if they did, I’d kick them out”, she says.

 

Ivy: “That’s some good thinking there, Mom.”

 

Everyone in the tea shop enjoys the rest of the evening. Several hours later, Felicia checks her watch.

 

Felicia: “All right, everyone. Tonight has been fun, but I’m afraid the shop is closed. You can all come back tomorrow if you wish.”

 

Everyone leaves the tea shop and goes home. Ivy and Felicia head back up to their rooms, and fall asleep.

 


 

Nahuel is escorted into a jail cell with handcuffs on him by Buck. Buck then closes the door behind him.

 

“Now then, you’ll be staying here for the foreseeable future. I won’t be wearing those goggles all the time, so I won’t be opening this door for any reason, since you can turn yourself invisible.”

 

Buck starts to walk away.

 

“Wait.”

 

Buck turns around.

 

"Can I request something?”

 

“Depends. What is it?”

 

“I told someone in my tribe to watch over the rest of them until I came back. Obviously, that won’t be happening. Can you tell them Nootau is in charge now?”

 

“Ya want someone to go all the way there just to drop off a message?”

 

“Someone will be exploring that continent, no? If they’re doing that, it shouldn’t be too much of an inconvenience to tell them something.”

 

“Hrm. Can’t argue with that. Fine, I can fulfill that request. Er, well, not me, but I can certainly get someone to.”

 

“Thank you.”

 

Buck leaves.

 

“This is…not what I had hoped for. But, even if others are checking out the continent, they know not to mess with my tribe. Our way of life will be maintained. And that is enough for me to rot away in here without a twinge of regret.”





Chapter 27: Froggy Feelings

Summary:

Sprig tries to find out how Ivy really feels about him.

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

The alarm on Sprig’s phone goes off. He turns it off, leaves his room, goes downstairs, and heads to Grub n’ Go. He buys a single daisy, and leaves the store. He then heads over to the Wartwood Graveyard. There, he sees Ivy on her knees in front of a grave. The headstone reads “Emily Goliath” In front of it, there is another daisy laying in front on the dirt. Sprig slowly makes his way to her side, kneels, and puts the daisy on top of the one she had placed. 

 

“Today would have been her 16th birthday.”

 

“Anne told me that’s a special one. Something about it being sweet.”

 

“Yeah, I remember the party you threw me for mine. I was so confused when you brought me a bunch of candy.”

 

Sprig chuckles. He notices there’s another daisy on the ground next to Emily’s grave.

 

“Hey, who’s that one...oh..."

 

“I…I didn’t know her long enough to know when her birthday was. I don’t even know if daisies were her favorite flowers…knowing her, they might have been something with thorns…”

 

“You know, I never asked you about her…what was she like?”

 

“Oh…um…she was…someone who gave 110% to everything. I mentioned she was…difficult to get along with at first. Like the first time we met, I tried to shake her hand, and she thought I was giving her a high five…”

 

Sprig chuckles.

 

“But…I got to know her. She wasn’t just someone who was pushing full throttle for no reason. She…was abused when she was younger by her own family. And she didn’t have any friends, either…”

 

“Oh, that’s…horrible…”

 

“Yeah…she just wanted to prove to her friends and family that her life mattered. That’s why she lived her life to the fullest.”

 

“But…you said she gave her life up for yours…”

 

Ivy sighs. “Yeah, she did. She…said she only had one regret in life. Because she trusted her family, and they let her down, she was wary of people who were being friendly with her. She thought they might hurt her the same way, and she didn’t want to go through that again. But…she didn’t want to close herself off from everyone. And…she felt comfortable enough around me to tell me about herself”, she says.

 

Ivy starts to cry. “But…when I told her about all the people who loved me back home, she made a promise to herself that she’d do anything it took to make sure that I could leave the continent…”, she says.

 

Sprig hugs Ivy. Ivy wipes her tears.

 

“And that’s what she did. But…I made a promise to myself as well. That I’d tell people her story and made sure that she really left a mark in history. And…I was able to keep that as well. Olivia told me they would have a statue built of her in the city. And she told me they’d have a book written about her once I send them an outline…”

 

“Have you started writing?”

 

“Not yet, but I will…I have a few things to take care of back here...", Ivy says, before standing up. “Thanks for coming. I know you don’t have to, so it means a lot when you do.”

 

Sprig stands up. “Hey, you know I could never leave you to mourn here alone. I’ve been doing this every year, and I don’t plan on stopping anytime soon", she says.

 

Ivy smiles.

 

“Hey, I like that you stopped wearing all that makeup. Made you look like a bit of a clown. And I don’t know what was with that outfit yesterday. You looked like you were dressed like a grandma! But, uh...I'm glad you stopped wearing your hat. Your hair looks better this way.”

 

“Sprig, what are you talking about? I’ve been dressed like this since yesterday.”

 

“What? I could have sworn…”

 

Ivy sees Toadstool hanging papers on the bulletin board.

 

Ivy: “Hey, Toadstool?”

 

Toadstool: “Yeah?”

 

Ivy: “You were at my party yesterday, right? Was I dressed differently?”

 

Toadstool: “Don’t think so. Why, were you wearing earrings or something?”

 

Ivy: “Uh, yeah. But I don’t blame you for not noticing.”

 

Toadstool: “Oh, good. Wouldn’t want to get on your bad side. You’re pretty scary even for your small size.”

 

Toadstool resumes putting pieces of paper on the bulletin board.

 

“Huh. Guess I just imagined it. Sorry about all that stuff I said…”

 

“It’s fine. I enjoyed the…indirect compliments. Anyways, I’m gonna go see what I can get for that treasure. Then we can decide on where we want to live!"

 

“We’ll stay here in Wartwood, right?”

 

“Of course! I gotta help mom out at the tea shop.”

 

“But…we’ll be rich. You don’t need to work there…”

 

Ivy giggles. “No, but I enjoy working there”, she says.

 

Sprig chuckles.

 

“Anyways, meet me at the Wartwood Realty Office in an hour?”

 

“Sounds good!”

 

Ivy heads home, as does Sprig.

 


 

Sprig enters through the front door of the house. He sees Anne having coffee. 

 

“Hey, Anne. Where’s Hop Pop and Polly?”

 

“Oh, they’re just building something out back. A remote-controlled Frobot, or something.”

 

“Why is Hop Pop helping?”

 

Anne laughs. “You know how he always talks about building character? Polly managed to convince him that constructing it would help him have more”, she says.

 

Sprig laughs.

 

“Anyways, where were you? It’s not like you to be out so early.”

 

“Oh, I was just hanging out with Ivy. We’re gonna go to the realty office and buy a house today with the money she gets from selling the treasure.”

 

Anne chokes on her coffee. She recomposes herself.

 

“That’s great, dude! You and Ivy are finally taking your friendship to the next level!”

 

“Next level?”

 

“Yeah! You know, boyfriend and girlfriend!”

 

Sprig blushes. “Woah, hey…pretty sure Ivy and I are just friends", she says.

 

“Oh, come on, dude. She asked you to move in with her. Only romantic partners do that.”

 

“You moved in with us…”

 

“Well…that was different.”

 

Sprig rolls his eyes.

 

“Look, you clearly left an impression on her when you danced with her five years ago. She wants more of that. She’s been waiting for you to make a move for a while, and some girls will just hint to their crush that they want to be together. If this isn’t a sign, I don’t know what is.”

 

“Couldn’t she just…you know…tell me?”

 

“It’s not ladylike. Generally the guy in the relationship has to do that.”

 

“Why?”

 

“I don’t know, dude. I didn’t make the rules.”

 

“Uh, I don’t know…we’ve never really talked about us being more than friends. What if I confess my love to her and she doesn’t reciprocate my feelings? I feel like that might ruin the friendship…”

 

“Just ask her out on a date.”

 

“A date?!”

 

“Dude, a date doesn’t have to mean anything. I went on dates with guys in high school. It’s low pressure, you just go and have a good time. Two people can date and still be friends.”

 

“Uh, all right…”

 

“And you don’t have to tell her how you feel. But you do need to ask what you two are.”

 

“Uh, we’re frogs. She and I both know that.”

 

“That’s not really what I meant. I meant like if you two were friends or lovers.”

 

“I’m scared, though.”

 

Hop Pop and Polly walk in from the back door. 

 

Hop Pop: “Woo, that was a lot of work. But now I know more about how robots work. They’re pretty cool!”

 

Polly: “So you’ll let me automate the farm with them?”

 

Hop Pop: “No! They could never match the amount of love I put into growing my crops!”

 

Polly: “You geezer! The future is now!”

 

Hop Pop storms off into his room and slams the door. Anne gets an idea.

 

Anne: “Hey, Polly. You busy?”

 

“Huh? Oh…kinda. I got a request from Queen Olivia. They wanted me to build a Frobot and send it over there to Salamanderland to take pictures of the wildlife and plants there...", Polly says, as she holds up a helmet. "...and I can use this headset to control it. Oh, and uh…I also need to tell the locals there their leader is in jail here.”

 

Anne: “Their leader was imprisoned here?”

 

Polly: “Yeah, he tried killing someone and stealing from them. But Buck got him, so it’s all good now.”

 

Anne: “Yeesh. Wait, is Salamanderland the name of that continent?”

 

Polly: “Yeah! Olivia said she asked her wife to name it.”

 

Anne: “That explains a lot…but your task…it can wait, right?”

 

Polly: “Uh, I guess…why?”

 

Anne: “You’re gonna come with me to Stumpy’s for Sprig’s date with Ivy.”

 

Polly: “Uh….why?”

 

Sprig: “Yeah, I don’t understand…”

 

Anne: “You said you were afraid you might muck things up with Ivy, right? So Polly and I will be your wingwomen!”

 

Polly: “Neither of us have wings, Anne.”

 

Anne: “No, a wingwoman is someone who helps their friends out with potential romantic interests. We can just act like we’re hanging out, and Sprig, if you need help, we can come to the rescue!”

 

Polly: “I dunno…what’s in it for me?

 

Anne: “Uh…I’ll make dinner tonight?”

 

Polly: “Make it a week!”

 

Anne: “Deal!”

 

Polly: “Nice! A whole seven days without Hop Pop’s cooking!”

 

Hop Pop: “I heard that!”

 

Anne: “Great! Sprig, just go and ask Ivy out, and we’ll meet you at Stumpy’s.”

 

Sprig nods, then leaves.

 

“All right, in order for this to work, we have to make sure Ivy doesn’t see us, or she might think something’s up.”

 

“Ooh! We can put on disguises!”

 

No, that’ll draw too much attention. We just need to act like we’re normal diners there.”

 

“If you say so…”

 


 

Sprig gets to the realty office and walks inside. He sees Ivy.

 

“Hey, Ivy!”

 

“Sprig! Guess what, I got so much money, they can build a house for us!”

 

“Oh…that’s cool. Uh, hey listen, why don’t we go have a d-d-”

 

“Huh?”

 

“Discussion! About, uh, what type of house we want built. And uh…why don’t we talk over lunch at Stumpy’s?”

 

“I don’t know…why not at the tea shop? Stumpy’s is kind of a dump…”

 

“Uh…I mean…have you ever been there?”

 

“No…”

 

“Well, spice is the variety of life! I mean, life is the spice of variety! I mean-”

 

“OK, we’ll go.”

 

“Great!”

 

Sprig and Ivy head towards Stumpy’s.

 


 

Polly and Anne are sitting in a booth at Stumpy’s. The waiter comes over.

 

“Hello, my name is Edwin, and I’ll be your server this afternoon. Can I get you started with an appetizer or beverage?”, he says.

 

Anne: “Uh, yeah…I’ll have the…moss-arella sticks.”

 

Edwin: “Good choice! And for you?”

 

Polly: “Uh, I’ll just have a glass of water…”

 

Sprig and Ivy enter.

 

Ivy: “I guess this place isn’t so bad. Oh, hey Anne and Polly! Funny seeing you here!”

 

Anne: “Oh, uh…yeah. I mean, I helped save this place from bankruptcy, so I like coming here!”

 

Ivy: “Is the food good?”

 

Anne: “Yeah, Stumpy is an amazing chef!”

 

Edwin comes by and hands Anne her appetizer, and Polly a glass of orange juice.

 

Polly: “Dude! I asked for a glass of water! How could you possibly mess this up!?”

 

Edwin: “Oh dear, I’m terribly sorry. I will get that fixed for you right away!”

 

Edwin picks up the glass of orange juice, but trips on his own feet. The sound of shattering glass echoes throughout the restaurant.

 

Edwin: “Oh, no. I’ll have to get this cleaned up.”

 

Polly: “I could build a robot replacement for you that doesn’t make mistakes like that!”

 

Edwin: “Please, no! I’m behind on my bills!”

 

Ivy: “Sprig, maybe we should leave…”

 

Sprig: “Uh, but…Anne said Stumpy was a fantastic cook, right?”

 

Ivy: “Well, all right.”

 

Sprig and Ivy sit in another booth and look at their menus. After deciding on what they are going to order, they put their menus down. 

 

“So I was thinking we could have a two story house built in a tree. What do you think?”

 

“Uh, yeah. I like it.”

 

“You don’t sound too enthusiastic about that. Come on, Sprig, if you have a different preference, let me know. This will be our house, you know.”

 

Sprig starts stuttering. Anne notices.

 

Ivy: “Sprig, what’s the matter?”

 

Another waiter comes by and takes their order. Sprig breathes a sigh of relief.

 

Anne: “OK, this isn’t going well. Time to help.”

 

Anne pulls out an ax from her bag.

 

Polly: “Ooh! Are you gonna threaten Ivy to admit her feelings?”

 

Edwin comes back with a broom and mop.

 

Anne: “What? No…just watch…and stop building a robotic waiter!”

 

Polly puts down her hammer.

 

Polly: “You’re no fun.”

 

Edwin: “Please! I don’t wanna live in a cave again!”

 

Once Sprig and Ivy’s waiter leaves, Anne stands up and walks by Sprig and Ivy’s booth. She drops the ax in front of her feet and intentionally trips on it. Sprig and Ivy take notice.

 

Ivy: “Anne! What happened?”

 

Anne: “Oh, I just tripped on this ax…”

 

Ivy: “Uh, how did it get there…?”

 

Anne: “Uh…Loggle must have dropped it! That guy has butter fingers!”

 

Ivy: “But Loggle isn’t even here…”

 

Loggle, who is wearing a trench coat, turns away from the bar.

 

Loggle: “Who’s talking about me?”

 

Anne: “Loggle? Why are you here?”

 

Loggle chuckles. “My employer requires me to take a 30 minute break.” he says.

 

Anne: “...aren’t you…self-employed?”

 

Loggle: “Yeah, and I require that I take an half an hour long break!”

 

Anne: “OK, uh…well you dropped this ax…”

 

Loggle: “Oh! Thanks for telling me. I don’t even remember bringing it in here…”

 

Loggle looks at his watch.

 

Loggle: “Well, that’s my break. I’m leaving.”

 

Loggle gets up, but Anne stops him.

 

Anne: “Hey Loggle, wouldn’t you say it’s important to…ax?”

 

Loggle: “Absolutely! How else are you gonna get lumber?”

 

Anne: “You hear that, Sprig? It’s important to ax. Maybe you should, too.”

 

Ivy: “Anne, you’re being weird. Why are you talking about lumber?”

 

Anne stares at Sprig, but he doesn’t respond.

 

Anne: “All right, I didn’t want to have to do this…but…Ivy, can you please tell Sprig that you’re dating?”

 

Ivy: “What?! Anne, where is this coming from?”

 

Anne: “Oh, come on. You and Sprig were doing something in the forest yesterday, and neither of you were comfortable enough to talk about it with me. Now you’re gonna be living together...you really expect me to believe that you don’t want to be his girlfriend?”

 

Ivy stammers before frowning. “OK, first off that ‘thing we did in the woods’ is something neither of us want to talk about, but not for the reasons you think. Second, did you even consider that Sprig and I might just want to be roommates? Moving in doesn’t really mean anything!”, she says.

 

Sprig: “Ivy.”

 

Ivy: “What?”

 

Sprig: “I’m…I’m sorry…”

 

Ivy: “For what?”

 

Sprig: “The reason I took you here is because Anne wanted me to take you out on a date. She told me all this stuff about how you might consider us more than friends, and this was just a way for us to discover how you felt about me…”

 

Ivy: "Sprig...how do you feel about me?”

 

Sprig: “I…I don’t know. I’ve never been in love before…”

 

Ivy: “Well, let me ask you this. How do you feel about Anne?”

 

Sprig: “Anne? Uh, like a friend. More of like a big sister, actually.”

 

Ivy: “And would you say you feel the same towards me?”

 

Sprig: “Um…not quite the same. But it’s close.”

 

Ivy: “There’s your answer, then. If you don’t feel that much different towards me, then you don’t see me as a romantic interest.”

 

Sprig: “But…how do you feel about me? I don’t want to lead you on into thinking we could be lovers right now…”

 

Ivy: “Sprig, that doesn’t matter…”

 

Sprig: “But relationships work both ways. Your feelings towards me are just as valid as mine towards you.”

 

Ivy sighs. “Yeah, you’re not wrong. But the reason it doesn’t matter is because if you don’t see me as being your potential girlfriend anytime soon, then I’m not gonna force you to be in a relationship you don’t want to be in. If I really do, I might…subtly try to make you fall in love with me…but if you want to stay friends, I am 100% fine with that. And me asking you to move in with me wasn’t some method of trying to make you fall head over flippers for me”, she says.

 

Sprig breathes a sigh of relief. “Thanks, Ivy. That’s a load of my mind", she says.

 

“Anytime...", Ivy says, before pointing at Anne. "...and you! How dare you make assumptions about our relationship!”

 

Anne: “OK, I’m sorry. But, to be fair, there were a lot of signs that you wanted to take things further…”

 

Ivy smirks. “You mean like how you wanted to go on a date with Loggle? Or with Buck? Or even with my dad?”, she says.

 

Anne blushes. “How…how do you know about that?”, she says.

 

Ivy: “Sprig told me. I thought it was funny at first. But when I learned that Wally was my father, it made me vomit.”

 

Anne: “OK, look. Dates don’t have to mean anything, right? I just wanted to have a good time with someone in town.”

 

Ivy: “Just like how moving in with someone doesn’t have to mean anything?”

 

Anne starts to say something, but decides against it. She goes over to Polly.

 

Anne: “Come on, Polly, we’re leaving…”

 

Polly: “But I’m almost done with my project…”

 

Edwin: “I’m begging you!”

 

Polly: “Fine. But only because you’re so annoying!”

 

Polly and Anne leave Stumpy’s. Edwin goes over to Ivy and Sprig’s table with a tray of food. He puts it on the table.

 

Edwin: “I, uh…got you what you ordered…but knowing me, it’s probably wrong…”

 

Ivy: “You said you were having money issues?”

 

Edwin: “Yeah?”

 

Ivy: “Well, today’s your lucky day. How much do you need?”

 

Edwin: “Just a hundred coppers. But that’s a lot…”

 

Ivy pulls out a 100 copper coin and gives it to Edwin. His eyes light up.

 

Ivy: “Just a tip.”

 

Edwin: “Th-thank you!”

 

Edwin leaves. Ivy and Sprig look at the food.

 

Ivy: “This isn’t what we ordered, is it?”

 

Sprig: “Nope. But it can’t be that bad, right?”

 

Ivy and Sprig eat. 

 

Ivy: “Eh, I’ve had worse. But let’s never come here again.”

 

Sprig: “Agreed.”

 

Ivy and Sprig leave Stumpy’s.

 


 

Ivy and Sprig are in the realtor’s office. They’re given a design for a house, which they both look at. They look at each other and smile, and they hand the realtor two 1000 copper coins. They leave and jump for joy.

 

“This is really happening! We’re gonna be living together!”

 

“I know! I can’t wait to stay up late, party all the time, and eat food on the couch!”

 

“Woah, hey. There’s consequences to all those…”

 

“Who cares about consequences! There’s gonna be no rules in our house!”

 


 

A Frobot is heading towards Salamanderland. It finds the tribe of salamanders. The salamanders raise their spears at it.

 

Frobot: “Relax! I’m not here to harm you.”

 

Nootau: “You’re..you’re not?”

 

Frobot: “Nope. My name is Polly by the way. I’m not really here, I’m in my house in a town called Wartwood. I’m just controlling this remotely.”

 

Nootau gives Frobo a blank stare.

 

Frobot: “Oh, I guess for you guys, that doesn’t really mean anything…uh, anyways, I’m here to document the wildlife and plants here. Just letting you know, one of you salamanders named…uh…where did I write down his name…oh! It's Nahuel. He’s been imprisoned for his crimes. He wanted to let someone named Nootau know that he’s the leader now.”

 

Nootau: “That’d be me. So he’s not coming back?”

 

Frobot: “Afraid not. We might have people coming here, but we know not to bother you guys, anyways, I’ll be off!”

 

Nootau: “Wait.”

 

Frobot: “Yes?”

 

Nootau: “Something you should know is that Nahuel ruled over us with an iron fist. We weren’t allowed to have arguments. But…I think I speak for everyone here that nobody liked his way of life, even if we never told him so.”

 

The salamanders nod in agreement.

 

Nootau: “So, as leader, I’d like to make a slight modification to his request. If people come here, we will not tolerate them if they bother us. But they are allowed to live with us, without fear of having a difference of opinions with anyone else here. And my people, that goes for you as well. If you have something to say, and they don’t see eye to eye with you, I will not make you fight.”

 

One salamander starts clapping. Then the rest join in, and start cheering.

 

Frobot: “Uh, cool? Oh, by the way, we’re calling this place Salamanderland. I didn’t come up with the name. Are you OK with that?”

 

Nootau: “Yes, that is acceptable.”

 

Frobot: “Neat! I’m gonna go explore now.”

 

The Frobot starts walking into the jungle, taking pictures occasionally of the trees and flowers.

 

Odina: “Thank you, Nootau. You will make a better leader than Nahuel could ever dream of.”

 

Nootau: “I appreciate it. Still, I do feel bad for him…”

 

Odina: “Why? He brought it upon himself…”

 

Nootau: “Yes, but he learned it from his father. This idea was taught from parent to child for centuries. I like to believe he may have been a good person, if it were not for a bad influence.

 

Odina: “I suppose you’re right…”

 

Nootau: “Either way, there is nothing we can do for him now. I just hope he has seen the error in his ways…”

Notes:

The names I gave to the salamanders were not random.

Nahuel is a Native American name meaning "jaguar". Tiger salamanders are a species.

Nootau is a Native American name meaning "fire". Fire salamanders are a species.

Odina is a Native American name meaning "mountain". There are several salamander species with "mountain" in their name, such as the Cheat Mountain salamander, the Allegheny Mountain dusky salamander, and the Larch Mountain salamander.

And yes I really did this much research for a fan fiction

Chapter 28: Moving Out

Summary:

Ivy learns the importance of having rules.

Chapter Text

Sprig is packing his bags in his room. He finishes, then goes downstairs to see Hop Pop, Anne and Polly smiling on the couch.

 

Hop Pop: “Sprig! I’m glad you’ve found your own place! It’s enough to make this old man cry…”

 

Sprig: “Ah, don’t worry, Hop Pop. I’ll visit. Nothing’s really changed, it’s just I won’t be here as often.”

 

Hop Pop: “That’s good to hear! And now that you’ve moved in with your girlfriend, my hopes for great-grandchildren are alive again!”

 

Sprig blushes. “Woah, Ivy and I are just friends. We might be lovers eventually, but…for the time being that’s not happening. Also, I’m only 16, Hop Pop. You’re gonna have to wait a bit longer", he says.

 

“And there they go…", Hop Pop says, before turning to his granddaughter. "...hey, Polly?”

 

Polly: “No.”

 

Hop Pop sighs.

 

Anne: “Don’t worry, Hop Pop. Even if you’re not around, I’m sure Polly will eventually find someone.”

 

Polly: “No way. Not unless they’re into robots as much as I am!”

 

Sprig: “Uh, this conversation’s making me uncomfortable. So I’m just gonna leave…”

 

Sprig heads out the front door. He heads towards Felica’s Tea Shoppe.

 


 

Sprig enters Felicia’s Tea Shoppe. He sees Felicia taking orders.

 

Sprig: “Hey, Ms. Sundew!”

 

Felicia: “Oh, hiya Sprig! Ivy’s just upstairs packing her stuff.”

 

Sprig: “Cool! Uh, you’re fine with her moving out, right?”

 

Felicia: “Of course! Sylvia was happy when I moved out. Sure, it made her sad, but…it’s difficult to explain. Every bird has to leave the nest at some point, right?”

 

Sprig: “Yeah, that’s true.”

 

Felicia: “Besides, Ivy said she’d help me and Wally here at the shop, so nothing’s really changed besides the fact that she won’t be staying here.”

 

Sprig: “Yeah, it’s like that for me, too. Anyways, I’ll go check in on Ivy.”

 

Felicia: “Wait, I have a request for you.”

 

Sprig: “A request? What is it?”

 

Felicia: “I was kinda like Ivy when I was her age. Sylvia was strict with rules, and well….I tried bending them a lot. She always told me they were for my own good, and I didn’t really realize that until I was on my own. That’s why I was the same for Ivy, but I’m not sure if she is mature enough for her age to know the reasons-”

 

Sprig: “Don’t worry, Hop Pop taught me that lesson about five years ago. I’ll make sure Ivy learns as well.”

 

Felicia smiles. “All right, thank you. Fair warning, though, she may not like you for setting rules…”, she says.

 

Sprig: “Hey, I didn’t like HP for his rules at first, either. But we worked it out.”

 

Felicia: “I trust you, then.”

 

Ivy heads downstairs with her bag.

 

Ivy: “Yo, Sprig! You good to go?”

 

Sprig nods.

 

Ivy: “Sweet! Bye, Mom!”

 

Wally comes out of the kitchen with a tray of tea.

 

Wally: “Oi! Don’t I get one as well?”

 

Ivy: “See ya, Dad!”

 

Sprig and Ivy leave the tea shop.


 

Sprig and Ivy are standing outside their new home. It is a one story house made of birch.

 

Sprig: “What the…how did this get built so quickly? We put the request in yesterday!”

 

Chuck: “I grow tulips.”

 

Sprig turns around to see Chuck tipping his hat.

 

Sprig: “Oh, that makes sense. Thanks, Chuck.”

 

Chuck: “You grow tulips.”

 

Chuck leaves, and Sprig and Ivy enter their house. It has a study, closet, kitchen, family room, bathroom, and a master bedroom. The furniture they asked and paid for is already set up. Ivy runs into the master bedroom, and puts down her bag next to her bed. Sprig walks in and does the same, next to his.

 

“Come on, dude! We gotta fill the fridge with food, and get decorations for the party!”

 

“Party? What party?”

 

“For us, silly! To celebrate being free from our parents! We’ll be going until the sun rises!”

 

“That’s…something I wanted to talk to you about, actually.”

 

“Huh?”

 

"Uh, I think it’s best if we set a few rules for this house…”

 

Ivy groans. “You sound like my mom! Sprig, we have this house to ourselves. We can do as we please!”, she says.

 

“Yes, I know. But just because you can, doesn’t mean you should…”

 

“So...what? Because you don’t want to have a party, I can’t have one?”

 

"Um…no. If you want to throw one, by all means, do. I’ll even help you get set up, I just won’t be participating.”

 

“But this is for us!”

 

“I appreciate that, but I’d prefer if it was just something more low-key…”

 

“Forget that. I wanna go all out!”

 

“That’s fine. I’ll be spending the evening at Hop Pop’s, then."

 

“Pfft, your loss. You’re gonna miss the greatest party of all time!”

 

“Anyways, if you make a shopping list, I can go buy what you need.”

 

Ivy grabs a piece of paper out of Sprig’s notebook, and writes down a long list of food items and decorations. Once she’s done, she hands it to Sprig.

 

“Got it. Be back in a few hours.”

 

Sprig leaves. Ivy then writes various invitations, and walks out the front door a few minutes later.

 


 

Ivy walks through the front door, having delivered her invites. Sprig walks through the front door around 15 minutes later, with various bags full of junk food and party decorations. He and Ivy adorn the house with balloons, streamers, and a piñata. They also put out bowls of chips and dip, as cans of Bog Rod in a tub filled with ice. Ivy checks her watch.

 

“Oh, shoot. The party starts in 5 minutes!”

 

“Who did you invite?”

 

“Everyone in town besides our families!”

 

“Well then. Hope you have fun!”

 

“You sure you don’t wanna stay?”

 

“Positive. And, this isn’t because I don’t like you or parties or anything. It’s just a difference in opinions, and I don’t want to stop you from having fun.”

 

Sprig hands Ivy her phone.

 

“Here, this can play music. Might make the party a bit more fun. All you gotta do is press on this app, then press this triangle button. It’ll turn into two vertical lines afterwards, and you just press it again to stop. And there’s these buttons on the side to control the volume.”

 

“Oh, thanks…you know, it’d be more fun if you were here, but..." Ivy says, before shrugging. "…you do you.”

 

Sprig smiles as he walks out the front door. Over the next ten minutes, various residents of Wartwood enter the house. They begin chatting, eating, and dancing.

 


 

Sprig enters the front door of Hop Pop’s house. He sees Anne with her phone against her forehead with the word “Durian” on it, while Hop Pop and Polly sit across from her.

 

Anne: “Uh, am I an animal?”

 

Hop Pop: “Uh…I don’t think so…”

 

Anne: “Do you not know what this is?”

 

Polly: “I don’t even know if you know what it is…”

 

Anne pulls down the phone.

 

Anne: “Yeah, I’ve never heard of this. Marcy probably knows what it is.”

 

Sprig: “Hey guys!”

 

Anne, Polly, and Hop Pop turn their heads to see Sprig in the doorway.

 

Anne: “Sprig? What are you doing here?”

 

Polly: “Did you already get sick of Ivy?”

 

Sprig: “Nah, she’s just throwing a party at our house.”

 

Anne: “A party? Why aren’t you there?”

 

Sprig: “Ah, well…you remember the time I kicked Hop Pop out of here, and I tried running the farm myself?”

 

Anne: “Yeah? What about it?”

 

Sprig: “Well, that’s kinda what letting Ivy throw the party is for. It took me the bad experience of suffering the consequences of my own actions to realize that rules are generally in place for a reason.”

 

Polly: “That’s…actually kinda smart.”

 

Sprig: “Yeah. Anyways, Anne, you’re making dinner tonight, right?”

 

Anne: “Yeah, I was gonna make Khao Pad.”

 

Sprig: “Don’t know what that is, but sounds better than what Hop Pop was planning on making.”

 

Hop Pop: “Why do you guys always talk about me like I’m not here?”

 

Anne, Polly, and Sprig laugh. Anne prepares dinner, and serves it to Hop Pop, Polly, Sprig, and herself.

 

Anne: “So, Hop Pop. What do you think?”

 

Hop Pop: “It’s…OK. Some avocado oughta make it better!”

 

Hop Pop pulls out a peeled avocado from his pocket and mashes it into his food.

 

Polly: “Why did you have an avocado in your pocket?”

 

Hop Pop: “Never know when you’re gonna need one!”

 

Sprig: “Well, I oughta head home and get some sleep. Thanks for the good food, Anne.”

 

“You’re welcome. But uh…”, Anne says, as she looks out the window and sees that there are still guests at Sprig’s house. “The party’s still going. How are you gonna get to bed?”

 

Sprig: “You got those noise canceling headphones?”

 

Anne: “Ah, yeah. I’ll let you borrow them for the night. Just bring them back in the morning.”

 

Anne goes downstairs and grabs a pair of headphones from her backpack. She hands them to Sprig. Sprig then leaves.

 


 

Sprig enters his house. A few people notice, including Ivy.

 

Ivy: “Sprig! The party’s been going for a while, but you’re still welcome to join us!”

 

Sprig: “No thanks. I’m going to bed.” 

 

Ivy: “Bed? Dude, it’s only 10 PM.”

 

Sprig: “Yeah, and I’m tired.”

 

Ivy: “Fine, you big party pooper.”

 

Sprig heads into the master bedroom and closes the door. He puts on the headphones and goes to sleep. The party continues for another hour. Then there’s a knock on the door. Ivy opens up the door to see Buck Leatherleaf.

 

Buck: “Awright. Party’s over.”

 

Ivy: “What do you mean the party’s over?”

 

Buck: “Wartwood law states that informal get-togethers must end at 11 PM. If yer not a resident of this house, then you need to leave.”

 

Everyone in the house leaves except for Ivy. Ivy then frowns.

 

“Whatever. Who says I can’t party by myself? But what to do…”, Ivy says, as she looks at Sprig’s phone. "I’ve seen Sprig use this a lot…maybe there’s something fun on it…”

 

She picks it up and fiddles around with it until she sees an app called Metfix. She opens it up and sees a picture labeled “Suspicion Island”. She pushes the picture and episode 1 of Suspicious Island starts playing. She then sits on the couch and begins watching it. After the episode ends, she sees a button that says “next episode”, which she pushes. She does this several more times before she falls asleep from exhaustion. 

 


 

Sprig wakes up in the morning at 7 AM. He leaves the master bedroom to see that Ivy is passed out on the couch, with Sprig’s phone showing the “next episode” button for Suspicious Island. He notices there are crumbs all over the couch.Sprig picks up the phone, exits out of Metfix, and sets an alarm for 7:55 AM. He then writes a note to Ivy.

 

Dear Ivy,

 

Your mom wanted you at the tea shop at 8 AM today, so I set an alarm for you. Just press the square button when it pops up. I’ll be helping out, just in case you can’t make it. If that is the case, don’t worry about it. I’ll tell your mom you were tuckered out from all the partying. I’m sure she’ll understand.

 

Sincerely,

 

Sprig 

 

He then puts the note next to the phone. He leaves and heads to Felicia’s Tea Shoppe.

 


 

Sprig knocks on the door of the tea shop. Felicia opens up.

 

“Sprig? What are you doing here?”

 

“I’m about to pull the biggest prank on Ivy.”

 

“Prank? What for?”

 

“To teach Ivy about the importance of rules.”

 

“But…couldn’t you just tell her?”

 

“I tried, but it didn't work. I think a humiliation is more in order.”

 

Felicia gives Sprig a worried look.

 

“Sprig, depending on the prank, I may have to refuse to help you, or even have to stop you…”

 

“Don’t worry. Here’s the deal. I wrote Ivy a letter saying that I filled in for her since she might not make it to work and that I’d be fine with it despite the fact that we might be slammed with customers. I also told her I was gonna tell you the reason why she’d be late, and that you would understand. Finally, I’m gonna tell everyone in town to come here, if they can.”

 

“Why would you do all that?”

 

“Simple. She’ll see the note, and realize that you probably won’t be fine with her not showing up because she partied so much, so she’ll have to come here. But she won’t really be awake enough to work properly and cover for all the customers. That’s where the trick comes in. See, we’re actually gonna pretend like Ivy is doing a good job. But at the end of the day, we just reveal all the orders she messed up and such, and she’ll realize that maybe I was right. At that point, she’ll be more willing to let me set some ground rules because she doesn’t want to see something like this happen again.”

 

“...wow. Uh…yeah. If that doesn’t work, I don’t know what will. It’s scary how you were able to come up with such an elaborate yet seemingly foolproof plan…”

 

“The feeling is mutual. I feel like if I didn’t have a moral compass, I’d make a pretty good supervillain. Anyways, are we in agreement?”

 

Felicia nods.

 

“Good! I’ll be back here soon.”

 

Sprig leaves the tea shop.

 


 

Ivy groggily wakes up to the sound of the alarm. She looks at the phone, and then sees the note and reads it. She then pushes the button, then reads the rest of the note. Her eyes go wide.

 

"Can I even work on this little sleep? Wait, but…if Sprig really does tell mom, she’s probably gonna blow a fuse…”

 

Ivy dusts herself off and goes running out the front door. 

 


 

Ivy runs into the tea shop. Out of breath, she notices the place is packed. Felicia walks over to Ivy.

 

Felicia: “Hey, sweetie! You enjoy your first night in your new place?”

 

Ivy: “S-sure did!”

 

Felicia: “Great! Listen, we’re a little busy. Do you mind helping Sprig prepare the orders?”

 

Ivy nods, then waddles over to the kitchen. She sees Sprig preparing some Silver Needle tea. Sprig notices her.

 

Sprig: “Hey, Ivy! Glad you made it! I got a list of orders here. Mind helping me with them?”

 

Ivy nods, then totters over to the counter, where the list is. Her vision is blurry, so she has difficulty reading it. She then dumps the water from a flower vase into a pot and starts boiling it on low. She then uses the leaves from the flower and puts it into the water. She then grabs the pot and dumps it onto a plate. She then carries the plate out to Felicia. Felicia then writes down this mistake on a piece of paper. Ivy continues making more mistakes of similar caliber until the shop closes, all of which Felicia records.

 

Felicia: Well, I’d say today was better than usual. You’ll be back tomorrow, right, Ivy?”

 

Ivy yawns. “Yeah, I will, but uh…right now, I’m very tired…”, she says.

 

Felicia: “You’re tired? Why’s that?”

 

Ivy: “Uh…long day at work, right?”

 

Felicia: “Oh, yeah. I’m a little weary too. Good night, sweetie.”

 

Felicia goes upstairs as Sprig leaves the kitchen. Ivy is trying not to nod off. Sprig grabs the paper from the front desk, folds it, and puts it in his pocket.

 

“Sprig?”

 

“Yeah?”

 

“I can barely even keep my eyes open…can you carry me home?”

 

Sprig smiles. He goes over to Ivy and gives her a piggyback ride. He then starts walking home. Once he gets there, he puts her in her bed and tucks her in. He then goes to sleep.

 


 

Ivy wakes up. She then turns her head and sees Sprig sitting on his bed looking at her.

 

“Morning, Ivy! Sleep well?”

 

"Yeah, I did…hey, thanks for taking me home yesterday…I can’t believe you did that, and even helped out at the shop, even after I was mean to you…you’re a good friend.”

 

“I wouldn’t thank me.”

 

“Hmm? Why not?”

 

Sprig chuckles. “Truth be told, the events of the past two days were all planned”, he says.

 

“Wha...?”

 

“See, your mom asked me to teach you why having rules is vital. And I did try with words, but well…you weren’t very receptive to what I had to say. So I figured I had to step up my game. You know how yesterday, you were so fatigued, and yet you did such a good job with the orders, that your mom said the day was better than usual?”

 

“...yeah?”

 

“Well, you didn’t really do a good job. In fact, you messed up every single order. And I have a list of all the crazy things you did right here.”

 

Sprig hands the list to Ivy. She reads it.

 

“I…I served raw dough to someone?”

 

“Yup. But don’t worry, everyone knew that you were sleep-deprived, so anything you tried giving to anyone we just threw away. I got everyone’s order right.”

 

Ivy breathes a sigh of relief. “That’s good, I guess…if someone got sick because of me, I’d never hear the end of it…”, she says.

 

“Speaking of which, I told your mom why you’d be late.”

 

“WHAT?! WHY?!”

 

Sprig chuckles. “Relax, she actually was understanding of the situation. Mainly because of me, really. If I hadn’t told her…yeah, that wouldn’t have been pretty”, he says.

 

OK…but what was the point of this?”

 

“Simple, I wanted to teach you about why rules are necessary. You could have had a poor public image because you didn’t want any, but I didn’t really want anyone to feel the full effects of the consequences of your actions. Still, I do want you to ponder what would have happened if it wasn’t for me…”

 

Ivy stares into space for a few seconds.

 

“You did all this…just so I would be fine with you setting rules in this house?”

 

Sprig nods, before Ivy chuckles.

 

“Well, all right. If you went through this much effort, then we can talk about rules.”

 

"This is how it will work. I already have a list of rules based on yesterday’s events. I’ll be adding more as things come up…”

 

“Wait, don’t I get to add rules?”

 

“No, but this won’t be one-sided. Unless something should obviously be a rule, I’ll ask you if you’re comfortable with one being added. And, if you want to suggest one, I will consider it.”

 

“And what is the punishment for not following a rule?”

 

“Rulebreakers have to sleep outside. That goes for me and you.”

 

Ivy laughs, but Sprig just stares.

 

"...w-wait, you’re serious?"

 

Sprig nods.

 

"B-but there’s dangerous animals outside!”

 

“Exactly. It’s the perfect deterrent.”

 

Ivy shivers.

 

“So...", Sprig says, as he hands Ivy a piece of paper from off the bedside table. "...here’s the list.”

 

Sprig hands Ivy the list, which consists of three rules. One is about only eating food in the kitchen, one about not staying up past 10 PM without explicit permission from the other, and one about not planning an occasion in the house without consulting the other.

 

“These seem…reasonable.”

 

“Glad you think so.”

 

Ivy chuckles. “It’s good that one of us is responsible, otherwise, this house might have burned down already…”, she says.

 

“Meh, I learned the hard way. One time I tried running Hop Pop’s farm without him, and I kinda ended up destroying it. But Hop Pop fixed it, and we were able to set up a system like the one I have here, so it all worked out.”

 

“Pfft, so you’re gonna be like my grandpa?”

 

“In a way, yes. But I won’t talk about how lazy kids are nowadays.”

 

Ivy chuckles, and Sprig hugs her.

Chapter 29: Toadlent Show

Summary:

Sasha helps the toads in Toad Tower find their hidden talents. She runs into two familiar faces.

Chapter Text

Sasha is at the Toad Town Tavern, where she is having a Bog Grog drinking competition with Howard. Several toads are gathered around the table. Sasha and Howard try to down another can, but Howard vomits. Sasha throws her empty can on the ground and stands on the table.

 

Sasha: “I AM UNDEFEATED!”

 

Sasha jumps off the table and grabs a few napkins, then hands them to Howard.

 

Sasha: “Hey, you put up a good fight.”

 

Howard grabs the napkins and wipes his mouth.

 

Howard: “Ah, thanks Sasha. You’ve got quite the stomach there.”

 

Sasha chuckles. “Funny story, five years ago, Anne told me not to eat too much candy. I told her I was fine, but I ended up hurling. At that point, I realized I had a weakness, and I wanted to get rid of that. So I tried eating as much as I could until any type of food no longer fazed me. Sweet, savory, spicy…I had it all. But uh…safe to say I gained a bit of weight…”, she says.

 

Sasha pulls out her phone and shows the toads a picture of her on her phone. The toads start laughing.

 

“That’s more than a bit!”, Charlie says.

 

Sasha: “Yeah…but then I didn’t really like how I looked, so I got into aerobics to get fit. Then aerobics changed into strength and conditioning.  And honestly, I realized that there wasn’t really a whole lot that I couldn’t just pick up and immediately get good at it.”

 

“Sounds like you’re just naturally gifted…”, Hank says.

 

Sasha: “Yeah…I thought that at first too, but then I learned it was something else.”

 

“Is it sorcery?”, a third toad says.

 

Sasha: “No, Bryce, but as a friend once told me…”

 

Sasha pulls out a copper from behind Bryce’s ear and hands it to him. He looks at it in amazement.

 

Sasha: “...a good magician never reveals her secrets.”

 

The crowd starts clapping.

 

Sasha: “Anyways, this has been fun, but I gotta get back to Toad Tower.”

 

Sasha stands up and leaves the tavern. While she’s walking outside, she notices there’s a flier on the local community board for something called the “Toadlent Show”. She takes it off the board, and examines it.

 

Sasha: “Toadlent Show? What is that?”

 

A toad walks up to Sasha.

 

“You haven’t heard of the Toadlent Show?”, she asks.

 

“No…”

 

“It’s an annual competition we have. Toads come from all around and show off their talents. I’m actually the announcer for it. My name is Erika, by the way”, she says.

 

“That’s sick! Oh, I’m Sasha, by the way.”

 

Erika chuckles. “I know you. I don’t think there’s a single toad who doesn’t. But uh…the Toadlent Show has been boring recently….”

 

“Huh? Why?”

 

“It’s just been a brawn competition. I don’t know what it is, but toads here seem to think that they’re only good at being buff. So they just train to see how much they can lift. The only variety we have is Grime with his harp.”

 

“...Erika, what if I told you I was going to make this year...different?”

 

“Uh…how?”

 

“Simple. The toads think they’re only good at being strong, I’m gonna show them otherwise.”

 

“I don’t know…I don’t want to be mean, especially to myself, but toads aren’t really known for being smart…”

 

“Neither am I. But watch this.”

 

Sasha pulls out a deck of cards from her pocket. She hands it to Erika, then turns around.

 

“Go ahead and look through that deck. Pick a random card, but don’t tell me what it is. Once you’ve decided, go ahead and shuffle it back into the deck.”

 

Erika does as instructed.

 

“Now what?”

 

Sasha turns around and takes the deck back from Erika. She starts shuffling it again.

 

“Hey, when’s your birthday?”

 

“August 2nd. Why?”

 

“Hmm, that’d make you a Leo. I’m not really into Zodiac signs, but I hear people like that being the center of the attention. Sound like you?”

 

“Yeah, actually! That’s why I volunteered to be the announcer.”

 

“Cool, cool. Anyways, August is the 8th month, and you were born on the 2nd day…eight plus two equals ten…”

 

Sasha stops shuffling the cards. She hands the deck back to Erika.

 

“Do me a favor and pull the tenth card. Show it to me, but don’t look at it.”

 

Erika flips through the first nine cards. She pulls out the tenth card. 

 

“Hand the rest of the cards to me.”

 

Erika gives the cards back.

 

"There’s 52 cards in this deck. I asked you to pull one, so the odds that the card you’re holding and the one I asked you to choose earlier are extremely unlikely, wouldn’t you agree?”

 

Erika nods.

 

“Tell me, what was the card you chose?”

 

“I pulled the 3 of Hearts.”

 

“Go ahead and look at the card you have.”

 

Erika turns the card around to see that she’s holding the 3 of Hearts. Her jaw drops.

 

“Pretty cool, right?”

 

“How did you do that?”

 

Sasha chuckles. “That’d ruin the fun, wouldn’t it? Point is, though, someone taught me how to do…uh…human magic back home. I’m confident in my ability to pass my knowledge onto the toads in this town. You won’t see any acts where someone’s just lifting something. Not only that, but you won’t see any repeated ones, either”, she says.

 

Erika claps. “Sasha, you have made my day! For once, I’m actually looking forward to this year’s Toadlent Show!”

 

Sasha smiles. “Glad to hear it. Anyways, I gotta get those toads prepared. See you later!”, she says.

 

Sasha starts running towards Toad Tower.

 


 

Sasha opens the doors of Toad Tower to see two toads are wrestling with each other, surrounded by a ring of toads.

 

Sasha: “Everyone! This is your lieutenant speaking!”

 

The toads stop wrestling, and all of them stand in a line and salute.

 

Sasha: “I have a special mission for you, and I’m gonna make sure you’re in top shape for it.”

 

“Special mission? Is there some bad guy on the loose?”, one of the toads asks.

 

Sasha: “No, Eleanor. The Toadlent Show is soon, and you all think you don’t have any talents besides being tough. I’m here to prove that wrong.”

 

“Uh…are you saying we aren’t?”, another toad asks.

 

Sasha: “No, Oliver. You guys are burly, but you have so much more potential. Look at Grime, he can play the harp well. You can be just like him.”

 

“Uh…how?”, a third toad asks.

 

Sasha: “I’m gonna teach you how, Penny. I’m confident all of you have some hidden talent you’re not even aware of. I’ll help you guys figure out what that is. And nobody is to leave until you figure that out!”

 

“Yeesh, you kinda sound like how Grime used to talk to us. But at least this sounds fun”, a fourth toad says.

 

Sasha: “That’s the spirit, Liam! Now let’s get to work…”

 

And so Sasha tried to teach the toads various acts such as origami, but all of them ripped their paper. She then tried to teach them jump rope tricks, but all of them end up tripping themselves. Finally, she tried teaching them juggling, but all of them drop their balls. Sasha gets frustrated, sits in the corner, and covers her face with her hands. Liam walks over.

 

Liam: “Hey, Sasha…I don’t mean to be a pessimist, but I don’t think this is gonna work…”

 

Sasha: “No, come on, I’ll find something for all of you…”

 

Liam: “But we’ve been trying for an hour. I think toads are just good at being hefty, and nothing more…”

 

Sasha: “What about Grime?”

 

Liam: “Grime is special. That’s why he’s the commander. And you’re like him. We just don’t…have it in us…”

 

Sasha grits her teeth. “Listen up, everyone! I…I didn’t want to share this, but you know how I seem like how I’m just good at everything I do?”, she says.

 

Howard: “Yeah, you said you weren’t gonna tell us…”

 

Sasha: “Yeah, that was…my bad. But I’ll tell you all. It’s not luck or sorcery or anything like that. It’s just something called self-confidence.”

 

Eleanor: “Self-confidence? What’s that?”

 

Sasha: “It’s basically how you see yourself. I know it doesn’t seem that important, but it can be a huge difference between success and failure.”

 

The toads look at each other.

 

Sasha: “Look, Marcy did an…experiment of sorts with me a few years ago. She was looking at the effects that the mind can have on someone’s capabilities. And she certainly proved there is a connection.”

 

Oliver: “What did she do?”

 

Sasha: She had me think of myself poorly when I was sick. The next day, I felt even worse than the day before. But it works in the other way, too. Next time I was sick, I just told myself that this cold wasn’t gonna get the better of me. The next day, I was still sick, but I had way more energy. Point is, if you look at yourself one way, your mind will naturally cause you to meet that description. You guys think of yourself as nothing more than rugged soldiers, so it’s difficult for you to pick up any new talents. But I know you all have aspirations to be talented at something else. I…can’t really help you with that part. I can encourage you, but at the end of the day, it all falls on you.”

 

Penny steps forward. 

 

Penny: “Well, you guys heard the lieutenant. I want to be something more. You all want it, too. Just believe in yourselves, in the same way she does in us!”

 

Penny raises her fist in the air, and the other toads do as well. They get back to trying out new activities, and each of them finds something unique they can do well. Sasha smiles, and assists each of them.

 


 

Sasha wakes up. She heads downstairs and lifts some weights, and does 100 push ups and situps. She then heads to the mess hall, where the other toads are having breakfast. Sasha sits next to Grime.

 

Sasha: “So…I heard you’re playing harp at the Toadlent Show tonight.”

 

Grime: “Yes! Aw, dangit! I forgot to tell you about that!”

 

Sasha chuckles. “Don’t worry, dude. I’m not participating”, she says.

 

Grime: “What? But you have so many talents!”

 

Sasha: “Exactly. How am I supposed to pick just one? Besides, I helped everyone here learn a skill they didn’t know before. They won’t be just lifting something this year. I don’t wanna take the spotlight away from them.”

 

Grime laughs. “Seems like teaching others is a talent you have as well!”, he says.

 

Everyone finishes their food, then heads down to Toad Town for the show.

 


 

There is a stage in the center of Toad Town. Erika is standing on it, with a microphone in her hand. She sees Sasha heading over with the toads. Erika ushers for Sasha to come over. Sasha heads up the stage.

 

Erika: “Eek! I can’t believe it. The toads have puppets, yo-yos, and ribbon wands instead of dumbbells!”

 

Sasha: “Yep. They’re gonna blow your socks off!”

 

Erika: “I can’t wait! Ah, but I’m not wearing socks…”

 

Erika checks her watch.

 

Erika: “Shoot! Show’s gonna start in 5 minutes. Gotta get ready!”

 

Erika runs towards the back of the curtains. Sasha looks around the crowd of toads and sees two familiar faces. Her face lights up when she recognizes them. Sasha starts running over to them.

 

Sasha: “Percy! Braddock!”

 

Percy and Braddock turn their heads in time to see Sasha throw herself at them in a hug.

 

Percy: “Woah, Sasha! Didn’t expect to see you here.”

 

Braddock: “Yeah, Grime told us you were gonna miss us forever…”

 

Sasha: “And I did! Well, not forever…but I did miss you! Where have you two been?”

 

Percy: “Oh, well…after we…had our differences, we kinda chose our own path…”

 

Braddock: “Yeah, it was…refreshing. Nobody could tell us what to do but us. We didn’t have to be soldiers anymore. We could be comedians!”

 

Sasha: “Oh…um…I’m glad you found something that made you happy…”

 

Percy: “Ah, well…it’s kinda hard to be. We show up every year and mess up. Then people laugh at us, instead of with us.”

 

Braddock: “But this year’s gonna be different. We got some jokes that’ll have them in tears!”

 

Sasha: “Well, I…am looking forward to hearing them.”

 

Braddock and Percy give Sasha a slight grin.

 


 

After the toads put on various acts such as ventriloquism, juggling, yo-yo tricks, ribbon wand dances, origami, and jump rope routines, Percy and Braddock headed up to the stage as the second to last act. Braddock sets up a drum set while Percy grabs the microphone.

 

Percy: “Uh, hey everyone! How’s it going?”

 

The crowd doesn’t respond.

 

Percy clears his throat. “Uh, what do you call a sad frog? Unhoppy!”, he says.

 

Braddock hits the drums. The crowd murmurs.

 

Percy: “Uh…how about this one? Why are frogs rarely angry? They eat whatever bugs them!”

 

Braddock hits the drums. The crowd is silent.

 

Percy: “Uh…you hear about the frog who bought some new shoes? They were open-toad.”

 

Braddock hits the drums. Erika comes onto the stage. 

 

Erika: “Well! I think you’ve made us all laugh so much that we can barely contain it!”

 

Percy: “Oh! I thought our jokes were terrible again.”

 

Erika forces a laugh. “Definitely not! You got some real winners there!”, she says.

 

Percy and Braddock leave the stage.

 

Erika: “Next, we have Grime on the harp!”

 

Grime walks up to the stage while the crowd claps. He sets up his harp. The whole crowd listens intently to the masterpiece he performs. After he finishes, the crowd goes wild.

 

Erika: “Thank you, Grime! Another spectacular song!”

 

Grime: “You’re welcome. I’m just glad I get to share my music with people I’m proud to call my friends!”

 

Grime walks off the stage with his harp. Braddock and Percy leave, and Sasha notices.

 

Erika: “Well! That’s all the performances. I really enjoyed this year’s show! It was interesting to see the wide range of talents you all have! And on that note, I’d like to call an important person to the stage. Sasha!”

 

The crowd starts clapping as Sasha happily walks up the stage.

 

Erika: “I met Sasha just today. And wow, talk about a first impression! She told me she was gonna make this talent show different this year. I…had a little doubt in her. But hey, I was open to the idea. And she certainly delivered! Did you have anything to say, Sasha?”

 

The crowd starts clapping again as Erika hands the microphone to Sasha.

 

Sasha: “Uh, I just wanted to say that…I’m proud of every single one of you. You all broke free from the limited self-image you had of yourselves. And, that’s not an easy thing to do because…honestly, your mind can be your own worst enemy at times. And sometimes the people you care about…get hurt.”

 

Sasha clears her throat. “Anyways, keep up the good work! I’ll try to be here next year!”, she says.

 

The crowd claps once more as Sasha leaves. 

 

Grime: “Lieutenant! It’s time we celebrate at Toad Tower!”

 

Sasha: “Uh…I have to do something…”

 

Sasha starts running in the direction Braddock and Percy went.

 

Grime: “Sasha? Where are you going?”

 

Grime starts running after Sasha.

 


 

Percy sighs. “Another year, another messed up comedy routine…”, he says.

 

Braddock: “Aw, come on, Percy. We’ll do better next year.”

 

Percy: “No, we won’t! Don’t you get it? We’re pathetic excuses for toads! We couldn’t be proper soldiers, and now we can’t even be good at the one thing we’re trying to do! It doesn’t matter how hard we try…we really should just give up…”

Sasha: “Stop saying that!”

 

Braddock and Percy turn their heads to see Sasha approaching them.

 

Braddock: “Sasha? What are you doing here? Are you here to mock us more?”

 

Sasha: “No! I meant what I said!”

 

Percy: “R-really? You thought my jokes were funny?”

 

Sasha: “I mean…kinda? But it doesn’t really matter either way. You guys probably saw all the toads doing tricks and thought they were cool, right?”

 

Braddock: “Well, yeah. They’re good soldiers, and they have something they’re good at…what isn’t cool about that?”

 

Sasha: “If you saw them two days ago, you wouldn’t be saying that. I…I offered to help them discover their hidden talents. If I hadn’t said anything, they’d still be lifting dumbbells. They weren’t like you guys. You…you found something you wanted to do besides being a soldier, and you really went and tried to make something out of yourselves. And…you’re honestly some of the bravest toads I’ve ever seen.”

 

Percy: “W-we are?”

 

Grime catches up.

 

Sasha: “Yeah! I mean, you guys stood up to Grime here back when I was a prisoner. That takes guts!”

 

Grime: “What are we talking about?”

 

Sasha: “Just about how awesome these two are!”

 

Beatrix: “Sorry, I must have misheard. What did you say about those two losers?”

 

Beatrix approaches Sasha and gets in her face.

 

Sasha: “I said, Braddock and Percy are extraordinary individuals.”

 

Beatrix laughs. “Them? They were horrible soldiers, and they’re somehow worse comedians. Nothing extraordinary about that. In fact, they’re less than ordinary. For you to say something like that…any respect I had for you just vanished”, she says.

 

Sasha: “Oh? And am I supposed to care?”

 

Beatrix: “You should. I am the lord of the West Tower. You’re just a first lieutenant.”

 

Grime: “Hey, that’s MY first lieutenant you’re talking about!”

 

Beatrix: “Shut it, Grimothy. This doesn’t concern you.”

 

Sasha: “Yeah, not to be rude, but I can handle myself.”

 

Beatrix: “Anyways, can you name one thing these two have done right? You know, besides serving as an example of how a toad should not live?”

 

Sasha: “One thing? How about several?”

 

Beatrix smirks. “This is gonna be fun to hear. All right, I’ll humor you”, she says.

 

Sasha smirks. “Hey Grime, you remember when we were on the run?”, she asks.

 

Grime: “I do! That was…uh…a low point for me. But you got me going again!”

 

Sasha: “Yeah, I did. But…say…were we alone?”

 

Grime: “Uh…no. Braddock and Percy were helping us, even if it was just a bit.”

 

Beatrix crosses her arms.

 

Sasha: “Oh, you mean…they knew we were wanted criminals, and they still assisted us?”

 

Grime: “Sounds about right.”

 

Beatrix: “Big whoop. Sounds to me like they could have just been dumb enough to not know better.”

 

Sasha: “Grime, when we went to get your warhammer, you know, the one that everyone who tried to get died trying, were we alone for that?”

 

Grime: “Nope. Braddock and Percy were also there. But uh, again, they only helped a little. Not sure if that really matters.”

 

Sasha: “Oh, so we were on a mission which had a low likelihood of surviving, and they still joined us?”

 

Beatrix: “Yeah, sure. But I was there when you got back. They didn’t even have the backbone to keep going with you.”

 

Sasha: “No…but they did have the backbone to say no to us. Grime, the fiercest fighter of the colosseum, and me, the one who pulled the warhammer out. Not to mention, the both of us managed to overthrow Andrias. You’ve probably heard of him, right? For anyone to say no to someone like us…doesn’t seem like an easy thing to do, right? Not like you could really understand how difficult it was, considering you got your butt kicked by a pink frog.”

 

Grime: “Who I trained!”

 

Beatrix: “Fine! You’ve made your point.”

 

Sasha: “Then apologize.”

 

Beatrix grits her teeth.

 

Beatrix: “Braddock, Percy, you…have my respect. And I’m sorry for what I said earlier.”

 

Braddock and Percy’s eyes light up.

 

Beatrix: “Don’t think this is over, though. I’ll just use this as an opportunity to improve myself. Then, you will have no choice but to respect me!”

 

Beatrix leaves.

 

Percy: “Wow, uh…thanks Sasha.”

 

Braddock: “Yeah, seriously. I thought we were just a bunch of fools.”

 

Sasha: “No, it’s the least I could do. I…I’m sorry for how I acted that day. I…I promise I’m not that person anymore.”

 

Percy: “You don’t need to promise. For you to stand up for us like that…shows that you really have.”

 

Braddock: “Anyways, we’re leaving.”

 

Percy and Braddock start to leave. Grime and Sasha look at each other, and nod.

 

Grime: “Hold it.”

 

Percy and Braddock stop, and turn around.

 

Percy: “What is it?”

 

Grime: “Uh, you’re welcome to stay with us at Toad Tower.”

 

Braddock: “Really?”

 

Grime: “Yeah. It’s still the same as it was five years ago, but…well, you saw the toads at the show. They’re still trained soldiers, but they’re…finding out things about themselves. And with all the talents they picked up, the place will be more fun. And with you, it’ll be even better. And I won’t treat you poorly.”

 

Sasha: “But if anyone does, they’ll have me to answer to.”

 

Percy and Braddock look at each other.

 

Braddock: “We’d love to!”

 

Sasha smiles. “Glad to have you on board again!”, she says.

 

The four of them walk home.

 

Sasha: “You know, I helped the toads stumble upon their talents, and give them guidance. So I can help you write funnier jokes.”

 

Percy: “Really?”

 

Sasha: “Yeah. I’ll assist you in becoming a real comedian.”

 

Percy gets all giddy. “This is great, Braddock! We might be famous!”, he says.

 

Braddock: “I can just see it now. Perdock Live! Or, should it be Bradcy Live?”

 

Sasha: “I can also come up with a better name…”

Chapter 30: The Burglar

Summary:

A newt burglar discovers a hidden figure in plain sight.

Chapter Text

A purple newt wearing all black and carrying a sack is walking around in the mountains.

 

“Did…did I lose them?”

 

He looks around, and sees no sign of anyone else. He chuckles.

 

“You’ve done it again, Wyatt. Another day, another successful robbery. The cops aren’t too bright. They didn’t really think I’d run up here. Still, I need to get through here before night falls…there might be something that comes out when the sun goes down…plus it probably gets cold…”

 

Wyatt continues for several minutes before seeing a hut.

 

“Eh? Someone lives here?”

 

Wyatt looks to see the sun is setting.

 

“Maybe they won’t know I’m a criminal?”

 

Wyatt walks over to the hut and knocks.

 

“Anyone home?”

 

Wyatt doesn’t hear a response. He tries the door knob, and enters. He sees there is nobody inside the hut. He notices the sign that reads “Out to Lunch”.

 

“Out to lunch? That was several hours ago. Whatever, this place should be a good place to stay the night.”

 

Wyatt looks around and sees various items. He smirks.

 

“Might also be a good way to get some extra dough.”

 

He starts taking the belongings off the shelves and stuffing them in his sack.

 

“Honestly, I’m doing this dude a favor. Now he knows to lock his door…and not to be out to lunch for so long.”

 

Wyatt puts down the sack and tries to relax by sitting down on a chair, but some invisible force prevents him.

 

“What the heck?”

 

Wyatt tries putting his hand down on the chair, but he feels like there is someone in the way.

 

“OK, this has officially gotten weird…”

 

Carly appears in front of him, with her staff in her hand. He takes a step back.

 

“Wha?! I’m so sorry, I didn’t mean-”

 

“Enough.”

 

“I…I’ll put back your stuff, just don’t curse me!”

 

“You can keep it.”

 

“Wha? I can?”

 

“Yes. However, there is something I must do. This will not hurt.”

 

Carly raises her staff and casts a pale light over Wyatt.

 

“What…what did you just do?!”

 

“I made it such that you cannot tell anyone what you saw here.”

 

“Wha?! I’m not a snitch!”

 

“It cannot be known that I am here. Taking a chance on you keeping your word is unnecessary.”

 

“But…but I know…why is it fine for me to?”

 

“That is none of your concern. Now, leave, before I decide to do something drastic.”

 

Wyatt grabs the sack and runs out of the home. Carly then sits back in her chair, and turns herself invisible.

 


 

Wyatt heads into Wartwood. He places his sack near a tree, out of view.

 

“That was freaky. Gotta change into my civilian clothes…”

 

Wyatt hides behind a tree and puts on a green T-shirt, cargo shorts, and a baseball cap. He puts his burglar outfit into his sack.

 

"Now, just gotta find some place to sell my loot…”

 

Wyatt walks towards the Grub n’ Go. He passes the bulletin board, but walks backwards a few steps to look at a missing person poster. His eyes go wide as he rips the paper off.

 

“That’s…! This…Anne wants to know where she is…she might give me a big reward for information…and I’m actually doing something good! Let’s see, it says she lives at Hop Pop’s California Avocados, which is…”

 

Wyatt looks around town to see the farm. He then heads over and knocks on the door. Anne opens up, with Polly by her side.

 

Anne: “Oh, hello! It’s not often we see a newt in Wartwood.”

 

Albus walks by and stops. “Uh, did you forget about me?”, he says.

 

Anne: “You’re the only one, dude. Besides, all you do is give uncalled for reviews of places. Forgive me if you’re not really top of mind.”

 

Albus: “I’ll have you know my reviews have done a lot for the customers and owners of this town!”

 

Anne: “Yeah, I’m sure they have.”

 

Albus: “I’m glad you’ve started to appreciate what I do. Now, to give that boulder a review!”

 

Albus walks over to a boulder, and pulls out a pen and paper.

 

Anne: “Don’t mind him. I’m Anne by the way. But uh…maybe you already know that. Who are you?”

 

Wyatt: “I’m Wyatt, and I’m…uh…a door-to-door salesman?”

 

Anne: “Oh, uh…what are you selling?”

 

Wyatt: “Uh…various items?”

 

Polly: "Ooh! You got any boom shrooms?"

 

Wyatt: "Yes! But, uh...I’ll get them later. IBut first, I wanted to let you know about this.”

 

Wyatt pulls out the wanted poster. Anne’s eyes go wide.

 

Anne: “D-did you see her?!”

 

Wyatt: “Yeah, I did! She’s-”

 

Wyatt tries to speak, but no words come out, as Anne raises an eyebrow.

 

Anne: “She’s…where?”

 

Wyatt tries speaking again, but to no avail, then he rubs his chin.

 

Wyatt: "Oh, right...I just remembered that she cast a spell on me. Said I couldn’t say where she was.”

 

Anne: “Grr...once I get my hands on her, I’m gonna…!”

 

Polly: “Yeah, girl! Let your emotions go wild!”

 

Wyatt: “Uh, wait. She said I couldn’t say where she was. She never said I couldn’t show you where she was.”

 

Anne: “You remember, right?”

 

Wyatt: “Yeah, I do. And I can lead you there…for a price.”

 

Anne: “Hmm, I will. But after you show me.”

 

Wyatt: “I like the way you think. Only accepting payment after the deed is done. Then you just don’t give them the money!”

 

Anne: “Uh, I was gonna pay you. Do you steal from people…?”

 

Wyatt: “Me? A thief? How preposterous!”

 

Polly: “Actually, that kinda makes sense. He’s new in town, and he offered to sell you assorted wares but doesn’t know what they are or has them on his person.”

 

Wyatt starts to sweat. “Tell you what. I’ll lead you for free, and uh…you don’t tell anyone about me, got it?”, he says.

 

Polly: “Oh, that was just a guess. Thanks for confirming it for me!”

 

Anne: “Honestly, I hate criminals. But…I’m willing to look past your misdeeds, if you really do know where she is and you guide me there.”

 

Wyatt: “Great! Follow me!”

 

Anne: “Hold up. I gotta get something.”

 

Anne runs back inside and grabs the Calamity Box, and puts it in her bag. She then heads back outside. Wyatt then turns and starts heading towards the mountain. Anne follows.

 

Polly: “Have fun going crazy on that witch!”

 


 

Wyatt and Anne are on the mountain. They arrive at the hut. Wyatt opens the door, and Anne enters behind him.

 

Anne: “This place looks almost the same as when it was, besides…the fact that, uh...many items missing…did you steal from her?”

 

Wyatt: “How else does a thief make bank?”

 

Anne: “Tch. Whatever. She deserves it. Anyways, where is she?”

 

Wyatt attempts to sit on the chair as last time. As expected, he appears to be floating. Carly then pushes him onto the floor.

 

Carly: “I never should have had mercy on you…I should have just wiped your memory of this place…or even just killed you.”

 

Anne raises her sword and knocks Carly’s staff out of her hand. She then points her sword at Carly’s neck.

 

Anne: “YOU! START TALKING!”

 

Carly: “Anne, I understand you’re angry…”

 

Anne: “ANGRY? I’M LIVID! MY PARENTS ARE BACK HOME THINKING FROG KNOWS WHAT, AND YOU AND VALERIANA HAVE NOT ONLY REFUSED TO LET ME GO HOME, BUT NOT EVEN GIVE ME THE SLIGHTEST HINT AS TO WHY. EXPLAIN YOURSELF!”

 

Carly: “I…I can’t…”

 

Anne starts slowly approaching with her sword still pointed at Carly’s neck. Carly starts backing up.

 

Carly: “Please…I really want to…”

 

Anne: Then do it.

 

Carly: “Look, Valeriana asked me to make something with her called an indestructible promise…”

 

Anne: “Indestructible promise?”

 

Carly: “Yes. Take a look at this…thief here. He managed to reveal my location, but I’m sure he must have found difficulty…”

 

Wyatt: “That’s right! I tried telling her, but it’s like I was mute, just when I was trying to say that…”

 

Carly: “Yes. Similar to how he had his lips sealed, mine are as well for certain topics. Additionally, there are some actions I am physically unable to perform…”

 

Anne lowers her sword.

 

Anne: “Like recharging the stone properly?”

 

Carly nods.

 

Anne: “And I imagine you can’t tell me why?”

 

Carly nods.

 

Anne: “Great. Just great. I can’t go back home, and the one person who could do that, can’t, and can’t tell me why. Why would you make this indestructible promise with Valeriana? Or can you not tell me that either?”

 

Carly: “Please don’t ask me that again. Like I said, I do want to inform you as much as possible. For the things you want to know that I can reveal, I will tell you.”

 

Anne: “Go ahead, then.”

 

“Valeriana wanted a successor to her. Someone skilled with magic, yes, but also someone loyal to her. I wanted her staff for myself, but when she told me the restriction…it didn’t seem so appealing anymore. But…she told me that if I refused, she would simply find someone else…", Carly says, a tear falls down her cheek. “I know you’re in pain, Anne. And not to invalidate those feelings, but I am as well. To have all this information that you should know, but for me unable to tell you…I feel awful. And I’d never want anyone else to feel this bad. That’s why I’ve burdened myself with this curse. But…you should know that I have tried to help you as much as possible…”

 

Anne: “You…you have?’

 

Carly: “Yes. The promise only applies to me. Valeriana can choose what she wants to reveal. That’s why I left the candies, because I knew you’d take one, and you’d ask Maddie to use it to speak with her.”

 

Anne: “But…she didn’t really tell me anything…”

 

Carly: “I figured as much. She probably feels just as bad as I do…”

 

Anne: “But…you said the promise doesn’t apply to her. She chose to influence my friends to get stuck here! How can she feel bad?”

 

Carly: “I know it makes no sense from your point of view, but…it does from hers. And while I don’t completely agree with it, I can see why she would…”

 

Anne: “...how restrictive is that promise?”

 

Carly: “What do you mean?”

 

Anne: “Like, look at Wyatt. There shouldn’t have been any way for him to tell me where you were, and yet we’re here. Would the same apply to this promise?”

 

Carly: “It…might. Why don’t I just tell you what I am unable to do?”

 

Anne: “Yeah. If I’ve learned something from lawyer shows, there’s always some sort of loophole. Some way where I get what I want, without you breaking your promise.”

 

Carly: “Very well. There are two things I am forbidden from doing. The first is that I must not tell anyone why Anne, Marcy, and Sasha cannot return to Earth. The second is that I must not let Anne, Marcy, or Sasha return to Earth.”

 

Anne: “...that second one. You said you can’t let me, Marcy, or Sasha return to Earth. Does that also mean anyone besides us three can go there?”

 

Carly: “...technically, yes. But I wouldn’t advise…”

 

Anne: “You can! Good! Now we’re getting somewhere…now I just…need to figure out what’s special about us three…”

 

Wyatt: “Um…you’re Anne, right? And you mentioned Sasha and Marcy?”

 

Anne: “Yeah?”

 

Wyatt: “Um, well…you three are…humans, right? And you came from…Earth…to stop this planet’s destruction?”

 

Anne nods.

 

Wyatt: “And I heard you came here using a magical box? And five years ago, you were able to get back to Earth, but the box was destroyed?”

 

“Yeah. I got back using this one", Anne says, as she pulls out the Calamity Box.

 

Wyatt: “...so, it seems like…for every world, there is one of those…and it also seems like for every one of those, there will be three individuals who end up using it to travel to another world, because there is something that threatens to end it?”

 

Anne: “I mean…that’s a huge leap to make. Yes, it certainly happened here, but…to assume the same for all worlds is based on nothing more than conjecture…”

 

Wyatt: “But it might explain why…uh…that other newt made this promise. She didn’t want the saviors of this world to risk their lives again.”

 

Anne: “But…even if that was the case, we’re the only three who have saved this world. The Guardian told me so.”

 

Wyatt: “Guardian? What’s that?”

 

Anne: “It’s…I don’t know how to describe it…”

 

Carly: “Allow me. The Guardian is…something of a deity. While we don’t know exactly how old it is, it is presumed to be as old as the multiverse…”

 

Wyatt: “Multiverse?”

 

Carly: “Yes. The universe is simply everything you could theoretically observe. From here, to the deepest depths of the cosmos…but there are others like this one. Ones where…history may have played out slightly or vastly. The entire collection of universes is known as the multiverse.”

 

Anne: “And the Earth is just in another universe.”

 

Carly: “Correct. The Guardian watches over these universes. And it was looking for someone to replace it after its vastly long life.”

 

Wyatt: “Was? It found someone?”

 

Anne: “Yes. It…chose me. Because I was the first one in any universe to choose to save a world that wasn’t mine, and to give my life to do so…”

 

Wyatt: “You…traded your life for this planet? But…you’re right here…”

 

Anne: “Yeah, it…wanted me to take its place right then. But I convinced it to let me live the rest of my mortal life, so it…made an exact copy of me, and let me return to the realm of living. Once I pass away, then I’ll be the new Guardian. A Guardi-Anne, if you will.”

 

Wyatt: “Uh…yeah. But…maybe the Guardian wants you to live a full life. And if there’s…something that’s going to destroy the Earth, and you are unable to stop it…then your life would be cut short, right?”

 

Anne: “I…I guess…but that’s assuming we can’t…”

 

Wyatt: “But, you…you died, right? And it seems like you still being here was more of a stroke of luck on your part…what if next time, you, Sasha, and Marcy aren’t so fortunate?”

 

Anne: “But…if you’re right…that means MY planet is in danger! I have to do something! Except…I can’t…”

 

Wyatt: “Maybe not in the way you want. But…she did say you can send someone else, right? Maybe you can be like the Guardian and choose who should go and save the planet.”

 

Anne: “Yeah…yeah you’re right! The Guardian did choose us…kinda…and if I’m going to become it someday, that means there’s nobody else worth choosing the most worthy saviors than me!”

 

Anne runs out of the hut. Wyatt stands up and runs after her.

 


 

Anne runs into Wartwood. She tries to catch her breath. Wyatt catches up to her.

 

"Why…were…we…running?”

 

“I don’t…know…I kinda…just got…pumped so…I just…took off…”

 

“Uh, anyways…who were you gonna choose? Are there warriors or something here?”

 

“Warriors?”

 

“Yeah, I mean…if you’re gonna save your world, you need fighters like yourself, right? You wield that sword like an expert.”

 

“I…I wasn’t like this before I came here the first time. I was kinda just your average girl. So were Marcy and Sasha.”

 

“But then, why did the Guardian choose you? I’m not saying you weren’t up to the task because…well, you three did it…”

 

“The stones in this box represent heart, wit, and strength. Me, Marcy, and Sasha have those qualities, and we are good friends. That’s why we were sent here.”

 

“So then, you’re looking for someone kind, someone smart, and someone brave?”

 

Anne nods.

 

“And…you know three people like that? Is one of them here?”

 

Anne rubs her chin before smiling. “Actually, all of them are here. Listen, I need you to do me a favor, and I’ll even pay you…”, she says.

 

“No need. If I can do something to help save your world, maybe my crimes will be forgiven…"

 

"Don't care. Just...go to Flour and Daughter's bakery, ask for Maddie, and...", Anne says, as she points to Sprig and Ivy's house. "...bring her here."

 

Wyatt nods before runing off in the direction of the bakery. Anne walks over to Sprig and Ivy’s house and opens the door. She sees Ivy and Sprig sitting on the floor, each holding one finger in the air.

 

Ivy: “Never have I ever…tried to drive a snail when I was underage.”

 

Sprig puts down his last finger.

 

Ivy: “I am victorious!”

 

Sprig: “All right. ‘Gee gee’, as Anne says. Don’t know what that means.”

 

Anne: “Sprig! Ivy!”

 

Sprig and Ivy turn their heads.

 

Ivy: “Hey, Anne! Wanna play Truth or Dare with us?”

 

Anne: “Maybe later. I have some good news…and potentially terrifying news…”

 

Sprig: “Uh…why not start with the good news?”

 

Anne: “Right, uh…someone found Carly. And I talked with her.”

 

Sprig’s eyes go wide. Ivy looks confused.

 

Ivy: “Who’s…Carly?”

 

Sprig: “Oh, well, there was this magical newt named Valeriana. She was the one who created the Calamity Box in the first place, and also responsible for charging one of the stones. Carly is her successor.”

 

Ivy: “Oh…and why were you trying to find her?”

 

Anne: “She was purposefully keeping me from leaving, and while she…was unable to tell me exactly why, I do have a theory…”

 

There’s a knock on the door. Anne opens it and sees Wyatt standing with Maddie.

 

Maddie: “Uh…hey. This guy told me he’d give me a magical artifact if I came over here.”

 

Sprig: “Um…wouldn’t you just want to hang out with us regardless?”

 

Maddie: “Why would I? You two never put in any effort into making arrangements with me.”

 

Sprig and Ivy look at each other.

 

Maddie: “That’s what I thought. Now, if you don’t mind, I’ll take that magical item…”

 

Wyatt: “Uh…sure! Um…let me go get it…in the meantime, why don’t you spend some time with-”

 

Maddie: “No. You can bring it to me at the bakery.”

 

Wyatt: “OK, maybe uh…Sprig and Ivy over there aren’t too friendly. But what about Anne? She’s cool, right?”

 

Maddie looks at Anne.

 

Maddie: “Fine. I’ll stay for no other reason than the fact that she’s here.”

 

Maddie sits down next to Sprig. Wyatt leaves.

 

Ivy: “Uh…what were you saying, Anne?”

 

Anne: “Uh…oh, right. I think Carly was keeping me here because there’s some ‘Core-level threat’ on Earth.”

 

Sprig, Maddie, and Ivy’s eyes go wide. 

 

Sprig: “There’s…no way…”

 

Wyatt comes back inside with a small book labeled “Charms”.

 

Wyatt: “Uh, hey, Maddie. Here’s a…book for you…”

 

Wyatt hands the book to Maddie.

 

Wyatt: “Uh…I can stay, right?”

 

Anne: “Uh, yeah. Actually, do you mind explaining how you helped me arrive at my conclusion?”

 

Wyatt: “Oh, right. So Anne’s from another world, sent by a magical box to stop something evil here. So it’s possible that there’s also three individuals who were also sent by a magical box to Earth to prevent its destruction.”

 

Maddie: “But…if that really is the case, won’t they handle it?”

 

Anne: “No. You guys remember the day I stopped the moon from crashing into Amphibia?”

 

Sprig: “Yeah?”

 

Anne: “When I died, I had a conversation with someone known as The Guardian. It…told me the point of the Calamity Stones was to see how mortals would handle infinite power. And it found that in every universe besides this one, they were always misused. I was the first one to not. Keeping that in mind, it seems that whoever is there will not succeed…and that’ll be the end of the Earth…”

 

Ivy: “So, why don’t you, Sasha, and Marcy go?”

 

Anne: “Valeriana made sure we couldn’t. But…I can send someone else.”

 

Sprig: “You should ask Grime. He’s a tough guy!"

 

Ivy: “General Yunan is good with her claws, too! And Andrias would be unstoppable!”

 

Maddie: “Guys, I think Anne wanted to transport us…”

 

Sprig & Ivy: “Huh?”

 

Anne: “She’s right. I did.”

 

Ivy: “But why? We can fight, but…we’re not the best…”

 

Anne: “I’m not looking for the best. I’m looking for ones with certain qualities.”

 

Ivy: “Certain…qualities?”

 

Wyatt: “That’s right! Anne explained it to me. She told me she didn’t have any combat experience before coming here. Rather, she was chosen because she was kind, Sasha was because she was fearless, and Marcy was because she was intelligent.”

 

Anne: “Correct. And I see those same three qualities in each of you. Maddie, you represent wit.”

 

Maddie: “M-me? But I’m not that smart…”

 

Anne: “Wit doesn’t just mean you have the brainpower. It also means you’re humble about it. You’ve taught yourself to use magic well, and even taught it to your sisters. You’ve also never once bragged about yourself, and you’ve always offered your help to people, even when they didn’t really treat you the way you should be treated.”

 

Maddie: “I…I had no idea…”

 

Anne: “And Ivy. You represent courage.”

 

Ivy: “I…I do?”

 

Anne: “Sure! You stood up for what you believed in, and didn’t let Sprig get in your way of wanting to adventure. Not to mention, you successfully completed a mission in which there was little to no guarantee of survival.”

 

Ivy: “Oh, yeah…I guess you’re right.”

 

Sprig: “Then that must mean…”

 

Anne: “Yes. You represent heart.”

 

Sprig: “Woah, hey. I’m not nice like you. I pulled a town-wide prank on Ivy a few days ago…”

 

Ivy: “Yeah, but…that was just because you didn’t really have a choice. Besides, you didn’t really let me feel the full effects of it.”

 

Anne: “And being kind isn’t something you do. It’s more of a state-of-mind. You’re always looking to do the right thing, even if nobody is there to appreciate or even notice.”

 

Sprig: “Well…I do try to live by this motto. That, if I can help someone, I have a moral obligation to, because someone else might not…”

 

Anne: “So, that’s it then. Three heroes with the three qualities, just like me, Sasha, and Marcy. All that’s left is for you to decide whether you want to go or not.”

 

The three of them look at each other. Then they all smile.

 

Maddie: “Why wouldn’t we?”

 

Anne: “I mean, there’s no telling what you’re up against…”

 

Ivy: “So? You came back to Amphibia the first time, even though there may have been no way for you to get back home. You did that, just to save us. And there wasn’t any price high enough you wouldn’t pay to make sure we were unharmed. It’s only fair we do the same for you.”

 

Sprig: “Don’t worry, Anne. We’ll vow to protect the Earth in your stead.”

 

Anne smiles before hugging the three of them.

 

Anne: “All right. Just…promise me you’ll get back home.”

 

Sprig nods. Anne takes the Calamity Box out of her bag, and hands it to Sprig. Sprig then walks outside with Maddie and Ivy towards the mountain. Wyatt makes eye contact with Anne.

 

“You know, for a criminal, you’re pretty smart. You figured all this out even though you were introduced to this today.”

 

Wyatt chuckles. “That’s because I graduated from Newtopia University with a philosophy degree”, he says.

 

“Huh? Then why are you a pickpocket…?”

 

“I have a lot of student debt and couldn’t get a career. Seemed like the easiest way to get rid of it.”

 

“Yeah, like, what’s up with that? Why is college so expensive?”

 


 

Sprig, Maddie, and Ivy enter Carly’s hut. Carly notices them.

 

Carly: “Are you three the ones Anne chose to go to Earth?”

 

Ivy: “That’s right. Can you fix the box?”

 

Carly sighs. “Give me it”, she says.

 

Sprig hands the Calamity Box to Carly. She pushes the “A” button on it, and puts the stone in her staff. She then puts it back into the box.

 

Carly: “It is done. But before I give it back, I must warn you of a few things. First, if only you three use this, you will absorb the power of these stones…” 

 

Maddie: “We know. Whatever our enemy is, we need to be at our full strength to stop it.”

 

Carly: “That brings me to my second point. Once the stones are depleted of their power, the only way to return here is to recharge them. Similar to here, there are temples on Earth where that can be done, and you will find people who know where they are. They are…also designed to test your levels of kindness, courage, and intelligence. Secondly, the power of the stones is infinite, but your ability to utilize it is not. As such, you need to be careful when you use it. Otherwise, you may hurt yourselves…or worse. Additionally, you will…need to be touching in order to not be separated through your journey across the universal barrier. Do you need me to repeat any of that?”

 

Sprig: “I think we’re good…I imagine you can’t tell us anything else?”

 

Carly: “I wish I could, but no. This is the extent to which I can help you. I apologize.”

 

Sprig: “No worries. We’ll handle it from here.”

 

Carly: “Very well. Here you are.”

 

Carly hands the box back to Sprig.

 

Ivy: “Uh…how are we supposed to hold hands and open the box?”

 

Maddie: “Sprig, you hold it like this. Ivy and I will hold your hands. Ivy, you open it from one side, and I’ll open it from the other.”

 

The three link hands.

 

Ivy: “On one. Three, two, one!”

 

Ivy and Maddie open the box. There’s a great flash of light.

Chapter 31: Adjustment

Summary:

Sprig, Ivy, and Maddie arrive on Earth.

Chapter Text

Sprig, Ivy, and Maddie are laying in a forest, when Sprig comes to and looks around.

 

Sprig: “Is this…Earth?”

 

Sprig rubs his chin, before pulling out his phone and noticing there’s a signal.

 

Sprig: “Yep. We’re definitely here.”

 

Sprig notices the Calamity Box’s stones are uncharged, and he picks it up. Maddie and Ivy come to. They both look around.

 

Ivy: “Huh. Was expecting it to be more…urban.”

 

Sprig: “Yeah, it is. But nature still has its place here. But if you’re looking for civilization…”

 

Sprig opens the maps application on his phone.

 

Sprig: “Follow me.”

 

Sprig starts walking and Ivy and Maddie follow. They get to a clearing, and Ivy and Maddie gasp at the view.

 

Sprig: “This…is Los Angeles. This is where Anne, Marcy, and Sasha live.”

 

Ivy: “Wow! This place makes Newtopia look like a village!”

 

Sprig: “Yeah. What’s more is there are cities like this all around the globe. Not all of them are this big, though.”

 

Maddie notices there are people walking nearby. Her eyes go wide and she grabs Sprig and Ivy and pulls them into a bush.

 

Ivy: “Maddie! What are you doing?”

 

Maddie: “I just realized that we’re just like Anne was when she first came to Amphibia. Everyone thought she was a monster. If people see us, they might think similarly…”

 

Ivy: “But…people have seen Sprig, Hop Pop, and Polly before. Plus, it’s not like these people don’t know what a frog is…”

 

Sprig: “No, Maddie’s got a point. Most people probably don’t know about me, so they’d probably freak out if they saw us. Plus, when the government found out about me and my family, they wanted to dissect us...but...th-then they were cool with us! Hang on, I need to make a call…”

 

Ivy: “Call?”

 

Sprig: “Oh, it’s like a way to communicate with anyone in the world, provided you have their phone number…”

 

Maddie: “What’s a phone number?”

 

Sprig: “It’s…you know what, never mind…”

 

Sprig scrolls through Anne’s contacts before finding one simply labeled “X”. He presses on the name and calls the number.

 

Mr. X: “Anne?”

 

Sprig: “Uh, not quite.”

 

Mr. X: “Look, I don’t know who you are, but you better let Anne go before I send a bunch of troops to your location!”

 

Sprig: “What? No, Anne’s not here…”

 

Mr. X: “She’s been missing for a while, you called me from her phone, and you expect me to believe that? That’s it…Jenny!”

 

Sprig: “Wait, X, it’s me, Sprig! Sprig Plantar!”

 

Mr. X: “Sprig? Wait a minute, you’re that…frog…”

 

Sprig: “Yeah. Look, there’s a lot to explain, but I need you to come get us…”

 

Mr. X: “Us? Who else is with you?”

 

Sprig: “My friends, Maddie and Ivy.”

 

Mr. X: “Are they…also frogs?”

 

Sprig: “Uh, yeah.”

 

Mr. X chuckles. “Well, all right. I’ll send a helicopter over”, he says.

 

Sprig: “Wait, but you don’t know where we are…”

 

Mr. X: “Yeah, I do. Your phone has its location turned on. We can track you using that.”

 

Mr. X hangs up.

 

Ivy: “What’s happening?”

 

Sprig: “Uh, not entirely sure. But an ally is coming to get us.”

 

Maddie: “In the meantime, do you mind explaining how phones work?”

 

Sprig: “Uh, I can try…”

 


 

Maddie: “Ohhh...so that’s how it works.”

 

A helicopter starts approaching, as Ivy takes a step back.

 

Ivy: “What kind of bird is that?!”

 

Sprig: “I don’t think that’s a bird. I think that’s a…what did he call it? Whatever, Mr. X should be in there…”

 

Maddie: “That’s the guy who’s gonna help us, right?”

 

Sprig nods as the helicopter lands nearby. Sprig checks the coast is clear.

 

Sprig: “Come on!”

 

Sprig, Ivy, and Maddie jump out of the bush and start running towards the helicopter. The door slides open, with Mr. X sitting in one of the seats.

 

Mr. X: “Get in!”

 

Sprig, Maddie, and Ivy climb inside, and sit down in the seat opposite Mr. X.

 

Mr. X: “Put on your seatbelts!”

 

Maddie and Ivy look confused.

 

Sprig: “Here, let me help!”

 

Sprig gets up, and straps Maddie in. He does the same for Ivy. He then sits back down and straps himself in.

 

Ivy: “What are these for?!”

 

Mr. X: “Safety!”

 

Ivy: “Safety!? From what!?”

 

The helicopter takes off. 

 

Mr. X: “If that door slides open while we’re in the air, and you fall out, it’s gonna be a long way down! That seatbelt is the only thing keeping you secure!”

 

Maddie: “What happens if this thing crashes!? Will this save us!?”

 

Mr. X: “No! So try not to think about that!”

 


 

The helicopter lands on top of a government building. Mr. X, Sprig, Ivy, and Maddie jump out, with Ivy trembling as she does.

 

Ivy: “Well, one thing’s for sure. I never want to go flying again.”

 

Mr. X: “Follow me. You have some…explaining to do.”

 

Mr. X starts walking downstairs, while Sprig, Ivy, and Maddie follow. Mr. X sits down at a desk with one seat at one side, and three at the other. He ushers for Sprig, Maddie, and Ivy to sit down.

 

Mr. X: “I think introductions are in order. My name is Mr. X.”

 

Ivy: “My name is Ivy.”

 

Maddie: “And I’m Maddie.”

 

Mr. X: “Nice to meet you two. I work here to deal with special cases.”

 

Ivy: “You mean like us?”

 

Mr. X: “Well, yes it’s not often we see talking amphibians here. At first, I thought that anything not of this world surely was something that needed to be studied, without regard for the well-being of said creature. But…I realized that maybe they weren’t so different from us.”

 

Sprig: “Anne taught you that, didn’t she?”

 

Mr. X chuckles. “Yes, she did. Speaking of which, you said she wasn’t here. Initially, I thought she had been kidnapped, hence why I thought that when you called from her phone, I thought that you were her captor, as well as the one for Sasha Waybright and Marcy Wu. While that…obviously isn’t the case, it doesn’t explain where they are…”, he says.

 

Sprig: “They’re in Amphibia, which is where we’re from. And they’re safe, but…they couldn’t come here.”

 

Mr. X: “Why’s that?”

 

Maddie: “That’s…a little complicated…”

 

Mr. X: “I’ll try to follow along.”

 

Maddie: “Sprig, show him the box.”

 

Sprig slides the Calamity Box across the desk. Mr. X picks it up.

 

Mr. X: “What…what is this?”

 

Ivy: “That’s called the Calamity Box. It’s…how we got here.”

 

Mr. X: “It…transported you here?”

 

Mr. X opens the box.

 

Mr. X: “How does it work?”

 

Sprig: “Normally, you just open it, and it can send you to Amphibia if you’re on Earth, or vice versa. It’s powered by the three stones there.”

 

Mr. X: “Then…why is nothing happening?”

 

Maddie: “The stones have lost their power because we’ve absorbed them.”

 

“You…", Mr. X says, as he puts the box down. "...what?”

 

Sprig: “X, do you remember when Anne powered the portal in that lab?”

 

Mr. X: “Yeah…I didn’t understand how she was able to do that…”

 

Sprig: “That was because she had absorbed the power of one of those stones.”

 

Mr. X: “Ah, I see…so the power can be inside an individual or the stones, and if they’re not in the box, then the box is just a paper weight…but…surely there must be a way to return the power to the stones, right?”

 

Ivy: “Correct. There should be three temples where the stones can be charged here, because there were three in Amphibia. But one of the temples there was…more of an individual. As such, she had the choice of whether to recharge one of the stones…”

 

Maddie: “And whether the box works or not is an ‘all or nothing’ deal. Either all the stones are charged, or the box won’t work.”

 

Mr. X: “...but…clearly, you’re here…which means you got the stones charged…”

 

Sprig: “Yes, but…the person who agreed to charge one of them set up the condition that she would not if Anne, Sasha, or Marcy were going.”

 

Mr. X: “That explains why they aren’t here…but…why make such a restriction?”

 

Ivy: “That’s something we don’t have an exact answer to. But…all you need to know is that the same villain that invaded this world from ours…there might be someone or something like that here.”

 

Sprig: “Which is why we’re here, and why we purposefully used the box such that we could have its power. You know how much of a threat it was, and we don’t want anyone like that destroying this world, or any other.”

 

Mr. X: “...if what you’re claiming is true, we seem to have a few things to take care of. But first and foremost, is finding this villain…can you tell me anything about what the one from Amphibia was like?”

 

Maddie: “Marcy told me about it. She was…actually kinda…connected to it…”

 

Mr. X: “Connected?”

 

Maddie: “Yes. It called itself The Core, and it was an amalgamation of Amphibia’s greatest minds. It chose Marcy to join her. It…used her body as a host, and it was able to use her intelligence.”

 

Mr. X: “That sounds like quite the formidable enemy. Still, I can’t fathom anything like that here…”

 

Maddie: “Well, it did have one quality that nothing else in Amphibia did. They had their otherworldly creatures known as the Mossmen and Shadowfish, which don’t exactly show signs of aging. They were able to replicate that for The Core.”

 

Mr. X: “Are you saying it was, in a sense, immortal?”

 

Maddie: “Yes. Do you know of any animals like that here?”

 

“Yes...", Mr. X says, as he pulls out his picture and searches on the Internet for an image, which he then shows to Sprig, Maddie, and Ivy. "...this one."

 

Ivy: “It’s…kinda cute! What do you call this?”

 

Mr. X: “We call it a lobster. I took a marine biology class in college, and they explained how it can theoretically live forever, if one was in a situation with no threats to it. I won't bore you with the details of how, though.”

 

Ivy: “So then…it’s possible our villain is just one of these? Seems easy enough to stop…”

 

Maddie: “I don’t think so. If our enemy was just a few feet big, then Carly wouldn’t have made such a big deal for the girls to not come here.”

 

Sprig: “So maybe it’s just…a bigger one? Or one that’s smarter?”

 

Maddie: “Hard to say…”

 

Mr. X puts his phone down. “Well, I think talking about it further won’t do us any good. For now, let’s just assume our villain is a giant mastermind lobster. We can begin our search for it in the ocean", he says.

 

Ivy: “Is the ocean big?”

 

“It covers 70% of our planet...", Mr. X says, before sighing. "...and, sadly, we’ve explored very little of it…”

 

Sprig: “What? You guys have flying machines and cars that can go several dozens of miles per hour, but you can’t even explore the ocean?”

 

Mr. X: “I’m sure that’s easy to say if you can breathe underwater or have webbed feet. But you know humans aren’t like that. We need to bring air with us, and have flippers.”

 

Ivy: “Can you do that?”

 

Mr. X: “Yes. But then comes the issue of the pressure. Eventually you just get to a point where it feels like your body is being crushed. And our technology can’t really get down there without a number of issues…”

 

Ivy: “But then, how are you going to find it?”

 

Mr. X: “Well, I can pull a few strings and get some money invested into this project. I’m sure my superiors will be willing to listen, considering the severity of the situation.”

 

Sprig: “That’s good. We can help, too, if they’re underwater!”

 

Mr. X: “I appreciate the offer, but I’m afraid that wouldn’t be wise…”

 

Ivy: “What? Why?”

 

“That ‘Core’ was something we had never seen before. We were really only able to stop it because of the girls. Similarly, you need to stay out of harm’s way, until we find our villain. Besides..." Mr. X says, before smirking. "...you didn’t really enjoy your stay here that much, did you, Sprig?”

 

Sprig: “Well, considering you kept trying to capture us…”

 

Mr. X: “Exactly. Take this time to see what Los Angeles has to offer. We won’t bother you, and I’ll make sure nobody else will, either.”

 

Ivy: “Ooh! I wanna see all the tea shops!”

 

Maddie: “Meh, Marcy told me there’s no real magic here. But I guess if we have to wait, I’m down for whatever.”

 

Mr. X: “It’s settled then. I’ll call you once we find something.”

 

Maddie and Ivy get up from their seats.

 

Ivy: “Sprig, you know this place better than us. Lead the way!”

 

Sprig looks at his phone.

 

Sprig: “All right, follow me.”

 

Sprig gets up, and they walk out of the building. While walking down the street, Sprig continually looks at his phone, Ivy is taking in all the sights, Maddie just has her hands in her pockets. People give them strange looks, but nobody says anything. 

 

Ivy: “Yeesh, I’m uncomfortable with all the looking…I’m not a monster or anything…”

 

Maddie: “Now you know how I feel.”

 


 

Maddie, Ivy, and Sprig are walking down Lee Street.

 

Ivy: “Hey, Sprig, I just realized you never told us where we were going…”

 

Sprig: “You’ll see. We’re here.”

 

Sprig looks up from his phone, and turns to the right.

 

Ivy: “Uh…whose house is this…?”

 

Sprig: “It’s Anne’s.”

 

Ivy: “Oh.”

 

“I’m sure Anne’s parents would want to see Anne right now more than anything. I can’t really make that happen for them, but…", Sprig says, before shrugging. "...they at least deserve to know what’s happening. That goes for the Waybrights and Wus as well.”

 

Sprig walks up to the front door and knocks. A few seconds later, Mrs. Boonchuy opens up. He looks down at Sprig.

 

Mr. Boonchuy: “Sprig?”

 

Sprig: “Uh…hey. I was probably the last person you expected at your front door, huh?”

 

Mr. Boonchuy gives Sprig a hug.

 

Sprig: “It’s…nice to see you, too…”

 

Mrs. Boonchuy: “Honey, who’s at the door?”

 

Mrs. Boonchuy notices Sprig. She joins in on the hug.

 

Mrs. Boonchuy: “Did you like the Mooncakes?”

 

Sprig: “I loved them. So did Polly and Hop Pop.”

 

Mr. Boonchuy and Mrs. Boonchuy break away from the hug while smiling.

 

Ivy: “Uh…hi.”

 

Maddie waves.

 

Mr. Boonchuy: “Are these your friends? Or is one of them your girlfriend?”

 

Sprig blushes. “N-nope, we’re all just friends here. But, uh…I came here to tell you about what’s going on.”

 

Mrs. Boonchuy grabs Sprig by the shoulders.

 

Mrs. Boonchuy: “Please, just tell me…is my daughter unharmed?”

 

Sprig: “Yeah, she’s fine. So are Marcy and Sasha. But…they’re not here. And they won’t be able to come here for a while.”

 

Mr. Boonchuy: “Well…come inside. You can tell us more.”

 

Sprig, Ivy, and Maddie walk inside the Boonchuys’ house.

Chapter 32: Packer Tracker

Summary:

Sprig, Ivy, and Maddie look for the person who sent Anne the Calamity Box.

Chapter Text

Anne's parents, Sprig, and Ivy are sitting in the chairs in the family room of the Boonchuy residence.

 

Sprig: “...and…yeah. That about sums everything up.”

 

Mrs. Boonchuy: “So the government is looking for this…lobster, and are also looking for these temples so you can recharge the stones?”

 

Sprig: “Yeah. But first we have to take care of the…lobster. And until we can figure out where it is, even if we find the temples, we need to stay here…”

 

Ivy: “Not that that’s a bad thing! Look at that giant phone!”

 

Ivy points to the television. Sprig chuckles.

 

Sprig: “That’s not a phone, Ivy. That’s a television.”

 

Ivy: “Television…?”

 

Sprig: “Yeah…it can play shows like Suspicion Island, but on a bigger screen. Can’t call people with it, though.”

 

Sprig gets up and turns on the television. It starts playing commercials.

 

Ivy: “Wow! So cool!”

 

Ivy sits on the floor in front of the television. 

 

Mr. Boonchuy: “Finding those temples might be difficult. There’s quite a lot of them here…”

 

Sprig: “Is there any way we can narrow it down?”

 

Mrs. Boonchuy: “Hmm, there might be one way…I kept a letter that Anne received when she got the Calamity Box. I have-”

 

There is an explosion in the kitchen. Sprig runs into the kitchen to see Maddie’s face is covered with soot, along with the rest of the kitchen. She coughs.

 

Maddie: “Note to self, do not try to make a potion with those red berries with the seeds on the outside…”

 

Sprig: “Maddie! What did you do!?”

 

Maddie: “Oh, I was just experimenting.”

 

Mrs. Boonchuy and Mr. Boonchuy run in.

 

Mr. Boonchuy: “Oh dear…I’ll get this place cleaned up…”

 

Maddie: “Nah, don’t worry. I got this.”

 

Maddie twirls her wand. The kitchen looks brand new. Mr. Boonchuy eyes light up.

 

Mr. Boonchuy: “Where do I get one of those?!”

 

Maddie chuckles. “So, you’re interested in learning magic?”, she asks.

 

Mr. Boonchuy: “Yes! That’d make my life so much easier!”

 

Maddie: “Well, too bad. Humans can't use it.”

 

Mr. Boonchuy: "Aww...way to get my hopes up..."

 

Sprig: “Uh...anyways, Mrs. B, what were you saying earlier?”

 

Mrs. Boonchuy: “Huh? Oh, right! The person who sent Anne the Calamity Box might also know about those temples.”

 

Sprig: “Great! So where can I find him?”

 

Mrs. Boonchuy: “Uh…I don’t know. The person who left it did so anonymously.”

 

Sprig: “Do we have any way of finding out who he is?”

 

Mr. Boonchuy: “Well, it might take a bit, but we do have a security camera outside. If we can rewind the footage from around the time when it was dropped off, you might be able to discover that. Follow me.”

 

Mr. Boonchuy starts walking upstairs, and Sprig follows. Mr. Boonchuy enters his office, and sits down at his computer. On it, he opens a folder called “Front Porch Footage”. There are tons of video files, each for every day in the past 7 years.

 

Mr. Boonchuy: “We don’t know the exact time it was dropped off, but it must have been…this day. If you watch the entirety of this, you should find him.”

 

Sprig: “Cool! I’ll get started.”

 

Mr. Boonchuy opens the video file and it starts to play. He gets up from his chair so Sprig can sit there. After several minutes of fast forwarding, he notices a man walks up to the front door, pulls out the Calamity Box from his backpack, then puts it on the porch. He then turns around and leaves.

 

Sprig: “It’s him!”

 

Mr. Boonchuy: “Yeah…but it’s kinda hard to tell who he is with his hat and baggy clothing…”

 

Sprig: “Maybe…there’s another way we can ascertain his identity? Let’s try slowing down…”

 

Sprig replays the footage, but sets the speed to half. He then notices a piece of paper in his backpack. 

 

Sprig: “Hey, what’s that?”

 

Sprig points to the piece of paper. Mr. Boonchuy zooms in and sees it’s a plane ticket.

 

Mr. Boonchuy: “That’s a plane ticket! Let’s see, he took a Jetpurple flight from Long Beach Airport to Los Angeles International Airport, his seat number was 33C, and he left at 8:45 PM…”

 

Sprig: “And since we know he arrived at…let’s see, 8:30 PM, then it must have been the next day. Is that enough to determine who he is?”

 

Mr. Boonchuy: “You would have to go to the airport and ask. I’m not really sure if they’ll give you such information, but that’s probably your best shot.’

 

Sprig: “That’s enough for me!”

 

Sprig writes down the information on a piece of paper, folds it, then stuffs it into his pocket. He then puts on a backpack, and puts the Calamity Box inside. He then runs downstairs. He sees Ivy is watching a commercial for a soda called Dr. Chili, and Maddie is using her wand to set off tiny sparks, while Mrs. Boonchuy watches.

 

Sprig: “Ivy, Maddie. We have something to do!”

 

Ivy continues watching. Sprig turns off the television.

 

Ivy: “No! Why’d you turn off the big phone?”

 

Sprig: “Look, you said you would follow me, right? We’re going somewhere, and you’re coming with. Maddie, that goes for you, too.”

 

Maddie: “Eh, whatever. I was getting a little stir-crazy anyway. Let’s go.”

 

Ivy: “Wait, I don’t wanna go outside…people are gonna give us funny looks again…”

 

Maddie: “I fail to see how that affects anything…”

 

Ivy: “Well, of course you don’t, everyone sees you as being weird normally. But some of us have standards for how we present ourselves. So we should wear disguises!”

 

Maddie: “Sounds like you’re just self-conscious…”

 

Ivy’s mouth drops open. Sprig steps in between the two of them.

 

Sprig: “Maddie, can we talk for a moment?”

 

Sprig grabs Maddie’s hand and walks with her into the dining room.

 

Sprig: “Maddie, let’s just do what Ivy wants…”

 

Maddie: “Oh, I see. Because she’s your girlfriend, you just listen to her without question.”

 

Sprig blushes. "Sh-she’s not my girlfriend! Look, we’re supposed to work together…”

 

Maddie: “So then why does she get a say in this matter but I don’t?”

 

Sprig looks to the side. “Tell you what, if you wear a disguise, then I’ll do you a favor", he says.

 

Maddie smirks. “All right. You have to take me out on a date", she says.

 

Sprig: “What? Why?”

 

Maddie: “Ivy’s not your girlfriend, right? So there shouldn’t be an issue.”

 

Sprig sighs. “OK, fine. But this is just as friends, nothing more”, he says.

 

The two leave the dining room.

 

Maddie: “Hey, Ivy. Sorry about my earlier comment. I’ve had a change of heart and will wear a disguise.”

 

Ivy: “It’s fine. Let’s go to…uh…where are we going, Sprig?”

 

Sprig: “Don’t worry about it.”

 


 

Sprig, Ivy, and Maddie are walking down the street. They’re all wearing face masks. Sprig is wearing a jacket with the hood up, Ivy is wearing a dress that covers her feet, and Maddie is wearing a long sleeve shirt with tall jeans, with sunglasses and a beanie.

 

Ivy: “See? This isn’t so bad.”

 

Maddie: “Besides the fact that we look ridiculous…these don’t really work that well. You don’t think people will notice that Sprig has pink skin? Or that I have blue skin? Or that you have y-”

 

Sprig: “We’re here.”

 

The three look around to see a humongous building. Ivy notices there are planes taking off and landing.

 

Ivy: “Are those birds? Or…wait, what did you call them? Helicopters?”

 

Sprig: “Those are planes.”

 

Ivy: “We’re not…going in one of them, right? I’m still scared from the last time we were in the air…”

 

Sprig: “Um, we might have to…but maybe there’s some way we won’t have to…let’s just go inside…”

 

Sprig, Ivy, and Maddie walk inside. Sprig looks around and notices there are people claiming their luggage, hugging, and getting tickets. Sprig stands in line, and Ivy and Maddie stand next to him. After a few minutes, they reach the front.

 

“Oh, hello! Did you get separated from your parents? Did you want me to call for them?”

 

Sprig: “What? No…I just wanted some information…”

 

“Information? What kind?”

 

Sprig: “Uh…can you potentially tell us who bought a certain ticket on a Jetpurple flight around five years ago?”

 

“I…do have such records available. However, that’s classified, and I can’t just give it to you without authorization from my boss…”

 

Sprig: “Can you ask him, then?”

 

“Yes…but I do need to ask you why you need this…”

 

Sprig: “It’s uh…well…uh…”

 

Ivy: “We have reason to believe that individual is a criminal!”

 

Sprig and Maddie look at Ivy in surprise.

 

“A…criminal?! All right, I’ll ask…can I get your name, please?”

 

Sprig: “Sprig. Sprig Plantar.’

 

“Gotcha. I’ll leave a message for him. In the meantime, you can go sit over there…”

 

The ticket agent points over to some chairs. Sprig, Ivy, and Maddie walk over and sit down.

 

Maddie: “Gotta admit, Ivy, that was some quick thinking there.”

 

Ivy: “Yeah…wouldn’t say it was good thinking though…I’m just glad she didn’t ask what kind of crime we think he committed.”

 

The ticket agent starts waving to them. Sprig, Ivy, and Maddie walk over.

 

“My boss seemed…eager to talk to you...", the ticket agent says, before pointing to a room. "...he’s in that office over there. The pin code is 4568. Don’t tell anyone, and don’t let anyone follow you.”

 

Sprig, Ivy, and Maddie nod. They walk over, and Sprig inputs the code. He hears a lock open, and he pulls open the door. He sees a man in a suit sitting in front of a desk. On the other end is a bench. Sprig closes, the door, and the three of them sit down on the bench.

 

“Good afternoon, you three. My name is Mr. Morado, and I’m the owner for this branch of Jetpurple here”, he says.

 

Sprig: “Oh, uh…it’s nice to meet you, as well.

 

Mr. Morado: “You don’t have to keep those masks on, by the way. I know you’re frogs.”

 

Maddie and Ivy gasp.

 

Sprig: “How…how do you know that?”

 

Mr. Morado laughs. “Relax, this airport is government owned. We heard from someone named Mr. X there were some frogs from another world visiting, and we got your names, too. Once I heard yours from my employee, I realized that it was probably something important”, he says.

 

Sprig, Ivy, and Maddie breathe a sigh of relief. Then they pull their masks down.

 

Mr. Morado: “Anyways, my employee said something about you believing we had a criminal on one of our previous flights…but you probably just said that to get in here, right?”

 

Sprig, Ivy, and Maddie nod.

 

Mr. Morado: “What did you need to know, then?”

 

Sprig: “There was someone who…left a gift for one of our friends. They did so anonymously, but we have a clue as to who they are. Can you look them up based on this information?”

 

Sprig takes the note out of his pocket, and hands it to Mr. Morado. He then spends less than a minute typing on his computer before finding a match.

 

Mr. Morado: “Gregory Conrad. He lives at 4867 Sunfield Avenue.”

 

Sprig: “That’s him! Probably…”

 

Mr. Morado: “Are you trying to speak with him?”

 

Sprig nods.

 

Mr. Morado: “If you want, I can get you a plane ride for free over there…”

 

Ivy: “No thanks! We’ll get over there some other way, right? It’s probably walking distance…”

 

Mr. Morado: “Uh…not really…it’d take you about 7 and a half hours walking continuously to get there…and that’s not even roundtrip…”

 

Ivy: “Well, there’s…other modes of transportation, right? Ones that don’t involve going into the air?”

 

Mr. Morado: “I suppose you could go by train…but the railway system here is privately owned, and I don’t think they’ll let you ride for free…or even be fine with you being frogs…”

 

Ivy hugs herself.

 

Mr. Morado: “Are you…afraid of going on planes?”

 

Ivy nods.

 

Mr. Morado: “Ah, don’t worry about it. Our planes are almost guaranteed to land safely!”

 

Ivy: “And what happens in the event they don’t?”

 

Mr. Morado: “Uh…w-well…in a worst-case scenario, the plane crashes, and nobody survives…”

 

Ivy: “Yeah, see. That’s why I’m not going by plane!”

 

Sprig: “Ivy, hey. We need to talk to that guy. I know it’s scary, but…if we don’t find the temples, then we can’t get back home.”

 

Ivy sighs. “All right, I’ll go…”, she says.

 

Mr. Morado: “Excellent! I can get you first class seats.”

 

Maddie: “First class?”

 

Mr. Morado: “That means they’re the best ones. Normally, those are for the wealthy and famous, but we have a flight in 15 minutes with three seats open. I’ll just reserve them so nobody else can get them…”

 

Mr. Morado presses a button on his keyboard.

 

Mr. Morado: “There you go! I’ll have someone help you get on board.”

 

Sprig, Ivy and Maddie leave. 

 


 

Sprig, Ivy, and Maddie board the plane. 

 

Maddie: “Woah! Those seats look really comfortable!”

 

Maddie runs and jumps into one of the seats near the window. Sprig sits in the middle seat, and Ivy sits next to him.

 

Ivy: “Sprig, can I have your phone? I kinda need something to distract me…”

 

Sprig pulls out his phone and hands it to Ivy. She begins playing Trigonometry Rush. Many other passengers board the plane. 

 

“All right, folks. We’re about to take off. Please put down your tray table, fasten your seatbelts, and turn off all electronic devices…”

 

Ivy continues using the phone. Sprig notices, and he takes it from her.

 

Ivy: “Sprig! I need that…”

 

Sprig: “Sorry, Ivy. They said to turn off all electronic devices. This is one.”

 

Sprig puts the phone in his pocket.

 

Pilot: “Prepare for takeoff.”

 

The plane starts turning around.

 

Ivy: “This isn’t so bad…”

 

The plane starts accelerating. Ivy shuts her eyes. Sprig notices, and he holds her hand, as the plane takes off.

 


 

“All right, folks, we have reached 10000 feet. You can now use your electronic devices.”

 

Ivy opens her eyes. She looks out the window, and sees clouds. She turns to Sprig.

 

Ivy: “Sprig, phone.”

 

Sprig hands Ivy the phone back. She resumes playing Trigonometry Rush.

 

“Yo, Sprig. Didn’t Anne say Ivy was supposed to be the brave one?” 

 

“Yeah. Why, do you not think so?”

 

“I mean, look at her, if it wasn’t for your phone and you sitting by her side, I’m sure she’d be losing it…”

 

“Why are you being so mean to her?"

 

“I’m not being mean. I’m just saying how things are. If you don’t like it, that’s your problem…”

 

Sprig rubs his chin before turning to Ivy, taking her phone, and handing it to Maddie.

 

Ivy: “Hey, give that back!”

 

Sprig: “Ivy, this is for your own good…”

 

Ivy: “My own good? What are you talking about?”

 

Sprig: “Ivy, do you know what it means to be bold?”

 

Ivy: “It…means you don’t have any fears…right?”

 

Sprig: “But that can’t be, right? Anne chose you as the representation of courage.”

 

Ivy: “Then…maybe she made a mistake…maybe…I’m a fraud…”

 

Ivy starts breathing heavily.

 

Sprig: “Ivy, being plucky doesn’t mean you have any fears. It just means you don’t let them get the better of you.”

 

Ivy: “Isn’t that what I’m doing right now? I mean, I’m trying to do everything I can to take my mind off being here…”

 

Sprig: “But what’s the harm in being present? If you…face your fears head on, doesn’t that mean nothing can really stop you?”

 

Ivy ponders to herself.

 

Ivy: “Hey, yeah! You’re right! I’m no longer letting my fear paralyze me…I’ll show it what happens when it messes with Ivy!”

 

“Told you she was brave”, Sprig whispers to Maddie.

 

Maddie: “Fine. Just take your phone back.”

 

Maddie hands the phone back to Sprig, who puts it in his pocket.

 


 

Sprig, Ivy, and Maddie are leaving Long Beach Airport.

 

Sprig: “Let’s see, that guy’s house shouldn’t be too far from here. Let’s go.”

 

Sprig starts walking, while Maddie and Ivy follow far behind.

 

Maddie: “Hey, uh…Ivy? I just wanted to apologize to you…”

 

Ivy: “Hmm? For what?”

 

Maddie: “That stuff you were saying about you being a fraud and Anne making a mistake, I thought that as well. But…I couldn’t really do what you did today. I…I have fears, too. And oftentimes, I won’t even try something I’m afraid…”

 

Ivy: “What? But you were so cool during the Wartwood Resistance…”

 

Maddie: “Well, yeah. What I’m afraid of never came up there.”

 

Ivy: “What…what are you afraid of?”

 

Maddie: “Bees. Or anything like them.”

 

Ivy: “You’re scared of…like, wasps and hornets?”

 

Maddie: “Yeah. They have this stunning ability. And if I can’t move, I can’t use magic, and I’m kinda just at their mercy. They’re also good at dodging spells and stuff, so I can’t really fight back…that’s why I never try to make any potions with honey.”

 

Sprig: “We’re here.”

 

Sprig turns to a house and walks towards the front door and knocks. Maddie and Ivy catch up as a man wearing skinny jeans and a polo opens the door. He looks down.

 

Sprig: “Uh, hey…are you Gregory Conrad?”

 

Gregory: “That’s me. What’s up?”

 

Sprig: “Do you recall giving a magical box to someone by the name of Anne Boonchuy?”

 

Gregory looks at them again before grinning.

 

Gregory: “Wow! Aliens really do exist!”

 

Ivy: “What? We’re not aliens…we’re frogs. Frogs are on Earth…”

 

Maddie: “Technically speaking, he’s right. We’re not from this world.”

 

Gregory: “That newt really was telling the truth!”

 

Sprig: “Newt? You mean Valeriana?”

 

Gregory: “Yeah! She told me that box could transport me to another world, but she told me not to use it…but I guess I got what I wanted! Can I get a picture with you, without your masks?”

 

Ivy: “Sure! Just uh…tell us what you know.”

 

Gregory: “Epic!”

 

Ivy, Maddie, and Sprig pull down their masks, as Gregory takes a selfie with them.

 

Maddie: “Now, uh…do you know anything about where the stones in the box can be recharged?”

 

Gregory: “What? Oh, you might wanna ask the person who made that…”

 

Ivy: “Isn’t that you?”

 

Gregory: “Nah, someone gave that to me as a birthday gift.”

 

Ivy: “Where can we find him?”

 

Gregory: “Uh, well, he was my neighbor…but then he moved away…you’d have to ask who lives there now where he went, because he didn’t tell me for some reason…”

 

Ivy groans. Sprig starts walking to the next house over, while Maddie and Ivy follow. Sprig knocks on the door. An elderly woman wearing a polka dot blouse and a long skirt opens up. 

 

“Oh, hello dearies! What can I help you with?”

 

Ivy: “Tell us where the previous resident of this house went!”

 

“My, you kids nowadays have such fire in them! He told me he moved to the next house over…”

 

Maddie: “Great, thanks for your help.”

 

Sprig, Ivy, and Maddie walk over to the next house. They knock on the door. A man dressed in a white T-shirt and skinny jeans opens up. He looks down, then sighs.

 

“Come inside…”

 

Ivy, Maddie, and Sprig enter the house to see it is adorned with crystals and old books. The man sits in a chair, and Ivy, Sprig, and Maddie sit on the couch.

 

“So you’re from another world, I’m guessing?”

 

Maddie: “What was your first clue?”

 

Ivy: “Pretty sure that was a rhetorical question…”

 

“It was. Anyways, my name is Patrick. Nice to meet you."

 

Sprig: “Oh, I’m Sprig. These are my friends, Ivy and Maddie.”

 

Ivy: “Pleasure to meet you.”

 

Maddie: “I like your home.”

 

Patrick: “Thanks, anyways, you have the Calamity Box, right?"

 

Sprig, Ivy, and Maddie nod.

 

Patrick: "Well, I was the one who made that. Some newt appeared in my dreams five years ago and gave me some instructions on how to, but then she told me I couldn't use it…that I had to send it to someone named Anne, and if I didn’t, there’d be consequences. I really wanted to, so in order to stop myself, I just gave it to one of my neighbors, since it was his birthday. The next night, the newt came back and told me I had to hide, and not tell anyone where I was going. She didn’t really state any ramifications this time, so I didn’t really try. That lady asked where I was going when I sold the house, so I told her. I didn’t really think anyone would ask.”

 

Sprig: “Well, that box did end up in Anne’s hands…she used it to travel to our world…”

 

Patrick: “Is she still there?”

 

Maddie: “Yeah, it’s complicated. But we had a question for you. Do you know how to recharge the stones?”

 

Patrick: “Recharge?”

 

Sprig pulls out the Calamity Box.

 

Sprig: “You see how the stones have lost their color?”

 

Patrick: “...I see. So the power can be taken away from them…thankfully, I do have records of temples where they could be recharged. I’ve never really confirmed it, but they did have an emblem on the front door in the shape of those gems, and each one was color-coded. One blue, one pink, and one green.”

 

Ivy: “That has to be them, then.”

 

Patrick gets up and pulls out a piece of paper with six numbers on them, two on three lines. He hands it to Sprig.

 

Sprig: “Uh…what are these?”

 

Patrick: “Those are X and Y coordinates. If you plug those into a maps application, it can get you directions to the temples.”

 

Ivy: “Thanks!”

 

Patrick: “No problem. Uh…can I ask you something?”

 

Ivy: “What is it?”

 

Patrick: “Uh, your world…can I come visit it?”

 

Maddie: “I don’t think you wanna, dude. There’s giant bugs and killer birds.”

 

Ivy chuckles nervously.“I think what Maddie is trying to say is that we’d love to have you there, after what you’ve done for us", she says.

 

Patrick: “I appreciate it. Still, I need some way to contact you…”

 

Sprig: “Oh! I have a phone. You can just call or text.”

 

Sprig hands his phone to Patrick. He then takes note of the number, and adds it to his contacts list in his phone.

 

Sprig: “Well, we better get going…”

 

Ivy: “Wait, are we going back by plane…?”

 

Maddie: “Yeah, you’re not scared of it, right?”

 

Ivy starts sweating. “Of course not! But, you know…once you’ve been on one plane, you’ve been on all of them, right? So why don’t we go by train?”, she says.

 

Patrick: “There’s a train station not too far from here. Where were you going?”

 

Sprig: “Los Angeles.”

 

Patrick: “Yeah, it’ll take you there.”

 

Sprig: “I can pay for it, too! I stole one of Mr. Boonchuy’s credit cards!”

 

Sprig checks his phone, and finds the train station on the maps application.

 

Sprig: “Follow me!”

 

Sprig leaves Patrick’s house, and Ivy and Maddie follow. 

 


 

Maddie, Ivy, and Sprig get to the train station. Sprig uses the ticket machine to buy three tickets, then hop aboard the train. They sit down. A few minutes later, a lady with a refreshment cart walks over. Ivy notices it has cans of Dr. Chili on it.

 

Ivy: “Excuse me? Can I get three cans of Dr. Chili?”

 

Maddie: “Three? Why three?”

 

Ivy: “One for each of us!”

 

Maddie: “Have you had one?”

 

Ivy: “No, but the commercial said they were good!”

 

“Three cans will cost you six dollars.”

 

Sprig: “Do you take credit?”

 

“Yes.”

 

Sprig hands the credit card to the attendant, who swipes it. She then hands them each a can.

 

Ivy: “I’d like to propose a toast! To friendship!”

 

The three of them clink their cans together, then open them. Ivy starts to drink hers. Maddie and Sprig downs theirs, and Maddie lets out a burp.

 

Ivy: “Maddie! That’s so unwomanly!”

 

Maddie: “Aw, come on. I do this around my dad all the time. He thinks it’s funny.”

 

Ivy: “Well my mom wouldn’t allow such a thing!”

 

Maddie: “She’s not here, though, is she? You can’t tell me you haven’t wanted to try…”

 

Ivy then looks at her can, gulps the rest, then lets out a belch. She then covers her mouth with her hands.

 

Maddie: “Good one!”

 

Ivy starts laughing.

 

Ivy: “I don’t know why, but that felt good!”

 

Maddie: “It’s because you’re doing your own thing, instead of what someone else wants you to do.”

 

Ivy: “I ought to try to do that more!”

Chapter 33: Spraddie

Summary:

Sprig goes on a date with Maddie.

Chapter Text

Ivy, Maddie, and Sprig are watching Suspicion Island on the phone on the train when the intercom comes on.

 

"Next stop is Los Angeles."

 

Sprig grabs the phone and puts it away. “That’s us", he says.

 

Sprig, Ivy, and Maddie get up from their seats and head towards the train doors. They open and they get off. Sprig checks his phone.

 

Sprig: “Let’s see, to get back to the Boonchuy’s we just need to go…this way.”

 

Sprig starts walking. Ivy and Maddie follow. Ivy yawns.

 

Ivy: “What a day, huh? We got here, had a word with that…X guy, then we met the Boonchuys, got a little familiar with how things work around here, and traveled on a plane and train…I’m just about ready to hit the hay…”

 

Sprig: “Yeah, same here. It’ll be about 10 minutes before we get home, though…I don’t know how sleeping arrangements are gonna work…”

 

Maddie: “Meh, I’m sure the Boonchuys have figured that out.”

 

Ivy starts to nod off.

 

Ivy: “Uh…how complicated are the directions back?”

 

Sprig: “Not at all. If you just keep walking straight, you’ll get there.”

 

Ivy: “Cool…I’m gonna run then to keep myself awake…”

 

Ivy starts running.

 

Maddie: “That’s convenient.”

 

Sprig: “What do you mean?”

 

Maddie: “Now you can tell me about your plans for our date tomorrow…”

 

Sprig: “Oh…I almost forgot…”

 

Maddie chuckles. “Like you could forget someone like me”, she says.

 

Sprig: “Uh, let’s see…what did you want to do?”

 

Maddie: “They’re your plans. Dad told me the guy is typically supposed to make them.”

 

Sprig: “But…I don’t know what you like to do…I don’t wanna plan to do something with you that you’re not gonna enjoy…”

 

Maddie: “Fine. Uh…well you know I like magic and baking, right? Is there anything like that here?”

 

Sprig: “...all right. I got it. We’ll…uh…get some breakfast at 348K Bakery, then we’ll go to a magic show.”

 

Maddie: “There are magic users here?”

 

Sprig: “Not really. Anne told me magic doesn’t exist here. They just use something called ‘sleight of hand’.”

 

Maddie: “Sleight of hand?”

 

Sprig: “Yeah. Basically, they’re able to move things with their hands faster than their eyes can process. Since people don’t really like not…having an explanation for things they can’t understand, they just attribute it to the supernatural. Here, Anne taught me this one…”

 

Sprig pulls out a pencil from his bag and hands it to Maddie.

 

Sprig: “If you were to try to bend that pencil, it’d break, right?”

 

Maddie: “Yeah?”

 

Sprig: “Well, watch this…”

 

Sprig takes the pencil back, and holds it by the end. He then starts wiggling it up and down.

 

Maddie: “What…how are you doing that?”

 

Sprig: “It’s an illusion. Your eyes are playing a trick on you.”

 

Maddie: “Woah…”

 

Sprig: “Yeah. There’s many tricks like this, and most of them are way cooler. Anne didn’t understand a lot of them.”

 

Maddie: “Sounds fun. See, you’re not so bad at planning.”

 

Sprig chuckles. Then he notices they’ve arrived at the Boonchuys’ house. The two walk inside, to see that Ivy is sleeping on the couch. Maddie sees there’s a note on the table. She reads it, then hands it to Sprig.

 

Dear Maddie, Ivy, and Sprig,

 

We have three sleeping bags, blankets, and pillows in the closet. Please try not to get any slime on them. If you do, just have Maddie use a spell to clean it up :)

 

Mrs. Boonchuy

 

Maddie and Ivy go over to the closet and find the sleeping bags, blankets, and pillows. They set them on the ground, and go to bed.

 

Sprig, Ivy, and Maddie wake up.

 

Ivy: “I had no idea you could sleep on a couch this well! How are you guys feeling…wait, why are you on the ground?”

 

Sprig: “Because there was no room on the couch…”

 

Ivy: “Oops! Sorry, I was just very tired…”

 

Maddie: “It’s probably because you ran here last night…”

 

Ivy: “Oh, right. Well, you guys got a good night’s rest, right?”

 

Sprig: “I’ve had worse…”

 

Ivy: “Cool! So what are we doing today?”

 

Maddie: “Uh, well I don’t know about you, but Sprig and I are going out for a d-”

 

Sprig’s eyes go wide as he covers Maddie’s mouth with his hand.

 

Sprig: “...donut! Yeah, I know you wanted to see what baked goods are on Earth, so I promised Maddie I would get one for her.”

 

Ivy: “What’s a…donut? Is that like a new type of almond?”

 

Sprig: “No, it’s a…how do I describe it, it’s like a mini cake, but it’s hollow in the center.”

 

Ivy: “Ooh! Can I come with you?”

 

Sprig: “No!”

 

Ivy is taken aback.

 

Sprig: “Uh, because…I had something I think you should watch!”

 

Sprig turns on the television with the remote and finds the Cynthia Coven series.

 

Sprig: “This is uh…a movie series! There’s only seven episodes, although I heard they’re making a spinoff, but each of them is a few hours long. It’s based on a best-selling book series!”

 

Ivy: “Wow! Reading is boring, but watching television is fun! Wait, why don’t we watch it together, then?”

 

Sprig: “Uh, because…I’ve already seen them all with Anne when I was here last time. And Maddie read the series, right?”

 

Maddie: “Yeah, and movies don’t really interest me.”

 

Ivy: “Your loss!”

 

Sprig presses play on Cynthia Coven and the Sorcerer's Step Ladder, as Ivy begins watching.

 

Sprig: “I’ll bring you a donut once we get back!”

 

Maddie starts to leave. Sprig stops her.

 

Sprig: “Hey, you’re not wearing a disguise…”

 

Maddie: “Yeah. You know how I feel about those.”

 

Sprig sighs. He and Maddie walk outside and close the door.

 

Maddie: “All right, here’s the deal. You have to do whatever I say on our date.”

 

Sprig: “Whatever you say?”

 

Maddie: “Relax, I won’t be unreasonable with my requests. Now, hold my hand.”

 

Sprig looks at Maddie’s hand, then holds it sheepishly. Maddie chuckles.

 

Maddie: “It’s gonna be a fun day today.”

 

Sprig and Maddie are walking side-by-side, holding hands, until they arrive at the 348K Bakery. They walk inside and stand in line. A few minutes later, they arrive at the front.

 

“Hello! Oh, you two make such a cute couple!”

 

Sprig blushes. “Uh, actually…we’re just friends", he says.

 

“Oh! Sorry for making assumptions…what can I get you two today?”

 

Sprig looks at the menu.

 

Sprig: “”Uh…the whole wheat mushroom…what kind of mushrooms are in there? They’re not ones that can mind control, right?”

 

The cashier looks to the side. “Um…I don’t know where you’re from, but we don’t have mind controlling fungi…or…maybe we do…but these ones are just portobellos, which…uh…don’t do that", she says.

 

Sprig: “Oh, then I’ll have one of those.”

 

“And for you, miss?”

 

Maddie: “I’ll have the walnut raisin multigrain, please.”

 

Maddie then heads over to a table and sits down.

 

Sprig: “Can we get whatever you have that’s closest to a donut?”

 

“Uh sure. As far as donuts, we have something called a Choco Bun, which is popular here. Is that OK?”

 

Sprig nods.

 

“Are you paying cash or card?”

 

Sprig hands the cashier Mr. Boonchuy’s credit card. She swipes it, then hands it back. She gives Sprig the receipt.

 

“We’ll call your name when your order is ready.”

 

Sprig: “Thanks…uh…quick question…why are you so chill with us being frogs?”

 

“Oh…the government sent a message to everyone in the US about you through our phones.”

 

Sprig looks at his phone. He sees an alert on it which reads as follows:

 

ATTENTION: There are three frogs from another world visiting. They mean no harm to you, so please do not bother them.

 

Sprig: “Ohhh…that explains a lot.”

 

Sprig goes over to the table that Maddie is sitting at and opens up Bonbon Bash on his phone. Maddie huffs.

 

“Put that away. Don’t you know it’s rude not to give your full attention to someone you’re hanging out with?”

 

“But I’m just about to get to the next level!”

 

“I told you you’d have to do whatever I said, and you agreed. Or do you want me to tell Ivy what you were really doing today?”

 

Sprig’s eyes go wide.

 

“You seemed to not want her to know the truth. It’d be a shame if she knew…”

 

Sprig puts his phone away. They sit in silence for 10 seconds. Maddie clears her throat.

 

“Uh…boy, they sure take a long time here, huh?”

 

“This place is busy. And it’s only been two minutes.”

 

Sprig starts twiddling his thumbs.

 

“Hey, have you been on a date with Ivy before?”

 

“Uh, once, maybe twice…Why?”

 

“Was it ever this uncomfortable?”

 

“I mean, at first, it was. Both times were for some other motive than just being with her.”

 

“But you find her easy to talk to otherwise, right?”

 

Sprig nods.

 

“So why am I so different? Ivy and I are both your friends, but you seem to not want to talk to me. There’s not even any reason for you being here other than the fact that I asked.”

 

“Uh…”

 

“Order for Boonchuy!”, the cashier says.

 

“Oh! I’ll go get the food!”

 

Maddie frowns as Sprig hops from his chair and grabs the tray. He brings it back to the table.

 

“Bone apple teeth!”

 

“What?”

 

“Uh, that’s something I’ve heard people say here before a meal.”

 

The two begin eating their food in silence. After Maddie finishes her food, Sprig gets up with the Choco Bun in one hand and holds his other hand out to Maddie.

 

“What are you doing?”

 

“You wanted us to hold hands, right?”

 

“I…changed my mind. You don’t have to anymore.”

 

Maddie gets up from her seat and leaves the bakery. Sprig follows after her.

 

“Uh, wait. I didn’t tell you where the magic show was…”

 

Maddie stops, but she doesn’t face Sprig.

 

“Don’t wanna go.”

 

“What? But you seemed so interested in what I had to show you yesterday…”

 

“It’s not the show that’s the problem. It’s you.”

 

Sprig frowns. “That’s not very nice…”, he says.

 

Maddie balls her hands into fists. “Doesn’t feel very good, does it?”, she says.

 

Sprig’s expression softens. “I…I’m sorry...”

 

Maddie turns around. “I don’t want your sympathy. I just wanna know why. I’ve never been anything but kind to you. I didn’t overreact when you broke up with me, and I even got rid of that curse for you. And still, you treat me like some third wheel…”, she says.

 

“It’s just…I don’t know…you left a bad first impression on me. I know you’re not really that type of person, but those are important…”

 

“Anne. Wally told us she was a monster when she first came here. And you became best friends with her.”

 

“I mean, it took a while. There was one time where we shared a room with each other, and we disagreed on just about everything. But we found a common problem, which was to get rid of the burrow bugs that were in her room. And we became better friends as a result of it..." Sprig says, before sighing. "Look, I…know I haven’t been the most friendly of people with you, and that’s on me. I can’t really make up for how I’ve treated you before, but…I do want to try to make things right with you. That’s why I wanted to do the things you wanted, even if it wasn’t something I really wanted…”

 

“I appreciate that. But honestly, you could have just asked me to watch paint dry and I still would have been accepted. It shouldn’t really matter what you do with your friends, just so long as you’re having fun.”

 

Sprig holds out his hand.

 

“Let’s just…start over then. Friends?”

 

Maddie grabs Sprig’s hand.

 

“Friends.”

 

Maddie tries to let go, but Sprig doesn’t.

 

“Uh, you can let go. I told you you didn’t have to hold my hand.”

 

Sprig smiles. “But I want to", he says.

 

Maddie smiles as Sprig pulls out his phone, and they start walking hand in hand to the magic show.

 

Ivy finishes watching the Sorcerer’s Step Ladder.

 

"That was so cool! Sprig said there was a spinoff series. I hope it stars that Hudvig character!", Ivy says, before her stomach rumbles. “Mmm, kinda hungry. I wonder where Sprig is? I feel like he should have been back with my…donut by now…”

 

Ivy walks outside to see Maddie and Sprig holding hands and laughing. Her jaw drops. Sprig notices, and she slams the door. Maddie stops laughing.

 

“Uh…what just happened?”

 

“Oh no…she must have thought I went on a date with you, and lied to her about it…I have to go explain!”

 

Sprig tries to run towards the door, but Maddie holds him back.

 

“Don’t you know anything about girls? If they’re mad at someone, they’re the last person they want to talk to. Let me handle this.”

 

Maddie walks up the front door and opens it. She sees Ivy curled into a ball with her hands over her eyes.

 

“Go away, Sprig!”

 

“Uh, it’s me.”

 

“Oh...well, I don’t really wanna talk to you right now that much, either…”

 

“Do you ever really want to see me?”

 

Ivy takes her hands off her eyes.

 

“Look, remember yesterday when I didn’t want to wear a disguise? And then I had that sudden change of heart?”

 

“Yeah?”

 

“Well, I didn’t. That’s why I didn’t wear one today.”

 

“But then…why did you?”

 

“Sprig asked me to. And I…asked him to take me out on a date in exchange.”

 

“Oh, well…I’m glad you and he have started something new…”

 

“The only thing ‘new’ is our actual friendship. I…kinda asked him because I wanted to force him to hang out with me, because you guys never do unless you need a favor from me. I thought he would see me more as a friend if we did, but…well, you can’t make people like you.”

 

“It’s not that we don’t like you…”

 

“I know. But it certainly feels that way. But Sprig could tell he did wrong by me today, and he tried to make things right. I don’t know many people who would for someone they’re not on the best terms with…”

 

Ivy smiles. “You know, after I came back from my journey, he was a little cold to me at first. I thought he didn’t want anything to do with me anymore, but he still wanted to patch things up with me, even after all the mean things I said to him", she says.

 

“Yeah…Sprig’s a rare one nowadays, isn’t he?”

 

Ivy chuckles before her expression softens. “Did he…just say you were going as friends?”, she says.

 

“Yeah, he did. And I’m not really for anything beyond that if you have your eyes set on him.”

 

"OK, maybe I overreacted a little…now I can see why Anne thought Sprig and I were boyfriend and girlfriend…maybe I shouldn’t have been so harsh on her…”

 

Sprig: “Um, hey.”

 

Ivy looks to the door to see Sprig standing there.

 

“They…uh, didn’t have donuts...", Sprig says, as he walks over with the box, and hands it to her. "...so I got you this instead.”

 

Sprig hands the box to Ivy. She opens it.

 

Sprig: “I know it’s not really what you asked for. If you want, I can go get a real don-”

 

Ivy tackles Sprig in a hug.

 

Ivy: “Shut up, dude. It’s fine.”

 

Sprig chuckles.

 

Maddie: “Uh, hey, Ivy. Did you want to go with us to the magic show?”

 

Ivy: “But…this is your date, right?”

 

Maddie: “Yeah. But…I think it'd be more fun if you were with us.”

 

Ivy smiles. “Sure, I’d love to go", she says.

 

Ivy grabs the Choco Bun, and follows Sprig and Maddie outside.

 

Ivy: “Uh, hey. I haven’t been too nice to you either. So, uh…”

 

Ivy splits the Choco Bun in two.

 

Ivy: “Did you want some?”

 

Maddie takes one half, and Ivy takes the other.

 

Sprig: “Hey! Don’t I get any? I paid for that!”

 

Maddie: “Actually, Mr. Boonchuy did, even if he doesn’t know.”

 

Maddie and Ivy giggle.

Chapter 34: Power Within

Summary:

Maddie, Ivy, and Sprig learn to activate their Calamity powers.

Chapter Text

Maddie, Sprig and Ivy wake up in their sleeping bags.

 

Ivy: “That Christina Angle person sure was good at magic, huh?”

 

Maddie: “Oh, right. Magic users don’t really exist here. She’s just good at creating illusions.”

 

Sprig: “Maddie!”

 

Maddie: “What? I'm just telling her the truth. Besides, that means you don’t really need to be anyone special to learn it. If I did, then I’d be a master sorcerer on both Earth and Amphibia...and I could pass off my knowledge to you.”

 

Ivy: “Oh. Maybe I’ll just watch the rest of Cynthia Coven today, then. I only watched the first movie.”

 

Sprig: “Uh, shouldn’t we do something productive today?”

 

Ivy: “I mean, we don't know where the temples are. And we haven’t gotten word from X about where the lobster is. We can’t really do anything until then, so let’s just enjoy what Earth has to offer.”

 

“I don’t know, there has to be something we can do…", Sprig says, as he scans the room, before noticing the Calamity Box on the side table. “Oh! Why don’t we figure out how to activate our Calamity forms?”

 

Maddie: “Better idea. Why don’t you figure that out, and then you tell us if you find something?”

 

Sprig: “Come on! Anne had difficulty mastering hers.”

 

Ivy: “Sprig, we know we need to. But surely you know something about how they work, right?”

 

Sprig: “Well, Anne was able to if she was emotional, or if she really needed to...”

 

Maddie chuckles. “Maybe once Ivy watches the last Cynthia Coven movie, she can activate hers…”, she says.

 

“What? Why? Is it super sad? Does someone get killed?! No...” Ivy says, as she grabs Maddie by the shirt. “PLEASE TELL ME IT’S NOT HUDVIG!”

 

Sprig: “OK, this isn’t helping. You guys wanna do your own thing, fine. But I’m doing mine.”

 

Sprig turns on the television for Ivy, and puts Cynthia Coven and the Auditorium of Mysteries on. She then lets go of Maddie as she sits in front of it. Sprig then pulls out his phone and opens up a Blootoob series on magic tricks, and hands it to Maddie. He then goes upstairs into Anne’s room, and closes the door.

 

“Let’s see…if I think about how much I want to save the Earth, then maybe I can activate my powers.”

 

Sprig closes his eyes and concentrates. He then strains his entire body, but nothing happens.

 

“Welp, that didn’t work. I can’t really put myself in any real danger, because I might get hurt…maybe there’s something else I can do…”

 

Sprig hops onto the computer and uses the Wing search engine to look up “how to unleash your power”. A video on meditation comes up.

 

“Meditation? I don’t know what that is, but I guess it’s worth a shot…”

 

Sprig clicks on the video and watches it.

 

“Ah, I see. The problem is I’m having thoughts. I need to clear my mind.”

 

Sprig sits down on the floor and closes his eyes. Anything he thinks of, he imagines getting rid of it. Soon, the only thing that’s in his mind is the sound of his heartbeat and breath. He then opens his eyes, and looks at his hands. They start to glow blue.

 

“Woah!”

 

His hands fade back to pink.

 

“It was only for a second, but that definitely was something! Let me try again…”

 

Sprig repeats as he did before. He then looks at his hands, and focuses on keeping that energy at a steady level. Soon, his entire body glows blue, as Maddie opens the door.

 

"Sprig, where do the Boonchuys keep their...", Maddie says, before seeing Sprig. "...what the frog!?”

 

Sprig loses his concentration and his body stops glowing. He then collapses to the floor.

 

“Sprig! Are you OK?”

 

Sprig groans. “Yeah, I’m fine. Just a little lightheaded…wait, but you saw that, right? I activated my powers!”, he says.

 

“Yeah…how did you do that?”

 

Sprig sits up.

 

"Through something called ‘meditation’. I can teach you and Ivy!”

 

Sprig stands up and runs downstairs. He pauses the television using the remote.

 

Sprig: “Ivy! I activated my powers!”

 

Ivy: “Yeah, yeah. Likely story. Can you put this back on?”

 

Maddie: “He’s not lying. I saw him.”

 

Ivy: “Wait, really? You were upstairs for like ten minutes!”

 

Sprig: “What can I say? I’m a quick learner.”

 

Ivy: “Sprig, it took you a week to learn how to fold swan napkins…and you’re not even that good at it…”

 

Sprig: “Hey, I’m not the best with my hands. Regardless, I can teach you and Maddie.”

 

Ivy: “Fine, I’ll listen. Just put this back on when we’re done. I wanna find out more about that house goblin!”

 


 

Sprig is sitting on the floor. Maddie and Ivy are sitting across from him.

 

Sprig: “So, just close your eyes, and follow my instructions.”

 

Maddie and Ivy close their eyes.

 

Sprig: “Right now, there’s a bunch of thoughts swirling in your heads. Like where the spoons are, or what’s gonna happen next in that movie. I want you to imagine those thoughts have a physical form, then just take them, and throw them in the trash. If you keep doing that, you’ll eventually have no thoughts, and all you will hear is your breath and heartbeat. Once you’re done, open your eyes.”

 

Maddie and Ivy keep their eyes shut for about ten more seconds. Then they open them within a second of each other.

 

Sprig: “Now, repeat after me.”

 

Sprig focuses on his right hand. It starts to glow blue. Maddie and Ivy do the same, with their turning green and pink respectively. Sprig then makes eye contact with the two. He then returns the power back to his body. Ivy and Maddie do the same.

 

Ivy: “That was kinda lame.”

 

Sprig: “The point of this is to get familiar with how your powers work, and to keep yourself grounded. I tried unleashing it all at once, and I almost fainted.”

 

Ivy: “But if we just stick to learning like this, it’s gonna take forever!”

 

Sprig: “It will take a while, yes. But Newtopia wasn’t built in a day…”

 

“Forget that! The best way to learn to swim is to jump into the deep end! You either float, or you sink! And I’m not sinking today!” Ivy says, as she strains herself and starts to glow pink. “LET’S GO!”

 

Ivy runs outside into the street. Sprig and Maddie follow her. There’s a car coming her way. 

 

Maddie: “Ivy, look out!”

 

Ivy instead runs towards the car, stops it, lifts it up, then throws it several dozen feet back onto the road, which lands on its wheels. The driver opens her eyes, before continuing to drive.

 

Ivy: “I AM UNSTOPPABLE!”

 

Another car starts to approach Ivy. The driver is looking at his phone. Ivy’s pink glow starts to fade, as her legs give way.

 

Ivy: “Huh? What’s happening? Maybe Sprig was right…I shouldn’t overdo it. I…can’t really move though…Oh well, I’m sure that guy will stop.”

 

Sprig notices the car isn’t slowing down. 

 

Sprig: “IVY!

 

Sprig glows blue and he starts flying towards Ivy and grabs her by the hand just as the car misses her by a few feet. They end up on someone else’s lawn.

 

Ivy: “Sprig, I’m sorry…I should have listened to you…”

 

Ivy then faints. Sprig then loses consciousness shortly after.

 


 

Ivy and Sprig wake up. They’re both slumped back against the couch. Sprig looks at Ivy, and hugs her. 

 

Sprig: “Ivy! You’re OK!”

 

Ivy: “Yeah. Thanks to you, actually.”

 

Maddie: “Well, now we know two ways of activating our powers. Either clearing our minds or trying to protect someone close to us.”

 

Sprig and Ivy see Maddie is sitting in a chair.

 

Maddie: “I brought you guys back here after you passed out. You’re welcome.”

 

Sprig: “How long have we been out?”

 

Maddie: “Meh, like 10 minutes.”

 

Ivy: “That’s not too long, I guess…”

 

Maddie: “Actually, it is. If we’re in a fight, mere seconds can be the difference between winning and losing. We need to be patient so we can last longer, and maybe not be out for as long. Which means we’ll need to stick to Sprig’s routine.”

 

Sprig: “Well, yes. But I think there should be a balance. We may have no choice but to go all out in a battle.”

 

Maddie sighs. “I suppose you’re right. But we should really only do that under the most dire of circumstances”, she says. 

 

Ivy: “But for now, we can stick to your approach, Sprig.”

 

Sprig smiles. “Glad you’re on board", he says.

 

Maddie: “Hey guys, wanna see something cool?”

 

Maddie pulls out a spoon. She then covers the handle with her hands, and presses it against the table.

 

Ivy: “Why are you bending that spoon? That’s gonna be hard to fix…”

 

Maddie: “Actually, it’s quite easy.”

 

Maddie then flicks her hands, and the spoon appears to have reverted back to normal.

 

Ivy: “What!? How did you repair that so quickly? I didn’t even see you do anything…”

 

Maddie chuckles. “That’s for me to know, and you to figure out”, she says.

Chapter 35: Fur Real?

Summary:

Sprig, Maddie, and Ivy meet some people from another world.

Chapter Text

Sprig wakes up to the sound of his phone ringing. He groggily gets out of his sleeping bag and picks it up, to see that it’s Mr. X calling. He presses the answer button without hesitation, then puts the phone to his ear.

 

Sprig: “Hello?”

 

Mr. X: “Hey, Sprig. You three adjusting to Earth all right?”

 

Sprig: “Well, I’ve been here before. But…”

 

Sprig looks at Ivy and Maddie in their sleeping bags. They smile at him.

 

Sprig: “Yeah, we’re doing fine.”

 

Mr. X: “Good, good! Listen, I wanted to talk to you three about something.”

 

Sprig: “Is this about the lobster?”

 

Mr. X: “I wish. We’ve been making steady progress, but we’ve found nothing yet. But there is something concerning…something that may prove your theory was right.”

 

Sprig: “My theory?”

 

Mr. X: “You said something about how Amphibia might be similar to Earth, in the sense that three individuals not of this world will come to save it.”

 

Sprig: “Did you…find otherworldly creatures? Besides us?”

 

Mr. X: “Not exactly. But we did get some information from someone named Terri, who we know is an expert at portals. She said there was an ‘energy wave’ in the Mojave National Preserve today, and it was something similar to the energy waves when others have either left or arrived here by portal.”

 

Sprig: “If...that really is true, then we might be in danger. They’re clueless about what’s happening. They might find where the temples are, get the stones recharged, and then the…lobster can take and use it to destroy the world…and maybe countless others…”

 

Mr. X: “That’s what we fear as well. That being said, they’re not our enemies. But they likely will not trust humans so quickly. They might make a connection with you, as you are in a situation similar to them. Plus, you know plenty more about what’s going on than we do. That’s why we’re asking you to go and find them.”

 

Sprig: “Understood.”

 

Mr. X: “Good. We have a government car outside the Boonchuy residence. The driver there will take you to your destination. However, there is a slight problem…”

 

Sprig: “What is it?”

 

Mr. X: “Even though we have a precise location of the energy wave, that was hours ago. Whoever they are may have fled somewhere else, and we have no way to track them. In other words, you’ll need to locate them, and I’m not really sure how you would go about doing that…”

 

Sprig: “We’ll figure something out.”

 

Mr. X chuckles. “Thought you might say something like that. In any case, best of luck in your search. If you find anything, please call”, he says.

 

Mr. X hangs up.

 

Ivy: “What’s going on?”

 

Sprig: “It’s…complicated. I’ll explain on the car ride.”

 

Maddie: “We get a car ride? Sweet. I’ve wanted to go in one since we got here.”

 

Sprig: “Yeah…I need to do something real quick before we leave…”

 

Sprig goes upstairs and takes a picture of the Calamity Box. He then hides it in the closet. 

 

“We can’t have anyone recharging our Calamity Box. We need to keep our powers…”

 

Sprig heads back downstairs. He then opens the front door with Maddie and Ivy. They see a man in a suit and sunglasses waving. The three hop into the car, and Ivy closes the door. The driver then gets back in, and they drive towards the Mojave National Preserve. 

 


 

Ivy: “I see…so there’s some aliens here? Just like us?”

 

Sprig nods.

 

Maddie: “Well, one thing’s for sure. We need to…have them feel they can trust us. If we just give them all the information, they might freak out.”

 

Sprig: “Right. We need to be like how we were for Anne when she first came to Amphibia…oh, wait…we thought she was a beast initially…what I meant to say is we need to be patient and understanding with them.”

 

The driver pulls over onto the shoulder and stops the car.

 

“All right. This is where that energy was detected. I’ll be staying here.”

 

Sprig, Ivy, and Maddie get out of the car.

 

Ivy: “Uh…how do we start looking? They could have gone anywhere…”

 

Maddie: “Well, it might be best to think of what you might do if you were in their situation.”

 

Sprig: “That’s right. Let’s see, if I was taken to a strange world with nothing but two of my friends, what might I do first?”

 

Ivy: “You’d probably look for basic necessities, like shelter, food, and water.”

 

Maddie: “And considering this place is rather barren, water and food would be hard to find…”

 

Sprig: “But that also means if we do find it, there’s a good chance we’ll find them nearby!"

 

Ivy: “And if there’s something like a cave close by, they will likely be inside it.”

 

Sprig: “Sounds like a plan. We’re looking for an oasis, a food source, and a cave…let’s go!”

 

Sprig, Ivy, and Maddie start looking around. After several hours of searching, they see a 3 foot tall gray rodent with an orange polo collecting apricots off a tree. The three of them hide behind a bush.

 

Ivy: “That was easier than I imagined…”

 

Maddie: “What do we do now? I mean, we need to talk to…it…but I feel like if we approach it, it’s just gonna run away…it also seems like it might be a fast runner.”

 

Sprig: “I got an idea.”

 

Sprig starts shaking the bush. The gray rodent notices and then puts the apricots on the ground.

 

“Who…who’s there? I should warn you, I have sharp teeth!”, she says.

 

Sprig: “Uh, listen. This is gonna sound really strange, but we’re…just like you…”

 

“W-we? How…how many of you are there?”

 

Sprig: “There’s…three of us…but we don’t mean you any harm. I promise.”

 

The gray rodent slowly approaches the bush. She looks over and sees Sprig, Ivy, and Maddie. None of them say anything for a moments seconds.

 

“Um…I don’t know what you mean about you being like me…we don’t look anything alike…”

 

Maddie: “He meant more so that we’re also from another world.”

 

“Another world? You mean…this isn’t Rodencia?”

 

Ivy: “No, this place is called Earth. We’re from a place called Amphibia.”

 

“Oh…I was hoping this was just a bad dream…”

 

Sprig: “Look, I know you’re scared. But…we’re here to help. We have valuable information we can give you. All we’re asking for is your cooperation.”

 

“I...I don’t know if that’s such a good idea…Linda has been on edge ever since we’ve gotten here…if she sees that I’ve brought three strangers, she might flip out…”

 

Ivy: “Linda? That’s one of the two other people you came with, right?”

 

“Yeah, that’s right. Wait, how did you know there were three of us?”

 

Maddie: “Like he said, we’re familiar with this situation.”

 

“Well, uh…I guess if we get some knowhow as to what’s happening, maybe she’ll understand…I’m Betty, by the way."

 

Sprig: “I’m Sprig.”

 

Ivy: “My name’s Ivy.”

 

Maddie: “You can call me Maddie.”

 

Betty smiles. “It’s nice to meet you three. Um, follow me…”, she says.

 

Betty goes over and picks up the apricots. She then starts walking towards a cavern.

 

Betty: “Um, what kind of animals are you?”

 

Ivy: “We’re frogs. We, uh, have long tongues, slimy skin, and we can swim well…”

 

Betty: “Ah, I’m a rat. I mentioned earlier that my teeth are sharp, but we also have good night vision…I’m also a bit of a brainiac.”

 

Maddie: “Night vision, huh? That’s pretty cool.”

 

Betty: “Thanks! Um, I mentioned Linda earlier. She’s a porcupine. She can be a little overprotective…She also has these spiny quills in her back, and she’s not afraid to use them on people she finds annoying. But underneath all that is a person who’s just looking out for the people she cares about…”

 

Ivy: “And the other?”

 

Betty: “Phoebe. She’s a chinchilla. She’s super kind, and she’s a good climber as well. She’s also got good hearing.”

 

Maddie: “Yeah, that all checks out.”

 

Betty: “Huh? What checks out?”

 

Maddie: “We’ll explain later.”

 

Betty leads Sprig, Ivy, and Maddie into the cave. They see Linda, a 3 foot tall porcupine with a white tank top and jean shorts, and Phoebe, a 3 foot tall chinchilla with a pink T-shirt sitting down and eating apples. Betty clears her throat. Linda and Phoebe turn their heads. Linda jumps up.

 

Linda: “Betty! What did I tell you about being followed?”

 

Betty: “Look, these people can help us…”

 

Linda: “Likely story! They’re gonna steal our food, or tell those weird monsters about where we are!”

 

Betty: “Linda, please…”

 

Linda: “No! We’re in some strange world. We can’t trust anyone besides ourselves!”

 

Phoebe: “Linda, you want to get back home, right?”

 

Linda: “Of course. Why?”

 

Phoebe: “Well, we’re…not gonna do that if we just sit around here…”

 

Linda: “So, what? We’re just supposed to take the word of three strangers?”

 

Phoebe: “I know there’s some..risk involved. If you don’t like what they have to say, then you can just…spike them. But let’s just give them a chance, OK?”

 

Linda sits back down with a huff.

 

Linda: “Fine. I'll listen."

 

Betty: “Um, so this pink guy is Sprig. The one next to him is Ivy. And that one with the blue skin is Maddie. They’re uh…frogs. They have lengthy tongues, gooey skin, and they’re adept at swimming…did I get that right?”

 

Ivy: “Yeah. You have a good memory.”

 

Betty smiles.

 

Linda: “All right, all right. Now that introductions are out of the way, why don’t you tell us what you know?”

 

Betty: “Well, um…they told me this is another world called Earth. And they’re similar to us because they’re from a world called Amphibia.”

 

Phoebe: “We got here because we accidentally opened a strange box…did the same happen to you?”

 

Ivy: “Almost. We opened ours on purpose while knowing about it.”

 

Linda: “Why the flying squirrel would you do that?”

 

Sprig: “Uh, well…let me explain. About five years ago, there were three people from this world who were like you…they opened a strange box, and they got stuck in Amphibia. As it turned out, there was some…villain in our world, who wanted to use the box in order to travel to other worlds, and conquer them…but, those humans were successfully able to stop it. But it came at the cost of them either having to stay, or not being able to return…and while they did choose to come back here, someone from this world made another box to send them back…and we used that same box to travel here.”

 

Betty: “But then…why did you come here?”

 

Ivy: “We had reason to believe there’s some villain here, who is also bent on world domination. And seeing you three here more or less confirms that.”

 

Linda: “So, what? We just got some bad guy who needs a few teeth missing?”

 

Ivy: “Well, we…don’t really know much about it. All of our theories about it are mere conjecture…”

 

Phoebe: “Can you at least tell what you think it’s like?”

 

Sprig pulls out his phone.

 

Linda: “Hey! What’s that? Don’t think you can pull a fast one on us!”

 

Sprig: “Relax, this isn’t a weapon.”

 

Sprig pulls up a picture of a lobster. He then hands it to Betty, who looks at it.

 

Betty: “What…what is this?”

 

Sprig: “That’s a lobster. It’s-”

 

Betty: “You call this strange device a lobster?”

 

Sprig: “Oh…no, that’s a phone. That’s just a picture of a lobster.”

 

Betty: “Oh…so you think this…lobster is a villain? What makes it so formidable?”

 

Betty hands the phone over to Phoebe.

 

Sprig: “By the way, don’t try breaking that to release the lobster. That won’t work.”

 

Linda puts down a rock she was holding.

 

Sprig: “Anyways, that lobster is a…special animal. Given the right conditions, it could live forever…”

 

Phoebe hands the phone to Linda.

 

Betty: “What are…the right conditions?”

 

Maddie: “They’re not really anything that could happen in nature. That lobster is only a few inches big, and it doesn’t really have a lot of ways to defend itself, save for its pincers.”

 

Phoebe: “Then why do you think it’s the villain?”

 

Sprig: “Two reasons, really. The first is that much of this planet has already been explored, but the ocean is an exception to that. Lobsters live in the ocean, so if there was one that was…smarter or stronger than the others…people wouldn’t really know. Secondly, the villain in Amphibia was based on…some otherworldly creatures that were immortal as well.”

 

Betty: “I see. Knowing nothing else, that does make it a safe assumption…”

 

Linda laughs.

 

Ivy: “Uh…what’s so funny?”

 

Linda: “You guys are scared of this?”

 

Ivy: “You should be. You’re just like the humans in our story, and they had to stop something very powerful. It’d be foolish to think this is different.”

 

Linda: “Yeah, OK…but you said this thing lives in the ocean, right? Is that close to here?”

 

Ivy: “I mean, not really…”

 

Linda: “Then there really isn’t anything to worry about, right? You can get the box fixed, we can get home, and everyone’s happy.”

 

Ivy: “But what about the people here? The threat wouldn’t have been stopped…”

 

Linda: “And why should we care? It’s not like this planet has really done anything for us…”

 

Ivy balls her hands into fists. “You! There are innocent people in danger, and all you care about is yourself!”, she says.

 

Linda: “Wrong. I care about my friends, too. And we don’t want to put ourselves in any sort of endangerment if we don’t need to. And this definitely qualifies as ‘not our problem’”.

 

Ivy: “And I thought Sasha was bad…but at least she redeemed herself. There’s no hope for this walking cactus…”

 

Linda: “What did you just call me?”

 

Ivy: “I called you a walking cactus.”

 

Linda stands up and gets in Ivy’s face.

 

Linda: “You better shut your mouth before I turn you into a pincushion.”

 

Sprig: “Ivy, can we talk for a moment?”

 

Sprig drags Ivy into a corner of the cave. Maddie follows them. Betty goes and sits with Linda and Phoebe.

 

Ivy: “I can’t believe her!”

 

Sprig: “Ivy, please calm down…”

 

Ivy: “Why should I?”

 

Sprig: “She wants you to get riled up. If you do, she wins.”

 

Ivy sighs. “I was just hoping we could make friends with them. But, I don’t know. I don’t like Linda. And I think she feels the same way about me…”, she says.

 

Sprig: “Yeah, me too. But…I think we should help them get home…”

 

Ivy: “What? But that’s a huge risk! What if the…lobster gets his pincers on the charged box?”

 

Sprig: “Linda did have a point. We’re not close to the ocean, so it shouldn’t be a problem…”

 

Ivy: “Even besides that, why should we assist them?”

 

Sprig: “Right now, there’s two Calamity Boxes here. One was enough to cause a ton of destruction. There’s no telling what can be done with two. If we get them home, we can at least cut that number down to one…”

 

Ivy: “But-”

 

Sprig: “And yes, they’re supposed to be heroes. But you remember what Anne said? Almost every time the Guardian ran its little test, the stones were misused. This is just one of those. If we help them get home, we can avoid that. Besides, they can leave sooner.”

 

Ivy: “I don’t think they’d want us to help though…”

 

Maddie smirks. “Maybe they just need the right motivation. I’ll handle this", she says.

 

Maddie approaches Betty, Linda, and Phoebe. Ivy and Sprig follow her.

 

Linda: “What do you want?”

 

Maddie: “We’ll help you get home.”

 

Linda: “We don’t need it.”

 

Maddie: “Maybe not. But you know almost nothing about how to fix the box, so you might be here for a while…you got friends and family back home?”

 

Betty: “Yeah. I miss them…”

 

Linda: “Betty, don’t tell them that!”

 

Phoebe: “Linda, please. I know you want to see them, too. I know these…frogs…may not be the most trustworthy of people…but without any guidance, we may never get home…”

 

Linda sighs. “Fine. We’ll go with them", she says.

 

Maddie: “Glad we could come to an agreement.”

 

Sprig: “Do you guys have your box?”

 

Phoebe stands up and pulls out a Calamity Box from behind a rock. It has depictions of rodents and trees.

 

Ivy: “You see how the stones are colorless?”

 

Betty: “Oh, I hadn’t noticed that…they definitely had color before…”

 

Maddie: “Yeah, that means…they need to be recharged. There are temples where that can be done. We know where they are, you just need to follow us.”

 

Linda: “And why can’t you just tell us?”

 

Ivy: “Don’t take this the wrong way, but we don’t trust you.”

 

Linda snarls. “Whatever. As long as you get us home, it makes no difference to me. Lead the way", she says.

 

Ivy leads Betty, Phoebe, and Linda back to the government. Sprig starts moving, but Maddie grabs on his arm. 

 

Maddie: “Uh, hey Sprig? I think we may have a small issue…”

 

Sprig: “What is it?”

 

Maddie: “X didn’t want us helping them get their box recharged. That’s the exact opposite of what they want. If they find out what we’re doing…they might just jail them. And…as much as I don’t like them, that doesn’t seem fair to them.”

 

Sprig: “Huh. Hadn’t thought of that…”

 

Maddie: “I don’t know if we can just…get back to X and lie to him, without him finding out sooner or later…”

 

Sprig: “And if we don’t come back, who knows what the government might think…they’ll probably just…track us down and interrogate us…wait…”

 

Sprig takes his phone out and turns off the location.

 

Sprig: “There. Now they shouldn’t be able to find us...easily. Still, we need to find someone who’s willing to help us. Someone who is willing to potentially go against the law…”

 

Maddie: “...I got someone in mind. I don’t know how we’re supposed to get to him, though…”

 

Linda comes back inside the cave.

 

Linda: “Hey! What’s taking you so long? You better not be conspiring against us!”

 

Sprig: “No, we’re just…formulating a plan to get you back home. That’s all.”

 

Linda huffs. “When you’re done, get moving", she says.

 

Linda turns around and leaves the cave. Sprig and Maddie follow.

 


 

The six of them start approaching a saloon.

 

Ivy: “So we’re asking Patrick?”

 

Sprig: “Yeah. You remember how much he wanted to visit Amphibia, even despite all the hazards. He might be just as willing to do that for…uh…Rodencia?”

 

Phoebe: “Correct. But, uh…this Patrick, who’s a…human, right? Can they be trusted?”

 

Ivy: “Humans aren’t really different from other creatures. There are good ones, and bad ones…we don’t know Patrick that well, but he seems willing to help.”

 

Sprig: “Yeah…the one thing that I can’t really get off my mind is the fact that he seems…somewhat like Andrias…”

 

Phoebe: “Who’s…Andrias?”

 

Sprig: “Uh, he was the king of Amphibia. He had knowledge about how to recharge the stones, and was super nice at first, but then we found out he was just manipulating us to get the stones recharged, so he could use the box for evil…”

 

Betty: “Um…isn’t that a good reason not to help this Patrick?”

 

Maddie: “Knowing nothing else, yes…but when we were at his house last, I couldn’t detect any other life forms there besides us four…”

 

Ivy: “I didn’t see you check around the house…”

 

Maddie: “Oh, it’s more of a magic thing.”

 

Betty: “You can use magic?”

 

Maddie: “Yep. I’ll show you some other time, though. Sprig, what do we do now?”

 

Ivy: “What do you mean? Can’t we just get one of those Doober rides, and pay for it with the credit card?”

 

Sprig: “Not quite. We’re trying to lay low. If we use the card, they can find us. And if we use Doober, they can as well.”

 

Ivy: “But then…how are we gonna get to Patrick’s house?”

 

Sprig: “We can withdraw money from the ATM machine over there. They can track that as well, but at the very least, they won’t know what we did with the money. Then I can use that payphone to call for a taxi.”

 

Sprig approaches the ATM, slides the credit card, then gets several hundred dollar bills. He then inserts one into the payphone, gets change, and dials the number for Patrick. After a few minutes, he then hangs up. He then makes another call for a taxi, and hangs up a minute later, and walks back over.

 

Sprig: “Patrick knows the situation, and he offered to help us. And someone’s coming to get us. I told him I’d pay him a little extra if he kept quiet about us. This way, we’re as incognito as possible. We’re not untraceable, but it’d be very difficult to find us.”

 

Ivy: “Wow, I had no idea you’d know how to cover your tracks so well. And you got the money from Mr. Boonchuy’s account so easily…is there no security on it?”

 

Sprig chuckles.  “When I was here last, Polly managed to hack into his account, and she got information about it, like the pin number. We didn’t use it, but we thought it might come in handy if we wanted to buy something without him knowing", he says.

 

Linda chuckles. “I like the sound of this Polly girl. I feel like she and I would make good friends" she says.

 

Sprig: “Well, maybe someday, you’ll meet her. But first, we gotta get you guys home…”

 

A taxi cab pulls up. The six of them cram in, with Linda sitting in the front seat, and Phoebe holding the box. The cabby looks at them, and clears his throat.

 

“I, uh…knew about you frogs. Didn’t know there were human size rodents here, too. You said you’d pay me a little more to keep quiet?”

 

Sprig hands the cabby a 100 dollar bill.

 

Sprig: “Will that be enough?”

 

“Yes, sir. Thank you.”

 

The cabby then drives off.

 


 

It is nighttime when the cabby arrives at Patrick’s house. Sprig hands enough money to cover the fare to the cabby. They then get out, and walk towards the front door. Sprig knocks on the door. Patrick opens up the door a few seconds later. He looks at the six of them, then steps aside. The six of them walk inside, and sit on the couch.

 

Patrick: “Uh…so I’m assuming you three know about me?”

 

Betty: “More or less…Sprig was telling us you knew how to get us home by recharging the stones in this box?”

 

Patrick: “That’s right. But uh…you know what I want, right?”

 

Linda: “What, you want money? Sprig’s got a lot of that.”

 

Patrick: “No, I want to go to your world.”

 

Phoebe: “What? Why?”

 

Patrick: “I come from a long line of explorers. We’ve seen a lot of this planet, but we’ve always had our eyes set on other worlds, so we can document what’s there.”

 

Linda: “I don’t know, man. Our world’s got fruit that can think for itself, and they’re pretty violent.”

 

Patrick chuckles. “You know, Maddie told me something similar. But my family was always willing to take the risk of getting hurt if it meant new discoveries were made, and I am just like them", he says.

 

Linda: “Well, all right. Just don’t say I didn’t warn you.”

 

Phoebe: “We’d be glad to have you. And thanks for helping!”

 

Patrick: “Ah, don’t thank me yet. You can thank me once the box is recharged. In any case, the closest temple is about an hour long drive from here. We can go now, then set up camp when we get there.”

 

Phoebe: “Um, why? Can’t we just go tomorrow?”

 

Patrick: “I wish. But from the sounds of it, when the government figures out Sprig, Maddie, and Ivy have disappeared, they’re gonna start looking for us. Once we get to the temple, we’ll be well hidden.”

 

Sprig: “Ah, don’t worry guys. I’ve been camping before. It’s fun! You know, if there aren’t any Scorpileos around…but there’s nothing like that here, right?”

 

Patrick: “Just bugs and small animals. If we’re unlucky, we might run into a bear or coyote, but I’ve got ways to defend us. Humans aren’t really the strongest or fastest of animals, but our intellect and ability to create weapons make up for that.”

 

Ivy: “And we can help, too. We’re good fighters.”

 

Patrick: “Sounds like a plan. Come on.”

 

The seven of them walk into the garage. Patrick gets into the driver seat of the minivan, and everyone else takes their seat. Patrick then drives out into the street, and takes off towards the first temple. Sprig’s phone goes off. He looks at it, then ignores it.

 


 

Mr. X is watching the video feed of the underwater drones on a screen on the wall. Jenny hands him a phone. He puts it to his ear.

 

“Talk to me…huh? Sprig and company haven’t come back? That’s a little odd…did you call him? You did? And he didn’t pick up? I can check his location…”

 

Mr. X uses a phone tracker. It shows the location of Anne’s phone, but as of several hours ago, before hanging up the phone.

 

“...Jenny. I need you to do everything you can to find out where Sprig went. Any sort of lead will help.”

 

Jenny nods, then leaves the room, as Mr. X leans back in his chair.

 

“I don’t know what you three are up to…but we’re gonna need to have a talk."

Chapter 36: Fur-titude

Summary:

Linda takes on the first temple.

Chapter Text

Sprig, Ivy, Betty, Maddie, Patrick, Phoebe, and Linda wake up in the minivan.

 

Linda: “Come on, sleepyheads. We got a temple to conquer.”

 

The seven of them exit the minivan and head towards the temple. The front door has an emblem in the shape of a pink diamond. Linda tries pushing on the door, but it doesn’t budge.

 

Linda: “How do you open this stupid thing?”

 

Patrick: “Patience, Linda. Phoebe, do you mind holding the box closer to the door?”

 

Phoebe does as instructed. The door starts to glow, then it opens.

 

Linda: “Oh. Could have told me that earlier…”

 

Patrick chuckles. “My mistake. Let’s enter", he says.

 

The seven of them go inside the temple. The first room consists of an abyss in the center, with a tall slab on their side of it.

 

Linda: “Uh…how do we get to the other side?”

 

Betty: “Hey, look over there!”

 

Betty points to an inscription on the wall. It is written in an ancient language.

 

Sprig: “Oh, it’s kinda like the language they use in Newtopia. Patrick, can you read this?”

 

Patrick: “Those are hieroglyphics. Sadly, I am unable to decipher it. But…Sprig, you have your phone, right? I think the Wing Translator works with images.”

 

Sprig pulls out his phone. He pulls up Wing, then goes to the Translator part. He then notices a camera icon, and taps it. He then points it at the inscription. 

 

Sprig: “Let’s see…it says, ‘If it is forward you want to go, with all your might, you must tow.’”

 

A rope comes out of a hole in the ground.

 

Betty: “Oh, I see. If you want to get across, you have to pull the bridge down. Linda, you should tug on it.”

 

Linda scoffs. “Why do I have to do it?”, she says.

 

Ivy huffs. “Whatever, I'll do it", she says.

 

Ivy attempts to grab the rope, but it shocks her, and she falls backwards, before Phoebe goes to help her up.

 

Phoebe: “Ivy! Are you OK?”

 

Ivy stands up. “Yeah, I’m fine…what happened? It’s like it rejected me…”, she says.

 

Patrick: “Linda has to. This is her challenge. Either she attempts and succeeds, or you three don’t get home.”

 

Linda groans. “I guess if there’s no other way…”, she says.

 

Linda grabs on the rope. She then starts straining, but the slab eventually meets the other side.

 

Linda: "All right, that wasn't too difficult..."

 

Linda lets go, but then the slab starts to rise slowly towards the ceiling. She then starts yanking it again, until the slab meets the other side again.

 

Linda: “Go!”

 

Patrick, Sprig, Ivy, Betty, and Maddie run across.

 

Phoebe: “Wh-what about you?”

 

Linda: “Don’t worry about me. Just do as I say!”

 

Phoebe gives her a sad look, but runs to the other side nonetheless.

 

Linda: “Only get one shot at this…”

 

Linda lets go of the rope, then runs as fast as possible. She makes a leap of faith at the top of the slab, and she manages to catch the ledge at the other side. Ivy puts out her hand.

 

Ivy: “Grab on!”

 

Linda grabs Ivy’s hand, and she manages to pull her to safety.

 

Linda: “Ah, thanks. Almost didn’t think I was gonna make it…I especially didn’t think someone like you was gonna save me…”

 

Ivy: “Why not? We’re in this together, right?”

 

Linda: “Yeah, but I said some mean stuff to you. Still haven’t apologized to you for it…”

 

Ivy: “Hey, I insulted you too, so let’s call it even?”

 

Ivy smiles and puts out her hand. Linda smiles, grabs her hand, and they shake.

 

Linda: “Sure, sounds good. Let’s get to the next room, aye?”

 

They enter the next room. It has a big, white circle in the center. Maddie tries to step inside it, but an invisible force prevents her.

 

Maddie: “That’s weird…maybe only Linda can enter.”

 

Linda steps across the line. A crystal copy of her appears at the other end.

 

Linda: “All right, it’s beat-down time!”

 

Linda throws a punch, but the copy grabs her arm and throws her across the room.

 

Linda: “You’re…you’re gonna regret that!”

 

Linda charges at her copy, but it jumps out of the way and kicks her to the floor.

 

Betty: “I…I don’t think Betty is doing this right…”

 

Sprig sees another inscription on the wall. He translates it.

 

Sprig: “‘Sometimes the best way to win a brawl is to make a withdrawal.’”

 

Sprig looks at Linda desperately trying to land a blow, but missing or getting blocked. 

 

"Wait, she's not supposed to battle!"

 

Sprig: “Linda! Stop fighting!”

 

Linda: “What do you mean? This thing can’t get away with kicking my butt!”

 

Sprig: “Please, just trust me!”

 

Linda looks at Sprig, then nods. She stands up and does nothing. The copy doesn’t move.

 

Linda: “Uh…what’s the matter? Tired?”

 

Phoebe: “Linda, it only attacked you before you tried to strike first! Now that you’ve surrendered, it doesn’t want to duel with you…”

 

Linda rubs her chin before bowing to her opponent. The copy bows back, then disintegrates. The door at the other end opens. 

 

Linda: “All right, two for two! Let’s go!”

 

Linda runs into the next room, and everyone else follows her. The room has a chair in the center, and hourglasses at both sides of the room.

 

Linda: “Woo! Easy challenge!”

 

Linda starts running.

 

Sprig: “Wait, Linda. That last one almost got you. I think it’s best if we just wait for me to translate the challenge before you just rush in…”

 

Linda stops. “All right. Just be quick", she says.

 

Sprig pulls out his phone and translates the last inscription. 

 

Sprig: “‘Real bravery does not come from brawn, but from what you have undergone.’”

 

Linda: “Uh…what does that mean?”

 

Linda looks at the other six before shaking her head.

 

Linda: “Well, if you guys don't have any ideas, I'll just see what happens…”

 

Linda sits down in the chair. The sand in the hourglasses starts to fall.

 

Linda: “Dunno what that inscription was about. Maybe the temple’s just broken or something.”

 

“Lindy?”, a voice says.

 

Linda’s expression softens.

 

Linda: “That…that voice…”

 

Everyone else in the room seems to disappear. A porcupine appears in front of Linda.

 

Linda: “Serena? You’re…alive…”

 

Serena: “Lindy, why did you leave me? I thought we were friends.”

 

Linda: “Serena…you’re still my friend…even if we’re not together.”

 

Serena: “That’s not true. Maybe you were never my friend to begin with.”

 

Linda: “Don’t…don’t say that!”

 

Linda starts crying.

 

Phoebe: “What’s…what’s happening? Why is Linda talking to herself?”

 

Linda gets out of the chair to try to hug Serena. She disappears, and the ceiling starts to descend. The hourglasses also stop.

 

Betty: “Wha…Linda, get back in the chair!”

 

Linda: “Huh?”

 

Linda looks back at the ceiling. She then gets back in the chair. The hourglasses resume, the ceiling stops, and Serena reappears.

 

Serena: “Don’t try to touch me, vermin.”

 

Linda: “Serena, please, I’m sorry…”

 

Maddie: “...I get it…she’s seeing and hearing illusions when she sits in the chair. She needs to continue sitting in it, or else we get crushed.”

 

Phoebe: “But she is being tormented by something…or someone…that’s gotta be rough…”

 

Ivy rubs her chin before runing to Linda.

 

Ivy: “Linda, listen to me!”

 

Serena: “Oh? I see you’ve gotten a new friend. So you mean to just forget me?”

 

Serena: “Serena, I didn’t…”

 

Ivy: “Linda, she’s not real!”

 

Serena: “Oh, I’m very much real.”

 

Serena goes over and touches Linda’s arm, then gets back to her original position.

 

Serena: “Can someone who is not real make physical contact with you?”

 

Linda: “Ivy, I’m sorry…Serena here died because of me…I…tried to save her, but I just couldn’t…I blame myself everyday for it…I…I can’t do this…”

 

Linda, with eyes closed and tears streaming down her face, starts to fall out of the chair, but Ivy pushes her back.

 

Linda: “IVY, PLEASE!”

 

Ivy: “No! Listen, I…know what it’s like. I had a friend similar to Serena here. The last thing she told me to do was to live my life to the fullest. You can’t change the past, but you can let go of it. What happened wasn’t your fault!”

 

Linda opens her eyes. She looks at Serena. Then she wipes her tears.

 

Linda: “You’re…you’re not her. You’re just my perception of how I thought she felt about me that day. But you can’t haunt me anymore.”

 

Serena disappears, before Linda sighs and the hourglasses empty. The door opens as Ivy gives Linda some space.

 

Linda: “That was…awful…maybe I’m not really fit for this…”

 

Ivy: “Hey, it’s fine. We all need help sometimes.”

 

Ivy looks at Sprig.

 

Ivy: “If it wasn’t for Sprig over there, I’d be just as much of a mess as you are. Just…don’t be afraid to talk to me, even if it’s something sensitive, OK? I’ll always lend an ear.”

 

“Ah, thanks. That means a lot coming from you. I…thought being tough meant bottling your emotions up. But I guess if you fill a bucket up too much, it’s gonna overflow, and it ain’t gonna be pretty…”, Linda says, before standing up. “Come on. Let’s go get this dumb stone recharged.”

 

The seven of them walk into the next room. They see a gem shaped hole in the wall. Phoebe removes one of the stones, puts it in the indentation, and it regains its pink color. The pink from Linda’s eyes fades.

 

Betty: “That’s one. Two more to go.”

 

Linda: “Let’s…get outta here. I wanna talk with Ivy on the road.”

 

The seven of them leave the temple and get back into the minivan. Sprig checks his phone, and sees that Mr. X has called him several times. He notices there’s a voicemail. He puts the phone to his ear.

 

Mr. X: “Uh, hey Sprig. Don’t really know what’s going on, and why you aren’t answering my calls…or why you turned off your location…I don’t really want to, but if you don’t answer me by the end of the day, I’m gonna have to label you and your friends as criminals. So just call back.”

 

Sprig pulls the phone away from his ear. He sighs.

 

“I’m sorry, X. It’s better you don’t know.”

Chapter 37: Af-fur-ble

Summary:

Phoebe takes on the second temple.

Chapter Text

Sprig is sitting in the front seat of the minivan, with Patrick driving. Ivy and Linda are talking in the back, while Maddie is showing Betty and Phoebe the spoon magic trick.

 

Patrick: “So, the government has labeled you three, and anyone helping you as fugitives?”

 

Sprig: “Yeah. I’m sorry…”

 

Patrick chuckles. “Don’t be. I offered to help and knew the risks. Besides, I’m only a criminal here. In Rodencia, I’ll be a free man", he says.

 

Sprig: “I guess…I’m just worried someone might see us through these windows and report us...”

 

Patrick: “Call it luck, but these windows are tinted. We can see out, but people can’t see in. We won’t be spotted easily.”

 

Phoebe: “HOW DID YOU DO THAT?”

 

Sprig turns around to see Maddie holding a spoon.

 

Betty: “What, you can’t figure it out? It’s simple, really.”

 

Phoebe: “What? How did she do it?”

 

Betty giggles. “I’ll never tell…”, she says.

 

Maddie giggles.

 

Linda: “Wow, it sounds like she died for a noble purpose…”

 

Ivy: “Yeah, she did. I miss her a lot…but I lost a friend when I was young, too, so it’s not like I wasn’t used to it…”

 

Linda: “Still, it sucks to lose those close to you…”

 

Ivy: “Yeah…but, as long as we remember them, they’re not really gone, right?”

 

Linda pulls out a vial from her pocket. There is a single quill inside. She looks at it and chuckles.

 

Linda: “No, they’re not.”

 

Patrick: “All right, gang. We’re gonna offroad a little, like last time. Make sure you’re buckled in.”

 

Patrick goes off the road and weaves through trees until they arrive in front of a temple. Patrick yawns.

 

Patrick: “Sorry guys. Driving all night till the morning takes a lot outta ya. I’m gonna sit this one out.”

 

Sprig: “It’s fine, Pat. Get some rest.”

 

Patrick: “Don’t need to tell me twice…”

 

Patrick reclines his seat, then pulls out an eye mask from the center console and places it over his eyes.

 

Patrick: “If you guys get done and I’m not awake, just shake me.”

 

Sprig: “You got it. Come on, guys.”

 

Sprig, Maddie, Betty, Phoebe, Ivy, and Linda get out of the car. Betty holds the Calamity Box in front of the temple door. The door opens. They walk inside to see a room with a white line. The door closes behind, and the back wall has spikes jut out. 

 

Ivy: “Uh…wonder what those are for…”

 

The six of them walk forward, but Phoebe is prevented from crossing the line because of an invisible force. The rest of them turn around at the end of the room, which has another white line.

 

Betty: “Pheebs, come on!”

 

Phoebe: “I can’t move forward…it feels like there’s a wall in front of me…”

 

Maddie: “Hmm, that’s kinda the opposite of the last temple. Last time, nobody could get across the line but Linda, and now, it only seems like you can’t.”

 

Ivy: “It’s probably because there’s some challenge she needs to pass, and it has to be her…”

 

Sprig notices an inscription on the wall. He pulls out his phone and translates it.

 

Sprig: “‘Before you can proceed, you must help those in need.’”

 

A clay doll appears beside Phoebe.

 

“Hello! Please take me to the other side!”

 

Phoebe: “But…I can’t…”

 

“It’s OK! Just carry me and you can get across!”

 

Phoebe picks up the clay doll. She then crosses the line.

 

Phoebe: “Hey, it worked!”

 

The clay doll starts screaming.

 

Phoebe: “What…what’s wrong!?”

 

The clay doll does not stop.

 

Phoebe: “You are so loud! If I get you to the other side, will you shut up?”

 

Phoebe continues moving forward. She notices the doll stops yelling, but it gets increasingly heavier.

 

Phoebe: “Why…why is this happening? My arms hurt…”

 

Phoebe drops the doll. She is then pushed back by a large gust of wind. She hangs on a crack in the floor.

 

Maddie: “Phoebe, you have to get it back on you! Otherwise, you’re gonna turn into a shish kebab!”

 

Phoebe: “...fine! You! Get on my back!”

 

“What’s the magic word?”

 

Phoebe: “Please!”

 

The clay doll hops on her back. The wind stops. She then gives it a piggy back ride, crossing over the other white line.She then collapses from exhaustion.

 

“Thanks for helping me!”

 

The clay doll disintegrates and the door opens.

 

Linda: “That was…uh…weird…you OK, Pheebs?”

 

Phoebe: “Just give me a second…that thing weighed like a ton…”

 

Phoebe sighs, then gets up. The six of them walk into the next room. It has a white line on the floor. Maddie tries putting her hand over it, but she can’t.

 

Betty: “Guess Phoebe can only cross it…”

 

Sprig uses his phone to translate the next inscription.

 

Sprig: “‘Turn the other cheek, and back you must not speak.’”

 

Phoebe steps over the line. A clay monster appears in front of her, and slaps her across the face.

 

Phoebe: “Ow! What was that for?”

 

The monster slaps her again harder. She falls to the floor.

 

Phoebe: “Please, stop…you’re hurting me…”

 

The monster slaps her even harder. She starts to cry.

 

Linda: “Man, if this barrier wasn’t in my way, I’d give that thing a piece of my mind! Nobody hurts my friends!”

 

Betty: “Wait, it said not to talk back…but what is she supposed to do instead?”

 

Linda: “Maybe it’s like that crystal copy of me. Maybe she’s just supposed to make friends with it.”

 

Betty: “Phoebe! Be nice to it!”

 

Phoebe gets up and looks at the monster.

 

Phoebe: “I…I forgive you…” 

 

The monster nods, then disintegrates. Betty runs over to Phoebe.

 

Betty: “Pheebs, are you OK?”

 

Phoebe rubs her cheek. “Yeah…that monster just wasn’t letting up…”, she says.

 

Linda: “Getting slapped to death sounds brutal…”

 

The six of them progress into the final room, which has a white line. The door is already open.

 

Ivy: “Woah, hey. Why is the door open? We didn’t do anything…”

 

Betty: “I imagine there is some trial you can fail here. And if you do, the door might close for good…”

 

Sprig notices an inscription. He translates it using his phone.

 

Sprig: “‘If you make a mistake, then your ego you must forsake.’”

 

Phoebe steps over the line. “All right, temple. What do you got for me?”, she says.

 

Phoebe starts walking forward, until she knocks into a transparent humanoid made of clay. He becomes visible. He is laying on the floor, with a bag of marbles spilled onto the floor.

 

“Watch where you’re going!”

 

Phoebe: “Oh! I’m sorry…”

 

Phoebe attempts to help him, but he pushes her back.

 

“I didn’t ask for your help. Go away!”

 

The clay man begins to pick up his marbles. 

 

Phoebe: “Please, I made a mistake. I want to correct it.”

 

“You can correct your mistake by leaving me alone!”

 

Phoebe stands still, unsure of what to do with herself. The door starts to close.

 

Phoebe: “Guys, what do I do? I’m trying to assist, but he doesn’t want me to…”

 

Linda: “Pheebs, I don’t think he’s really bothered by the fact you knocked into him. I think something else is going on. Forget the marbles. Just talk to him.”

 

Phoebe goes over and kneels by the man.

 

"I thought I told you to get lost!”

 

Phoebe: “Why don’t you tell me what’s really going on?”

 

“What are you talking about?”

 

Phoebe: “It doesn’t make sense why you don’t want me to lend you a hand. You seem…angry at something or someone, and you’re just taking it out on me.”

 

The clay man sighs, and stops with the marbles.

 

“I’m sorry. It’s just that my other clay friends have been treating me poorly. They don't invite me to events, they don’t seem to want to be around me, and every time they are, they just make fun of me…”

 

Phoebe: “Sounds like they’re not really your friends…”

 

“Yeah…I mean, they get along with each other well, I just wish I could know what I can do to get them to treat me like an equal…”

 

Phoebe: “But you’re not an equal. You’re better than them.”

 

“I…I am? But they don’t like me…”

 

Phoebe: “Yeah, well…I don’t really know much about you. But…you seem like a cool guy. They might just be bullying you because they’re jealous. And even if they’re not, they’re being mean regardless. And cool people treat everyone with respect if they deserve it. And since they’re not doing that for you, you shouldn’t be trying to get it from them.”

 

“But then…I won’t really have any friends…”

 

Phoebe smiles. “I…I’ll be your friend", she says.

 

“You…you will? But I said some nasty stuff to you…”

 

Phoebe: “It’s fine. We all get mad sometimes, and we hurt the people who care about us. I…I think we just got off on the wrong foot, so…my name is Phoebe, and I’d be pleased to become companions with you.”

 

The clay man smiles. “Thank you. Um…do you mind helping me with the marbles?”, it says.

 

Phoebe: “Of course!”

 

Phoebe picks up the remaining marbles and puts them back in the bag. The door fully opens, and the clay man then disintegrates. Phoebe looks in horror as the friend she just made turns into dust.

 

Phoebe: “WHA?!”

 

Ivy: “Oof. I see some therapy bills in her future.”

 

Phoebe falls to her knees. Linda comes over and puts a hand on her shoulder.

 

Linda: “Hey, uh…I’m not really good with talking about this type of stuff. But uh…it might be wise to just forget this ever happened, aye?”

 

Phoebe nods while maintaining her expression. She gets up, and the six of them walk into the final room. Betty pulls out the next gem, then puts it in the indentation in the wall. The blue from Phoebe’s eyes fades as the gem regains its color. The six of them leave the temple, and get back in the minivan. Maddie shakes Patrick awake.

 

Patrick: “Huh?”

 

Maddie: “We got the stone recharged. Let’s go.”

 

Patrick pulls the eye mask off himself, and puts it back in the center console. He rubs his eyes, then resets the chair to an upright position. He then starts the car and drives off to the next temple.

 

Betty: “Hey, uh…Pheebs, how are you holding up?”

 

Phoebe just stares off into space.

 

Betty: “Um, well…do you remember that hurt grasshopper I took care of?”

 

Phoebe looks at Betty.

 

Phoebe: “Graham?”

 

Betty: “Yeah. I always thought grasshoppers were kinda gross, but…well, when I saw him injured that day, I kinda just…ignored all that and did what I could to help him recover. It also kinda helped me in a way, since I made some cool discoveries. Like, did you know they have ears on their stomachs?”

 

Phoebe: “I thought it was a nose, but either way…I guess he probably appreciated what you did for him, even if it was for research purposes…but why are you telling me this?”

 

Betty: “Well, you remember how sad I was when I had to let him go?”

 

Phoebe: “Yeah, you shut yourself in. You didn’t even want to go with me and Lindy to the grand opening of Puck T Cheesies.”

 

Betty: “Yeah. I mean, I knew he had to go back in the wild someday. I wanted to keep him as a pet, but…you know. Stockholm Syndrome. But knowing all that made it so much more difficult. But…it had to be done. You get what I’m saying?”

 

Phoebe sighs. “Yeah. That clay man was…nothing more than just a test. I want to get home. And if that means things like that have to happen, then so be it", she says.

 

Phoebe smiles. “Thanks for talking to me. Usually I’m the one doing that with you two…but now I find myself being talked to by both you and Linda…”

 

Betty laughs. “These are strange times, huh? But…don’t think this is just a one-time thing. We appreciate what you do for us, but you have to let us do the same for you", she says.

 

Phoebe: “I will. I’m glad you guys are my friends…and that we’ve found such nice people willing to assist us, just out of the good in their hearts.”

Chapter 38: Pro-fur-cient

Summary:

Betty takes on the third temple.

Chapter Text

Mr. X tries calling Sprig again. He doesn’t pick up. Jenny walks into the room, and taps on his shoulder.

 

“What is it?”

 

Jenny leaves the room. Mr. X follows her into the room with a screen showing the surveillance of the ocean. One of the screens is offline.

 

Mr. X: “What’s happening? Did we find something?”

 

“Just…see for yourself, sir.”

 

The agent puts on a recording of a drone. The screen goes blank for a few moments. The video feed then returns for a few moments, only to show a javelin piercing it. The agent then zooms in and enhances the video to see a large, lobster-shaped robot.

 

Mr. X: “What am I looking at?”

 

“Uh, well…this drone was checking around this area, when we noticed the video signal got jammed. We didn’t really know what was happening, so we just backed it up. But then…that thing…chucked a spear at it, and we lost contact with it…”

 

 

Mr. X: “...one thing’s for sure. The theory about our enemy being a lobster was spot-on. And even if we don’t know exactly where it is, we have a rough idea, and that’s better than nothing. Still, I don’t understand how they have such complicated machinery…where did they get the materials necessary to build such a thing?”

 

“It’s unclear, sir. We’re just as clueless as you are.”

 

Mr. X sighs. “This would be good news if we knew where Sprig and his friends were, or what they were up to. Clearly, marking them as criminals wasn’t effective, so I’ll change my approach. In the meantime, Jenny, I need you to get something from the Boonchuys. I have a feeling we’ll need it.”

 

Jenny salutes, then leaves. Mr. X picks up his phone and sends a text to Sprig:

 

“Sprig, I’m sorry for whatever I’ve done to make you feel like you can’t talk to me. I’ll stop the search for you, but I really need to have a word with you.”

 


 

Linda: “So Pheebs and I have gone…that means this last one must be Bets’, right?”

 

Betty: “That’s right! I’ve also noticed something about the previous two temples…”

 

Phoebe: “Oh? What’s that?”

 

Betty: “Well, the first temple was for Linda, and it tested her courage, something she’s good at. Then the second temple tested your kindness, which you’re also good at. Which means it’s likely this third temple will test...”

 

Linda: “...how much of a nerd you are!”

 

Betty: “I was gonna say intelligence, but that works, too.”

 

Ivy: “Truth be told, we already knew that…”

 

Linda: “Huh? You did?”

 

Sprig: “That’s right. Something common among the worlds is that those three gems will choose three individuals who represent strength, wit, and heart.”

 

Phoebe: “The gems themselves choose?”

 

Maddie: “Meh, it’s more like some all-powerful deity does. But it will pick the best people from your world.”

 

Phoebe: “Wow. To think I’m the kindest one from where I come from…”

 

Maddie: “I wouldn’t say that. It seems like another essential factor is that there must always be three inseparable friends. But I guess that just goes to show how strong your companionship is with each other…”

 

Linda: “Inseparable? That’s a bit much…”

 

Ivy: “But you three really are. Despite all your quarreling, you’re still together. The humans who came to our world were…less close than you were. There were these two girls, Sasha and Anne, who tried killing each other multiple times…”

 

Phoebe: “Goodness!”

 

Sprig: "And then the other, Marcy, seemed like an innocent girl, but it turned out she was a liar who was bent on keeping Sasha and Anne from leaving her, even if was at the expense of never letting them see their loved ones ever again..."

 

Linda: "Dude. That's super messed up."

 

Betty: “But those three…they ended up saving your planet, right? So maybe they were just like us…but for a friendship to last even through that…they must have really understood each other…”

 

Sprig: “They did. They weren’t really…bad people. They did some things wrong to each other sometimes, but it was almost never out of hatred. And even for those times, they worked things out…”

 

Linda: “Uh, hey. I have a question. If you three are here, does that mean you three are the closest friends who are smart, nice, and brave?”

 

Maddie: “Um…not exactly. We weren’t chosen by that deity I mentioned earlier. But Anne was given an offer to take the position of it, but she chose to live out the rest of her mortal life, and rise to the occasion at that point. And well, she chose us. Me for wit, Ivy for strength, and Sprig for heart.”

 

Ivy: “And we trust her judgment. She knew all of us well enough to know there was nobody more suited for this than us. She saved our world, so we’re just paying back.”

 

Betty: “But…if you three just used the box, then your stones must be uncharged, right? Why haven’t you been charging yours?”

 

Sprig: “That’s because…erm…”

 

Linda: “Why did you clam up? Is there something you’re not telling us?”

 

Patrick: “I doubt any of them really want to tell you. But you do deserve to know. Just…don’t think badly of them, all right? They’re good people.”

 

Phoebe: “Um…well, they did give us hope…keeping things from others is not good, but I’m sure they had a valid reason…”

 

Patrick: “That they did. But let me ask you first. Would you give up anything to get home right now?”

 

Linda: “Anything?…uh…probably not my life…but if it was to get these two home, I might…”

 

Patrick: “No need to worry. The asking price isn’t too big.”

 

Phoebe: “But what is the cost? Is it just passing the temple challenges?”

 

Patrick: “No. In order for the box to work, it requires an infinite amount of power, which comes from the stones. But the power is never drained. It’s either inside the stones, or it’s inside someone else…”

 

Betty: “It’s…inside someone? Wait, do you mean that…”

 

Patrick: “Yes. You three at one point did have infinite power. But right now, because the strength and heart stone have been recharged, the power has been siphoned from Linda and Phoebe, and sent back. And even though Sprig, Maddie, and Ivy do plan on getting home, they still need as much power as possible in order to defeat the threat still here. That’s why they didn’t bring their box.”

 

Betty: “I have…infinite power? What…what can I do with it?”

 

Patrick: “You seem like a girl who likes to experiment, but I would recommend against that. Imagine yourself as a device, and the stone’s power is your battery. The device can only work when the battery is inside and functional…but if that battery instead has infinite power, it can run at maximum capacity…”

 

Betty: “...but eventually, the device will output more than it can handle…”

 

Patrick: “Correct. Sprig, you know this, right? So I imagine you three have been getting familiar with your powers?”

 

Sprig: “Uh…yeah, we have.”

 

Patrick: “That’s good. But the reason I say all this is because you have a choice. You can either have infinite power, or you can go home…you cannot have both. And that is why they did not tell you. But even if they had, I doubt you would be doing anything differently, right?”

 

Linda: “Well, as nice as having superpowers would be…I’d give them up if it meant I could see my friends and family again. You think so too, right?”

 

Phoebe and Betty nod.

 

Ivy: “I’m sorry for not telling you...”

 

Linda: “Nah, it's fine. Like he said, even if we had known earlier, we’d still be doing what we’re doing now.”

 

Patrick: “But I am sorry for spilling all this to you without your permission, you three. Please forgive me.”

 

Maddie: “I mean, you did say something we didn’t really have the guts to tell them, even if they should have known. We should be thanking you.”

 

Patrick chuckles. “Let’s just split the difference. Anyways, we’re almost here", he says.

 

Patrick drives off the road once more, weaves through trees, and arrives at the third temple.

 

Maddie: “Patrick, you got a pencil and paper?”

 

Patrick: “Yes, what for?”

 

Maddie: “I know this is Betty’s challenge, but we can help her. Writing stuff down helps me visualize it better.”

 

Patrick pulls out a pencil and several sheets paper from the center console, and hands it to Maddie.

 

Maddie: “Thanks.”

 

Patrick: “You guys go on ahead. I need to make sure my tires are inflated…I might have run over something without even knowing it…”

 

Patrick gets out of the car and pulls a tire inflator out of the trunk, then begins pumping the front right tire. Phoebe, Betty, Linda, Sprig, Ivy, and Maddie get out of the car and walk towards the temple. Linda holds the Calamity Box up to the front door, and it opens. They enter. Patrick then looks to see they have entered. He then hides back and pulls out his phone.

 

“My queen, everything is almost done…I will need eight soldiers. Once we leave, two of them will need to hold the spiny one by the arms. One soldier can restrain each of the other five. The last soldier will need to take the box, and travel down the stream nearby. I will stall so it can escape, even if it means I need to die. Are we clear?”

 

Patrick listens intently.

 

“Very well. Glory to our cause.”

 

Patrick hangs up, puts the tire inflator back in his trunk. He then walks towards the temple.

 


 

Sprig, Phoebe, Betty, Linda, Ivy, and Maddie are in the temple looking at an inscription on the back wall, with a door closed. The floor is glass, with a bottomless pit at the bottom. Sprig pulls out his phone to try and translate the hieroglyphics, but the screen warps.

 

Sprig: “Huh? What’s going on?”

 

Linda: “Yo, Sprig. We need to know what to do to continue.”

 

Sprig: “My phone’s not working right…”

 

Ivy: “It has a lot of percentage remaining, right?”

 

Sprig: “I don’t think that’s the problem. It’s like this temple doesn’t want me to translate the inscription…”

 

Betty: “Oh! I know, this must be a riddle. And it doesn’t want us cheating.”

 

Phoebe: “But if we can’t read the riddle, we can’t progress…”

 

Patrick walks inside, and Sprig notices.

 

Sprig: “Patrick, we got an issue. The temple’s distorting my phone’s screen, so I can't translate the inscription…”

 

Patrick: “Not to worry! I memorized the alphabet from the first temple. I should be able to do the same here.”

 

Maddie rubs her chin, while Patrick looks at the inscription.

 

Patrick: “‘I have many teeth, but do not bite. To get to the next room, you must get this right.’”

 

Four empty panels appear in front of them. 26 hieroglyphic tiles appear in front of them.

 

Betty: “It looks like that was right…but I still can’t really read it…”

 

Patrick: “Maddie, may I have a piece of paper? And may I borrow your pencil?”

 

Maddie hands the pencil and a sheet of paper to Patrick. He then writes down the translation for each letter on it, hands the pencil back to Maddie, then the paper to Betty.

 

Betty: “Wow, thanks!”

 

Maddie starts jotting down something.

 

Sprig: “Uh…so what’s the answer?”

 

Betty: “Just give me a few minutes…”

 

Betty repeatedly looks at the paper and inscription.

 

Betty: “‘I have many teeth, but do not bite. To get to the next room, you must get this right.’”

 

Phoebe: “Well, it looks like it’s only four letters…maybe it’s some kind of animal?”

 

Betty: “Actually, this one’s pretty easy. It’s a comb.”

 

Linda: “What?”

 

Betty: “Yeah, think about it. The bristly parts are called teeth. But since it’s not alive, it doesn’t bite. Plus, it’s four letters. Let’s see, C is that one, and O is that one…”

 

Betty approaches the tiles.

 

Ivy: “Wait, Betty. I think if you get this wrong, the floor probably opens up. Are you absolutely sure that’s the right answer?”

 

Betty: “Yes. Without a doubt. In fact, let me show you how confident I am…”

 

Betty slides the four tiles into place. The door opens up.

 

Betty: “See? Nothing to worry about!”

 

Maddie starts jotting down something, as the six of them enter the next room. Once again, the floor is glass, with a bottomless pit below. Betty takes a few minutes to translate the next inscription.

 

Betty: “‘Take one out and scratch my head, I am now black but once was red. Answer this to go ahead.’”

 

Five empty panels appear in front of them, with the same 26 hieroglyphic tiles.

 

Linda: “Well if it has a head, it must be an animal, right?”

 

Phoebe: “But last time it mentioned teeth, which animals do have, but it wasn’t. I think our answer this time must also be an object.”

 

Ivy: “That’s true…but what might have a black head?”

 

Sprig: “Oh! Anne told me she got those sometimes on her face. They were a type of acne, and if you scratch it, then it might get irritated. Maybe the answer is face. Or…faces, since it’s five letters…”

 

Betty: “No, I don’t think so…let me concentrate…”

 

Betty closes her eyes for a few moments before snapping her fingers. 

 

Betty: “I got it!”

 

Betty slides five tiles into place. The door opens.

 

Linda: “Woah! What was it?”

 

Betty: “A match! The tip of it is black, but when you slide it against the side of the box, it catches on fire!”

 

The seven of them walk into the next room, while Maddie continues to jot something down. The room once again contains a glass floor, with a bottomless pit. Betty spends a few minutes translating the last inscription.

 

Betty: “‘I can reply when spoken to, but cannot talk. Give the correct response, and I will recharge the rock.’”

 

Once again, four empty panels appear, with one tile appearing for each letter.

 

Maddie: “Betty, do you mind if I borrow that paper you’re holding?”

 

Betty: “Uh…sure?”

 

Betty hands the paper to Maddie.



Linda: “Uh…animals don’t talk, right? So this can’t be one…”

 

Sprig: “Well, parrots can talk, right? Maybe the word is bird.”

 

Betty: “No, I don’t think so. This is a tough one…what can talk only under the condition that something else initiates the conversation?”

 

Phoebe: “Is there something that can only give answers if it’s asked a question?”

 

Betty: “No…I don’t think so…maybe this isn’t even alive? But I can’t think of an object that can speak…”

 

Ivy: “Sprig’s phone can talk, right?”

 

Sprig: “Yeah, but…while there is a way to kinda have a chat with it, it can talk on its own by pressing a few buttons. No words required.”

 

Linda: “But if it’s not alive, or it’s not an object…what can it be?”

 

Betty forces her eyes shut. She tries to think of something for several minutes. She starts sweating before she screams. The others are taken aback, and even Maddie stops writing.

 

Phoebe: “Bets! What’s wrong?”

 

Betty: “I’m so useless…”

 

Phoebe: “What are you talking about? You got us past the first two riddles…”

 

Betty: “Irrelevant! This is an all-or-nothing situation! If I can’t get us past this room, we’ll have to spend the rest of our lives here! We won’t see anyone we ever know again…and those three will be stuck here, too! I…I…”

 

Betty starts crying. Maddie sighs, and walks over and puts a hand on Betty’s shoulder.

 

Maddie: “Hey, Betty. Please stop saying that. You…you have this view of yourself, and it’s holding you back.”

 

Betty: “I’m…holding myself back?”

 

“Yeah…look, I know how it is. People back home treated me like a freak, even when I had good intentions. And it was just because of, I don’t know…my snake-like eyes, the way I dressed, and the way I had my hair done. And me using magic didn’t really help, because people thought I was going to curse them. But…", Maddie says, before looking at Ivy and Sprig with a smile. “Sometimes, all you really need is the support of others. You want to get home, but more importantly, you want to help your friends get home.”

 

Betty wipes her tears. “I was…bullied a lot in school. People told me my teeth were too big, that my hands were strange, and my tail was too long…I didn’t really know why. Linda and Phoebe took a chance on me, and we became good friends. But…I’m letting them down now…”, she says.

 

Maddie: “...hey, just a minute ago. Did you hear that?”

 

Betty: “Hear what?”

 

Maddie: “You screamed, right?”

 

Betty: “I mean, yeah, I heard it. Everyone did.”

 

Maddie: “Yeah, but there was something else. I think you can figure out the answer. It…might be more obvious than you think.”

 

Betty rubs her chin, before she gasps. Betty slides four tiles into place. The door opens.

 

Maddie: “See? I knew you could do it.”

 

Betty: “Maddie, you’re a genius!”

 

Linda: “What? What was the answer?”

 

Betty: “An echo! This room is rather small, so the sound reverberated across the walls, ceiling, and floor. But there can’t be an echo without an initial noise, so that had to be the answer.”

 

Maddie resumes writing down on her paper, as the seven of them walk into the next room. Betty pulls out the stone and puts it in the indentation in the wall without hesitation. The gem regains its green color, as the green from her eyes fade. 

 

Betty: “I didn’t really notice it before, but I feel like I’m getting weaker. Maybe that’s just because I know what’s really happening. But…it doesn’t matter. This is what I want.”

 

Betty puts the gem back in the box.

 

Linda: “All right! We did it! We can get home now!”

 

Linda grabs the box.

 

Patrick: “Hold it!”

 

Linda stops.

 

Patrick: “I’ve upheld my end of the deal. Now you must do the same.”

 

Phoebe: “Deal? Oh…right. You helped us recharge the stones. So you want us to use the box with you.”

 

Patrick: “Correct. It’s also in your benefit to do so. If just you three use it, then the stones will lose their power again, and you will need to find the temples back on Rodencia. As long as at least one other individual goes, then the power can’t be distributed properly, so the power will remain in the stones. I can also help you potentially get to other worlds if you so wish. If not, that is fine, too…”

 

Betty: “It’d be cool to see other worlds! And as long as the four of us go, then we never have to worry about getting stranded!”

 

Linda: “Gotta admit, even after everything we’ve been through, this was kinda fun.”

 

Phoebe: “We can discuss that later. For now, we should get back to the minivan…this place gives me the creeps…”

 

The seven of them walk outside. Maddie stops writing, and her eyes go wide.

 

Patrick: “All right, Linda. In order for us four to travel, all you must do is open the box with us four facing the open end…”

 

Maddie: “Wait.”

 

Patrick: “Hmm? Did you want to go as well?

 

Maddie: “No, that’s not it. I just had a question for you.”

 

Patrick furrows his brow. “What is it?”, he says.

 

Maddie: “In the first temple, I recall you saying that you didn’t know how to translate those hieroglyphics. But now you seem to be an expert.”

 

Patrick: “Well, yes. I said I learned the alphabet from the first temple.”

 

Maddie: “OK, but…that can’t be. Take a look.”

 

Maddie shows her notes to Patrick.

 

Patrick: “These are…the messages from the first temple.”

 

Maddie: “Right. And here’s the alphabet you wrote. I don’t know how correct this is, but I know at least one of the letters is correct here, which is C. But there was a possibility of 5 others it could have been, and somehow, you managed to get it right.”

 

“That’s a 1 in 6 chance. And if that letter is correct, then it might be possible the others are as well. And if that’s the case…that’s a 1 in 720 chance...", Betty says, before slowing turning to Patrick. "Unless…Patrick has been…lying to us…”

 

Sprig, Ivy, Phoebe, give a concerned look to Patrick, while Maddie and Linda give one of anger, as he smirks and begins to clap.

 

Patrick: “Well done, Maddie. I had thought my plan was foolproof.”

 

Phoebe: “P-plan? What’s going on…?”

 

Patrick yanks the Calamity Box from Linda’s hands.

 

Linda: “Hey! Give that back!”

 

Patrick: “To me, my subordinates!”

 

Eight human-sized lobsters wearing water tanks over their gills jump out of the bushes. Two of them grab Linda by the arms, while the other five hold the others’ hands behind their backs. Patrick then gives the Calamity Box to the other, who then escapes with it.

 

Phoebe: “Y-you! We trusted you!”

 

Patrick: “Yes. Quite foolish of you, really. Sprig, I imagine you had someone gain your trust rather easily back in Amphibia, who then ended up stabbing you in the back, in the same way I have. Am I accurate in making that statement?”

 

Sprig: “Andrias…he was being kinda…controlled…”

 

Patrick: “Oh? You say he didn’t have a choice?”

 

Sprig: “I mean, he did, but…he was being influenced…”

 

Patrick: “But he still made the decision. He weighed his options, and realized that using the box for his own purposes was more important than not. That makes him similar to me.”

 

Ivy: “But you don’t have to do this!”

 

Patrick: “Have to? No. But I want to.”

 

Maddie: “If that’s the case, then you’re evil!"

 

Patrick: “Yes, I suppose I am. But evil is relative, no?”

 

Linda: “What are you talking about?”

 

Patrick: “For centuries, my ancestors explored the Earth. While they did find treasures and such, they also saw battles break out between cultures, and sometimes within them. It just seemed to be a constant among humans.”

 

Ivy: “But people aren’t like that now…”

 

Patrick: “No, but not because they realized what they were doing was wrong, but because there are laws in place to prevent such a thing. But…if someone follows a law, that doesn’t mean they’re moral. It just means they think the punishment they would get outweighs the benefit they may derive from doing so…what kind of creature needs to be told that?”

 

Sprig: “But what does conquering this planet have to do with that?”

 

Patrick: “I never said I want to conquer it. I just want to travel to the next. Earth…has a virus on it, which is the human race. I plan to expunge it, and let the planet return back to a normal state. One where nature can flourish again, without having to worry about civilization. Once that is done, I will travel to the next planet, to live the life that my ancestors wanted…”

 

Phoebe: “You’re…you’re insane! Yes, there may be bad people here, but they’re few and far in between! The rest are good people, and you’re punishing them even though they haven’t done anything wrong!”

 

Patrick: “Yes, I’m aware. But the people who have the ability to make real changes often don’t. In fact, it’s quite the opposite. They feed the common man lies about how tomorrow will be better…but it never is. I’m simply sparing them the agony of a worse future. And that is why I must do this.”

 

Linda: “I’ve had enough of your lying! I’m gonna punch your teeth down your throat!”

 

Patrick: “Well…I wouldn’t say I’m the only one who’s been lying…”

 

Betty: “What? Who else was?”

 

Patrick: “Your new ‘friends’. They’ve been helping you recharge the stones so you can get back home…but I can’t imagine that’s the only reason, is it?”

 

Sprig: "Uh..."

 

Patrick: “You three probably know most heroes who are chosen by the box almost never use the stones properly. I’m sure you assumed the same for them. That’s another reason you didn’t charge your box, right? Just so you can steal the glory of saving this planet, while they go back home to their mundane lives?”

 

Phoebe: “That…that’s not true, is it?”

 

Ivy sighs. “It…kinda is. We didn’t think you were going to misuse them, but…we couldn’t really take that chance…", she says.

 

Sprig: “But we’re not here for glory. We’re just here to do what’s right. And that’s saving this planet and getting you guys home.”

 

Patrick laughs. “That’s quite funny. You really thought you could assist everyone. And now, all you’ve done is set your fates. Anne really did make a mistake in choosing you three", he says.

 

Ivy’s eyes glow pink. “You…you take that back!”, she says.

 

Patrick: “What? You think because she saved your world that she knows what’s best?”

 

Sprig’s eyes glow blue. “No…she knows what’s best because she’s our friend!”, he says.

 

Sprig and Ivy break away from their lobsters, then fire beams of energy from their palms to set everyone free.

 

Linda: “Ha! Not so tough now, are you?”

 

Linda punches Patrick in the stomach. He goes flying into a tree. Linda prepares to hit him again. He chuckles while coughing.

 

Patrick: “You can do as you wish to me. It really makes no difference.”

 

Betty: “He’s…unfortunately right. The more time we spend here, the less time we have to catch up to that lobster…”

 

Phoebe: “Linda, forget him! He’s not our concern!”

 

Linda takes her arm back. “Fine. Let’s go!”, she says.

 

Sprig, Ivy, Maddie, Phoebe, Betty, and Linda go off in the direction the other lobster went.

 


 

The six of them are running through the forest.

 

Maddie: “I don’t get it…how did these lobsters get here? We’re not even near the ocean…”

 

Sprig: “Look! Up ahead!”

 

The six of them stop running and come across a river.

 

Betty: “It must have gone this way!”

 

Maddie jumps into the river. She then swims downstream. A few minutes later, she returns on land.

 

Maddie: “I…think it got away…”

 

Phoebe: “Is…that it, then? Did they…win?”

 

Linda: “No, they haven’t. These three have infinite power! They cooked those lobsters!”

 

Ivy: “But…so does the villain. We’re…evenly matched at best…”

 

Sprig sighs. “When Andrias had the box, Sasha and Grime started the Wartwood Resistance. We’re gonna need one of our own here. And that means…”, he says.

 

Sprig pulls out his phone. He sees the text message from Mr. X.

 

Linda: “Wait, are you gonna call that guy who we were trying to hide from?”

 

Sprig nods.

 

Linda: “What? He’s gonna be furious!”

 

Betty: “But…we have to. For now, we’ll just have to put aside our differences. Otherwise, we really will lose…”

 

Sprig calls Mr. X back. He picks up almost immediately.

Chapter 39: The Only Option

Summary:

With the Lobster Queen in possession of the Calamity Box, Linda, Phoebe, Ivy, Maddie, Sprig, and Betty combine their forces to stop the coming threat.

Chapter Text

Mr. X is sitting at his desk. Sitting across from him are Ivy, Sprig, Maddie, Betty, Linda, and Phoebe.

 

Mr. X: “So, let me see if I got this right…a few days ago you found Betty, Linda, and Phoebe here. Instead of bringing them back like I asked, you decided to go behind my back and into hiding, just so you could recharge their box, even though doing so would take away their powers. And you asked this…’Patrick’, to help you, despite the fact that you barely knew him, who then ended up betraying and taking the box for himself, which is now in the hands of our lobster villain?”

 

Sprig looks down. “Yeah. That’s about everything", he says.

 

Mr. X chuckles. “Gotta admit, you did a good job keeping yourself hidden. Still, we have a problem to focus on…”

 

Ivy: “Do we know where the villain is?”

 

Mr. X stands up with a determined expression. “Not exactly. We have a good idea, but our drones can’t really determine its precise location. But…there is something you should see", he says.

 

Mr. X pulls up a photo of the robot lobster.

 

Phoebe: “Wha…what is this?”

 

Mr. X: “One of our drones took this picture before being destroyed. It seems our villain has an army of robot lobsters. Robo-sters, if you will.”

 

Maddie: “Huh. Guess super villains always go for robots. I wonder why that is?”

 

Mr. X: “Beats me. Point is, this is just one, but it’s likely they have more. I can have the military defeat them if need be…”

 

Ivy: “You also need to get the people away from the ocean. That lobster is likely gonna come for innocent civilians.”

 

Mr. X: “But then we might not have enough soldiers…”

 

Sprig: “Yeah, I don’t think us three are strong enough with our powers currently to take on however many it has…”

 

Maddie smirks. “Guess we’ll just need to activate our Calamity forms, then", she says.

 

Sprig: “Huh? But couldn’t only Valeriana do that?”

 

Maddie: “Maybe. But Anne told me about what happened. If we do everything right, we might be able to pull it off. We just need the Calamity Box.”

 

Mr. X pulls out the Calamity Box from under the table and places it on top.

 

Mr. X: “There you go. Now what?”

 

Sprig: “What the…how did you find that? I hid it!”

 

Mr. X: “Come on, I knew you had it somewhere in the Boonchuys’ house. It was just a matter of time, really.”

 

Maddie: “Well, that takes care of that. Still, we should only use our Calamity forms for the Robo-sters. For now, we’ll just need to-”

 

There’s a huge explosion outside. Everyone gathers to the window to see a giant flying vessel shaped like a lobster without claws. Below it is an army of Robo-sters in the water.

 

“People of Earth! I am the Lobster Queen! We have sat and waited until this day, when we can now give you what you deserve!”

 

The army starts approaching towards the beach.

 

Mr. X: “OK, you guys do what you need to. I’ll get the military to escort people to safety.”

 

Linda: “We’ll help, too!”

 

Sprig: “But you guys don’t have your powers…”

 

Betty: “No, but…heroes don’t need powers.”

 

Phoebe: “You guys may have not treated us the best, but you three are selfless. Giving up your safety and well-being for people who don’t even know you. We were supposed to save this planet, and…in all honesty, we wouldn’t have gotten this far without you. Let us repay the favor.”

 

Ivy, Sprig, and Maddie smile.

 

Ivy: “Spoken like a true warrior.”

 

Betty, Phoebe, and Linda nod, as they run out the room with Mr. X.

 

Ivy: “Maddie, get this box working.”

 

Maddie: “Got it. You two, stand over there.”

 

Sprig and Ivy go to where Maddie is pointing. Maddie pulls out her wand.

 

Maddie: “Close your eyes.”

 

Sprig and Ivy close their eyes. Maddie does the same.

 

Maddie: “Think of your memories of the Earth, of how much this world means to you. This will allow the stones to resonate…with your hearts!”

 

Maddie taps the ground with her wand, and the box shoots out a pink beam towards Ivy, a blue one towards Sprig, and a green one towards Maddie. The three of them start glowing with their respective colors. Sprig’s hair turns blue, and his hat becomes a helmet. His jacket becomes a breastplate, with his black pants elongating to cover the rest of his legs. Ivy’s hair turns into a pink flame, and she gets a spiky tiara on her forehead. Her cape turns pink and lengthens considerably, with her clothes turn into pink armor. Maddie’s hair turns green, and she gets a rounded tiara. Her gloves turn into metal claws, and her lab coat turns into green armor. They open their eyes.

 

Ivy: “Holy frog! Check me out!”

 

Sprig: “And I thought your hair was unkempt before!”

 

Maddie: “All right, enough chit-chat. We have some Robo-sters to crush!”

 

The three of them fly out the window. Sprig focuses his power, which turns into a variety of glowing slingshots. Then they start rapidly firing energy-based projectiles, which pierce through the Robo-sters with ease. 

 

Sprig: “Now these are some trusty slingshots!”

 

Ivy then focuses her power, which turns into a giant, glowing teacup. The teacup then tips over, sending a wave of energy, which crashes into various more Robo-sters. The teacup then sends itself flying into a larger Robo-ster, which explodes on impact.

 

Ivy: “Oops! Guess I spilled the tea!”

 

Finally, Maddie focuses her power, which turns into two rolling pins. She then throws both of them, which slice through many Robo-sters before returning to her hands. She then sees a bigger Robo-ster, and combines the two rolling pins into a huge one. She then flies towards it.

 

Maddie: “Batter up!”

 

Maddie then swings with all her might, sending the Robo-ster flying. The three of them return to the ground, and gaze upon the countless Robo-sters they just laid waste to. They power down as Betty, Phoebe, and Linda start running towards them.

 

Linda: “Dude, that was so cool! Those guys didn’t stand a chance!”

 

Betty: “All that’s left is the queen…”

 

The six of them stare at the flying vessel. 

 

Phoebe: “That’s…odd. Why isn’t she doing anything?”

 

Linda: “She’s probably so surprised that she’s figuring out what to do next!”

 

Maddie: “No. I think she’s waiting for us.”

 

Phoebe: “She’s…waiting? But why?”

 

Maddie: “She knows she has the only feasible way home. We may still have our Calamity Box, but she knows we wouldn’t dare risk recharging as long as she’s still around.”

 

Linda: “So we should just beat her up, like you did with her army!”

 

Ivy: “Honestly, I’m exhausted…our powers will come back, but it will take time…”

 

Sprig: “More importantly, I don’t think we have to defeat her…”

 

Linda: “What are you talking about? She just threatened to wipe out the entire human race!”

 

Sprig: “Our villain back home was evil, but it was also just…scared. It was afraid of being destroyed. It didn’t want to become irrelevant. Maybe the Queen has a good reason for this. We’re not gonna let her do what she wants, but we can maybe talk something out.”

 

Ivy: “Worst case scenario, if nothing comes of our conversation, it’ll at least give us extra time to regain our powers.”

 

Betty: “That’s smart thinking! That’s like what Patrick did for us!”

 

Phoebe: “We want to come with. Maybe we can help, since things have calmed down here.”

 

Sprig, Ivy, and Maddie nod as they power themselves up. Sprig grabs Phoebe’s hand, Ivy grabs Linda’s hand, and Maddie grabs Betty’s hand. They fly towards the door in the vessel. Once they land, Ivy, Sprig, and Maddie power themselves down. They start walking down hallways and checking various rooms. After several minutes, they come across one labeled “QL”.

 

Linda: “She…uh…has to be in here, right?”

 

Linda opens the door to see a lobster sitting on a throne and wearing a crown. She has a device strapped to her neck. Behind her is a balcony looking out to the ocean, and to her side is a pedestal with the Calamity Box on it. A lobster soldier is guarding it.

 

“I’ve been expecting you.”

 

Maddie: “We just wanna talk.”

 

“As do I. I’m sure you’ve met Patrick, my most loyal ally?”

 

Phoebe: “Yeah. What about him?”

 

“Kinda odd a human wants to see his own people exterminated, wouldn't you say?”

 

Linda: “I don’t know. If you’re crazy, anything goes.”

 

“Crazy? No, no. Patrick was one of the few people to see the truth and accept it for what it was. He was more sane than anyone down there.”

 

Ivy: “How can you say a man who is trying to see his own race massacred is acting rationally?”

 

“From your point of view, I can see how you might think that. Why don’t I give you mine?”

 

Betty: “I’m…uh…actually kinda interested to hear your logic.”

 

“Very well. Lobsters have lived for hundreds of millions of years. I was one of the first.”

 

Phoebe: “Wha…you’re saying you’ve been alive for hundreds of millions of years?!”

 

“Correct. I was…unique. My immune system works perfectly, and my organs don’t decay…and because of that, I was treated like a deity in the lobster kingdom. I was the mother for countless children, who wandered the seven seas in peace. It was a utopia…that was, until the humans arrived…”

 

Phoebe: “What did the humans do?”

 

“The humans did what was previously thought to be impossible. They were able to harm all of us on a massive scale. Did you ever wonder where we got the technology to make the robots? Or this vessel? Or the device that allows me to communicate with you?”

 

Betty: “No, that’s something that has perplexed me…”

 

“The humans gave it to us.”

 

Maddie: “What? Why would they give you that?”

 

“It wasn’t intentional. We’ve been told humans create a ton of garbage, and instead of properly disposing of it, they instead dump it in places it doesn’t belong. Like the ocean, for example.”

 

Phoebe: “They…they did? I don’t understand…humans seem to be relatively smart…”

 

“No. A human is smart. Collectively, though, they are moronic. These people…this is their only planet, and they are polluting it with reckless abandon for seemingly no reason. We understand that some animals, humans included, will kill us for food. But humans sometimes catch us for sport…which we can kinda understand. But this…this doesn’t benefit anyone. The marine animals here have shortened lives, and nothing can consume us without getting sick. But…I suppose one good thing did come from this. They gave us the means to get our revenge.”

 

Betty: “Wait, you said you were told about all this? By whom?”

 

“Ah, good question. That would have been Lance, who was Patrick’s ancestor. One of my children met him centuries ago.”

 

Ivy: “But…you live in water, and humans live on land…”

 

“Yes. They met by pure accident. He took one of our own, and when he didn’t come back that day, we had thought for sure he was just another poor soul who had become a victim to some predator. But…Lance had no interest in eating him. He wanted to study him. Gabriel learned with him as well, and together, both of them learned about the history of the others. Even though we were vastly different species, they both had something in common. They were disgusted by the actions of humans. And so, they made a deal. That, if either Lance or one of his descendants found a way to do so, they would tell us. When that lobster returned to us, he told us what Lance had told him. We thought Lance’s dream was nothing more than that. That was, until, around five years ago, when Patrick told us there might be a way to do so…”

 

Ivy: “But there was a problem. Patrick didn’t give the Calamity Box to you, he gave it to Gregory, who gave it to Anne.”

 

“Yes. Our one glimmer of hope was ripped away from us…but Patrick…he told us it would come back. I don’t know if he really knew, but he was right.”

 

Sprig: “Look, maybe the human race has been horrible to you. But…if you go through with this, you’ll be no better than them…”

 

“Trying to play that card? Do you really think you can change my mind?”

 

Ivy: “This isn’t going to end well for either of us. We can come to an agreement…”

 

Betty: “Yeah, maybe…you can just go to the next world, and leave this one behind. The humans can’t bother you…”

 

“No…but that’s not fair to the other animals here. Lobsters are just one of many species who have suffered at the hands of humans. That includes you three rodents.”

 

Phoebe: “Huh? What do you mean?”

 

“You three must think you’re aliens to this world, right?”

 

Linda: “Are we…not?”

 

“Not exactly, no. Porcupines, chinchillas, and rats live on this world. They’re just smaller and less intelligent. Humans…they eat you, too. Just as they do with frogs. And they also pollute your habitats. But I’m guessing that Sprig already knew that.”

 

Phoebe: “Wait, there are more of us here? And humans do the same to lobsters as they do to us? And…Sprig…you knew that?”

 

Sprig: “I…I did…”

 

Betty: “But…why? Why would you help them if they knew what they were doing? And not only that…why would you not tell us?

 

Ivy: “Look, we’ve known this for a while. But we’re helping because humans saved our world, and…because one of them asked us to do the same…”

 

“But where does that leave them? They don’t know these humans. Sounds like they just came along so they can feel like heroes. But…they don’t have their powers. Do you really think they can fight me, and live? And do you really think, in that circumstance, they might not just…take all the credit?”

 

Sprig: “No! We wouldn’t!”

 

“Talk is cheap...", the queen says, as it walks over to the box. "I can offer something better...sending you three home. And since you’ve done no wrong by me, I won’t destroy your planet. You can go back to your friends and family. And by friends, I mean real friends. People whose word you can believe. Or…you can stay here. And face certain death. The choice is all yours.”

 

Ivy: “Don’t…don’t listen to her! We can stop her together! And we’ll defend you! And…even if we can’t…we’ll make sure you’re remembered! I swear!”

 

Betty, Linda, and Phoebe look at each other. Linda sighs.

 

Linda: “Ah, I’m sorry, guys. I thought I wanted to save the day…but…I’m not like Darla…I have friends and family back home, and I want to see them again…I don’t want them to go through the thought of them wondering what happened to me…”

 

Phoebe: “Lindy! That’s so unlike you!”

 

Linda: “Face it, Pheebs! We made a choice to go home, even if we knew something like this might happen.”

 

Betty: “She’s right. I had considered this possibility. I just hope it wouldn’t have occurred…”

 

“Sounds like you’ve made your decision. Although…next time you come here, this planet will be purged of the humans here…”

 

The Queen opens the box, which creates a portal. Linda runs through it, Betty follows closely behind, and Phoebe hesitates before entering. She turns around.

 

Phoebe: “F-for what it’s worth…I’m sorry…”

 

Phoebe then enters the portal.

 

“My offer extends to you three as well. You’ve also done no wrong by me. Sure, it’s not your home…but maybe you can figure out a way back to your own. But even if you can’t, do you really think humans are redeemable? Maybe you’re just doing this out of obligation. But…if you get to their world, they might just think you tried your best, but you weren’t enough. They’ll never know.”

 

Sprig, Maddie, and Ivy look at each other. Sprig sighs.

 

Sprig: “You know, at first I thought that maybe I only went because Anne asked me to. But, even if she hadn’t and I knew what was happening, I still would have gone. It didn’t really occur to me why until just now.”

 

Ivy: “Why just now?”

 

Sprig: “Because of what Betty, Phoebe, and Linda just did. They fled. And…Anne, Sasha, and Marcy could have easily done the same when The Core initiated its final gambit. But…they didn’t. And that’s because they wanted to do what was right. And even with the odds seemingly stacked against us…everything in my body is telling me I shouldn’t walk through that portal.”

 

“Then you are a fool.”

 

Maddie: “You know, the human race can’t keep doing what they are forever. They’re feeling the effects of it now, and soon it’ll get to the point where it can no longer be ignored. Eventually there will be change.”

 

“Enough talking! There is no hope for Earth!”

 

Ivy: “All right then, let’s try pummeling!”

 

The Queen waves her tail, and various mechanical lobster claws appear out of panels in the wall.

 

“I will be rid of you now. And with you out of the way, no one can stop me!”

 

Ivy changes into her Calamity form and blocks a claw strike. She then fires an energy ball at it and destroys it.

 

Ivy: “That all you got? 

 

Queen: “Oh, I have plenty more where that came from. But why should I let you have all the fun?”

 

Another mechanical claw takes the place of the one that was blown up, while two more point themselves at Sprig and Maddie. They change into their Calamity forms and dodge their attack.

 

Ivy: “Spread out! Give her more targets!”

 

Ivy jumps to the balcony, while Sprig and Maddie hop to opposite sides of the room. They then get into a back-&-forth of demolishing the claws while another takes its place. The Queen scowls.

 

“Sooner or later, I’m going to run out of those…but all I need is for one of them to be unable to keep going…at that point…”

 

Ivy obliterates another claw, but she stops glowing.

 

Ivy: “Huh? Oh no…”

 

Another claw points itself at Ivy, with a blade protruding from the other end. Maddie and Sprig annihilate their claws and notice Ivy. The claw then charges towards her chest. 

 

Sprig and Maddie: “NO!”

 

Ivy’s face distorts in dread. Her eyes then close as her body falls backwards into the ocean. Sprig and Maddie run towards the balcony.

 

Sprig and Maddie: “IVY!”

 

Sprig and Maddie falls to their knees, as tears fall from their eyes.




Chapter 40: Out of Options

Summary:

Sprig and Maddie attempt to stop the Lobster Queen once and for all.

Notes:

(See the end of the chapter for notes.)

Chapter Text

Sprig and Maddie: “IVY!”

 

The Queen then grabs both Sprig and Maddie from behind with her claws.

 

"This was a test of endurance. And you have failed. You have done considerably well for beings as pathetic as yourselves, but you’ve used up your power, while I have more to spare.”

 

The Queen then has two more claws come from the walls, with blades at the other end. Sprig and Maddie try to break free, but are unable to. Sprig starts sobbing uncontrollably.

 

“I know you’re sad, but don’t worry. You’ll be joining her soon!”

 

As the claws approach, Sprig’s entire body glows blue, and a surge of energy blasts the claws, setting himself and Maddie free. He punches the Queen and sends her flying into a control panel. The portal closes, and the vessel starts malfunctioning, as it descends towards the ocean. Sprig then charges towards the Queen, but Maddie stops him.

 

Sprig: “LET ME AT HER! SHE NEEDS TO PAY!”

 

Maddie: “SPRIG, PLEASE! THIS ISN’T WHAT IVY WOULD HAVE WANTED!”

 

Sprig starts breathing heavily, but then he calms down, with tears rolling down his cheeks. The Queen looks over the control panel. She weakly pushes a button, but nothing happens. She starts chuckling.

 

“So, you must think you have won, huh? My systems are down, so I can’t use the Calamity Box to travel to another world…but there should be one thing still operational…”

 

The Queen then meekly presses another button on the control panel. The vessel starts to rumble as a gigantic torpedo starts coming out of the water and heading towards the sky.

 

Maddie: “What…what did you just do?!”

 

Queen: “Think of this as my last resort. I may not be able to achieve my dream of living in a better world, but I can make sure this world is next to impossible to live in. That right there is a nuclear bomb. Once it crashes, it’ll cause a massive explosion. Anyone nearby will be obliterated. But everyone else will still have the radiation to worry about.”

 

Maddie: “Are you insane?! This won’t just kill humans, it’ll kill everything!”

 

Queen: “If I can’t have my perfect world, nobody else can!”

 

Sprig grabs Maddie’s hand.

 

Sprig: “Maddie, we have to stop that!”

 

“Don’t bother. The three of you could have certainly stopped that, but I’m afraid two won’t be enough..." the queen says, as she points towards the Calamity Box. "Luckily for you two, the box is still there. I’m…in too much pain to stop you, or even get it myself…but you can live the rest of your lives, perhaps happily with Linda, Betty, and Phoebe.”

 

Sprig looks over at the box.

 

“Sprig, any future without you by my side can’t be happy.”

 

Sprig: “Maddie, come on!”

 

Maddie: “But-”

 

Sprig: “NO! THIS ISN’T UP FOR DISCUSSION! WE CAN’T CONCEDE DEFEAT!”

 

Maddie blinks once.

 

“If I give up, that’s how it ends. And I’m not letting that happen. Not without putting up a fight!”

 

Maddie nods, and the two fly towards the nuke as it starts descending. They start pushing against it with all their strength, but all they can do is slow its descent.

 

Maddie: “Sprig, this isn’t working…”

 

Sprig: “IT DOESN’T MATTER!”

 

Maddie: “Sprig! Remember you made a promise to Anne! You vowed we would get back home!”

 

Sprig: “But…I…have to…”

 

Maddie frowns. “Sprig, we tried our best. But…I don't think we can stop this..., she says.

 

Sprig has tears in his eyes. “I…have to…keep going…”, he says.

 

Maddie: “Fine! If you won’t move, I’ll just bring the Calamity Box to us! At the very least, I’ll get home and tell everyone what happened!”

 

Maddie starts flying back towards the falling vessel as it crashes into the ocean. Sprig continues pushing, but his power is slowly fading.

 

“Am I…really doing the right thing here? Anne wanted us to get back home…but is that really what she wanted?”

 

Sprig thinks back to when Anne died, and how he felt.

 

“No…she wanted us to save the planet…but she knew if she said that, it might come to this…and she didn’t want to go through the same pain I did, even if she wasn’t here to see it…but…that’s why…I must!”

 

Sprig uses up his remaining strength to attempt to stop the nuke, before losing consciousness and falling towards the ocean. 

 


 

Sprig is sleeping outside a small house in space. He comes to.

 

"What the...where am I?"

 

Sprig gets up and opens the door to see an interior that looks like his room. He sees a tarantula on the table, looking at him.

 

“Ch-Charlie Bigbottom?”

 

“I am not Charlie.”

 

“What? But you look just like him…I guess Charlie never spoke, though…but…if you’re not him, then who are you?”

 

“I am someone you’re familiar with only by name. I am…The Guardian.”

 

“Y-YOU’RE THE GUARDIAN?!”

 

“Yes. Why do you find that so hard to believe? Surely my voice sounds something like a deity to you?”

 

“But…why do you look like Charlie Bigbottom?”

 

“I am simply in a form your mind can understand.”

 

“But what do you really look like?”

 

The Guardian grins. “Anne asked the same thing of me. She didn’t like what she saw. Curiosity killed the cat, as the humans say", it says.

 

“Oh. Um…Anne came here when she died, right? Does that mean…”

 

The Guardian's smile fades. “No. You are not dead. Right now, I’ve taken you to the space between seconds. Even though time may appear to be flowing, it has actually stopped. I’ve brought you here because you’ve shown yourself to be worthy", it says.

 

“Worthy? Did I...stop the bomb?"

 

“No, you did not. But…you also did not give up. Even after Betty, Phoebe, and Linda ran away, even after Ivy perished, and even after Maddie tried to get you to leave…you had one mission in your mind, and you did whatever you could to see it through. Throughout my millennia of existence, I have only ever seen one other individual to do so. You know who I’m thinking about.”

 

“Yeah, Anne. She’s…one of my best friends. But…I didn’t do this for her. I did this…because of her. She taught me to always fight for what’s right, even when your odds seem slim to none…”

 

“Yes. And here I was, 5 years ago, thinking that someone who had the right conditions to take my place would never reveal themselves. And here I find myself again, finding another…”

 

“Woah, hey. I’m not like Anne. She’s way more deserving of this position than I am.”

 

The Guardian chuckles. “The fact that you think that just proves my point", it says.

 

Sprig looks out the window and sees various universes.

 

“Here’s the deal. You can take over for me until Anne’s mortal life ends, and the two of you, together, can choose what happens, and does not, to universes…”

 

Sprig looks back at the Guardian.

 

“That look…Anne gave me a very similar one when she came here. Something tells me that’s not what you really want.”

 

“No, it isn’t. Not right now, anyway…”

 

The Guardian smiles. “Last time, Anne had to convince me to let her live out the rest of her days. I won’t make you do the same. Instead, I will grant you your deepest desires", it says.

 

Sprig: “M-my d-deepest desires?’

 

“Yes. Normally, I wouldn’t offer such a thing to someone…but I can see through you. There is no malice in your heart. So the things you wish for, they will benefit either you, or those around you, at the expense of nobody that doesn’t deserve it.”

 

“Then…that’s what I want. But…as far as your offer…I haven’t said no to it. I don’t really know when I’ll be ready for it. But I guess I have the rest of my life to figure that out, don’t I?”

 

The Guardian chuckles. “Yes, you certainly do", it says.

 

“Anyways, my first wish-”

 

“No need to state them. Like I said, I can see through you.”

 

“But…I still want to make sure…”

 

The Guardian chuckles. “Very well. You want people to be able to travel between Earth and Amphibia easily. You want the Earth to be saved. And…you want Ivy back. Am I missing anything?”

 

Sprig sniffles. “You…you’d really do all that for me?”, he says.

 

“I can and I will. Just promise me one thing.”

 

“Anything!”

 

“As I said, people like you and Anne…are difficult to come by. The same attitude you had today…don’t ever lose it.”

 

“You have my word.”

 

The Guardian chuckles. “And I know it’s good. Very well, let me send you back to the world of the living. I will see you in…you know what, I’ll let that remain a secret. I might have scarred Anne by telling her…”, it says.

 

“What?”

 

“Nothing. Farewell.”

 

The Guardian claps its hands as Sprig loses consciousness.

 


 

Sprig is sleeping on a field. Maddie is pumping on his chest. While Ivy is curled into a ball, rocking to calm herself down.

 

Maddie: “Wake up, you! You don’t have my permission to die!”

 

Sprig comes to. “Huh?! What’s happening?”, he says.

 

Maddie puts her hands over her mouth as happy tears fall down her face.

 

Maddie: “Sprig! You’re alive! A few more seconds, and I was gonna have to start collecting some ingredients to bring you back to life…”

 

Ivy: “SPRIG!”

 

Ivy tackles Sprig into a hug, and they roll along the grass.

 

Sprig: “Ivy…you’re…here…”

 

Sprig and Ivy start crying out of pure joy. Then Ivy smacks him across the face.

 

Sprig: “Ow! What was that for?”

 

Ivy: “You! I have so much I wanted to tell you, and you almost died…I can’t believe you!”

 

Sprig: “Well, you can tell me now, can’t you?”

 

Ivy: “I don’t know, the moment has kinda passed…”

 

Sprig chuckles, before looking around nervously. “Wait, the bomb…what happened to it!?”, he says.

 

Ivy: “You helped us destroy it, remember? And the Queen Lobster is gone, too!”

 

Mr. X: “Are you three done having your hugs and such?”

 

Mr. X walks over with Jenny by his side. Maddie, Ivy and Sprig stand up and face him.

 

Maddie: “Uh, I’m sorry, but our friend almost died here, so forgive me if we’re being a little too happy for you.”

 

Mr. X: “Oh, I didn’t mean that to get you to hurry up. I just wanted to tell you something.”

 

Sprig: “What…what did you wanna tell us?”

 

Mr. X: “Oh, nothing. Just a thank you, from the people of Earth.”

 

Ivy: “You got every person to agree to thank us?”

 

Mr. X: “Goodness, no. But I’m sure if people knew the heroism you showed today, they would. I wanted to thank Betty, Phoebe, and Linda, but I don’t know where they’ve gone…”

 

Maddie: “Ah, don’t worry about them. They’re heroes like us, I guess. But…they’re not as cool as us.”

 

Maddie puffs out her chest and puts her hands on her hips.

 

Mr. X: “There! That’s a perfect pose for your statue!”

 

Maddie: “Statue?”

 

Mr. X: “Of course! We build statues for people who have done a lot for humans. I think saving us all would qualify on that list.

 

Maddie: Uh, can I instead have my statue be like this?”

 

Maddie pulls out her wand and crosses her arms while smiling. Mr. X takes a picture of her with his phone.

 

Mr. X: “Sure! And you two?”



Ivy: “Uh, if I could just have my statue be like this, where I’m holding a kettle in my left hand, and a teacup in my right…”

 

Ivy strikes a pose while smiling. Mr. X takes a picture of her with his phone.

 

Mr. X: “Got it! And you, Sprig?”

 

Sprig pulls out his Silver Bolt slingshot and pulls it back while smiling. Mr. X takes a picture of him with his phone.

 

Mr. X: “Perfect! I’ll have those statues built by tomorrow. Now, I’ll get your box recharged.”

 

Ivy: “Huh? But you don’t know where the temples are…”

 

Mr. X: “No, but a new inmate we have by the name of Patrick told us. We’ll get it done.”

 

Sprig: “That’s…not really necessary…”

 

Mr. X: “Please, I insist. You’ve done so much for us, this is just how we show our gratitude. You guys can explore the city of Los Angeles, and I’ll call Sprig to let him know when it’s done.”

 

Ivy: “Ooh! I wanna check out all the tea shops!”

 

Maddie: “And I wanna see the magic shops!”

 

Sprig: “Uh, wait, X. It seems like we all wanna do separate things. I can’t really contact Maddie and Ivy with just one phone…”

 

Mr. X: “Private! Get these two heroines the latest Apricot Phones!”

 

A soldier runs into a C-Mobile shop, and runs out having paid for two new phones. He hands one to Maddie and Ivy.

 

Sprig: “I’ll…stay here. Just give me the numbers and I’ll call.”

 

Ivy: “But…don’t you wanna see the city?”

 

Sprig: “Ah, I’ve kinda already seen it. Besides, there’s no slingshot shops or anything, are there?”

 

Mr. X: “Afraid not.”

 

Sprig: “Plus, one of us has to stay put. I don’t mind that being me. You guys have fun.”

 

Mr. X: “Very well. We’ll be back here soon. By the way, because of what you did, we’ll cover all of your expenses here.”

 

Ivy: “ALL OF THEM?!”

 

Mr. X chuckles, as he hands the three of them credit cards.

 

Mr. X: “Yes. This is money from the US government. We have billions, so please feel free to use as much as you desire. Just…don’t go too crazy, OK?”

 

Mr. X leaves.

 

Ivy: “Thanks for staying, Sprig. I’ll bring you back something!”

 

Ivy looks for the nearest teashop on her phone and takes off.

 

Maddie: “And I’ll show you a new trick! I’ll even explain it to you!”

 

Maddie looks for the nearest magic shop on her phone and runs towards it. Sprig sees a bench, sits on it, and sighs. He then looks at the various shops nearby and notices a jewelry store. He doesn’t know why, but he stands up and walks towards it and enters. The cashier notices him.

 

“Oh, hello! You’re…Sprig, right? You looking for some bling for yourself?”

 

“Uh…I just wanted to look around.”

 

“Sure! Just let me know if you have any questions.”

 

Sprig peruses the store. After a few minutes, he sees two rings, one with a red shell on it, and the other with a blue shell. His eyes light up, and he grabs both of them and brings them to the counter.

 

“You…you want these ones? But they’re not-”

 

“You said to let you know the ones I want. I want these ones.”

 

“Well, all right…”

 

The cashier rings up the rings. Sprig then hands the credit card to the cashier. He then swipes it, gives it back, then hands the rings back to Sprig. He then puts them in his pocket and leaves. He then goes back and sits on the bench, and texts Mr. and Mrs. Boonchuy.

 


 

Sprig is playing Bonbon Bash, when Ivy returns back to where he was. She is holding a cup of Boba tea.

 

“Heya, Sprig! I got you this!”

 

“Uh…what is this?”

 

“It’s Boba! It’s really popular here, and for good reason. Here!”

 

Ivy hands the cup to Sprig, who takes a sip.

 

“It’s delicious!”

 

Maddie runs to where Sprig and Ivy are. She has a bag on her back.

 

Maddie: “Guys! Check this out!”

 

Maddie pulls out amd shows them a seemingly empty tube.

 

Maddie: “Empty, right?”

 

Sprig and Ivy nod.

 

Maddie: “Abra cadabra!”

 

Maddie turns the tube to the side, and pulls out a ribbon from the opening.

 

Ivy: “What? How did you do that?”

 

Maddie: “It’s simple. You see-”

 

Mr. X: “You three!”

 

Ivy, Sprig, and Maddie turn their heads to see Mr. X running with the Calamity Box, with the stones having regained their color.

 

Mr. X: “Sorry this took so long. But you’re free to go back home, now.”

 

Mr. X hands the box to Sprig.

 

Mr. X: “You…you’ll come back, won’t you? I know you want to see your friends and family again, but you’re always welcome here. And that goes for your other amphibian friends, too.”

 

Ivy: “Yeah, we’ll be back. I wanna learn how they make Boba!”

 

Mr. X: “Good. We’ll see you soon.”

 

Sprig starts to lift the top of the box.

 

Maddie: “Wait!"

 

There’s a great flash of light.

 


 

Sprig, Maddie, and Ivy are laying on their stomachs in a forest. Maddie comes to and notices the stones are now colorless. She gets up and shakes Sprig awake.

 

Sprig: “Wha? Why are you shaking me?”

 

Maddie: “I don’t know why you’re so impatient…we could have taken someone else with us, and we wouldn’t have had to worry about getting the stones recharged again!”

 

Ivy comes to.

 

Sprig: “Sorry…I just wanted to tell everyone the good news, and see my family and friends again…”

 

Ivy: “Yeah, give him a break. It’s an inconvenience at best. And…I can’t imagine Carly would refuse to charge one of the stones now, seeing as the threat on Earth has been destroyed.”

 

Maddie sighs. “Fine. Let’s go to Wartwood, then", she says.

 

Maddie, Ivy, and Sprig head towards Wartwood. 

 




Sprig, Ivy, and Maddie hide out in the bushes just outside Wartwood. They don’t see anyone around except Anne, who is sitting on the fountain, holding a pink frog plush.

 

Ivy: “Where is everyone? And what is Anne holding?”

 

Sprig smiles, before getting out of the bushes and sitting beside her.

 

“You seem kinda down.”

 

“Yeah…just missing someone, is all…”

 

“Who?”

 

“You, silly. Wait!", Anne says, before hugging Sprig tightly. “Sprig!”

 

“Can’t…breathe…”

 

Anne releases him. She has happy tears in her eyes. Maddie and Ivy start walking towards Anne.

 

Anne: “You’re back! I knew you could do it! Wait…you saved the Earth, right?”

 

Maddie: “I’d say it was more of a group effort.”

 

Ivy: “And it wasn’t just us, either. We had a lot of help from Mr. X, and even some rodents from another world…”

 

Anne: “Rodents?”

 

Ivy: “Yeah! There was Linda, the courageous porcupine, Phoebe, the kind chinchilla, and Betty the intelligent rat.”

 

Anne: "Huh?"

 

Maddie: “You know how amphibians exist on Earth but they’re smaller and less intelligent than us? Well, they were the rodent equivalents of us.”

 

Anne: “Oh…I guess I hadn’t considered the fact that there would be visitors to the Earth besides you three…so you six collectively stopped the planet’s destruction?”

 

Sprig: “Not really. You know how you, Sasha, and Marcy were the first people in the multiverse to use the stones for good?”

 

Anne: “Yeah?”

 

Ivy: “Well, it’s a little difficult to say if they would have done the same. Maybe it was because of us, but they didn’t wanna save the Earth. But we…still helped them recharge their box…”

 

Maddie: “...which was a mistake in hindsight, because the guy who created this box was actually kinda like Andrias was. We trusted him to assist us, but he ended up betraying us and giving the box to…uh…the Lobster Queen…”

 

Anne: “The…Lobster Queen?”

 

Sprig: “Kinda like the Earth’s version of The Core.”

 

Anne: “Oh.”

 

Ivy: “Anyways, we ended up activating our Calamity forms to stop her, and we even stopped a nuclear bomb!”

 

Anne: “Woah! That’s pretty cool. I didn’t even think you could really activate them without Valeriana…”

 

Maddie: “Actually, I was able to because of what you told me when we went to get that feather for my potion. I remember what Valeriana told you to to get you to activate yours, and I just modified it to work for us.”

 

Anne: “See, didn’t I tell you would save the day?”

 

Sprig rubs the back of his head. “Yeah, you were right. Still…I was hoping to share the good news with everyone else…”, he says.

 

Anne whistles. All the residents of Wartwood come out of hiding, including Sasha, Marcy, Grime, Olivia, Yunan, and a robot controlled by Andrias. Ivy, Maddie, and Sprig look around.

 

Anne: “Surprise! I knew that if you just saw me here, you’d want to tell me you succeeded. We didn’t really know when you would show up, but we had Soggy Joe hide out in the bushes near where Marcy, Sasha, and I seem to keep ending up when we go here…then he just told us, so we got into positions!”

 

Polly: “Sprig!”

 

Polly and Hop Pop are waving to Sprig. Sprig comes over and hugs them.

 

Polly: “Why did you have to go and one up me? You thought I was more accomplished than you, so you went and saved the Earth!”

 

Sprig chuckles.

 

Hop Pop: “I’m glad to see you back, Sprig. The town wasn’t the same without you.”

 

Sprig: “Yeah…I must have a lot of seminars, questions, and experiments to catch up on…”

 

Anne: “Actually, I took care of those for you.”

 

Sprig: “You…you did?”

 

“Of course! I wasn’t just gonna let those pile up. I used your notes, even if they were a…little unorganized…", Anne says, as she holds up a sheet of Sprig's notes, which have sloppily written words and shoddily drawn diagrams. "...seriously, how can you make sense of these?”

 

Sprig: “I mean, I can make sense of it…”

 

Felicia and Wally walk over to Ivy, who then give her a hug.

 

Ivy: "Mom! Dad!"

 

Felicia: “Welcome back, sweetie. Did you enjoy Earth?”

 

Ivy: “Yeah, I did! They have a type of tea there we should try making here, but uh…I’ll have to go back to learn it…”

 

Wally: “It’d be nice to get some new items on our menu!”

 

Maddie is looking at Ivy and Sprig with their families. Her dad sneaks up behind her, along with Ginger, Rosemary, and Lavender.

 

Chef Flour: “Uh, hey Maddie…”

 

Maddie turns around.

 

Maddie: “Oh, hey Dad…”

 

Ginger: “Sister! You’re so cool!”

 

Rosemary: “Yeah! Our respect for you just skyrocketed!”

 

Lavender: “We wanna be like you someday!”

 

Maddie’s sisters hug her.

 

Chef Flour: “Uh…I’m not really one to talk about my feelings, but uh…I’ve never really told you how proud you make me. And…I’m sure your mom would think the same of you if she was still here…”

 

Chef Flour joins the hug, as happy tears roll down Maddie’s cheeks.

 

Olivia: “Well then…I suppose if we’ve gotten the formalities out of the way…Master Marcy, if you will?”

 

Marcy pulls a cube out of her pocket. "I don't think we should, though...I haven't tested it yet..."

 

Sasha grabs the cube from Marcy’s hand.

 

Sasha: “Mar-mar! Less thinking, more doing!”

 

Sasha throws the cube on the ground, and it sends various party decorations flying, which adorn the town, while setting up tables and a stage.

 

Sasha: “See? Nothing went wrong!”

 

Mrs. Croaker: “One of the tables is on fire.”

 

Marcy notices the table ablaze. She runs towards it and takes off her cape to mat it down.

 

Sasha: “OK, almost nothing went wrong. Now, come on, let’s party!”

 

Toadie gets up to the stage with Toadstool.

 

Toadstool: “Attention, I would like to remind everyone that it’s lights out at 11 PM.”

 

The crowd groans.

 

Toadie: “But I’ll make an exception for today. You alright with that, sheriff?”

 

Buck Leatherleaf just tips his hat while smiling.

 

Toadie: “Let the festivities begin!”

 


 

Braddock and Percy are telling jokes, and people are laughing with them. Maddie and Sasha are showing people magic tricks on the stage, while Grime plays the harp. Everyone else is either dancing or chatting amongst each other. Sprig is sitting at a table alone, feeling the rings in his pocket. Ivy comes over and sits down next to him.

 

“Dude, what’s the matter? You’ve been sitting this entire time. Were you waiting for me to ask you to dance?”

 

“Uh, no. I’ve just been thinking.”

 

"Parties aren’t for thinking, silly!”

 

“Yeah, I know. But…can we talk for a moment?”

 

“Sure…what’s up?”

 

“Uh…what was your recollection of the battle we had with the Lobster Queen?”

 

“Uh, you were there…”

 

“Please, just tell me. I promise there’s a reason for this.”

 

“Well, uh…after Betty, Linda, and Phoebe went back, we fought against those claws, then we smashed all those, but then she pushed that button to launch the bomb, and then the three of us struggled to stop it, but you…you gave it everything you had to destroy it, which is why we thought you died back then…”

 

“Yeah, that’s…not quite right…”

 

“Wh-what do you mean it’s not right?"

 

“I know it doesn’t really make sense, but I know for a fact that’s not what happened…”

 

“All right, wise guy. What did happen? And how do you know yours is valid?”

 

“After Betty, Linda, and Phoebe fled, we did certainly put up a fight against the claws, but…you were the first to power down. And the Queen took full advantage of that by…by…”, Sprig says, before a tear falls down his cheek. "...killing you..."

 

“Wh-what?! B-but…I didn’t die…I’m right here, aren’t I?”

 

“Yeah, I’ll get to that. After that, the Queen tried to off me and Maddie, too. But…I just lost control…if it wasn’t for Maddie, I would have obliterated her…but…that also gave her the chance to use the nuclear bomb…I convinced Maddie to help me stop it, but she realized it was a losing battle, so she…went to go get the Calamity Box so we could get to safety…but I…I refused to go with her…I didn’t wanna let the Earth get destroyed, let Anne down, and…and…" Sprig says, before shaking his head. "...I couldn’t leave you behind. So I tried, but…I ultimately failed…”

 

“But…the bomb was stopped…”

 

“Yeah, I…I met the Guardian. It told me I was worthy, and it told me I could either take its place now, or it would grant wishes for me. For me, that was a no brainer. I wanted for us to be able to go back home, for the planet to be saved, and, most importantly…”, Sprig says, before picking up Ivy's hand. "...I wanted you back. More than anything.”

 

Ivy has tears in her eyes.

 

“You know, when you went off on your adventure, the idea of losing you just seemed so distant to me. But…after really going through it, I realized just how fragile life is. I…I don’t know how much time we have left on this planet, but…just as much as there are things you wanted to say to me, there are things I want to do with you…so...Ivy Sundew…” Sprig says, as gets out of the chair and gets on one knee and pulls out the red shell ring. "..will you be my best friend for life?”

 

Ivy gasps. “Sprig! Of course I will!”, she says.

 

Sprig slides the ring on Ivy’s left finger, and hands the blue shell ring to her, who slides it on his left finger. Everyone turns to see what the commotion is about. Then they start cheering.

 

Anne: “FINALLY! I was wondering when you two were gonna get married!”

 

Sprig: “Married? What, no. We’re still friends.”

 

Anne stands in utter shock.

 

Anne: “Are y-you kidding me?! You got matching rings, and you expect me to believe that?”

 

Ivy: “Girl, what is your problem?! Neither of us feel any romance towards the other. We’re just really good friends.”

 

Sprig: “And now everyone in town will know it!”

 

Anne: “Everyone already knew that!”

 

Ivy: “You’ve got matching bracelets with Sasha and Marcy. What makes these so different?”

 

Anne: “Uh, well, when you put it that way…”

 

Stumpy: “Now that that’s over, can we get back to partying?

 

Loggle: “Absolutely!”

 

The party resumes, and Sprig and Ivy dance with each other until the night ends. 

 


 

Back on Earth, a lobster is swimming around when it notices the Calamity Box. It brings it back to the Lobster Queen, who then grabs it.

 

“Thank you, Chloe…I may have told those rodents I wouldn’t wreck havoc on their world…but I do want to get my revenge on those frogs. I’ll ask the rodents politely to help, and if they refuse…that’s not my problem. But one thing’s for sure. That Maddie made a mistake by not letting Sprig kill me. And I’ll make sure they regret it.”

Notes:

Thank you so much for reading! This was a blast to write, and if you've followed the story up until now, I appreciate it! If you have any recommendations for corrections or different ways to write, please let me know! Additionally, if you have any suggestions for new episodes, I'm all ears! I'll credit you if you do. I do plan on writing a season 5, which will be less plot-focused and more "slice of life". However, there will be an overarching villain. It will also include characters that, while are from a different series, there is a reason to believe Amphibia and this universe are connected.

Series this work belongs to: